MSCCBCSRS34

VERY IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS:
Kindly refer the official communication of the University in the

B.A. R&S file .
APPENDIX – 17 [R]
UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS
M.Sc. DEGREE COURSES
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

(w.e.f. 2008-2009)
SECOND YEAR
(i.e. III & IV SEMESTERS)
COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS
NAME OF THE COURSES
1) M.Sc. APPLIED ELECTRONICS

2) M.Sc. APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
3) M.Sc. BIOCHEMISTRY
4) M.Sc. BIOINFORMATICS
5) M.Sc. BIOTECHNOLOGY
6) M.Sc BIOTECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT
7) M.Sc. BOTANY
8) M.Sc. CHEMISTRY
9) M.Sc. COMPUTER SCIENCE
10) M.Sc. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (5 YEAR INTEGRATED)*
11) M.Sc. ELECTRONIC MEDIA
12) M.Sc. FOODS SCIENCE NUTRITION AND DIETETICS
13) M.Sc. FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT AND DIETETICS
1
14) M.Sc. GENERAL GENETICS
15) M.Sc. HOTEL AND CATERING MANAGEMENT
16) M.Sc. INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
17) M.Sc. MATHEMATICS
18) M.Sc. MEDICAL LABORATORY TECHNOLOGY
19) M.Sc. PHYSICS
20) M.Sc. VISUAL COMMUNICATION
21) M.Sc. ZOOLOGY
The scheme of examinations for different semesters shall be as follows:
Vide APPENDIX-B
2
APPENDIX - B
SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS FOR III AND IV SEMESTERS
1. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS
SECOND YEAR
THIRD SEMESTER
HoursExam
Inst. Hrs
Credits
Course Max. Marks
Subjects
Components Int. Ext.
Total
marks Marks
Core Courses Paper – IX 6 4 3 25 75 100
Data Communication and
Computer Networking
Paper – X 6 4 3 25 75 100
Digital Signal Processing
Paper – XI 6 4 3 25 75 100
Practical – III Embedded
and DSP Laboratory
Paper – XII 6 4 3 25 75 100
Basic VLSI Design
Elective Subject - Paper – III 4 3 3 25 75 100
III Embedded Systems
Offered by M.Sc computer 4 3 3 25 75 100
(Extra disciplinary)
Science
4 3 3 40 60 100
Soft Skill – III
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third
Semester Marks Statement.
3
Exam Hours
Inst. Hrs
Max. Marks
Credits
Course
Subjects Int. Ext.
Components
mark Mark Total
s s
Paper – XIII 6 4 3 25 75 100
Part –I Industrial Process Control
Core Courses
Paper – XIV 6 4 3 25 75 100
Semiconductor Device
Technology
Paper – XV 6 4 3 25 75 100
Project & Viva voce
Elective Paper – IV 4 3 3 25 75 100

Power Electronics
Paper - V 4 3 3 25 75 100
Elements of Nanotechnology
in Electronics
Soft Skill – IV 4 3 3 25 75 100
FOURTH SEMESTER
4
2. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Max. Marks
Inst. Hrs.
Credits
Course
Subjects Int. Ext.
components Total
marks marks
Core Paper-IX 5 4 3 25 75 100

Courses Microbial Genetics
Paper-X 5 4 3 25 75 100
Genetic Engineering
Paper-XI 5 4 3 25 75 100
Molecular Biology
Paper-XII 5 4 6 40 60 100
Microbial Genetics,
Molecular Biology &
Genetic Engineering -
Practical III
Elective Research Methodology 5 3 3 25 75 100
Subject-III
Elective Industrial & Pharmaceutical 5 3 3 25 75 100
Subject-IV Microbiology
Extra Environmental 6 3 3 25 75 100
disciplinary Biotechnology
Soft Skill-I 2 3 40 60 100
UNIVERSITY PRACTICAL EXAMINATION WILL BE CONDUCTED IN EVEN SEMESTER

ONLY.
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the
Third Semester Marks Statement.
5
FOURTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Max. Marks
Inst. Hrs.
Credits
Course
Subjects Int. Ext.
components Total
marks marks
Core Paper-XIII 6 4 3 25 75 100

Courses Food, Dairy and
Environmental
Microbiology
Paper-XIV 6 4 6 25 75 100
Soil, Agricultural, Food and
Environmental
Microbiology - Practical IV
Paper-XV 12 4 3 20 80 100
Project
Elective Soil and Agricultural 6 3 3 25 75 100
Subject-V Microbiology
Soft Skill-I 2 3 40 60 100
UNIVERSITY PRACTICAL EXAMINATION WILL BE CONDUCTED IN EVEN

SEMESTER ONLY.
6
3. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOCHEMISTRY
THIRD SEMESTER
Exam. Max. Marks
Course Name of Course Inst.
Credits Hours
components Hours CIA External
Core - 8 Cell and Molecular 5 4 3 25 75
Biology
Core - 9 Hormonal Chemistry 5 4 3 25 75
Core - 10 Clinical Biochemistry 5 4 3 25 75
Core - 11 Practical III 6 4 6 40 60
Elective - 4 Biostatistics 5 3 3 25 75
Elective - 5 Immunology 4 3 3 25 75
Extra- Clinical basis of Diseases 4 3 3 25 75

disciplinary
SOFT SKILL – III 2 3 40 60
FOURTH SEMESTER
Course Inst. Exam Max. Marks
Name of Course Credits
components Hours Hours CIA External
Core - 12 Principles of 5 4 3 25 75
Biotechnology
Core - 13 Concepts of 5 3 3 25 75
Bio-informatics
Elective - 6 Microbial 5 3 3 25 75
Biochemistry
Core - 14 Project and Viva 8 20 60 project
voce 20 viva voce
SOFT SKILL – IV 2 3 40 60
7
4. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOINFORMATICS
THIRD SEMESTER
Course Name of Course Inst. Credits Exam Maxmarks

Components hours (Hours) CIA Ext
Paper 12 Genomics & Proteomics 6 4 3 25 75
Core
Paper 13 Algorithms for 6 4 3 25 75
Core Computational Biology
Paper 14 Structural 6 4 6 25 75
Core Bioinformatics
Paper 15 Tools and their 6 4 3 40 60
Core Applications in
Bioinformatics
(Practicals)
Paper 16 Systems Biology 6 3 3 25 75
Elective
Paper 17 Potentia;l Applications 6 3 3 25 75
Elective and commercial aspects
(Other of Bioinformatics
Departments)
Soft Skill 2 3 40 60
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the
FOURTH SEMESTER
Course Name of Course Inst. Credits Exam Maxmarks

Components hours (Hours) CIA Ext
Paper 18 Databases in Molecular Biology 6 4 3 25 75
Core
Paper 19 Advanced Topics in Bioinformatics 6 4 3 25 75
Elective
Paper 20 Bioinformatics & Drug design 6 3 3 25 75
Elective
Paper 21 Project & viva-voce 12 8 - 20 80
Core
Soft Skill 2 3 40 60
8
5. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
Course Name of Course Semester Inst. Credits Exam Max.

Components Hours HRS Marks
CIA Ext
Paper-13 Enzyme Technology III 4 4 3 25 75
Core
Paper-14 Genomics and Proteomics III 4 4 3 25 75
Core
Paper-15 Bioprocess Technology III 4 4 3 25 75
Core and Downstream
Processing
Paper-16 Practical III– III 10 4 6 40 60
Core (A) Enzyme Technology
Practical (B) Genomics and
Proteomics
(C) Bioprocess Technology
and
Downstream Processing
Paper-17 Tissue Engineering III 3 3 3 25 75
Elective
Paper-18 Stem Cell Biology III 3 3 3 25 75
Elective
Soft skill - III III 2 2 3 40 60
**Internship III 2
* Elective Principles of Gene III 2 3 3 25 75

offered to Manipulation Technology
other Dept.
FOURTH SEMESTER
9
Course Name of Course Semeste Inst. Credit Exa Max. Marks
Component r Hour s m
s s HRS CI External
A
Paper-19 Environmental IV 5 4 3 25 75
Core Biotechnology and
Nano Biotechnology
Paper-20 Animal IV 4 3 3 25 75
Elective Biotechnology
Paper-21 Bioethics, Human IV 4 3 3 25 75
Elective rights and
Social Issues
Paper-22 Dissertation IV 15 8 20 80
Core (60-
Disse
rtation
+ 20-
Viva)
Soft skill - IV IV 2 2 3 40 60
Examination:
(* Practical examination shall be conducted independently at the end of even semesters.)
10
6. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
Course Name of Course Inst. Credits Exam. Max.Marks

Components Hours HRS
CIA External
Paper-13 Core Enzyme Technology 6 4 3 25 75
Paper-14 Core Operations 6 4 3 25 75
Management
Paper-15 Core Genomics and 6 4 3 25 75
Proteomics
Paper-16 Core Practical III– 6 4 6 40 60
(A) Enzyme
Technology
(B) Genomics and
Proteomics
Paper - 17 Entrepreneurial 3 3 3 25 75
Elective Development Project
Management
Paper - 18 Principles of Gene 3 3 3 25 75
Elective Manipulation
Technology
Soft skill – III 2 2 3 40 60
Internship 2 2
11
FOURTH SEMESTER
Inst. Exam Max.Marks

Course
Name of Course Hour Credits .
Components CIA External
s HRS
Paper-19 Core Strategic Management 6 4 3 25 75
Paper - 20 Animal Biotechnology 4 3 3 25 75

Elective
Paper - 21 Bioethics, Biosafety, 4 3 3 25 75
Elective IPR,
Human rights and Social
Issues
Paper – 22 Dissertation 15 8 - 20 80
Core (60-
Dissertation)
+ 20 (Viva)
Soft skill – IV 2 2 3 40 60
Overall Credit: 95
12
7. M. Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BOTANY
THIRD SEMESTER
Marks
Course Exa
Subject Inst Credi
Componen m
Title of the paper . t CI Ex Tota
t Hrs
Hrs A t l
CORE Paper-IX. Cell Biology, Genetics, 5 4 3 25 75 100
Biostatics and Plant Breeding
CORE Paper-X 4 3 25 75 100
Plant Molecular Biology 5
CORE Paper- XI 4 3 25 75 100
Plant Biotechnology 5
CORE Paper XII 4 4 25 75 100
Practicals- IV- Covering theory 5
papers IX, X & XI
Elective Bioinformatics 4 3 4 40 60 100
III
Extra Herbal Drug Biotechnology 3 3 25 75 100
disciplinary 4
-I
Soft Skill- 2 2 3 40 60 100

III
13
FOURTH SEMESTER
Marks
Course Exa
Subject Inst Credi
Compone m
Title of the paper . t CI Ex Tota
nt Hrs
Hrs A t l
CORE Paper-XIII. Plant Biochemistry and 6 4 3 25 75 100
Biophysics
CORE Paper-XIV- Plant Physiology 4 3 25 75 100
6
CORE Paper- XV 4 3 25 75 100
Applied Plant cell and Tissue 6
Culture
CORE Paper- XVI 4 4 40 60 100
Practicals- V- Covering theory 6
papers XIII, XIV & XV
Elective- Algal Biotechnology 4 3 3 25 75 100
IV
Soft Skill 2 3 3 40 60 100
IV
14
8. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN CHEMISTRY
THIRD SEMESTER
Course Subjects Inst. Credits Hrs. Max. Marks
Components Hours
CIA External
Core IX Organic Chemistry-III 6 4 3 25 75
Core X Inorganic Chemistry-III 6 4 3 25 75
Core XI Physical Chemistry-III 6 4 3 25 75
Physical Chemistry
Core XII 8 4 6 40 60
Practical*
Elective III Theory Elective 4 4 3 25 75
Soft Skill 2 40 60
Theory Electives Offered:

1. Material Science
2. Elementary Bio Chemistry
3. Research methodology
Electives offered in the II & III Semester can also be taken by other branch students.(ED)
* Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks
FOURTH SEMESTER
Course Components Subjects Inst. Hours Credits Hrs. Max. Marks
CIA External
Core XIII Organic Chemistry-IV 5 4 3 25 75

Core XIV Inorganic Chemistry-IV 5 4 3 25 75
Core XV Physical Chemistry-IV 5 4 3 25 75
Elective IV Analytical Chemistry Practical* 8 4 6 40 60
Elective V Group Project /Review 7 4 6 25 75
Soft Skill 2 40 60
* Practical examinations to be conducted at the end of the academic year.
15
9. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE
THIRD SEMESTER
DurationExam.
Max.
Marks
Semester
Course
Credits
component Name of Course
CI
s UE
A
Core Principles of Compiler Design III 4 3 25 75

Core Object Oriented Analysis and Design III 4 3 25 75
Extra – Digital Image Processing III 4 3 25 75
Disciplinary
Elective Elective –II III 4 3 25 75
Elective Elective – III III 4 3 25 75
Core Practical – V: Mini Project III 2 3 40 60
Soft Skill-4 III 2 3 40 60
**Internship During summer vacation 4 to 6 weeks of I Year 2 100
FOURTH SEMESTER
Exam. Duration
Semester
Course Name of Course Max. Marks

Credits
component CI UE
s A
Core Project & Viva-Voce IV 20 - 20 60+ 20
List of Electives
Elective – II
Data Warehousing and Data Mining OR Mobile Computing OR Artificial Intelligence
Elective – III
Artificial Neural Networks OR Computer Simulation and Modeling OR Cryptography
16
10.M.Sc. DEGREE FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED COURSE IN
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
III Semester Theory
Marks
Subject Code Name of the Subject Credits
Int. Ext.
CST201 Computer Oriented Mathematics 4 25 75
CST203 Internet and its Applications 4 25 75
CST205 Microprocessors 4 25 75
CST207 Programming in C 4 25 75
Soft Skill – III 3 40 60
Environmental Exam. In IV Semester
Studies
PRACTICAL
Marks
Int. Ext.
CST209 Practical – III : C Programming and : 4 40 60
Microprocessors Lab
IV SEMESTER THEORY
Marks
Int. Ext.
CST202 Software Engineering 4 25 75
CST204 Data Structures 4 25 75
CST206 Computer Graphics 4 25 75
CST208 Programming in C++ 4 25 75
Soft Skill – IV 3 40 60
Environmental Exam. In IV Semester 2
Studies
PRACTICAL
Marks
Int. Ext.
CST210 Practical IV : Data Structures using C++ 4 40 60
17
V SEMESTER THEORY
Marks
Int. Ext.
CST301 Database Management Systems 4 25 75
CST303 Operating Systems 4 25 75
CST305 Visual Programming 4 25 75
CST307 Computer Networks 4 25 75
Value Education 2
PRACTICAL
Marks
Int. Ext.
CST309 Practical V : RDBMS with Visual 3 40 60
Programming Lab
VI SEMESTER THEORY#
Subject Code Name of the Subject Credits Marks
CST302 Multimedia Systems 4 Int. Ext.
CST304 Java Programming 4 25 75
CST306 Computer Architecture 5 25 75
CST308 Object Oriented Analysis and Design 4 25 75
Extension Activities 1
PRACTICAL
Marks
Int. Ext.
CST310 Practical – VI : Java Programming Lab 3 40 60
VII SEMESTER THEORY#

Marks
Int. Ext.
CST401 Advanced Java Programming 3 25 75
CST403 Design and Analysis of Algorithms 4 25 75
CST405 Web Technologies 3 25 75
Elective I 4 25 75
Soft Skill – V 2 40 60
PRACTICAL
Marks
Subject Code Name of the Subject Credit
Int. Ext.
18
CST407 Practical VII: Advanced Java Programming 3 40 60
Lab.
CST409 Practical VIII : Web Applications Lab. 3 40 60
ELECTIVE – I
1 CST411 Parallel Algorithms

2 CST413 Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems
3 CST415 Systems Software
VIII SEMESTER THEORY#

Subject Marks
Name of the Subject Credit
Code Int. Ext.
CST402 Unix and Shell Programming 3 25 75
CST404 Distributed Databases 4 25 75
CST406 E-Commerce 3 25 75
CST408 Information Security 3 25 75
Elective II 4 25 75
Soft Skill – 2 40 60
VI
VII
Internship** During Summer Vacation
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the fourth year and marks
should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Ninth
PRACTICAL
Marks
Int. Ext.
CST410 Practical IX : Unix Lab 3 40 60
ELECTIVE II
1 CST412 Software Project Management

2 CST414 Fuzzy Logic
3 CST416 Computer Simulation and System Modelling
19
IX SEMESTER THEORY#
Subject Marks
Name of the Subject Credits
Code Int. Ext.
CST501 Network Programming 3 25 75
CST503 Software Testing 3 25 75
ED Data Warehousing and Data Mining 3 25 75
Elective III 4 25 75
Elective IV 4 25 75
VII
Internship 2 100
PRACTICAL
Subject Code Name of the Subject Credit Marks
Int. Ext.
CST507 Practical X : Network Programming Lab 3 40 60
ELECTIVE III
1 CST509 TCP/IP Networks

2 CST511 Artificial Neural Networks
3 CST513 Windows Programming
ELECTIVE IV
1 CST515 CAD/CAM
2 CST517 Distributed Computing
3 CST519 Image Processing
X SEMESTER
Marks
Int. Ext.
CST502 Project 20 20 60+20
# Soft Skill courses for IV and V year shall be opted by the students as per soft skills
regulations for postgraduate courses.
20
11. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN ELECTRONIC MEDIA
THIRD SEMESTER
Inst.H
Course Credi Exam.H
Title of the Course r MAX.MARKS
Code t r
Week
INT. EXT.
MARKS MARKS
Core 9 Communication Research 4 4 3 25 75
Methods-I
Core 10 Film Studies 4 4 3 25 75
Core 11 Radio Production 4 4 3 25 75
Elective 5 Technical Communication 3 3 3 25 75
Elective 6 Public Relations & 3 3 3 25 75
Corporate Communication
Soft Skills Soft Skills 2 2 3 40 60
Soft Skills **Internship 2 2 3 40 60
FOURTH SEMESTER
Course Inst.Hr Credi Exam.

Title of the Course MAX.MARKS
Code Week t Hr
INT. EXT.
MARKS MARKS
Core 12 Communication Research 3 3 3 25 75
Methods-II
Core 13 Cross-Cultural 3 3 3 25 75
Communication
Core14 Research Project Work 6 6 3 25 75
Core 15 Specialization (Video 3 3 3 25 75
Magazine)
Core 16 Media practice (Internship II) 3 3 3 25 75
Elective 7 Media Analysis Technique 2 2 3 25 75
Soft Skills Soft Skills 2 2 3 40 60
Total Credits 90
21
12. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN FOOD SCIENCE NUTRITION AND
DIETETICS
THIRD SEMESTER
HOURSEXAM
HOURSINST.
MAX.MARKS
CREDITS
COURSE
SUBJECT
COMPONENTS INT. EXT.
MARKS MARKS
CORE 9 PAPER IX 6 5 3 25 75
Advanced Human
Nutrition – Macro
Nutrients
CORE 10 PAPER X 6 5 3 25 75
Advanced Dietetics
CORE 11 PAPER XI 6 3 3 25 75
Dietetics Practical
CORE 12 PAPER XII - 3 3 25 75
Dietetics Internship
Elective PAPER III 5 3 3 25 75
Inter Disciplinary Dissertation Design
Elective PAPER IV 5 3 3 25 75
Extra Disciplinary Clinical Biochemistry
SOFT SKILL III 2 2 40 60
22
FOURTH SEMESTER
MAX.
HOURSEXAM
HOURSINST.
MARKS
CREDITS
MARKSEXT.
MARKSINT.
COURSE
SUBJECTS
COMPONENTS
CORE 13 PAPER XIII 6 5 3 25 75

Advanced Human Nutrition –
Micronutrients
CORE 14 PAPER XIV - 8 3 25 75
Dissertation
ELECTIVE PAPER V 5 3 3 25 75
Extra Disciplinary Principles of Gene
Manipulation
ELECTIVE PAPER VI 5 3 3 25 75
Extra Disciplinary Community Relations
ELECTIVE PAPER VII 5 3 3 25 75
Inter Disciplinary Fundamentals of Child
Guidance and Counselling
SOFT SKILL IV 2 2 40 60
23
13. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN FOOD SERIVICE MANAGEMENT AND
DIETETICS
THIRD SEMESTER
HOURSEXAM
MAX. MARKS
HOURSINST.
CREDITS
COURSE
SUBJECT
COMPONENTS EXT
CIA
MARKS
CORE 9 PAPER IX 6 4 3 25 75
Food Service Management
CORE 10 PAPER X 6 5 3 25 75
Advanced Dietetics
CORE 11 PAPER XI 6 3 3 25 75
Dietetics Practicals
CORE 12 PAPER XII - 3 3 25 75
Dietetics Internship
ELECTIVE PAPER III 5 3 3 25 75
Inter Disciplinary Dissertation Design
ELECTIVE PAPER IV 5 3 3 25 75
Extra Disciplinary Clinical Biochemistry
SOFT SKILL III 2 2 40 60
24
FOURTH SEMESTER
HOURSEXAM
MAX. MARKS
HOURSINST.
CREDITS
COURSE EXT
SUBJECTS CIA
COMPONENTS MARK
S
CORE 13 PAPER XIII - 5 3 25 75

Catering Internship
CORE 14 PAPER XIV - 8 3 25 75
Dissertation
ELECTIVE PAPER V 5 3 3 25 75
Extra Disciplinary Principles of Gene
Manipulation
ELECTIVE PAPER VI 5 3 3 25 75
Extra Disciplinary Community Relations
ELECTIVE PAPER VII 5 3 3 25 75
Inter Disciplinary Fundamentals of Child
Guidance and
Counselling
SOFT SKILL IV 2 2 40 60
The following Courses are common to both the Branches.

(12 & 13)
1. Paper X - Advanced Dietetics

2. Paper XI - Dietetics Practicals
3. Paper IV(EDP) - Clinical Biochemistry
4. Paper V (EDP) - Principles of Gene Manipulation
5. Paper VI - Community Relations
6. Paper VII – Fundamentals of Child Guidance and Counselling
(Inter Disciplinary)
25
14. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN GENERAL GENETICS
THIRD SEMSESTER
MAX.
COURSE INST.
NAME OF COURSE CREDIT MARKS
COMPONENT HOUR HRS.
S EXT
S S CIA
N
Paper XIV Recombinant DNA
CORE 10 6 HRS. 4 3 25 75
Technology
Paper XV
CORE 11 6 HRS. 4 3 25 75
Human Genetics II
Paper XVI Developmental
CORE 12 6 HRS. 4 3 25 75
Genetics
CORE 13 Paper XVII Practical III 6 HRS. 4 3 40 60
ELECTIVE 4 Paper XVIII Gene Therapy 6 HRS. 5 3 25 75
SOFT SKILL 2 40 60
FOURTH SEMSESTER
INST. MAX. MARKS
COURSE CREDIT HRS
NAME OF COURSE HOUR CI
COMPONENTS S . EXTN
S A
Paper XIX
ELECTIVE 5 6 HRS. 5 3 25 75
Genomics and Proteomics
100
Viva-
Voce
Project work* 8 3 50
(Fully
external
)
Project work*: CIA (Project) – 50 Marks; External – 100 Marks
Note: Students are expected to do internship during summer vacation at the end of second
semester and submit a typed write up not exceeding 5-10 pages during third semester. Internship
carries two credits.
26
15. M.Sc. Degree Course in Hotel and Catering Management
THIRD SEMESTER
SUBJECTS HOURS CREDITS
Paper XI- Hotel Financial Management 6 4
Paper XII- Tourism Marketing and Travel Operations 6 4
Paper XIII- Management Information System 6 4
Paper XIV- Advanced Front Office Management 5 4
Paper XV- Kitchen Operation and Cost Control 5 4
Soft Skills 2 2
Total 30 22
marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included
in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
SUBJECTS HOURS CREDITS
Paper XVI- Research Methodology 6 4
Paper XVII- Food and Beverage Department 6 4
Organization
Paper XVIII- Conceptual Skills of Accommodation 6 4
Operation
Paper XIX- Rooms Division Yield Management 5 4
Paper XX- Project and Viva Voce 5 4
Soft Skills 2 2
Total 30 22
27
16. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
DurationExam.
Max. Marks
Credits
Course
Name of Course
components CIA UE
Core Computer Networks 4 3 25 75

Core Design and Analysis of Algorithms 4 3 25 75
Core Advanced Java Programming 4 3 25 75
Extra- Information Security 4 3 25 75
Disciplinary
Elective Elective – V 4 3 25 75
Core Practical – V: Advanced Java Lab. 2 3 40 60
Soft Skill-3 2 3 40 60
Soft Skill-4 2 3 40 60
Internship** During summer vacation 4 to 6 weeks of I Year 2 100
Fourth Semester
DURATIONEXAM.
MAX. MARKS
SEMESTER
CREDITS
COURSE
NAME OF COURSE
COMPONENTS CIA UE
Core Project & Viva-Voce IV 20 - 20 60+

20
List of Electives
Elective – V: Mobile Computing OR Artificial Intelligence OR Computer Graphics
28
17. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN MATHEMATICS
THIRD SEMESTER
Core XIV Complex Analysis-I 25 75 3 Hrs 4
Core XV Topology 25 75 3 Hrs 4
Core XVI Operations Research 25 75 3 Hrs 4
Core XVII Mechanics 25 75 3 Hrs 4
Elective XVIII Elective – III (Choose one 25 75 3 Hrs 4
from Group C)
Soft skill -III XIX 40 60 3 Hrs 2
FOURHT SEMESTER
Core XX Complex Analysis-II 25 75 3 Hrs 4
Core XXI Differential Geometry 25 75 3 Hrs 4
Core XXII Functional Analysis 25 75 3 Hrs 4
Elective XXIII Elective – IV (Choose one 25 75 3 Hrs 4
from Group D)
Elective XXIV Elective - V (Choose one 25 75 3 Hrs 4
from Group D)
Soft skill-IV XXV IV 40 60 3 Hrs 2

Total Marks / Credits 2400 90
Elective-III (Semester III)
Any one of the following courses from Group-C shall be chosen as Elective-III for
Semester III.
Group-C
1. Algebraic Theory of Numbers
2. Number Theory and Cryptography
3. Stochastic Processes
4. Data Structures and Algorithms
29
Elective-IV (Semester IV)
Any one of the following papers from Group-D shall be chosen as Elective-IV for
Semester IV.
Group-D:
5. Fluid Dynamics
6. Combinatorics
7. Mathematical Statistics
8. Algebraic Topology
Any one of the following papers from Group-E shall be chosen as Elective-V for Semester IV.
Group – E
17. Tensor Analysis and Relativity

18. Mathematical Physics
19. Financial Mathematics
20. Calculus of Variations and Integral Equations
30
18. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN MEDICAL LABORATORY
TECHNOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
Inst. Max. Marks
Course Exam
Name of Course Hour Credits
component Hours CIA External
s
Core – 7 Microbiology 6 4 3 25 75
Core – 8 Medical Laboratory 6 4 3 25 75

Technology and
Biiostatistics
Core – 9 Microbiology Practical – 6 4 6 40 60
III
Core -10 Serology and 6 4 3 25 75
Hematology
Elective- 5 Parasitology 5 3 3 25 75
Elective- 6 Diagnostic Clinical 5 3 3 25 75
(ED) Biochemistry
Core – 11 Serology and 6 4 6 40 60
Hematology Practical -
IV
SOFT SKILL - III 2 3 40 60
FOURTH SEMESTER
Course Inst. Exam Max. Marks
Name of Course Credits
component Hours Hours CIA External
Core - 12 Pathology 6 3 3 25 75
Core –13 Pathology 6 4 6 40 60

Practical - V
Elective- 7 Pharmacology and 4 3 3 25 75
Toxicology
Core - 14 Project and viva- 8 20 60
voce
SOFT SKILL - IV 2 3 40 60
COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF PRACTICAL EXAMINATION

University Practical examination for practical I and II will be conducted at
31
the end of second semester. Practical III shall be conducted at the end of fourth semester.
32
19. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN PHYSICS
THIRD SEMESTER
MAX
COURSE INST.
NAME OF COURSE CREDITS HRS MARKS
COMPONENTS HOURS
CIA EXT
PAPER 11 – Statistical
CORE 6 4 3 25 75
Mechanics
PAPER 12 – Nuclear
CORE 6 4 3 25 75
And Particle Physics
PAPER 13 –
CORE Computational Methods 6 4 3 25 75
and Programming
PAPER 14 – Practical
CORE 6 4 4 40 60
- III
Extra
PAPER 15 6 4 3 25 75
Disciplinary II
Soft Skills-III 2 2 3 40 60
33
FOURTH SEMESTER
MAX
COURSE INST.
CREDIT MARKS
COMPONENT NAME OF COURSE HOUR HRS
S CI
S S EXT
A
PAPER 16 – Condensed
CORE 6 4 3 25 75
Matter Physics
PAPER 17 – Practical – IV
CORE 6 4 4 40 60
***
ELECTIVE-
PAPER 18 6 4 3 25 75
II
ELECTIVE-
PAPER 19 6 4 3 25 75
III
CORE PAPER 20 – PROJECT **** 4 ** **
Soft Skills-IV 2 2 3 40 60
Elective I - Paper 9
Spectroscopy [OR] Nanoscience and Technology
Elective II and III -Papers 18 and 19
Any two out of the following:

1. Microprocessor and Microcontroller.
2. Material Science.
3. Advanced Spectroscopy.
Extra disciplinary Electives to be offered to M. Sc. students in Chemistry, Mathematics and

other disciplines.
1. Basic Quantum Mechanics.
2. Intelligent Instrumentation.
3. Basic Material Scince.
4. Mathematical Methods.
5. Classical Dynamics.
Total credits : 90 ( Core 60 + Soft-skill/Internship 10 + Electives/ED 20 )
34
20. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN VISUAL COMMUNICATION
THIRD SEMESTER
Course Title of the Course Inst. Credi Exam MAX

Code Hr t . MARKS
Wee Hr
k
CIA EXT
Core 9 Visual Research Methods 4 4 3 25 75

Core 10 Special Visual Effects 4 4 3
40 60
(Practical)
Core 11 Video Editing (Practical) 3 3 3 40 60
Elective 5 Entertainment & Society 3 3 3 25 75
Elective 6 Film Analysis & Criticism 3 3 3 25 75
Soft Skills Soft skills 2 2 3 40 60
Soft Skills **Internship 2 2 3 40 60
FOURTH SEMESTER
Course Title of the Course Inst. Credi Exam MAX
Code Hr t . MARKS
Week Hr CIA EXT
Core 12 Computer Graphics & 3 3 3
40 60
Animation III (Practical)
Core 13 Sound Recording & Editing 3 3 3
40 60
(Practical)
Core14 Project Management 6 6 3 25 75
Core 15 Research Project Work 3 3 3 25 75
Core 16 Specialization (Project) 2 3 3 25 75
Elective 7 Gaming & Game Design 2 2 3 25 75
Soft Skills Soft skills 2 2 3 40 60
Total Credits 90
35
21. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN ZOOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
Marks
Core/Elective/EDP Name of the Course Credits
Int Ext
Core Developmental Biology 4 25 75
Core Immunology 4 25 75
Core Lab Course III 4 25 75
Elective Elective III 3 25 75
Elective Elective IV 3 25 75
EDP II Microbiology 3 25 75
Soft Skills -III 2 40 60
FOURTH SEMESTER
Core/Elective/ED Marks
Name of the Course Credits
P Int Ext
Core Biotechnology 4 25 75
Core Research methodology 4 25 75
Core Lab Course IV 4 25 75
Elective Elective V 3 25 75
Core Project 6 25 75
Soft Skills -IV 2 40 60
Electives*
1. Fishery Biology
2. Entomology
3. Endocrinology
4. Toxicology
5. Sericulture
6. Costal Ecosystem
7. Aquaculture
* Colleges offering M.Sc. Zoology can choose any FIVE electives from the list given.
A.C.F.2009
36
APPENDIX - 17 (S)
UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS
1. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER III
CORE PAPER IX – DATA COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING
Objectives
i) This course introduces the fundamental concepts and terminology of data communication
and networking,
ii) Provides a general introduction to data communications and computer networking
that would be useful to all personnel who deal with distributed systems,
iii) Encompassing both technical and managerial aspects,
iv) To help students better understand the challenges and opportunities faced by
modern business, and
v) Topics include: fundamentals of telecommunications, data transmission mechanisms,
telecommunication media and technologies, considerations for LAN and WAN
implementations, the Internet and intranet applications, emerging telecommunications
technologies, and trends in the telecommunications industry.
UNIT 1 DATA COMMUNICATION
Introduction to data communication: A digital communication system - Data terminal equipment

(DTE) - Line control unit (LCU) - Data communication Equipment (DCE) - Transmission media
and communication link - Communication system formats - Data link protocols : General
protocols, Character oriented protocols, Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC), High level data
control (HDLC) and XMODEM communications protocols - Low speed data communications -
Frequency shift keying- FSK link and FSK modems- High speed modems and systems -
Balanced modulator - Phase shift Keying- Differential PSK Bit splitters - PSK modulator-
Quadrature Phase shift keying (QPSK)- QPSK modems - QPSK demodulator- Higher data rate
modems- Multi channel data communications : Frequency division multiplexing (FDM) - FDM
groups and subgroups - Multichannel data distribution- Data under voice (DUV)- Digital T
carriers and Time division multiplexing (TDM)-Multichannel TDM- Sampling theorem-
Sampling using TDM- Natural sampling- Sample and hold- Quantisation - Pulse code
modulation- Delta modulation - Adaptive delta modulation- CODECS Vocoders.
37
UNIT 2 DATA TRANSMISSION
Transmission – Synchronous transmission – Overview of modems and control – Error detection

methods - Data compression – Transmission control circuits – Communication control devices -
Data transmission concepts – Analog and Digital data transmission – Transmission media –
Guided transmission media – Wireless transmission – Protocols - Error control - Ideal RQ –
Continuous RQ – Link management – Data link control protocols – Bit oriented protocols.
UNIT 3 COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKS
Open system network models : Data topologies - Data switching- Types of networking- The
open system interconnection (OSI) model-System network architecture (SNA)- SNA layers-
Logical units- SNA message formats- Local area networks – Selection issues – Types –
Protocols – Performance – High speed and bridged area networks - Interconnection methods -
High speed LAN - Bridges - Transparent bridges – Source routing bridges – Performance issues
– LAN technology – Architecture – BUS/TREE LANs, Ring LANs, Star LANs and Wireless
LANs.
Characteristic of public networks - Packet switched data networks – Circuit switched data
networks – Integrated services digital networks – Private networks – Inter network architecture –
Network layer structure - Internet protocol standards – Frame relay protocols architecture –
Frame relay call control - User data transfer - Network function - Congestion control.
UNIT 4 ARCHITECTURE, PROTOCOLS AND INTERFACES
Protocols and architecture - TCP/IP protocols – Principles of inter-networking and intra-

networking - Current loop interface – RS232- RS432 interface – BASIC test - Breakout box and
line monitors – Pattern generators and bit error rate analyzers – Protocol analyzers – Time
domain refractometry – Fibre optic systems.
UNIT 5 ADVANCES IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Enhanced features of telephone : Conference calls -Call transfers- Call queuing- Priority calls
and automatic directory search- PBXs- Picture phone- Still picture video telephone -
Telephotograph transmission- Facsimile services- Radio paging- Radio telephone-
Mobile/cellular telephone-Vehicle location monitoring- Vehicle traffic control-Remote control of
machines-Emergency communication -Interactive TV (shopping, advertisement and games)-
Data broadcasting - Mail gram- Voice gram -Electronic mail delivery-Electronic fund/cash
transfer (banking) - Person identification systems (security systems) - Computer assisted
instructions
38
Books for Study:
1. F. Halsall, 1994, Data Communications, Computer Networks and Open Systems,
Addison Wesley.
2. A. C. Agarwall, Computer Communication and ISDN Systems, Khanna
Publishers.
3. W. L. Schweber, Data Communications, McGraw–Hill.
4. D. Besteskas and R. Gallagar, Data Networks, Prentice Hall.
5. J. Quinn, Digital Data Communications, Prentice Hall.
6. James Martin, 1987, Future developments in Telecommunications, Prentice Hall
Inc.
Books for Reference:

1. A. S. Tanenbaum, 1999, Computer Networks, 3rd Ed., PHI.
2. D. F. Commer, 2000, Computer Networks and Internets, 2nd Ed., Addison –Wesley.
3. U. Black, 1999, Computer Networks, 2nd Ed., PHI.
4. Thiagrajan Vishwanathan, 1992, Telecommunication switching systems and networks,
Printice Hall of India.
5. Gordon White, Newnes, 1995, Mobile Radio technology, Butterworth Heinemann Ltd.
6. John L. McNamara, 1991, Local Area Networks, Prentice Hall of India.
CORE PAPER X - DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Objectives
i) To introduce the basic concepts of signal processing,
ii) To give basic knowledge of the typical structure of a DSP system,
iii) To explain the benefits of DSP,
iv) To inculcate different architectures/types of DSPs, and
v) To introduce some applications of DSP.
UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF DSP

Signals and graph terminology – Mean and standard deviation – Histogram – Normal
distribution – Digital noise generation – Precision and accuracy – Quantization – Sampling
theorem – Digital to analog conversion – Analog filters for data conversion – Selecting the
antialias filter – Multirate & single bit data conversion
UNIT 2 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

Basics of signals - Discrete sequences - Signal amplitude – Magnitude - Power - Sampling rate -
aliasing - Discrete linear systems - Time-invariant systems – Frequency domain representation of
discrete time signals – Transfer function - Types of transfer functions – All pass, minimum-
phase and maximum-phase - Complementary transfer functions – Discrete-time processing of
random signals.
39
UNIT 3 TRANSFORM TECHNIQUES IN DSP
Laplace transform – Discrete Fourier transform – Computation of the DFT - Fast Fourier
transform – Decimation in time – Decimation in frequency – Bit reversal – Radix-2 Butterfly
structures - Z-transform – Chirp Z-transform – Hilbert transform.
UNIT 4 DIGITAL FILTER DESIGN

Fundamentals and basic structures of FIR & IIR filters – Convolution - Low-pass, band-pass,
high-pass FIR filters – Design of IIR filters – Impulse invariance method – Bilinear transform
method – Design of digital IIR notch filter – Low-pass IIR digital filter design – Comparison of
IIR & FIR digital filters.
UNIT 5 IMPLEMENTATION OF DSP TECHNIQUES IN TYPICAL DSP HARDWARE

DSP circuits – Different DSP hardware – Typical DSP board (Analog devices/Texas
Instruments/Motorola/AT&T) – Functional block diagram – DSP software – Fixed point –
Floating point – Number precision – Program language - Applications – Spectral analysis using
DFT - Short-term DFT.
Books for Study:
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer, 1999, Digital Signal Processing, Prentice-
Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Steven W Smith, 1999 , The Scientist and Engineer’s Guide to Digital Signal
Processing, California Technical Publishing.
1. Richard G. Lyons, 1999 , Understanding Digital Signal Processing, Addison Wesley.

2. Sanjit K. Mitra, 1998, Digital Signal Processing: A Computer Based Approach,
TMH.
3. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, 2000 ,Digital Signal Processing, Principles,
Algorithms and Applications, Third Edition, PHI.
4. Boaz Porat, 1997, A Course in Digital Signal Processing John Wiley & Sons.
5. Andrew Bateman, Iain Paterson-Stephens, 2002, The DSP Handbook - Algorithms,
Applications and Design Techniques, Prentice Hall & Pearson Education Ltd,
6. Walt Kestler, 2000, Mixed Signal and DSP Design Techniques, Analog Devices Inc.
Internet Resources:
1. Texas Instruments Website: www.ti.com
2. Analog Instruments Website: www.analog.com
3. Motorola Website: www.motorola.com
4. www.dspvillage.com
5. www.dspstores.com
6. www.dspguru.com
40
CORE PAPER XI - PRACTICAL – III: EMBEDDED AND DSP LABORATORY
Objectives
i) To train students with practical ability to design and implement real- time/embedded
systems based on the understanding of real- time the
ii) To become familiar with the building of a real-time/embedded system using I/O
devices, device drivers, and real-time operating system's functions, and
iii) To study the embedded applications with the goal of optimizing parameters such as
robustness, cost, speed, size, or features against real world constraints.
Any twelve experiments of the following to be done
1. Introduction to DSP & DSK (TMS320C6711)
2. Examples with DSK & CCS (Echo generation, sine wave generation with two sliders for
amplitude and frequency control, square wave generation, ramp wave generation)
3. FIR filter design (Low, High, Bandpass & Bandstop)
4. IIR filtering (Low, High, Bandpass & Bandstop) Convolution & correlation
5. FFT & DFT
6. Generation of fixed PWM with variable frequency and variable duty cycle
7. AC induction motor control using sine modulation technique
8. Assembly language programming of the 8031/8051 (16-bit Addition, Subtraction,
Multiplication & Division)
9. Interfacing experiments of 8031(Key board, LED, LCD)
10. Interfacing experiments of 8051 (ADC & DAC)
11. 8031/8051- Parallel port
12. 8255 & 8251A- Serial port interface
13. 8031/8051 – 8253 counter and timer interface
14. 8031/8051 – Stepper motor control
41
CORE PAPER XII - BASIC VLSI DESIGN
UNIT 1 MOS AND BI-CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN PROCESSES
MOS Layers –Stick Diagrams –Design Rules and Layout –General Observations on the Design
Rules –2um Double Metal, Double Poly. CMOS/Bicomos Rules –1.2um Single Metal, Single
Poly. CMOS Rules –Layout Diagrams –A Brief Introduction –Symbolic Diagrams – Translation
to Mask Form.
UNIT 2 BASIC CIRCUIT CONCEPTS
Sheet resistance (Rs) –Sheet resistance concept applied to MOS transistors and inverters –Area
capacitances of layers –Standard unit of capacitance Cg –Standard unit of capacitances
calculation –The delay unit –Inverter delays –Driving large capacitive loads –Propagation delay
–Wiring capacitances.
UNIT 3 SCALING OF MOS CIRCUITS
Scaling models and scaling factors –Scaling factors for device parameters –Some discussion on
and limitations of scaling.
UNIT 4 SUBSYSTEM DESIGN AND LAYOUT
Some architectural issues –Switch logic –Gate (restoring) logic –Examples of structured design
(combinational logic) –Some clocked sequential circuits –Other system considerations.
UNIT 5 ILLUSTRATION OF THE DESIGN PROCESS– COMPUTATIONALELEMENTS
Some observations on the design process –Regularity –Design of an ALU subsystem –A further
consideration of adders –Multipliers.
Books for Study:

1. BASIC VLSI DESIGN “Douglas A. Punknell & Kamran Eshraghian” – Eastern
Economy Edition, IIIrd Edition.
2. S. M. Sze, 1988, VLSI Fabrication Technology, McGraw Hill.
3. Nell H. E. Weste and Kamran Eshraghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design",
2ndEdition, Addision Wesley, 1998.
4. Jacob Backer, Harry W. Li and David E. Boyce, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and
Simulation ", Prentice Hall of India, 1998.
42
ELECTIVE PAPER III - EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Objectives
i) To understand the scientific principles and concepts behind embedded systems,
ii) To obtain hands-on experience in programming embedded systems,
iii) To inculcate the basics of embedded system requirements of real-life electronic/electrical
systems,
iv) To learn fundamental real-time theory such as real-time scheduling, timing analysis and
validation, synchronization, which are essential for advanced research in real-time area.
UNIT 1 OVERVIEW OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Introduction – Review of microcontrollers – 8 and 16 bit microcontroller families– Flash series

– Embedded RISC processor architectures - Embedded system design process – Design
examples
UNIT 2 EMBEDDED SYSTEM ENVIIRONMENT
Microcontroller architecture - Communication interface standards- Embedded system

development process- Embedded operating systems- Types of embedded operating systems.
UNIT 3 MCS51 EMBEDDED CHIPS
Introduction- 8051 Micro controller hardware – Assembly language programming – Addressing

modes - Input/Output ports and circuits- External memory- Counter and timers- Serial data
Input/Output- Interrupts - Inter facing of 8051 with LCD, ADC, sensors, stepper motor, key board,
DAC, memory.
UNIT 4 MICROCHIP EMBEDDED CHIPS
Microchip PIC16C6x/7x family – Features – Architecture – Memory organization – Register file

map – I/O ports – PORTA – PORTB – PORTC – Data EEPROM and flash program memory –
Asynchronous serial port – SPI mode – I2C mode – MPASM assembler and its use –
Applications in communication and industrial controls.
UNIT 5 REAL – TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Architecture of the kernel – Task and task scheduler – Interrupt service routines- Semaphores –
Mutex – Mailboxes – Message queues – Event registers – Pipes – Signals – Timers – Memory
management – Priority inversion problems – Embedded operating systems – Embedded linux –
Real-time operating systems – RT linux – Handheld operating systems – Windows CE
43
Books for Study:
1. Frank Vahid, Tony D. Givargis, 2002, Embedded System Design – A Unified
Hardware/Software Introduction, John Wiley.
2. KVKK Prasad, 2005, Embedded / Real Time Systems, Dreamtech Press.
3. Programming for Embedded Systems- Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gillispie Mazidi, 2002, The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems, Fourth Indian Reprint, Pearson Education.
5. John B. Peatman, 2004, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, Seventh Indian Reprint
Pearson Education.
1. David E. Simon, 2005, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Ed.,.

2. Raj Kamal, 2002, Introduction to Embedded Systems, TMS.
3. 1187D: Atmel semiconductor reference manual.
4. DS30292B: Microchip reference manual.
Internet Resources:
1. Atmel semiconductor web site – www.atmel.com
2. Microchip semiconductor web site – www.microchip.com
3. National semiconductor web site – www.national.com
4. www.embedded.com
5. www.allembedded.com
44
SEMESTER IV
CORE PAPER XIII – INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL
Objectives
The students will
i) understand the principles of industrial process control systems,
ii) study the various controllers and their characteristics
iii) understand the importance of computers in process control industry
iv) become familiar with CAD, CAM & CIMS
v) study various process control systems.
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL AND TRANSDUCERS AND

ACTUATORS
Identification of functional elements - Control system evaluation-Analog and digital processing -
Application specific selection of transducers for measurement of process parameters : temperature,
pressure, flow level, density, safety and weight sensors- Synchro/Servo motors- Control valves-
Solenoids-Electropneumatic converters- Indicators- annuniators- Alarms-Displays-Recorders-
Loggers, etc.
UNIT 2 CONTROLLER PRINCIPLES AND CONTROL LOOP CHARACTERESTICS

Process characteristics : Process equation, process lead, process lag and self regulation - Control
system parameters : Error, variable range, control parameter range, control lag, dead time,
cycling- Controller modes: discontinuous controller modes, two position mode, multiposition
mode and floating control mode, continuous controller modes, proportional (P), integral (I) and
differential (D) control modes, composite controller modes – PI, PD and PID - Control loop
characteristics- Control system configurations – Single variable and cascade control-
Multivariable control system- Stability- Process loop tuning- Open loop transient response
method- Ziegler-Nicholas method and Frequency response method.
UNIT 3 COMPUTER IN PROCESS CONTROL

Programmable controllers- Data logging- Supervisory control- Computer based controller-
Hierarchial control- Controller software- Computer aided integrated manufacturing (CIM)- The
product cycle and CAD/CAM- Fundamentals of CAD- Computer aided process planning-
Computerized scheduling- Material requirement planning and shop floor control- NC, CNC and
computer controlled robots- Computer aided quality control- Implementation of CIM’s.
45
UNIT 4 DISCRETE STATE CONTROLLERS
Definitions and terminologies- Characteristics of the system-Discrete state variables- Process
space and event sequence description- Ladder diagram- Programmable logic controllers (PICs)-
Use of microcontrollers- Fuzzy logic control.
UNIT 5 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

Batch process control and automation- Boiler control- Chiller control- Clean room control-
Compressor control - Cooling tower to crystallizers control-Distillation control -Dryer control -
Evaporation control- Extruder controls-Furnace control- Heat exchangers- PH control- Pump
controls- Reactor controls- Rolling mill control- Steam turbine control -Water treatment control.
Books for Study:
1. C. D. Johnson, 1996, Process control instrumentation technology, Prentice Hall of India.
2. M. P. Groover and E. W. Zimmers, 1992, CAD/CAM, Prentice Hall of India.

1. J. M. Jacob, 1989, Industrial control electronics, Prentice Hall Inc.
2. B. B. Liptak, 1995, Process measurement and analysis, Chilton Book Co.
3. B. B. Liptak, 1995, Process control, Chilton Book Co.
CORE PAPER – XIV - SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND TECHNOLOGY

Objectives
The students will learn the various crystal growth techniques, semiconductor devices fabrication
and monolithic integrated circuit technology, ion implantation techniques and the developments
in the IC technology
UNIT 1 MATERIAL PROPERTIES AND CRYSTAL GROWTH
Material properties of Si and GaAs – Crystal structure – Planes and orientations – Defects:
Crystal defects, Poisson dislocation and their movement – Vacancies- CZ and Bridgeman
techniques – Zone
UNIT 2 WAFER PREPARATION AND EPITAXY
Ingot shaping – Polishing – Cutting – Wafering – Scribe lines - Cleavage planes- Vapour phase
epitaxy – Basic transport process and reaction kinetics – Reaction of the substrate – Elements of
nucleation and growth – Doping and autodoping – Process selection and capabilities - Buried
layer epitaxial defects – Liquid phase epitaxy – Tilt type growth furnace – Slider boat
arrangement – Apparatus – Si on insulators – Sapphire and amorphous substrates.
46
UNIT 3 DIFFUSION AND OXIDATION
Nature of diffusion – Interstitial and substitutional movements – Diffusion concentration
gradient – The diffusion co-efficient – Field aided motion – Interaction of charged defects- The
dissociative process – Impurity behaviour in Si – Substitutional diffusers – Interstitial diffusers-
Thermal oxidation of Si – Oxide formation – Kinetics of oxide growth - Network former –
Network breaker – Oxidation systems – Oxidation furnaces - Techniques for growing thin oxide
layer – Oxidation induced stacking faults – Anodic oxidation systems – Thermal oxidation of
GaAs – Plasma oxidation – Properties of oxide layers.
UNIT 4
ION IMPLANTATION, ANNEALING AND SINTERING AND VACUUM DEPOSITION
Ion implantation versus diffusion – Penetration range – Backscattering – Sputtering – Straggling
– Nuclear and electronic stopping expression for range, transverse effects – Ion implantation
systems and principles – Simulation of ion implantation – Different Gaussian modes and
Pearson IV model – 3 moments of range data – Analytical equation – Boltzmann transport
equation – Monte Carlo approximation – Implantation damage – Shallow junctions - Annealing
of implanted impurities – Isothermal and isochronal annealing – Reverse annealing effects –
Sintering of contacts - Chemical vapour deposition – Plasma assisted deposition – Electroplating
– Deposition techniques specifically for metal, dielectric, polysilicon and polymer films.
UNIT 5 LITHOGRAPHY, ETCHING AND PACKAGING
Positive and negative resistance development – Photomask – Its preparation and scaling –
Pattern reticle mask – Master mask – Production mask – Alignment – Optical lithography –
Contact printing – Projection printing – Proximity printing- Wet chemical etching –
Crystallographic etches – Etching noncrystalline films – String model – Lift off process – Plasma
etching – Plasma assisted etching – Sputter etching – Milling - Bonding techniques – Ultrasonic
die bonder – Packing materials – Standard packages and selection criteria – Packaging
techniques- IC technologies: SSI, MSI, LSI, VLSI and VVLSI .
Books for Study:
1. S. M. Sze, 1988, VLSI Fabrication Technology, McGraw Hill.
2. S. K. Gandhi, 1983, Si/GaAs Devices Fabrication Technology, John Wiley Ltd.
1. Ruska, 1988, Devices Fabrication Technology, McGraw Hill.
2. D. K. Schroder, 1990, Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization, Wiley, NY.
3. M. S. Tyagi, Introduction to Semiconductor Devices, Wiley.
47
CORE PAPER – XV - PROJECT & VIVA VOCE
Objectives
To let students adventure into preliminary research field both in experiment and theory, the
concept of project has been introduced in the final semester. The project work can be based on
experimental work. The students shall explore new developments from journals, collecting
literature/data and write a dissertation based on his/her work and studies. A close interaction
with industry will be appreciated while carrying out the project work.
ELECTIVE – IV - POWER ELECTRONICS
UNIT 1 THYRISTORS AND RELATED DEVICES
Thyristors – Triacs – Power diodes – Power transistors – Power MOSFETs – GTOs and
insulated gate transistors – Steady state and switching characteristics – Protection circuits –
Series and parallel operation – Thyristor commutation techniques.
UNIT 2 RECTIFIERS AND CONVERTERS
Phase control – Half-wave thyristor rectifiers with R, RL and RLC load – Effect of free wheeling
diode – Full-wave thyristor rectifiers – Single phase half-controlled and fully-controlled thyristor
bridge converters - Load voltage, load current and input power factor for continuous current
operation – Three-phase half-controlled and fully-controlled thyristor - Converters – Dual
converters.
UNIT 3 INVERTERS
Series and parallel inverters using thyristors – Inverter circuits using devices other than thyristors
– Single phase and three phase bridge inverters – Voltage and wave form control – Current
source inverters – Cycloconverters. Switch mode regulators: Buck regulators –Boost regulators –
Buck/Boost regulators – CUK regulation –SMPS.
UNIT 4 CHOPPERS
DC chopper circuit using devices other than thyristors – Single quadrant DC – Chopper with
R,RL,RLC load - Time ratio control – Load voltage and load current for continuous current
operation – Two quadrant and four quadrant DC choppers – AC choppers (AC voltage
controller) using thyristors and triacs – ON-Off control and phase control – Single phase full-
wave controller with R & RL load – load voltage, load current and input power factor – circuits
for three phase half-wave and full-wave controllers.
48
UNIT 5 CONTROL CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS
Generation of control pulses – Microprocessor based implementation – DC and AC drives –

HVDC systems – Static circuit breakers – Regulated power supply – UPS
Book for study:
1. S.B. Dewan and A. Stranghen, Power Semiconductor Circutis, Wiley, NY, 1975.
2. M.H. Rashid, Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices, and Application, 2nd Ed.,
Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 1999.
3. S. Rama Reddy, Fundamentals of Power Electronics, Narosa, New Delhi, 2000.

1. A. Ahmed, Power Electronics for Technology, Pearson Education, PrenticeHall,NJ,1999.
2. G.K. Dubey, S.R. Doradla, A. Joshi, and R.M.K. Sinha, Thyristorised Power Controllers,
New Age International, New Delhi, 1986.
3. P.C. Sen, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1987.
4. M. Ramamoorthy, An Introduction to Thyristors and Their Applications, 2 nd Ed., Affiliated
East West, New Delhi, 1991.
5. M.D. Singh and K.B. Khanchandani, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
1998.
6. P.S. Bimbhra, Power Electronics, 3rd , Ed., Khanna, New Delhi, 1999.
7. R.K. Sugandhi and K.K. Sugandhi, Thyristors – Theory and Applications, 2 nd Ed., Wiley
Eastern, New Delhi, 1981.
8. N. Mohan, T.M. Undeland, and W.P. Robbins, Power Electronics – Converters,
Applications, and Design, 2nd Ed., Wiley, NY 2001.
9. B.W. Williams, Power Electronics –Devices, Drivers, Application, and Passive Components,
2nd Ed., Macmillan, London, 1992.
10. J.N. Ross, The Essence of Power Electronics, Prentice-Hall, London, 1997.
ELECTIVE
PAPER V - ELEMENTS OF NANOTECHNOLOGY IN ELECTRONICS
UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO NANOTECHNOLOGY
Definition of nanoscale – Significance of nanoscale: Surface-volume, Grain boundary, Examples

of Critical sizes in phenomena - Property Enhancements: Quantum mechanical aspects –
nanosize and energy bands –confinement effects, discretisation and tunneling – lithography at
nanoscale
UNIT 2 NANOSCALE FORMATIONS AND ELECTRONICS
49
Nanoparticles – production methods: Gas condensation, laser ablation, decomposition (thermal
and ultrasonic), chemical methods, mechanical milling – Application of nanoparticles.
Nanolayers – production methods: deposition (PVD, CVD, Epitaxy - ion implantation –
Applications of nanolayers.
Nanotubes – carbon nanotubes – types – production – properties – applications in electronics
UNIT 3 NANOSTRUCTURING
Nanopolishing - Etching of nanostructures – Lithography: optical, electron beam, ion beam, x-

ray lithography procedures(principles and methodologies) – nanoimprinting – Nanostructure
characterisation tools: AFM , Near-field Optics and Electron microscopy (principles and
procedure in each of these)
UNIT 4 CONVENTIONAL DEVICES BY NANOTECHNIQUES
MOS transistors: structure and technology – electrical characteristics of sub-100 nm MOS

devices- limitations – low-tempearature aspects – future trends
Bipolar transistors: Structure and technology at nanoscale – trends
UNIT 5 NOVEL DEVICES BASED ON NANOSTRUCTURES
Resonant Tunneling Diode: principles and technology – aplications -- Quantum Cascade Laser
:Principles and structure – applications – Single Electron Transistor: Principle – technology –
applications – Carbon Nanotube devices: structure and technology – CNT transistors
Book for study:
W.R. Fahrner (Ed) Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics Springer International Edition,Indian

reprint 2006
50
2. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
SEMESTER - III
PAPER IX - MICROBIAL GENETICS
UNIT I :
Nucleic acid as genetic information carriers : experimental evidence. DNA structure:
historical aspects and current concepts, melting of DNA. Super helicity in DNA, linking
number, topological properties.
UNIT II :
Organization of genes and chromosomes: Definition of gene, Operon, interrupted genes,
gene families, structure of chromatin and chromosomes, unique and repetitive DNA,
heterochromatin, euchromatin, transposons.
UNIT III :
Plasmids as extrachromosomal genetic elements; Types and properties of plasmids;
Structure of plasmids: Col E1, F1 and Ti plasmid, their replication, control, partitioning,
incompatibility, plasmid amplification and plasmid curing; Gene transfer mechanisms:
Transformation, conjugation and transduction.
UNIT IV :
Mutation: Mutants; Mutagens; Mutagenesis; Biochemical basis of mutation: Spontaneous
and induced mutations; Isolation of Mutants; Reversion; Suppression; Genetic analysis of
Mutants; Molecular basis of spontaneous and induced mutations and their role in
evolution; Environmental Mutagenesis and toxicity testing; Carcinogens: Chemical
Carcinogenesis and Carcinogenecity testing.
UNIT V :
Molecular recombination - Mechanism, control and models. Transposition; Regulatory
sequences and transacting factors; Genetic mapping in E. coli and Yeast. Genetics and
life cycle of Lambda, M13, Mu, T4 and OX174; Mycophages and Cyanophages. Fine
structure and genetic analysis using II systems of phage T4. Genetic systems of yeast and
Neurospora; Extrachromosomal inheritance and mitochondrial genetics. Basic concepts
of Genomics.
51
PAPER X - GENETIC ENGINEERING
UNIT I :
Principles and methods in genetic engineering: Host cell restriction; Restriction modification;
Restriction enzymes: Types and applications; Restriction mapping; DNA finger printing; RFLP,
RPAD and AFLP techniques; Nucleases, Ribonucleases, DNA ligases, Tag DNA Polymerases,
Methylases, Topoisomerases, Gyrases, and Reverse Transcriptases.
UNIT II :
Vectors: plasmid vectors: pSC101, pBR322, pUC series and Ti plasmids based vectors;
Bacteriophage vectors: Lambda phage based vectors, phagemids, cosmids, and M13
based vectors; Viral vectors: Vaccinia, Retroviral, SV40 and Baculoviral system;
Bacterial artificial chromosome and yeast artificial chromosome. Expression vectors,
Insect vectors.
UNIT III :
Cloning techniques; Genomic DNA and cDNA library Construction; Screening methods;
Cloning in E. coli, Bacillus, Pseudomonas, Streptomyces and yeast; Expression systems;
Gene fusion and Reporter genes; Gene targeting; Methods of gene transfer -
Transformation, Transfection; Electroporation, microinjection and biolistics.
UNIT IV :
Analysis of Recombinant DNA; Polymerase chain reaction; Principles and techniques of
nucleic acid hybridization and cot curves; Southern, Northern, Western and South-
Western blotting techniques; Dot and Slot blotting.
UNIT V :
DNA and protein sequencing; Protein engineering; Protoplast fusion; Hybridoma
Technology, cell & tissue culture in plants & animals. Transgenic animals & plants;
Applications of genetic engineering in agriculture, health and industry including gene
therapy.
52
PAPER XI - MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
UNIT I :
Structure of atoms, molecules and chemical bonds. Composition, structure and function
of biomolecules (carbonhydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids). Stabilizing
interactions (Van der, Waals, electrostatic, hydrogen bonding, hydrophobic interaction,
etc.). Conformation of proteins (Ramachandran plot, secondary, tertiary and quaternary
structure; domains; motif and folds). Conformation of nucleic acids (A-, B-, Z-, DNA), t-
RNA, micro-RNA. Stability of protein and nucleic acid structures. Molecular approaches
to diagnosis and strain identification.
UNIT II :
DNA replication, repair and recombination: Unit of replication, enzymes involved,
replication origin and replication fork, fidelity of replication, extrachromosomal
replications, DNA damage and repair mechanisms.
UNIT III :
RNA synthesis and processing: Transcription factors and machinery, formation of
initiation complex, transcription activators and repressors, RNA polymerases, capping,
elongation and termination, RNA processing, RNA editing, splicing, polyadenylation,
structure and function of different types of RNA, RNA transport.
UNIT IV :
Protein synthesis and processing: Ribosome, formation of initiation complex, initiation
factors and their regulation, elongation and elongation factors, termination, genetic code,
aminoacylation of tRNA, tRNA-identity, aminoacyl tRNA synthetase, translational
proof-reading, translational inhibitors, post-translational modification of proteins.
UNIT V :
Control of gene expression at transcription and translation level: Regulation of
phages, viruses, prokaryotic and eukaryotic gene expression, role of chromatin in
regulating gene expression and gene silencing.
53
PAPER XII - MICROBIAL GENETICS, MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND
GENETIC ENGINEERING PRACTICAL - III
UNIT I :
Isolation of genomic DNA from bacteria and demonstration in agarose gel
electrophoresis. Isolation of plasmid DNA by alkali lysis method and demonstration in
agarose gel electrophoresis. Estimation of DNA by diphenyl amine method.
Determination of Tm value of DNA. Quantitation of nucleic acids by UV
Spectrophotometer.
UNIT II :
Isolation of RNA from yeast. Estimation of RNA by orcinol method. Induced
mutagenesis - Isolation of antibiotic resistant auxotrophic mutants.
UNIT III :
Estimation of proteins by Lowery et al method. SDS-PAGE. 2D-Gel electrophoresis.
Isoelectric focussing. Separation of amino acids by TLC and paper chromatography.
UNIT IV :
Separation of proteins using Gel filtration and Ion exchange chromatography.
Immobilization of enzymes and whole cells. Western blotting. Protoplast and spheroplast
isolation. Induction of beta-galactosidase activity in E. coli using 1PTG.
UNIT V :
Preparation of competent cells. Transformation and Blue-White selection for
transformants. DNA amplification by PCR. Separation of PCR amplified product on
PAGE using a marker ladder and identification of product size. Restriction mapping /
Restriction analysis.
ELECTIVE III - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
UNIT I :
Research Methodology - An Introduction: Meaning of Research, Objectives of Research,
Types of Research, Research Approaches, Importance of knowing how research is done,
Research Process, Criteria of good research. Defining the Research Problem; Research
Design; Sampling Design; Methods of Data Collection; Processing and Analysis of Data;
Sampling Fundamentals; Testing of Hypothesis.
54
UNIT II :
Molecular biology methods: In vitro mutagenesis and deletion techniques, Gene knock
out in bacterial and eukaryotic organisms; methods for analysis of gene expression at
RNA and protein level, large scale expression analysis, such as micro array based
techniques; isolation separation and analysis of carbohydrate and lipid molecules.
UNIT III :
Histochemical and immunotechniques: Flowcytometry and immunofluorescence
microscopy, detection of molecules in living cells, in situ localization by techniques such
as FISH and GISH. Biophysical methods: Analysis of biomolecules using UV/visible,
fluorescence, circular dichroism, NMR and ESR spectroscopy, structure determination
using X-ray diffraction and NMR; analysis using light scattering, different types of mass
spectrometry and surface plasma resonance methods.
UNIT IV :
Radiolabeling techniques: Properties of different types of radioisotopes normally used
in biology, their detection and measurement; incorporation of radioisotopes in biological
tissues and cells, molecular imaging of radioactive material, safety guidelines.
Miscroscopic techniques: Microscopy of living cells, scanning and transmission
microscopes, different fixation and staining techniques for EM, freeze-etch and freeze-
fracture methods for EM, image processing methods in microscopy.
UNIT V :
Writing the Research Report (Thesis and publications): Components of research
report - Title, Authors, Addresses, Abstract, Keywords, Introduction, Materials and
Methods, Results, Discussion, Summary, Acknowledgements and Bibliography.
ELECTIVE IV - INDUSTRIAL & PHARMACEUTICAL MICROBIOLOGY
UNIT I :
Isolation, preservation and improvement of industrially important micro organisms; Raw
materials and media design for Fermentation processes; Sterilization; Development of
inocula for industrial fermentations; Types of fermentation: Batch, continuous, dual or
multiple, surface, submerged, aerobic and anaerobic.
UNIT II :
Fermenter - Design, Instrumentation and control, aeration and agitation, Recovery and
purification of fermentation products; Types of fermentors; Enzyme and cell
immobilization, production of recombinant proteins having therapeutic and diagnostic
applications: Vaccines, Insulin, Interferon, Somatotropin; single cell protein.
55
UNIT III :
Biology of industrial micro organisms. Streptomyces, Yeasts (Saccharomyes, Hansenela)
Spirulina and Penicillium. Mushroom cultivation, Biochips; Biosensors; Biofuels from
microbial sources.
UNIT IV :
Production of primary metabolites: Alcohols (Ethanol and Butanol); Beverages (Beer and
Wine); Aminoacids (Glutamic acid and Lysine); Organic acids (Citric acid and acetic
acid).
UNIT V :
Production of secondary metabolites: Antibiotics (Penicillin and Streptomycin); Vitamins
(Riboflavin and Cyanocobalamin); Steroids; Production of enzymes (Protease, amylase
and lipase); Biopolymers (Xanthan gum and PHB); Biopreservatives (Nisin).
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - PAPER-II - ENVIRONMENTAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT I :
Biofilm Kinetics: Completely mixed biofilm reactor-Soluble microbial products and inert
biomass-Special-case biofilm solution.
UNIT II :
Reactors: Reactor types - A batch reactor - A continuous-flow stirred-tank reactor with
effluent recycle A plug-flow reactor - A plug-flow reactor with effluent recycles-Reactors
with recycle of settled cells - Using alternate rate models - Linking stoichiometric
equations to mass balance equations - Engineering design of reactors - Reactors in series.
UNIT III :
Denitrification: Physiology of denitrifying bacteria-Tertiary denitrification-One-sludge
denitrification - Waste water treatment systems - Anaerobic & Aerobic - Drinking-water
treatment: Anaerobic treatment by methanogenesis - uses for methanogenic treatment-
Reactor configurations - Special factors for the design of anaerobic sludge digesters.
UNIT IV :
Detoxification of Hazardous chemicals: Factors causing molecular recalcitrance -
Synthetic organic chemical classes - Energy metabolism versus co-metabolism - Electron
donor versus electron acceptor - Minimum substrate concentration (S min) Biodegradation
of problem environmental contaminants.
56
UNIT V :
Bioremediation: Engineering strategies for bioremediation - Evaluation bioremediation -
Sewage and waste treatment - Pollution monitoring, control and remediation (petroleum
Industry, Paper Industry, chemical industry etc.) Biomass from the wastes.
SEMESTER - IV
PAPER XIII - FOOD, DAIRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY
UNIT I :
Food Microbiology: Sources of contamination of microorganisms in foods; Factors
influencing microbial growth in foods; Extrinsic and intrinsic; Principles and methods of
food preservation: High Temperature, Low Temperature, Drying, Irradiation and
Chemical Preservatives; Food borne diseases: Bacteria, Fungi, Viruses, Algae and
Protozoa; Spoilage of fruits, vegetables, meat, poultry, fish and sea foods.
UNIT II :
Dairy Microbiology: Microflora of milk; sources of contamination, preservation and
spoilage of milk and milk products; Milk borne diseases; Preservation of milk, Fermented
foods: Sauerkraut, Pickles, Buttermilk, Yogurt and Cheese; Probiotics and Prebiotics;
Food sanitation, food control agencies and their regulations.
UNIT III :
Microbiology of air: Composition of Air; Number and kinds of organisms in air;
Distribution and sources of air borne organisms; Droplet and droplet nuclei; Assessment
of air quality; Air Sanitation; Airborne diseases; Microbiology of water: Physico-
Chemical properties of water; Kinds of aquatic habitats (freshwater and marine); Aquatic
microflora and fauna of lake, ponds, river, estuary and sea; Biology and ecology of
reservoirs; Distribution and impact of environmental factors on the aquatic biota;
Biodegradation in different aquatic ecosystems.
UNIT IV :
Environmental Microbiology: Waste treatment - Wastes - Type - characterization -
solid and liquid; Treatment of solid wastes - composting, vermiform composting, silage,
pyrolysis and saccharifications; Treatment of liquid wastes - primary, secondary
(anaerobic and aerobic) - trickling, activated sludge, oxidation pond, and oxidation ditch-
tertiary - disinfection.
57
UNIT V :
Degradation of Xenobiotic compounds: Simple aromatics, chlorinated polyaromatic
petroleum products, pesticides and surfactants; Biodeterioration of materials by microbes:
Paper, leather, wood, textiles and paint; Metal corrosion; Bioaccumulation of heavy
metals; Biofouling, Bioleaching, Biofilms and Bioremediation.
PAPER XIV - SOIL, AGRICULTURAL, FOOD AND ENVIRONMENTAL

MICROBIOLOGY - PRACTICAL-IV
UNIT I :
Isolation and enumeration of soil microorganisms (fungi, bacteria and actinomycetes).
Isolation of phosphate solubilizer from soil. Isolation of Nitrogen fixers (a) Rhizobium
from root nodule and (b) Azotobacter from rhizosphere. Screening of antagonistic
bacteria in soil by agar block overlay method. Isolation of Cyanobacteria and
Photosynthetic bacteria from soil/water.
UNIT II :
Estimation of foliar infection by Stoyer's method. Cultivation of oyster mushroom. Study
of the following diseases: Tobacco mosaic; Bacterial blight of paddy; Downy mildew of
bajra; Powdery mildow of cucurbits; Head smut of sorghum, Leaf rust of coffee; Leaf
spot of mulberry, Red rot of sugarcane, Root knot of mulberry.
UNIT III :
Detection of number of Bacteria in milk by breed count. Determination of quality of milk
sample by methylene blue reductase test and Resorzurin method. Detection of number of
bacteria in milk by standard plant count. Isolation of yeast and molds from spoiled nuts,
fruits, and vegetables. Bacteriological examination of specific food (a) Curd (b) Raw
meat (c) Fish (d) Ice cream.
UNIT IV :
Extracellular enzyme activities - phosphatase. Quantification of microorganisms in air-
solid and liquid impingement techniques.
UNIT V :
Physical, chemical and microbial assessment of water and potability test for water.
Physical and chemical-colour, pH, alkalinity, acidity, COD, BOD, anions and cations.
Microbiological - MPN index presumptive, completed and confirmatory tests.
58
PAPER XV - PROJECT PLUS VIVA VOCE
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE
To impart advanced practical knowledge in conducting a research project.
To plan and design Statistically, retrieve relevant literature, organize and conduct,
process the data, photograph relevant observations, evaluate by statistical programmes.
Present the project in any regional/national conference/seminar during the Second year of
the course and submit for final semester Examinations. The work has to be conducted in
department under the guidance of the project supervisor. Interdisciplinary collaborations
from external departments / institutions can be organized only for essential areas of the
project. The method of valuation of project report submitted by the candidate is outlined
as follows:
Internal 20 marks 2 out of 3 presentations - 20 Marks

Viva - 20 Marks
Project Report - 60 Marks
ELECTIVE-V - SOIL AND AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY
UNIT I :
Characteristics and classification of soils; Soil Microorganisms; Interactions between

microorganisms: Mutalism, commensalism, ammensalism synergism, parasitism,
predation, competition; Interaction of microbes with plants and animals: Rhizosphere,
phyllosphere, mycorrhizae.
UNIT II :
Symbiotic and Asymbiotic Nitrogen fixation; Genetics of Nitrogen Fixation; Rumen

Microbiology; Biogeochemical cycles: Carbon, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Sulfur;
Biofertilizers - Rhizobium, Azotobacter, Azospirillum, VAM, Phosphobacteria, Azolla
Cyanobacteria; Biopesticides. Interrelationships between microorganisms, plants and
soil: Enzymes of microbial origin and their role in release of available plant nutrients,
microorganisms and soil-borne plant pathogens, microbial toxins and their degradation in
soil.
59
UNIT III :
Plant pathogens and classification of plant diseases. Principles of plant infection and
defense mechanisms: Entry of pathogen in to host; Colonization of host; Role of
enzymes, toxins and growth regulatory substances; Structural and biochemical defense
mechanisms in plants; Secrets of host pathogen recognition and specificity; Molecular
aspects of host defense reactions; Lipoxygenase and other enzymes in the expression of
disease resistance.
UNIT IV :
Plant disease management: Exclusion Evasion, Eradication; Crop rotation, Sanitation,

Physical, Chemical and Biological control, Plant disease forecasting; Biotechnological
approaches to disease management.
UNIT V :
Symptoms, Etiology, Epidemiology and management of the following plant diseases:

Mosaic disease of tobacco; Bunchy top of banana; Leaf roll of potato; Bacterial blight of
paddy; Angular leaf spot of cotton, Late blight of potato; Damping off of tobacco, Downy
mildew of bajra; Powdery mildew of cucurbits; Head smut of sorghum; Leaf rust of
coffee; Blight of maize/sorghum; Leaf spot of paddy, Grassy shoot of sugar cane; Root
knot of mulberry.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P. and Klein, D.A. (1999) Microbiology. McGraw Hill, New
Delhi
2. Ketchum, P.A. (1984) Microbiology: Concepts and Applications. John Wiley and
Sons, New York.
3. Madigan, M.T., Martinko, J.M. and Parker, J. (1999). Brock’s Biology of Micro
organisms, 9th Edn. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
4. Salle, A.J. (1992) Fundamental Principles of Bacteriology, 7th Edn. Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi.
5. Mandelstam, J., McQuillen, K. and Dawes, L. (1992) Biochemistry of Bacterial

Growth, 3rd Edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
60
6. Moat, A.G. and Foster, J.W. (1995) Microbial Physiology, 3rd Edn. John Wiley and
Sons, New York.
7. Roitt, I.M.(1988) Essential Immunology. Blackwell Scientific Publications,Oxford.
8. Jawetz, E., Melnic, J.L. and Adelberg, E.A. (2000) Review of Medical
Microbiology ,19th Edn. Lange Medical Publications, U.S.A.
9. Ananthanarayan, R. and Jeyaram Paniker, C.K. (1994) Text Book of

Microbiology,6th Edn. Orient Longman, Chennai.
10. Jeyaram Paniker, C.K. (2006) Text Book of Parasitology. Jay Pee Brothers, New
Delhi.
11. Alexender, M. (1977) Introduction to Soil Microbilogy. John Wiley and Sons, New
York.
12. Stanbury, P.F., Whitaker, A. and Hall, S.J. (1995) Principles of Fermentation
Technology, 2nd Edn. Pergamon Press, Oxford.
13. Frazier, W.C. and Westhoff, D.C. (1988) Food Microbiology, 4th Edn. McGraw Hill,
New York.
14. Old, R. and Primrose, S.B. (1995) Principles of Gene Manipulation: An Introduction
to Genetic Engineering, 5th Edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
15. Freifelder, D. (1995) Molecular Biology. Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
16. Timbury, M.C. (1986) Medical Virology, 9th Edn. Churchill Livingstone, London.
17. Jagadish Chander (1996) A Text Book of Medical Mycology. Interprint, New Delhi.
18. Arora, D.R. (2003) Text Book of Microbiology, 2nd Edn. CBS Publishers &
Distributors, New Delhi.
19. Arora, D.R. and Arora, B.(2002) Medical Parasitology, 1st Edn. CBS Publishers &
Distributors, New Delhi.
20. Dubey, R.C. and Maheswari, D.K. (2003) A Text Book of Microbiology, 1st Edn. S.
Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
61
21. Dubey, R.C. and Maheswari, D.K. (2002) Practical Microbiology, 1st Edn. S.
Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi
22. Sathyanarayana, U. (2002) Essentials of Biochemistry 1st Edn. Books and Allied (P)
Ltd., Kolkata.
23. Deb, A.C., (1999) Concepts of Biochemistry, 1st Edn. Books and Allied (P) Ltd.,
Kolkata.
24. Rose,A.H. (1976) Chemical Microbiology: An Introduction to Microbial Physiology,

3rd Edn.Plenum, New York.
25. Gottschalk, G. (1986) Bacterial Mrtabolosm, 2nd Edn. Springer-Verlag, New York.
26. Davis, B.D., Delbecco, R., Eisen, H.N. and Ginsburg, H.S. (1990) Microbiology, 5th
Edn. Harper & Row, New York.
27. Alexopolus, C.J. and Mims, C.W. (1979) Introductory Mycology, 3 rd Edn .John
Wiley and Sons, New York.
28. Schmidt, G.D. and Roberts, L.S. (1981) Foundations of Parasitology, 2nd Edn,
Mosby, St. Louis.
29. Tizard, R.I. (1983) Immunology: An Introduction. Saunders College Publishing,

Philadelphia.
30. Kuby, J. (1994) Immunology, 2nd Edn. H.W.Freeman and Company, New York.
31. Elgert, K.D. (1996) Immunology:Understanding the Immune System. Wiley – Liss,
New York.
32. Cambell, R. (1983) Microbial Ecology, 2nd Edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications,
London.
33. Atlas, R.M. and Bartha, R. (1992) Microbial Ecology: Fundamentals and
Applications, 2nd Edn. The Benjamin / Cummings Publishing Co.,Redwood
City,CA.
34. Mitchell, R. (1974) Introduction to Environmental Microbiology. Prentice – Hall.

Inc. New Jersey.
62
35. Subba Rao, N.S. (1995) Soil Microorganisms and Plant Growth. Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
36. Paul, E.A. and Clark, F.E. (1989) Soil Microbiology and Biochemistry. Academic
Press, London.
37. Subbha Rao, N.S. (1995) Biofertilizers in Agriculture and Forestry, 3rd Edn. Oxford
& IBH Pub. Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
38. Banwart, G.J. (1989) Basic Food Microbiology. CBS Publishers and Distributors,
New Delhi.
39. Casida, J.E. (1968) Industrial Microbiology. Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.
40. Adams, M.R. and Moss, M.O. (1995) Food Microbiology. Royal Society of
Chemistry, Cambridge.
41. Winnacker, E.L. (1987) From Genes to Clones: Introduction to Gene Technology.
VCH, Weinheim.
42. Brown, T.A. (1995) Gene Cloning. Chapman and Hall, London.
43. Maloy, S.R., Cronan, J.E., Jr. and David Freifelder. (1994) Microbial Genetics, 2nd
Edn. Jones and Bartlett, Boston.
44. Chatterjee (1986) Medical Parasitology. Tata McGraw Hill, Calcutta.
45. Grierson, D. and Covery, S. (1989) Plant Molecular Biology, 2nd Edn. Blackie,
London.
46. Luria, S.E., Darnel, J.E., Jr., Baltimore, D. and Campbell, A. (1978) General
Virology, 3rd Edn. John Wiley & Sons, New York.
47. Fenner, F. and White, D.O. (1970) Animal Virology. Academic Press,New York.
48. Glick B.K. and Pasternak, J.J. (1999) Molecular Biotechnology. Principles and
Applications of Recombinant DNA. ASM Press, Washington, DC.
49. Stryer, L. (1995) Biochemistry. W.H. Freeman & Co., New York.
50. Ingraham, J.L. and Ingraham, C.A. (2000) Introduction to Microbiology, 2nd Edn.
63
Books / Cole Thomson Learning, UK.
51. Lee, J.D. (2001) Inorganic Chemistry. Blackwell Science,Oxford.
52. Sony, P.L. (2000) A Text Book of Inorganic Chemistry. S.Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
53. Greenwood, N.N. and Earnshaw, A. (1989) Chemistry of the Elements.Mac Millan
Publication New York.
54. Cotton, F.A and Wilkinson, G. (1989) Inorganic Chemistry. John Wiley and Sons,
NewYork.
55. Schelegel, H.G. (1993) General Microbiology,7th Edn. Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge.
56. Lehninger, A.L., Nelson, D.L. and Cox, M.M. (1993) Principles of Biochemistry, 2nd
Edn. CBS Publishers, New Delhi.
57. Pelczar, M.J., Jr., Chan, E.C.S and Kreig, N.R. (1993) Microbiology. McGraw Hill,
New York.
58. Negi, A.S. and Anand, S.C. (1997) A Text Book of Physical Chemistry, 5th Edn. New
Delhi.
59. Gerald Karp,(2002) Cell and Molecular Biology :Concepts and Experiments,3rd
Edn John Wiley, New York.
68. Arora, M.P., Gurdarshan and Sandhu, S. (2004) Genetics, 5th Edn. New Age
International Publishers, New Delhi.
69. Raven & Johnson (1990) Biology, 4th Edn. Wm. C. Brown Publishers, London.
70. 80. Salisbury, F.B. and Ross, C.W. (1991) Plant Physiology. Wassworth
Publication. Co. Belmont.
71. Daniel, W.W. (2005) Biostatistics; A foundation for analysis in the health
sciences, 7th Edn. Jhon Wiley & sons Inc, New York.
72. Garumani, N. (2004) An introduction to Biostatistics. JP publishers, Chennai.
64
73. Wilson, K. and Walker, J. (2002) Practical Biochemistry: Principles &
Techniques, 5th Edn. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
74. Sundar Rao, P.S.S. and Richard, J. (2006) Introduction to Biostatistics &
Research methods. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi.
75. Rittman, B.E. and McCarty P.L. (2001) Environmental Biotechnology: Principles
and application. McGraw-Hill, New York.
76. Anderson, J.B., Durston, H. and Poole, M. (1970) Thesis and Assignment Writing,
Wiley Eastern Private Limited, New Delhi.
77. Day, R.A. (1988) How to write and publish a scientific paper, 3rd edition, Oryx
Press, Phoenix, Anzona.
78. Jayaraman, J. (2000) Laboratory Manual of Biochemistry. Wiley Eastern Limited,

New Delhi 110 002.
79. Sharma, K.R. (2002) Research methodology. National Publishing House, Jaipur
and New Delhi.
80. Webster, J.G. (2004) Bioinstrumentation, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd.,
Singapore.
81. Agrios, G.N. (1978) Plant Pathology, 2nd Edn., Academic Press, New York.
82. Butler, E.J. (1918) Fungi and Disease in plants. Thacker Spink and Co., Calcutta.
83. Gregory, P.H. and Monteth (1962). Airborne Microbes. Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge, UK.
84. Watson, J.D., Gilman, M., Witkowshi, J. and Zoller, M. (1992) Recombinant
DNA, 2nd Edn. Scientific American Books, New York, USA.
85. Board, R.G. (1983) A modern introduction to food microbiology. Blackwell

Scientific Publications, Oxford.
86. Hobbs, B.C. and Roberts, D. (1993) Food Poisoning and Food Hygiene. Edward
Arnold: London.
65
87. Jay, J.M. (1987) Modern food microbiology. CBS Publisher and Distributors, New
Delhi.
88. Weir, D.M. and Steward J. (1993) Immunology, 7th Edn. ELBS, London.
89. Humphrey, J.H. and White, R.G. (1995) Immunology for Students of Medicine,
5th Edn. ELBS, London.
90. Parija, S.C. (1996) Text Book of Medical Parasitology. Orient Longman, Chennai.
91. Morag, C. and Timbury, M.C. (1994) Medical Virology, 10th Edn. Churchill
Livingston, London.
92. Daniel, W.W. (1995) Biostatistics : A foundation for analysis in health

sciences,6th Edn. John Wiley & Sons, New York.
93. Cotton, T. (1974) Statistics in Medicine. Little Brown, Boston.
94. Arunagirinathan, N. and Rajendran, P.(2006) Allergy, 1st Edn. Rahul

Publication,Arcot,Vellore.
95. Kannan, I. (2007) Immunology. MJP Publishers, Chennai.
96. Daniel, J.C. (1996) Environmental Aspects of Microbiology. Bright Sum

Publication, Chennai.
97. Meena Kumari, S. (2006) Microbial Physiology. MJP Publishers, Chennai.
98. Arunagirinathan, N. and Aswini, L. (2006) Biotechniques, 1st Edn. Rahul

Publication,Arcot,Vellore.
99. Cappuccino, J. and Sherman, N. (2002) Microbiology: A Laboratory Manual, 6th

Edn. Pearson Education Publication, New Delhi.
100. Vijaya Ramesh, K (2007) Food Microbioloy. MJP Publishers., Chennai.
101. Jayapal, V. (2007) Fundamentals of Medical Immunology. Jay Pee Brothers

Medical Publications, New Delhi.
102. George Pinchuk (2002) Immunology (Schaum’s Outlines). McGraw Hill , New
York.
66
103. Palanivelu, P (2004) Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – A
Laboratory Manual for B.Sc & M.Sc Students, 3rd Edn. Twenty-first Century
Publication, Palkalai Nagar, Madurai.
104. Nicholl, D.S.T. (1994) An Introduction to Genetic Engineering. Cambridge

Press, London, UK.
105. Sundararaj, T. (2002) Microbiology Laboratory Manual, Ist Edn.Mrs.Aswathy

Sundararaj Publication, Chennai .
106. Robinson, R.K. (1990) Dairy Microbiology. Elsevier Applied Sciences, London.
107. Gautham, N. (2006) Bioinformatics. Narosa Publishing Company, New Delhi.
108. Lesk, A.M. (2002) Introduction to Bioinformatics, Ist Edn. Oxford University
press, Oxford, UK.
109. Westhead, D.R., Parish, J.H. and Twyman, R.M.(2003) Instant Notes Series –
Bioinformatics, Ist Edn. Viva Books Private Limited, New Delhi, India.
110. Attwood, T.K. and Parry-Smith, D.J.(1999) Introduction to Bioinformatics.

Addision Wesley Longman Limited, England.
111. Ignacimuthu, S. (2005) Basic Bioinformatics, Ist Edn. Narosa Publishing House,
New Delhi, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Finegold, S.M. (2000) Diagnostic Microbiology, 10th Edn. C.V. Mosby Company,
St. Louis
2. Holt, J.S., Krieg, N.R., Sneath, P.H.A. and Williams, S.S.T. (1994) Bergey’s
Manual of Determinative Bacteriology, 9th Edn. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore.
3. Rheinheimer, G. (1980) Aquatic Microbilogy, 2nd Edn. John Wiley & Sons, New
York.
4. Peppler, H.J. and Pearl Man, D. (1979) Fermentation Technology, Vol 1 & 2,
Academic Press, London.
5. Bert Desowitz (1980) Ova and Parasites. Harper and Row Publishers, New York.
67
6. Hayes, W. (1968) The Genetics of Bacteria and their Viruses. Blackwell Scientific
Publications, London.
7. Lennette, E.H. (1974) Diagnostic Procedures for Viral and Rikettsial Diseases.
American Public Health Association, New York.
8. Hoeprich, P.D. (1977) Infectious Diseases, 2nd Edn. Harper & Row Publishers,
New York.
9. Hall, D.V. and Rao, K.K. Photosynthesis. Arnold, London.
10. Postgate, J. (1987) Nitrogen Fixation,2nd Edn. Cassel, London.
11. Zar, J.H. (2006) Biostatistical analysis, 4th Edn. Pearson education Inc. New
Jersey.
12. Scragg, A. (1999) Environmental Biotechnology. Pearson Education Ltd.,

England.
13. Marshall, K.C. (1985) Advances in Microbial Ecology, Vol.8, Plenum Press, U.K.
14. Fletcher, M. and Gray, T.R.G. (1987). Ecology of Microbial communities.

Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK.
15. Forster, C.F. (1985). Biotechnology and Wastewater Treatment. Cambridge

University Press, Cambridge,UK.
16. Gray, N.F. (1989). Biology of Waste Water Treatment. Oxford University Press,
Oxford,UK.
17. Metcalf and Eddy (1985) Waste Water Engineering: Treatment, Disposal and
Reuse, 2nd Edn. McGraw Hill, International Book Company, Auckland.
18. Rheinheimer (1977) Microbial ecology of brackish water environment. Ecological

studies, Vol. 25, Springer - Verlag Berlin - Heidelberg. N.Y.
19. Watson, J.D., Hopkins, N.H., Roberts, J.W., Steitz, J.A. and Weiner, A.M. (1987)
Molecular biology of the gene, 4th Edn. The Benjamin/cummings Publishing
Company Inc. NY.
68
20. Baumberg, S., Hunter, I.S. and Rhodes, P.M. (ed). (1989) Microbial Products -
New approaches. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK.
21. Demain, A.L. and Solomon, N.A. (1986) Manual of Industrial Microbiology and
Biotechnology. American Society for Microbiology, Washington.
22. Reed, G. (1982) Industrial Microbiology. Mac Millan Publishers Ltd., Wisconsin.
23. Boyd, R.F. (1998) General Microbiology. Times Mirror, Mosby College
Publishing, St Louis.
24. Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. and Pober, J.S. (1994) Cellular and Molecular
Immunology, 2nd Edn. WB Saunders, USA.
25. Gerhardt, P., Murray, R.G., Wood, W.A. and Kreig, N.R. (Eds) (1994) Methods
for General and Molecular Bacteriology. ASM Press, Washington, DC.
26. Snedecar, G.W. and Cochram, W.G. (1967) Statistical Methods. Oxford
Press,London.
27. Wolfgang, Joklik and Smith, D.T. (1990) Zinsser Microbiology, 16th Edn.
Appleton Century Crafts, New York.
28. Cowan and Steel (1995) Manual for Identification of Medical Bacteria, 4th Edn.
Cambridge University Press, London.
29. Weir, D.M. (1995) Experimental Techniques in Immunology. Blackwell Scientific

Publications, Oxford.
30. Topley and Wilson (1995) Principles of Bacteriology Virology and Immunity. 9th
Edn. Vol I, Edward Arnold, London.
31. Murray, P.R., Baron, E.J., Jorgensen, J.H., Pfaller, M.A. and Yoke, R.H. (2003)
Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 8th Edn. Vol 1&2, ASM Press, Washington,
D.C.
32. Balows, A., Hausler. W.J., Ohashi.M. and Turano.A. (Eds) (1988) Laboratory
Diagnosis of Infectious Diseases: Principles and Practice, Vol 1 Springer-Verlag,
New York.
69
33. Murray, R.K., Granner, D.K.and Rodwell, V.W. (2006) Harper’s Illustrated
Biochemistry, 27th Edn. Mc Graw Hill, Singapore.
34. Strachan, T. and Read, A. P. (1996) Human Molecular Genetics, Bios Scientific
Publishers, U.K.
35. Lodish, H., Baltimore, O., Berk, A., Zipursky, S.L.,Matsudaira ,P.and Darnell, J.
(1995). Molecular Cell Biology, Scientific American Books, New York USA.
36. Innis, M.A (1995) PCR Strategies. Academic Press, London, UK.
37. Clover, D.M. (1987) DNA cloning series, Vol. I to IV, IRL Press, Oxford.
38. Benjamin Lewin (1997) Genes VII. Oxford University Press, London,UK.
39. Baker, K.H. and Herson, O.S. (1994) Bioremediation. Mc Graw Hill, Inc.New
York.
40. Amold, L., Demain, A.L. and Davies, J.E. (1999) Manual of Industrial
Microbiology and Biotechnology, 2nd Edn. ASM Press, Washington DC.
41. Maniatis, T., Fritsh, E.F. and Sambrook, J. (1998) Molecular cloning A
Laboratory Manual, Vol I to III, Coldspring Harbour Lab., New York, USA.
42. Krane, D.E. and Raymer,M.L. (2003) Fundamental Concepts of Bioinformatics,

Benjamin Cummings, New York ,USA.
43. Baldi, P. and Brunak, S. (2003) Bioinformatics. Affillated East – West Press, New
Delhi, India.
44. Srinivas, V.S. (2005) Bioinformatics: A Modern Approach. Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, New Delhi, India.
45. Mount, D.W. (2001) Bioinformatics Sequence and Genome Analysis, Ist Edn.
Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New Delhi, USA.
46. Doelle, H.W. (1975) Bacterial Metablism, 2nd Edn. Academic Press, London.
47. Collee, J.C., Duguid, J.P., Fraser, A.C. and Marimon, B.P. (1996) Mackie and
McCartney Practical Medical Microbiology, 14th Edn. Churchill Livingstone,
London.
70
48. Greenwood, D., Slack, R.B. and Peutherer, J.F. (2002) Medical Microbiology,
16th Edn. Churchill Livingstone, London.
49. Lynch, J.M. and Poole, N.J. (1979) Microbial Ecology: A. Conceptual Approach.
Blackwell Scientific Publications, London.
50. Glover, D.M. (1984) Gene Cloning: The Mechanism of DNA Manipulation.
Chapman and Hall, London.
51. Levanthal, R. and Cheadle, R.S. (1979) Medical Parasitology. S.A. Davies Co.,
Philadelphia.
52. Walter Beck, J. and Davies, J.E. (1976) Medical Parasitology, 2nd Edn. C.V.
Mosby Company, St. Louis.
53. Bridge, E.A. (1994) Bacterial and Bacteriophage Genetics, 3rd Edn. Springer–
Verlag,New York.
54. Jacob, W.P. (1979). Plant Hormones and Plant Development. Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge.
55. Baker, K.F. and Cook, R.J. (1974) Biological Control of Plant Pathogens. W.H.
Freeman and Co., New York.
56. Imhoff, K. and Fair, G.M. (1956) Sewage Treatment. John Wiley and Sons Inc.,
New York.
57. Dan, R.R. and Jellis, G.J. (1988) Genetics and plant pathogenesis, Blackwell
Scientific Publication, Oxford.
58. Ward, O.P. (1989) Fermentation Biotechnology: Principles, Processes and

Products. Prentice Hall Engle Wood Cliffs, New Jersey.
59. Dimmock, N.J. and Pimbrose, S.B. (1994) Introduction to Modern Virology, 4th
Edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
60. Conrat, H.F., Kimball, P.C. and Levy, J.A. (1994) Virology, 3rd Edn, Prentice
Hall, New Jersey.
71
3. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOCHEMISTRY
SEMESTER III
Title of the paper Cell and Molecular Biology -Core-8
Category: C Year & Semester Credits Subject code
Second year & 4
Third Semester
Pre-requisites Bachelor degree in any life science discipline
Objective To introduce the students to the basic of cytology and
central dogma of Molecular biology
Course Outline: (Cell and Molecular Biology)
UNIT I
Gene as a unit of mutation and recombination Identification of DNA as a genetic
material. Mutation: Molecular nature, chemical mutagenesis by nitrous acid,
hydroxylamine, alkylating agent, interclators and physical mutation by UV, origin of
spontaneous mutation and its control, DNA damage and repair: Chemical and physical
agents cross-linkers- Mechanism of repair: Photo reactivation, excision repair,
recombinational repair- The SOS and adaptive responses and their regulation- Heat
shock response.
UNIT II
Architecture of Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells – Plant and Animal cells. Cell
division, mitosis and meiosis, Cell differentiation, Organogenesis. Cell cycle-phases of
cell cycle, cell-cell interaction, cell cycle and its regulation.
UNIT III
Replication machinery, Prokaryotic replication mechanisms, the cellular
replisomes, Eukaryotic DNA replication, the role of Topoisomerases and Telomerases,
Regulation of replication. Mutation and molecular mechanism of mutation, effect of
mutation in protooncogenes.
UNIT IV
72
The Lac Operon, identification of Operator and Regulator, sequences by
mutations, induction and repression, foot – printing and gel, shift assays for
identification of protein – DNA interactions. Catabolite repression, Trp Operon –
attenuation. Regulation of eukaryotic transcription – response elements, DNA – binding
motifs, association of methylation with gene expression, molecular mechanism of
eukaryotic transcription control.
UNIT V
Post transcriptional and post translational modifications. Genetic code,
deciphering the genetic code. mRNA 5’ capping and 3’poly adenylation, splicing.
Spliceosome assembly, alternative splicing, processing of tRNA and rRNA, self-splicing,
ribozymes, dehydration of mRNA, RNA editing, regulation of mRNA processing. Protein
sorting – signal peptides, targettting of mitochondrial, secretory and lysosomal proteins,
protein degradation.
Reference Books:
Cell Biology: A short course – Bolsover S, 2004, 2 nd edition, John Wiley & Sons.
Molecular biology of cell – Bruce Alberts, Alexander Johnson, Julian Lewis, Martin Raff,
Keith Roberts, Peter Walter, 2002, 4th edition, Garland science.
Molecular Biology – Weaver, 2002, 2nd edition, Mc Graw-Hill.
Molecule Cell Biology – Levin Benjamin, 2000, 4 th edition, WH Freeman & Company,
New York.
Recommended Books:
Introduction to Molecular Biology – Paolella P, 1998, Mc Graw-Hill.
Cell and Molecular Biology – Karp G, 2002, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Indian Books:
Cell Biology – Singh S.P, Tomar B.S, 1993, Rastogi Meerut, Delhi.
Cell Biology, Genetics, Molecular Biology and Evolution – Verma O.P.S and Agarwal
O.V.K, 1986, S.Chand & Co. Madras.
Web Sites:
www.whfreeman.com/biology
www.narosa.com
Title of the paper Hormonal Chemistry – Core - 9

73
Second year & 4
Third Semester
Objective To introduce to the students the basics of Endocrine system
and related signal transduction.
Course Outline : (Hormonal Chemistry)
UNIT I
Hormones - Definition. Classification, biosynthesis, circulation in blood,
modification and degradation. Target tissue - feedback control. Hormone receptors -
External features and structure, regulation of receptor levels. Mechanisms of hormone
action. Signal transduction. Plasma membrane receptors adenylate cyclase, role of G
proteins, protein kinases, tyrosine kinase, inositol phosphates, calcium, calmodulin.
Steroid hormone receptors – Mechanism of steroid hormone action.
UNIT II
Hypothalamus and pituitary hormones. Vasopressin and oxytocin. Hypothalamic
releasing factors. Anterior pituitary hormones – actions and feedback regulation of
synthesis. Growth promoting, lactogenic hormones, glycoprotein hormones the POMC
family. Endorphins. MSH. Hypho and hyperactivity of pituitary hormones-gigantism,
acromegaly, dwarfism, vasopressin and oxytocin. Diabetes insipidus, syndrome of
inappropriate ADH secretion
UNIT III
Thyroid hormones – Synthesis and secretion, transport, metabolic fate and
biological actions. Antithyroid agents. Thyroid diseases – thyrotoxicosis, goiter,
hypothyroidism, grave’s disease and Hashimoto’s thyroiditis. Biosynthesis, transport,
functions, mechanism of action of Parathyroid hormone, calcitonin and calcitriol. Rickets
and osteomalacia
UNIT IV
Pancreatic hormones – cell types of the islets of langerhans. Insulin –
biosynthesis regulation of secretion. Biological actions. Mechanism of action. Insulin
74
receptor – intracellular mediators. Insulin signaling pathways. Diabetes mellitus.
Glucagon, somatostatin and pancreatic polypeptide. Insulin like growth factors.
UNIT V
Adrenal hormones – glucocorticoids, mineralocorticoids synthesis, secretion,
transport, metabolism and secretion. Biological effects. Mechanism of action. Adrenal
androgens – metabolic effects and functions Adrenal medulla – catecholamines,
biosynthesis, storage, metabolism, regulation of synthesis.
Abnormal secretion of adrenal hormones – Addison’s disease, Cushing’s
syndrome, congenital adrenal hyperplasia, phaeochromocytoma.
Gonadal hormones – androgens, estrogens. Biological actions. Ovarian cycle.
Pregnancy - Biochemical changes in pregnancy.
Textbooks recommended
1. William’s textbook of endocrinology – Wilson and Forester 8 th edition.
2. Mechanisms of hormone action – Austin and short.
3. Harper’s biochemistry – Murray et al.25th ed. McGraw hill, 2000.
4. Principles of biochemistry – mammalian biochemistry – smith et al. McGraw Hill 7th
ed.
5. Text book of Biochemistry with clinical correlations (eds.) T.M.Devlin (John Wiley).
6. Endocrinology by Mac.E.Hadley (Prentice Hall).
7. Tietz text book of clinical chemistry by Carl. A.Burtis and Edward R.Ashwood.
8. Essential endocrinology J.E.Wise (Oxford Press).
75
Title of the paper Clinical Biochemistry-Core -10
Second year & 4
Third Semester
Objective To understand the biochemical basis of disease based on
clinical investigations
Course outline: (Clinical Biochemistry)

UNIT I
Collection, preparation of biological specimens such as blood, urine,CSF, bile,
saliva and faeces, automation in clinical biochemistry. Disorder of blood-blood
dyscrasias, agranulocytosis, thrombocytopenia, aplastic, hemolytic anemia,
methhemoglobin, hemutria hemoglobinopathies, homeostasis and thromobosis,
extrinsic and intrinsic pathways of blood clotting, mechanism and disorders. Laboratory
test and measure coagulation and anticoagulants.
UNIT II
Prenatal detection of in born disorders of metabolism and in the fetus and
heterozygous carriers by enzyme assays in amniotic fluid, plasma cells and biopsy
samples. Phenylketonuria, alkaptonuria, phenylalaninemia, homocystinuria and
tyrisonemia and related disorders of aminoacidurias, hartnup’s disease. Hypo and hyper
uricemia and gout.
UNIT III
Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism-blood sugar level , diabetes mellitus,
metabolic complications, various type of glucose tolerance test, assay of insulin,
glycosylated hemoglobin, glycogen storage diseases, galactosemia, lactose intolerance,
fructosuria, pentosuria, mucopolysaccharidosis, ketone bodies. Plasma lipids,
lipoproteins , abnormalities, hypo and hypercholesterolemia lipidosis. Clinical
interrelationship of lipids (sphingolipidosis, multiple sclerosis), lipoproteins and
apolipoprotiens. Diagnostic tests of apolipoprotein, HDL-Cholesterol, LDL-Cholesterol
and triglyceride disorders.
76
UNIT IV
Clinical enzymology – Plasma enzymes in diagnosis and prognosis – Amino
transferases, Creatine Kinase, lactate dehydrogenases, adlolase, amylase,
phosphatases, lipase, elastase, γ-glutamyl transferase, 5’nucleotidase. Iso enzymes of
ALP and LDH. Clinical application of plasma enzyme assays in myocardial infarction,
liver diseases and muscle contraction.
UNIT V
Evaluation of organ function test-assessment and clinical manifestation of renal
(clearance and tubular function tests), hepatic (proteins, carbohydrate lipid, pigment
metabolism, detoxification, excretion), pancreatic, gastric (FTM, pentagastrin test,
insulin stimulation tests), and intestinal functions (malabsorption syndrome,
disaccharidases deficiency).
Reference Books:
Varley's Practical Clinical Biochemistry - Alan H Gowenlock, published by CBS
Publishers and distributors, 1988, 6th edition, India.
Textbook of Biochemistry with clinical correlations-T.M.Devlin, 2002, 5th edition.
Biochemistry: A case oriented approach- Montgomery, Comway, Spector,
Chappell,1996, 6th edition, Mosby Publishers, USA.
Recommended Books:
Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical chemistry – Burtis and Ashwood, 2001, 5th edition, WB
Saunders Company, Oxford Science Publications USA.
Indian Books:
Text book of Biochemistry : A clinically oriented approach - Dinesh Puri, B.I, 2002,
Churchill Livingstone Inc., India.
Text Book of Medical Biochemistry – Chatterjea & Schinde, 2000 4 th edition.
77
Title of the paper Practical- III –Core -11
Second year & 4
Third Semester
Objective To get hands on training in Biochemical methods
Course outline: (Practical- III)

Antioxidant status: Estimation of super oxide dismutase and catalase. Estimation of
vitamine E and C.
Haematology: RBC count, WBC count – total and differential count, ESR, PCV,
MCV. Estimation of hemoglobin.
Immunological studies
a. Serotyping
b. Qualitative determination of antigen by Outcherlony diffusion technique
c. Demonstration experiments.
(i) Production of antibody
(ii) Determination of antibody titre
(iii) Assay of IgM, IgG.
Liver function test: Estimation of bilirubin – direct and indirect. Estimation of plasma
protein, A/G ratio, Thymol turbidity test, Assay of serum glutamate oxaloacetate
transaminase, alkaline phosphatase, isoenzyme separation of LDH by electrophoresis.
Renal function test: Qualitative tests for normal and pathological components of urine.
Estimation of blood and urine urea, creatinine, creatine and uric acid. Urea Clearance
test. Chemical analysis of kidney and gall stones.
78
Estimation of blood glucose by orthotoluidine and glucose oxidase method.
Determination of glycosylated Hb. Glucose tolerance test.
Lipid profile: Estimation of cholesterol by Zak’s method, lipoprotein profile, estimation of
ketone bodies, estimation of triglycerides, free fatty acids and phospholipids.
Reference Books:
Varley’s Practical Clinical Biochemistry by Alan H Gowenlock, published by CBS
Publishers and distributors, India Sixth Edition (1988).
Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical chemistry – Burtis and Ashwood, Fifth Edition, WB
Saunders Company, Oxford Science Publications USA, (2001)
Practical Biochemistry – Keith Wilson & John Walker, fifth edition, Cambridge Universtiy
Press, UK (2000).
Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – Palanivelu third edition (2004).
Biochemical calculations – Irwin H. Segel, second edition, John Wiley & Sons, USA
(1976).
Introduction to Practical Biochemistry by Sawhney and Randhir Singh, Narosa
Publishing House, London (2000).
Experiments in Biochemistry – A Hands on Approach by Shawn O Farrell and Ryan T
Ranallo, Thomson Learning Inc., USA (2000)
Recommended Books:
Principles of Instrumental analysis – Skoog, Holler, Nieman, fifth edition Published by
Harcourt College Publishers, Singapore (2001).
Essentials of Practical Biochemistry by Lalit M Srivatsava, Nibhriti Das, Subrata Sinha,
Published by CBS Publishers and Distributors, India, (2002)
Indian Books:
Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – Palanivelu third edition (2004).
Title of the paper Biostatistics Elective – 4

Category: E Year & Semester Credits Subject code
Second year & 3
Third Semester
Objective To understand the basic statistical methods applied in
Biochemical research
79
Course Outline – Biostatistics
UNIT I
Statistics – Scope –collection, classification, tabulation of Statistical Data –
Diagrammatic representation – graphs – graph drawing – graph paper – plotted curve –
Sampling method and standard errors –random sampling –use of random numbers –
expectation of sample estimates – means – confidence limits – standard errors –
variance.
UNIT II
Measures of central tendency – measures of dispersion – skewness, kurtosis,
moments – Correlation and regression – correlation table – coefficient of correlation – Z
transformation – regression – relation between regression and correlation.
UNIT III
Probability – Markov chains applications – Probability distributions – Binomial
(Gaussian distribution) and negative binomial, compound and multinomial distributions –
Poisson distribution – Normal distribution – graphic representation – frequency curve
and its characteristics –measures of central value, dispersion, coefficient of variation
and methods of computation – Basis of Statistical Inference –Sampling Distribution –
Standard error – Testing of hypothesis – Null Hypothesis –Type I and Type II errors.
UNIT IV
Tests of significance for large and small samples based on Normal, t, z
distributions with regard to mean, variance, proportions and correlation coefficient – chi-
square test of goodness of fit – contingency tables – c 2 test for independence of two
attributes – Fisher and Behrens ‘d’ test – 2×2 table – testing heterogeneity – r X c table
– chi-square test in genetic experiments – partition X 2 – Emerson’s method – Tests of
significance –t tests – F tests – Analysis of variance – one way classification – Two way
classification, CRD, RBD, LSD.
80
UNIT V
Spreadsheets – Data entry –mathematical functions – statistical function –
Graphics display – printing spreadsheets – use as a database word processes –
databases – statistical analysis packages graphics/presentation packages.
Recommended Texts:
 Zar, J.H. (1984) “Bio Statistical Methods”, Prentice Hall, International Edition
Sundar Rao P. S.S., Jesudian G. & Richard J. (1987), “An Introduction to
Biostatistics”, 2nd edition,. Prestographik, Vellore, India,.
 Warren,J; Gregory,E; Grant,R (2004), “Statistical Methods in
st
Bioinformatics”,1 edition,Springer
References Books:
 Milton,J.S.(1992),. “Statistical methods in the Biological and Health
Sciences”, 2nd edition ,Mc Graw Hill,
 Rosner,B (2005), “Fundamentals of Biostatistics”, Duxbury Press
Title of the paper Immunology – Elective - 5

Second year & 3
Third Semester
Objective To introduce to the students the basics of Immunology
Course Outline – (Immunology)

UNIT I
Scope of immunology, historical background of immunology, biological
aspects of immunology. Self and non-self recognition, specificity, memory of
immune system.
Antibody - structure, properties and functions, Antigens - properties and
function, antigen - antibody reactions, antigenicity, essential factors for antigenicity,
antibody diversity.
Theories of antibody formation : instructive, selective and clonal selection
theory.
UNIT II
81
Introduction and definition, Innate and acquired immunity, factors affecting
immunity. Cells of immune system - stem cells, lymphocytes, B and T cells,
macrophages, null cells, natural killer cells, eosinophils, basophils, neutrophils, mast
cells and platelets.
Complement system – Nature, components of complement pathway, complement
fixation.
UNIT III
Allergy and Hypersensitivity – Immediate Hypersenstitivity, Delayed
Hypersensitivity.Transplantation: Immunological response, HLA and other systems of human
major histocompatability complex, rejection mechanism. immunosuppressants.
UNIT IV
Immunological techniques - Radio immuno assay, ELISA, immuno
electrophoresis, Western blot, immunodiffusion. Agglutination tests – Direct and
Indirect, Widal’s test, VDRL test. Production and purification of antibodies,
Quantitation of immunoglobulin by RID, EID and nephelometry.
Hybridoma and monoclonal antibody production; Immunodiagnosis & Applications
of monoclonal antibodies in biomedical research.
UNIT V
Introduction, auto-recognition, classes of auto-immune diseases like Hashimoto’s
disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, aut-immune hemolytic
anemia.
Recommended Books:
Essential Immunology- Ivan M. Roitt and Peter J. Delvis, 10 th edition, Blackwell
Science Pub.,USA.
Immunology for Life Scientists - Lesley Janes Eales, 2 nd edition, Wiley Pub.
Immunology-Janes Kuby, Fifth edition, W.H.Freeman and company, New York.
Antibodies- Their structure and Function - Steward, M.W., 1984, Chapman
And Hall, New York.
II.Ransohoff Richard et aI., 1996, Cytokines and the CNS, CRC Press Boca Raton.
12Joshi, K.R & Osama, N.O., 1998, Immunology, Agro Botanica Bikaner.
Indian Books:
82
Microbiology - Panicker, 2000,6th edition, Orient Longman, Hyderabad.
Immunology: introductory textbook - I. Nandini Shetty, 1996, New Age International,
New Delhi.
Websites:
http://www.piercenet.com/resources/browse.cfm
www.portlandpress.com
www.library.csusm.edu/course guides/biology
www.immunologylink.com
http://www.wiley.com/college/bio/karp12791/weblinks.html
Title of the paper Clinical Basis of Diseases – Extra disciplinary

Category: ED Year & Semester Credits Subject code
Second year & 3
Third Semester
Objective To understand the biochemical basics of metabolic
disorders based on clinical investigations
Course outline: (Clinical Basis of Diseases)

UNIT I
Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism
Glucose homeostasis, Diabetes Mellitus and its metabolic complications,
Glucose Tolerance Test, assay of insulin, glycosylated haemoglobin. Glycogen storage
diseases, galactosemia, fructosuria and lactose intolerance.
UNIT II
Disorders of lipid metabolism
Sphingolipidosis, hypercholesterolemia and atherosclerosis, hypertrigeridemia,
and hyperlipoproteinemia, LCAT deficiency
UNIT III
Disorders of amino acid, protein and nucleic acid metabolism
83
Inborn errors of amino acid metabolism – phenylketonuria, alkaptonuria, albinism and
cystinuria, hyperuricemia, gout, orotic aciduria, Lesch-Nyhan syndrome.
UNIT IV
Disorders of blood and Autoimmune disorders
Blood Agranulocytosis, Thrombocytopenia, β Thalassemias, anemias,
haemoglobinopathies, disorders of blood clotting mechanism, Autoimmune disorders.
UNIT V
Cancer
Etiology of cancer- Agents of transformation –viruses as agents and oncogenes,
DNA viruses, RNA viruses-retro viruses, chemical carcinogenesis and radiation
carcinogenesis.
Reference Books:
Varley's Practical Clinical Biochemistry - Alan H Gowenlock, published by CBS
Publishers and distributors, 1988, 6th edition, India.
Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical correlations-T.M.Devlin, 2002, 5th edition.
Biochemistry: A case oriented approach- Montgomery, Comway, Spector,
Chappell,1996, 6th edition, Mosby Publishers, USA.
Recommended Books:
Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical chemistry – Burtis and Ashwood, 2001, 5th edition, WB
Saunders Company, Oxford Science Publications USA.
Indian Books:
Text book of Biochemistry : A clinically oriented approach - Dinesh Puri, B.I, 2002,
Churchill Livingstone Inc., India.
Text Book of Medical Biochemistry – Chatterjee & Schinde, 2000 4 th edition.
Web Sites:
http://golgi.harvard.edu/biopages.html
www.whfreeman.com
http.//www.harcourtcollege.com
84
SEMESTER IV
Title of the paper Principles of Biotechnology-Core -12
Second year & 4
Fourth Semester
Objective To understand the technological aspects applied to
Molecular Biology
Course outline: (Biotechnology)

PRINCIPLES OF BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT I
Biotechnology-definition-scope-importance
Basic techniques: Cutting DNA molecules, Restriction digestion, isoschizomers,

joining DNA molecules – DNA ligase, double linkers, adaptors, homopolymer tailing,
selection of recombinants and screening – genetic methods, immuno chemical
methods, South-Western screening, Nucleic acid hybridization methods, synthesis of
probes, radio-active and non-radioactive labelling of probes, analysing DNA sequences
– Maxam and Gilbert and Sanger’s methods, in silico sequence analysis, pulsed field
gel electrophoresis.
UNIT II
Cloning strategies: Cloning vectors – plasmids (pBR 322, pUC 18), phage  and
M 13, cosmids, phasmids, expression vectors, yeast vectors –YAC, Ti plasmid.
Genomic DNA libraries, chromosome walking, cDNA cloning, PCR, Inverse PCR, Hot
start PCR, RT-PCR, RACE, RAPD. Site directed mutagenesis of cloned genes.
UNIT III
85
Animal Biotechnology: Introduction of genes into animal cells: Reporter genes,
selectabe markers, viral vectors – Retroviruses and Baculovirus, Transferring genes
into animal cells in culture, oocytes, eggs, embryos and specific tissues, transgenic
animals.
UNIT IV
Plant Biotechnology: Agro bacterium – mediated gene transfer to plant cells,

microprojectiles, transgenic plant technology – for pest resistance, herbicide tolerance,
delay of fruit ripening and use of plants to produce commercially important proteins.
UNIT V
Applications of recombinant DNA technology – gene therapy, antisense therapy,

production of insulin in E. coli. Immunotechnology- Hybridoma technology
Biotechnology and Bioethics: Issues from legal and ethical perspectives including
property rights of transgenic and clones privacy discrimination-policy concerns to
societal concerns in India and abroad.
References:
 Brown TA Gene Cloning and DNA Analysis ; Blackwell Publishing; (2006)
 Twyman RM, Primrose SB Principles of Gene Manipulation and Genomics ;
Blackwell Publishing; (2006)
 Old RW, Primrose SB An Introduction to Genetic Engineering S.B; Blackwell
Science (2003)
 Sambrook J, Fritsch, EF , Maniatis T.
Molecular Cloning – A Laboratory Manual; Cold Spring Harbor Lab Press(2005).
Web Sites:
www.sciencedirect.com
Title of the paper Concepts of Bio-informatics –Core 13

86
Second year & 3
Fourth Semester
Objective To introduce the students to analyze the database/Bioethics
Course outline: (Bioinformatics)

UNIT I
Basics of computing: Introduction to operating systems – WINDOWS, UNIX,
LINUX; Advantages of security installation; Use of internet; Graphics – visualization
techniques; softwares and hardwares; Computer networking – LAN, WAN, MODEM,
Optical vs electronic networking, firewalls; Ethernet and TCP/IP family of protocols.
UNIT II
Data warehousing, data capture, data analysis; Introduction to Nucleic Acid and
Protein Sequence Data Banks; Nucleotide databases (Genbank, EMBL, DDBJ); Protein
databases (Swiss-Prot, Tr-EMBL, PIR_PSD, Expasy); Derived Databases (Prosite,
PRODOM, Pfam, PRINTS); Sequence submission Methods and tools (Sequin, Sakura,
Bankit); Sequence retrieval systems (Entrez & SRS); Sequence File Formats and
Conversion tools; Genome (NCBI, EBI, TIGR, SANGER), Metabolic Pathway database
(KEGG, EMP, EcoCyc, BioCyc and MetaCyc); Specialized database (IMGT, Rebase,
COG, LIGAND, BRENDA); Structural database.
UNIT III
Internal and external co-ordinate system; Generation of co-ordinates of
biopolymers in Cartesian and cylindrical polar co-ordinate system; Genome Anatomy,
Prokaryotic genomes structures, Eukaryotic genomes structures, Gene density, Gene
Ontology, Gene Order (synteny), Plasticity zone, Gene Network, tandem repeats,
Transposable elements, Pseudogenes, Gene Clusters, Segmental duplication, non-
coding conservation, Comparative genomics, Importance of Full Genome Alignments,
Concepts & applications of Suffix tree in comparative genomics, Algorithms for BLAST2,
MegaBlast, MUMmer.
UNIT IV
87
Analysis of protein and nucleic acid sequences, multiple alignment programs,
Development of programs for analysis of nucleic acid sequences, Pairwise Sequence
Alignment - Similarity, Identity and Homology, Global Alignment, Local Alignment;
database search methods and scoring matrics ; Dynamic Programming, Heuristic
approach, Scoring Matrices and Affine Gap costs; Detailed method of derivation of the
PAM & BLOSUM Matrices; Differences between Distance & Similarity Matrix; Assessing
the Significance of Sequence Alignments.
Multiple Sequence Alignment - Multiple alignment programs, Development of programs
for analysis of nucleic acid sequences, Conversion of various file formats; Phylogenetic
Analysis - Concept of dendrograms; Strings and Evolutionary trees; Ultrametric trees
and Ultrametric distances; Additive - Distance trees; Methods of Construction of
Phylogenetic trees-Maximum Parsimony Method, Maximum likelihood method and
Distance Methods, Reliability of trees.
UNIT V
Analysis of structures and correctness of structures, Submission of data to PDB:
atomic coordinates and electron density maps; Anatomy of Proteins - Ramachandran
plot, Secondary structures, Motifs, Domains, Tertiary and quaternary structures;
Calculation of conformational energy for bio-macromolecules; Methods for Prediction of
Secondary and Tertiary structures of Proteins - Knowledge-based structure prediction,
Fold recognition, Ab initio methods for structure prediction; Methods for comparison of
3D structures of proteins; Molecular interactions of - Protein – Protein, Protein – DNA,
Protein – carbohydrate, DNA – small molecules etc.; Docking of Molecules; Molecular
Design.
Recommended Texts:
 Lesk, A.M. (2002) “Introduction to Bioinformatics:, 1 st Edition, Oxford University
Press, Oxford, UK
 N. Gautham (2006) “Bioinformatics”, Narosa Publishing Company, New Delhi
88
 Westhead, D. R., Parish, J.H and Twyman, R.M (2003) “Instant Notes Series –
Bioinformatics” 1st Edition, Viva Books Private Limited, New Delhi, India
 Bernhard Haubold and Thomas Wiehe (2006) “Introduction to Computational
Biology – An Evolutionary Approach” Birkhauser Verlag, Switzerland
Reference Books:
 Krane, DE; Raymer, ML (2003), “Fundamental concepts of Bioinformatics”,
Benjamin Cummings
 Ignacimuthu, S (2005) “Basic Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, India
 P. Baldi and S. Brunak (2003) “Bioinformatics” Affiliated East-West Press, New
Delhi, India
Web Sites:
www.sciencedirect.com
Title of the paper Microbial Biiochemistry Elective 6
second year & 3
Second Semester
Objective To introduce to the students the various beneficial and
pathogenic micro-organisms
Course outline: (Microbial Biochemistry)
UNIT I
Micro organisms and their place in living world. Historical developments of
microbiology (spontaneous generation, germ theory of disease and Koch’s
postulates) Recent developments and future trends. Ultrastructure of bacteria,
fungi, algae and protozoa. Structure and functions of the cellular components.
Classification of microbes – phenotypic and taxonomic characters.
89
UNIT II
Environmental Microbiology – Microbial ecology – role of microorganisms in
the productivity of ecosystems – interaction between microorganisms, and with
plants and animals – microbes and biodeterioration – microbes in waste treatment –
home and industrial.
Food and Dairy microbiology : food spoilage, food preservation, fermented
foods (cheese, yoghurt, pickles, bread), food infections –clostridium, staphylococcus
and salmonella
UNIT III
Medical Microbiology: Pathogenic micro organisms - Salmonella, E.coli,
Pseudomonas, Klebsiella, staphylococcus, streptococcus, Neisseria, Haemophilus and
mycobacterium. Disease reservoirs, epidemiological terminologies, infectious
disease transmissions, cure, control and prevention.
UNIT IV
Industrial microbiology : Industrial use of microbes – fermentation products,
bio-conversions – bio remediation. products of industrial microbiology – penicillin,
methanol, vinegar, vitamin B 12, citric acid, glutamic acid and protease.
UNIT V
Introduction to virology : Classification, morphology, size, ultrastructure and
life cycle of some representative viruses (TMV, T4, SV40 and M13), methods of
culturing viruses, isolation, purification and characterization.
Reference Books:
Microbiology - Michael J.Pelczar I.R., Chan E.C.S and Noel R.Kreieg, 2004, 5th
Edition, 27th reprint Tata McGRAW-Hill, New Delhi.
Bioprocesses and Biotechnology for Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals - Jean-
Richard Neeser, and Bruce 1 German. 2004. Marcel Dekker.
Principles of Microbiology - Atlas RM, 1997, WCB Publishers.
90
Microbiology - Daniel Lim, 1998, 2nd edition. McGraw-Hill.
Microbiology: A laboratory manual -.Cappuccino J.G &.Sharman N, 1999, 4th

Edition, Addition Wesley Lonbgman, Inc.
Medical Microbiology:A guide to microbiological infection - David Slack Richard, 1992,
10th, edition, Churchill Livingstone, New York.
Indian Books:
Microbiology of Diseases - Gupta Yanka, 2000 ,1st edition, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi.
Web sites:
www.mhhe.com
www.microbiology-direcLcom
www.microbe.org
www.bact.wisc.edu/MicrotextbookJindex.php
Title of the paper Project + Viva voce -Core-14

Second year & 8
Fourth Semester
Objective -
C - Core; E- Elective; ED- Extra Discipliniary
4. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOINFORMATICS
91
Paper 12,Core GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS
UNIT I:
Organization of the prokaryotic and eukaryotic genomes – Genetic linkage maps and physical
maps – current sequencing technologies – partial sequencing – gene identification – gene
prediction rules and softwares,sequence assembly, Human Genome Project
UNIT II:
Gene therapy – pathway regulatory networks – drug discovery – management of chemical
libraries - Microarrays – genes in metabolic pathways – microarrays in drug toxicity testing and
metabolic pathways.
UNIT III:
Life cycle of a protein – functional protein families – Gene _expression – EST (Expressed
sequence tag) – mass spectrometry – application of proteomic mining, expression profiling,
network mapping and mapping protein modification.
UNIT IV:
Extracting proteins from biological samples – protein separation before and after digestion using
PAGE, preparative IEF, and HPLC – Tandem LC approaches for peptide analysis – protein
digestion technique – Mass spectrometry for protein – protein sequence analysis by TMS data,
Software for Mass Spectrometry data analysis.
UNIT V:
Mining proteomics- protein expression profiling – identifying protein-protein interaction and
protein complexes – mapping protein modification – new approaches in proteomics.
Recommended Texts:
1. Primrose, S.B. and Twyman, R.M. (2003). “Principles of Genome Analysis and
Genomics”: 3rd edition, Blackwell Publishing Company, Oxford, UK.
2. Liebler, D.C. (2002). “Introduction to Proteomics – Tools for the New Biology”, 1st
Edition, Humana Press Inc., New Jersey, USA.
3. Orengo, C.A., Jones, D.T. and Thornton, J.M. (2003). “Bioinformatics – Genes,
Proteins and Computers”, 1st Edition, BIOS Scientific Publishers Limited, Oxford,
UK.
Reference Books:
92
1. Mount, D.W. (2001). “Bioinformatics – Sequence and Genome Analysis”, 1st Edition,
Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York, USA.
2. Westhead, D.R., Parish, J.H. and Twyman, R.M. (2003). “Instant Notes Series –
Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Viva Books Private Limited, New Delhi, India.
3. Ignacimuthu , S. (2005). “Basic Bioinformatics”, 1 st Edition, Narosa Publishing House, New
Delhi, India.
4. Lesk, A.M. (2002). “Introduction to Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press,
Oxford, UK.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 13. Core ALGORITHMS FOR COMPUTATIONAL BIOLOGY
Unit I: Strings and trees

Definitions – strings – substrings, superstrings, suffix and prefix strings – operations on
strings – concatenation – delete operator – graphs – definitions – directed, connected,
cyclic, complete graphs – trees and terminology – leaf, node, branch root – algorithms –
big O notation – classification of algorithms – P, NP, NP-hard, NP – complete, with
examples, Travelling Salesman, Hamilton Path – pseudocode algorithms for sorting,
finding minimum/maximum.
Unit II: Sequence alignment
Why align sequences – similarity v/s homology – heterologs, orthologs, paralogs,
xenologs – Karlin – Altschul statistics to estimate significance of an alignment –
expectation values and Z values – sequence comparisons using dot matrices with
examples – dynamic programming – details of Needleman – Wunsch, Smith – Waterman
algorithms with worked out examples – hashing methods with worked out examples –
BLAST and FASTA
Unit III: Multiple sequence alignment, substitution matrices and phylogenetic trees
Representing and scoring a multiple sequence alignment – dynamic programming for
multiple sequence alignment – pitfalls – progressive or hierarchical alignment with
worked out examples – substitution matrices – evolutionary models – PAM substitution
matrices – BLOSUM substitution matrices – gap penalties – phylogenetic trees – distance
matrix methods – UPGMA, neighbour joining, with worked out examples – maximum
parsimony with worked out examples - maximum likelihood.
Unit IV: Pattern discovery and characterization in protein and DNA sequences
93
Sequence pattern representations – deterministic patterns – regular expressions –
probabilistic patterns – sequence logos – general methods of pattern classification –
methods for proteins – hidden Markov models and application to analyses of protein
sequences – general methods of gene discovery – using HMM, GeneMark – artificial
neural networks – introduction and their use in gene discovery, GRAIL – Gene discovery
using Fourier analysis, GeneScan ,Bayesian Classifications
Unit V: Methods of analyses of biomolecular structures

Visualisation and representation of molecular structure - computer graphics – methods
of representing a three-dimensional onbject on a two-dimensional surface – methods of
representing biological molecules – geometrical analyses – bond lengths, angles,
hydrogen bonds, torsion angles, calculations of planes, the Ramachandran map – protein
surface and solvent accessibility – protein structure comparisons – superposition
techniques – distance matrices – dynamic programming using distance matrices –
COMPARER – nucleic acid structural parameters.
References:
 Mount D.W. Bioinformatics. Sequence and Genome Analaysis. (Cold Spring
Harbor,2000)
 Baxevanis A.D. Bioinformatics: A practical guide to the analysis of genes and
proteins (John Wiley & Sons, 2nd edn. 2001)
 Attuvod T.K. Smith D.J. Introduction to Bioinformatics (Addison Wesley Longman
Ltd ,1999 )
 Taylor, H.D Bioinformatics: sequence structure and data banks (Oxford Univ.
Press,2000)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 14, Core STRUCTURAL BIOINFORMATICS
UNIT I:
Structural features of biomolecules – techniques used to determine the structure of biomolecules

- geometrical parameters – potential energy surfaces – molecular graphics – hardware and
software requirements – Internet – mathematical concepts,molecular file formats
UNIT II:
Structure prediction – secondary structure – homology modeling, fold recognition and ab initio
3D structure prediction – structure comparison and alignment – prediction of function from
structure.
UNIT III:
94
Molecular dynamic using simple models – simulations with continuous potentials – advantage of
constant temperature and pressure simulation – solvent effects – analysis of conformational
changes during molecular dynamic simulation.
UNIT IV:
Molecular docking – structure based drug design – de novo approach – molecular similarity –
quantitative structure-activity relationship – 3D pharmacophore derivation and matching –
importance of molecular modeling in drug discovery, Cheminformatics and its applications,
Combinatorial libraries and Chemical diversity
UNIT V:
Protein stability and folding-SCOP-DALI-assignment of protein structures to genomes-
determining gene function through conserved protein structure-prediction of protein function-
approaches to protein structural genomics
Recommended Texts:
1. Lesk, A.M. (2002).” Introduction to Bioinformatics”, 1st Edition, Oxford

University Press, Oxford, UK.
Reference Books:
1. Mount, D.W. (2001).” Bioinformatics – Sequence and Genome Analysis”, 1st

Edition, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York, USA.
2. Westhead, D.R., Parish, J.H. and Twyman, R.M. (2003). Instant Notes Series –
Bioinformatics, 1st Edition, Viva Books Private Limited, New Delhi, India.
3. Ignacimuthu (s.j.), S. (2005). Basic Bioinformatics, 1st Edition, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, India.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
95
Paper 15, Core TOOLS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS IN BIOINFORMATICS
(PRACTICALS)
A set of 15 computer ‘experiments’ are suggested, starting from bibliographic searches, and
ending with elementary structure analyses. The experiments use the CSIR-TCS Biosuite-
software package.
Unit I: Bibliographic search on the Internet – PubMed: The students should search PubMed
(www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov) and obtain information about a particular topic, which may be
suggested by the teacher.
Browsing database – Each student should independently access at least one database described in
http://nar.oxfordjournals.org/content/vol34/suppl_1/index.dtl and describe its contents
Unit II: Blast search – Each student is given a specific protein or DNA sequence, which is used
in the search through the Blast web page (www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov)
PsiBlast – Each student is given a specific protein or DNA sequence, which is used in the search
through the PsiBlast web page (www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov)
Unit III: Global alignment using Needleman – Wunsch (NW) algorithm – student is given a pair
of sequences to perform a global alignment using the NW algorithm.
DotPlot – student creates a DotPlot display of a pair of sequences
Multiple sequence alignment – Each student creates an alignment of a set of 6 to 10 sequences
and displays the results appropriately
Restriction Site analyses – Given a DNA sequence and a particular restriction enzyme, the
student identifies the cleavage sites. Comparative genomics using Vista
Unit IV: Phylogenetic tree construction (UPGMA) – Given a set of 6 to 10 protein or DNA
sequences, the student uses UPGMA to construct a phylogenetic tree.
Phylogenetic tree construction (Neighbour Joining) – Given a set of 6to 10 protein or DNA
sequences, the student uses Neighbour Joining to construct a phylogenetic tree
Unit V: Sequence conversions – The student converts a DNA sequence into the complementary
RNA and vice versa. The student translates the DNA sequence in all six reading frames to the
protein sequence and a protein sequence and a protein into the respective DNA sequence,
choosing an appropriate codon usage table
Gene discovery – Given a large DNA sequence (such as e.g. a small portion of an eukaryotic
genome) the student predicts all possible genes.
Protein structure calculations – Given a small protein/peptide structure, the student calculates
and tabulates bond lengths, bond angles, and torsion angles, and identifies hydrogen bonds,
Molecular surface calculations.
Ramachandran plot – Given a protein structure, the students creates and displays its
Ramchandran plot Structural superposition – Given a pair of similar protein structures the
student performs a structural superposition and calculates the similarities/differences
Chemical library search, molecular format conversion
96
Molecular dynamics simulation using simple models and continuous potentials, Molecular
docking and interaction analysis, QSAR, pharmacophore search
Recommended Texts:
1. K.Mani and N.Vijayaraj (2004) “Bioinformatics – A Practical Approach” Aparnaa

Publication, Coimbatore, India
2. C.Gibas and P.Jambeck (2001) “Developing Bioinformatics computer Skills” Shroff
Publishers and Disctributors Pvt Ltd, Mumbai, India
Reference Books:
1. It is expected that a computer laboratory is available, with necessary software and data.
The manuals corresponding to the software would serve as Reference Books.
Paper 16, Elective SYSTEMS BIOLOGY
SYSTEMS BIOLOGY
UNIT I: Introducing computational Systems biology
Basic concepts of System biology, Enabling information and integration for systems biology,
Databases for Systems biology, Natural language processing and ontology-enhanced biomedical
literature mining for Systems Biology.
UNIT II: Foundations of biochemical network analysis and modeling
Introduction to computational models of biochemical reaction networks, Biological foundations

of Signal transduction and the Systems biology perspective, Reconstruction of metabolic
network from genome information and its structural and functional analysis, Metabolic Flux
analysis, GEPASI, Gopher
UNIT III: Computer simulations of dynamic networks
Discrete approach to network modeling, Gene networks: Estimation modeling and simulation,
Computational models for circadian rhythms: Deterministic Versus Stochastic approaches.
97
UNIT IV: Multiscale representation of cells and Emerging phenotypes
Spatio-temporal Systems biology, Cytomics-from Cell States to predictive medicine, The IUPS
Physiome project, E-Cell Concept. Genesis tool and its applications
UNIT V: Applications and perspectives of Systems biology.
Developments and trends of Systems biology, Long and medium term goals of Systems biology,
the potential applications of Systems biology, Microarray analysis and gene networks, BRB
Array tool
Reference Books:
1. Computational Systems Biology. By Andres Kriete, Roland Eils. Published by Academic

Press, 2005, ISBN 012088786X.
2. Systems Biology: Applications And Perspectives. By Peter Bringmann. Published by

Springer, 2007, ISBN 3540313389.
3. Systems Biology: Principles, Methods, and Concepts. By Andrzej K. Konopka. Published by

CRC Press, 2007, ISBN 0824725204.
4. Systems Biology: Definitions and Perspectives. By Lilia Alberghina, Hans V. Westerhoff,

Published by Birkhäuser, 2005, ISBN 354022968X.
Paper 17, Elective (Other Departments)

POTENTIAL APPLICATIONS AND COMMERCIAL
ASPECTS OF BIOINFORMATICS
Unit 1: Visualization of sequence data: What a sequence reveals about the biological function of
a gene
Unit 2: Applications of bioinformatics in drug discovery
Unit 3: Genetic basis of disease Role of genetics in future approaches to healthcare, Genetic
medicine, human disease and genes
Unit 4: Pharmacogenomics, Personalized medicine and gene-based diagnostics: Definition of

personalized medicine, Conventional medicine versus personalized medicine, Role of genetics in
development of personalized medicines
Unit 5: Introduction to ethical issues, Legal, ethical and commercial ramifications of

bioinformatics Ethical and Regulatory Aspects of Personalized Medicine
98
FOURTH SEMESTER
Paper 18,Core DATABASES IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
Unit I: Database concepts

Databases in general – definitions and examples – computerized databases – advantages
and disadvantages – need for database models and systems – examples of logical models
– hierarchical, network and relational models – RDBMS – objected oriented models –
primary and secondary (derived) databases – structure and sequences databases – growth
of databases,Gene Ontology classifications
Unit II: Molecular Biology data types

Brief descriptions of the various types of data used in modern Molecular Biology and
how they are obtained, stored, represented and retrieved – organisms – genome maps –
DNA, RNA and protein sequences – RNA secondary structure – protein secondary and
tertiary structure – DNA and protein sequence motifs – protein and RNA structure motifs
– RNA and protein-protein interaction data – mutations and polymorphisms in sequences
and structures – tissues and cells – populations.
Unit III: Primary sequence databases

DNA sequence databases – GenBank, EMBL, DDBJ – details of structure of GenBank –
differences with and links to other databases – protein sequence databases – Swissprot,
PIR – details of arrangement of data in Swissport – differences and links to other
databases – TrEMBL database
Unit IV: Derived sequence database
Subcollections of data – FlyBase – AceDB, WormBase – comprehensive microbial
genome, Omniome – organelle genome database, GOBASE – eukaryotic promoter
database – Codon usage table database – Exon-Intron database – examples of protein
sequence subcollections – GPCR sequence database – human unidentified gene-encoded
large protein sequence database, HUGE – CluSTr and COGS – databases of protein
sequence patterns and motifs – PRINTS, PROSITE, Pfam, ProDom.
Unit V: Structural databases

Nature of structure data – coordinate systems – primary structure databases –PDB, CSD –
details of arrangement of data in PDB with examples – access to PDB and CSD – derived
structure databases – value-added subcollections, NDB – structural patterns and motifs –
SCOP – CATH-FSSP-PALI-DSSP, Drug bank, ligand depot,Querying chemical
databases
References:
Nucleic Acids Research (January 2008) Number 1. Database Issue. (This issue is available
online for free and open access at the following url
http://nar.oxfordjournals.org/content/vol34/suppl_1/index.dtl)
99
 N.Gautham (2006) ‘Bioinformatics’ Narosa Publishing Company, New Delhi
 V.R. Srinivas (2005) ‘Bioinformatics: A Modern Approach’ Prentice-Hall of India
Private Limited New Delhi, India.
 D.Mount (2000) ‘Bioinformatics: Sequences and Genome Analysis’ Cold Spring
Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, USA
 D.Higgins and W.Taylor. (eds) (2000) ‘ Bioinformatics: Sequences, Structures and
Databanks’ Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 19,Elective ADVANCED TOPICS IN BIOINFORMATICS
Unit I: Pharmacogenomics and Toxicogenomics

Definition of Pharmacogenomics & Toxicogenomics – case study in Alzheimer’s
diseases – safety metabolisms pharmacology – Exploitary Toxicology, Preclinical
Toxicology, Pharmacokinetics & Metabolism
Unit II: Phylogenetic analysis and Comparative genomics

Relationship of phylogenetic analysis to sequence alignment, genome complexity and
phylogenetic analysis – Maximum parsimony method, Distance methods. Reliability of
phylogenetic predictions- Complications from phylogenetic analysis – Phylip & Paup
softwares. DNA computers – Principle & working
Unit III: Nutrigenomics

Nutritional genetics – nutritional genomics-genetic nutrition-gene directed nutrition with
reference to diabetes, cardiovascular diseases and obesity and neurogenomics-short notes on
herbal informatics (medicinal foods)
Unit IV: Chemogenomics

Definition – Effect of chemicals on genes – delayed mutations – Interaction of molecules
(small & Big) with DNA intercalation – case study with copper deficiency leading to
diseases, Role of p53 – Oncogene changes
Unit V: Metagenomics and Molecular Evolutionary Pathways

Definition of metagenomics – application of genomics to cultured and uncultured
microorganisms, metagenomics of microbial communities, clastistics – evolutionary
relationships – evolution of nucleic acids, proteins and enzymes associated SNP’s.
100
References:
 Jacoby, E (2005) Chemogenomics- Knowledge-based Approaches to Drug
Discovery,World Scientific
 Rothstein,MA ,(2003) Pharmacogenomics,Wiley-Liss
 Chakraborty,C ; Bhattacharya,A (2005) Pharmacogenomics, Biotech Publishers
 Rimbach,GH (2005), Nutrigenomics, CRC
 Hamadeh,HK:Afshari,CA (2004) Toxicogenomics : Principles and Applications Wiley-
Liss.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paper 20,Elective BIOINFORMATICS AND DRUG DESIGN
Unit I:
Introduction – Basics of combinatorial chemistry & natural product libraries – Chemical
parameters in Drug design prodrugs & soft drugs – physico chemical parameters in Drug
design – structure based drug design – Micro array and drug discovery.
Unit II :
Drug metabolism – Genome to drug discovery – Sequence analysis – Structure properties
& computer identification of eukaryotic genes – analyzing regulatory regions in genomes.
Unit III:
Homology modeling – Molecular modeling using computers – CADD, protein-ligand
docking in drug design – vaccine development through Bioinformatics, Lipinski’s rule
Unit IV:
Target discovery – Target validation – Assay development – High through screening –
Lead optimization – Drug substrate manufacture – Development of new drugs,
subtractive genomics
Unit V:
Candidate drug nomination – clinical trial – Investigational new drug application – FDA,
MDA, approval, patenting and formulations-Marketing.
References:
 Richard B. Silverman , Organic chemistry of Drug Design & Drug action Elsevier
Science, Academic Press
101
 Wu-Pong Susanna, Rojanasakul, Youngyut Biopharmaceutical Drug Design and
Development, Molecular modeling – Principles and Applications ,Prentice Hall
 R. Mannhold, H.Kubinyi, H.Timmerman, (Editors) Bioinformatics – From Genomes to
Drugs – Methods & Principles in medicinal chemistry Vol-14
 H.Gerhard vogel, Wolgang H Drug Discovry & Evaluation. Pharmacological assays
(with CD-ROM)
 Eric M.Gordon ;James F.Kerwin (Editors)Combinatorial chemistry & Molecular
Diversity in drug discovery
 Stuart M.Brown (2002) Essentials of medical genomics, John Wiley & Sons
102
5. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY
SYLLABUS
Paper – 13
Title of the paper Enzyme Technology

Category of the course Year Semester Credits
Core II III 4
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Enzyme nomenclature and classification, General properties of enzymes and the factors
that affect their activity and the associated changes: Extraction and purification of enzymes:
Membrane bound enzymes – their extraction, enzyme assay methods.
Unit – 2:
Enzyme kinetics –pre –steady state kinetics, steady state, fast kinetics to elucidate the
intermediate and rate limiting steps (flow & relaxation techniques); complex kinetics and
analysis.
Unit – 3:
Michaels –menton equation derivation , determination of km value and studying kinetics

using Line weaver –Burke plot, Eadie- Hofstee plot and Hans Woolf equations, enzyme
inhibitors
Unit – 4:
Enzyme specificity – Evidence for enzyme substrate complex –Enzyme catalysis -

Nucleophilic and Electrophilic attack –Role of metal ions in enzyme catalysis, Acid Base
catalysis, Covalent catalysis, Proximity & Orientation catalysis: Mechanism of enzyme action –
lysozyme , chymotrypsin , DNA polymerase , RNase etc, Zymogen and enzyme activators,
Active site determination.
103
Unit – 5:
Regulation of enzymes-Allosteric interactions and Product inhibition: Coenzymes,

Isoenzymes, Immobilization of enzymes, Clinical and Industrial applications of enzymes;
Enzyme engineering
Recommended Texts
1. Voet & Voet 1995. Biochemistry .John wiley & sons, Inc.USA
2. Dixon & Webb .Enzymes
3. Palmer. Enzyme technology
Paper – 14
Title of the paper Genomics and Proteomics

Core II III 4
COURSE OUTLINE:
Unit – 1:
Genomics and cDNA sequences and output management from different biological output
sources, gene prediction rules and software – Human Genome project.
Unit – 2:
Analysis of genomic and proteomic information with respect to biological systems-

Genome applications – pathway regulatory networks. Drug design/ discovery and identification,
synthesis of new drugs.
Unit – 3:
Management of diverse chemical libraries, Gene expression, Microarrays and recent

development in expression analysis; Applications of Microarrays in drug toxicity testing,
metabolic pathways.
Unit – 4:
Sequences Analysis – Protein and Nucleic acid sequence Alignment methods-

proteomics- protein analysis – structural comparison – 2D gel, Mass spectrometry, and protein
and Antibody arrays.
104
Unit – 5:
Protein Databases – comparison of protein sequences and database searching-Methods

for Protein structure prediction –Conserved patterns in protein sequences and structures-
Comparison of protein 3D structures – predicting functions based on DNA and protein
sequences.
Recommended Texts:
1. Grandi Guido, Genomics, Proteomics and Vaccines, John wiley and sons.2004.
2. Maleolm & J.Goodship.2001. Genotype to phenotype, 2nd Edition .Bios Scientific
publishers Ltd.
3. Brown, T.A, 1999, Genomics, 1 st Edition, John wiley and sons.
4. B.Primrose, 1998. Principles of genome analysis. 2 nd Edition .Blackwell science.
Paper -15
Title of the paper Bioprocess Technology and Downstream

Processing
Core II III 4
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Introduction to bioprocess technology. Microbial growth kinetics, Measurment of growth

(cell number, direct and indirect methods) nutrition and product formulation. Effect of
environment (temperature, pH, substrate concentration) on product formation. Media
formulation, Kinetics of thermal death of microorganisms.
Unit – 2:
Types of bioreactors: Submerged reactors, surface reactors, mechanically agitated

reactors, non-mechanically agitated reactors. Design of fermentors – body
construction-,microbial cell culture.
Unit – 3:
Aerobic and anaerobic fermentation processes and their application in the field of
biotechnology industry. Solid substrate, slurry fermentation and its application. Whole cell
immobilization. Production of citricacid, penicillin and insulin.
105
Unit – 4:
Introduction to bioproducts and bioseparation. Primary recovery process: Cell disruption

methods. Cell lysis and Flocculation: Osmotic and mechanical methods of lysis. Flocculation by
electrolysis;polymorphic flocculation. Filtration: Principles, Conventional, Crossflow filtration.
Sedimentation: Principles, Sedimentation coefficients. Extraction Principles, Liquid – liquid
extraction, aqueous two phase extraction, supercritical fluid extraction.
Unit – 5:
Membrane separation – ultrafiltration, precipitation methods: liquid-liquid extraction,

aqueous two phase extraction.. Drying –Principles and operation of vacuum dryer, shelf dryer,
rotary dryer, freezer and spray dryer. Formulation methods.
Recommended Texts:
1. P.A.Belter, E.L.Cursler, and W.S.Hu. Bioseparation: Down stream processing for

Biotechnology. John Wiley and sons. 1988.
2. R.G. Harrison, P.Todd, SR.Rudge and D.P. Petrides. Bioseparation science and
engineering. Oxford Press. 2003.
3. Michael L.Shuler, Fikret Kargi. Bioprocess Engineering. PHI publishers. 2003.
Paper – 16 Practical III
Title of the paper Enzyme Technology, Genomics and Proteomics

practical, Bioprocess Technology and
Downstream processing
Core II III 4
COURSE OUTLINE
Enzyme Technology Practicals
1. Isolation, purification of Amylase and Alkaline Phosphatase(Ammonium sulphate

precipitation, Ion exchange chromatography, Native PAGE, Gel permeation
chromatography, SDS PAGE).
2. Kinetic studies – Effect of pH, Temperature, Substrate Concentration, - -Km
Determination, L.B Plot. Determination of enzyme activity, Effect of inhibitors,
purification chart
3. Enzyme immobilization by entrapment method and covalent method.
4. Chemical modification of enzyme by any two methods.
106
Genomics and Proteomics Practicals
1. Sequence identity search- Sequence similarity search using BLAST, FASTA, PSI & PHI-
BLAST.
2. SEQUENCE ANALYSIS- Pattern Search (Domains & Motifs)-ORFs Search-Sequence
translation.
3. SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT- Pair-wise (Needleman-Wunsch & Smith-Waterman)-
Multiple using CLUSTAL.
4. PHYLOGENY- Phylogenetic tree using PHYLIP.
5. PROTEOMICS- Structure Prediction (Secondary and Tertiary)-Molecular visualization
of proteins using RASMOL.
Bioprocess Technology and Downstream processing Practicals
1. Isolation of industrially important microorganisms for microbial processes.

2. Production and estimation of protease and amylase.
3. Use of alginate for cell immobilization.
4. Media standardization (C:N ratio) for maximum biomass production of an industrially
important microorganism.
5. Cell disruption (Sonication)
6. Conservation of Bacteria by Lyophilization.
7. Aqueous Two Phase Extraction of enzymes
Paper – 17 Elective
Title of the paper Tissue Engineering

Elective II III 3
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Basic biology of tissue engineering: The basis of growth and differentiation-

morphogenesis and tissue engineering.
Unit – 2:
In vitro control of tissue development-Growth factors-Tissue engineering bioreactors-

Tissue assembly in microgravity-In vitro synthesis of Tissue and organs.
107
Unit – 3:
Organotypic and histotypic models of engineered tissues-Biomaterials in tissue

engineering-Approaches to transplanting engineered cells and tissue engineering.
Unit –4:
Bioartificial pancreas-Hepatassist liver support system-Heamatopoietic system: Red

blood cell substitutes-Renal replacement devices- Musculoskeletal system.
Unit – 5:
Structural tissue engineering-Bone regeneration through cellular engineering-Brain

implants-Neural stem cells-Periodontal applications- -Artificial Womb.
Recommended Texts:
1. Robert P. Lanaza, Robert Langer and Joseph Vacanti.2000. Principles of Tissue

Engineering. Second edition Academic Press.
2. Sylvia, S. Mader, 2000, Human Biology, Sixth edition , Mc Graw Hill, USA.
3. Cecie Starr, 1996, Biology, Third edition , Wordsworth, America..
4. Micklem.H.S., Loutit John.F., Tissue grafting and radiation, Academic Press, New
York.2004.
5. Penso.G., Balducci.D., Tissue cultures in biological research,Elsevier, Amsterdam. 2004.
Title of the paper Stem Cell Technology

Elective II III 3
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Stem cells - Definition, Characterization, Pluripotency, Self renewal and differentiation,

hierarchy, Stem cell niche, Niche specification - Drosophila germ line stem cells. Adult stem cell
from amniotic fluid, cord blood and tooth primordial.
108
Unit – 2:
Characteristics of stem cell- cell cycle, Ras\Raf pathway, PI3K cell signaling, p53 check
points, Role of LIF pathway in cell cycle control. Stem cell communications - gap junctions, cell
fusion, HOX genes, upstream transcriptional factors, transdifferentiation, cell fusion
Unit – 3:
Chromatin modification and transcriptional regulation, chromatin modifying factors,

epigenetic regulation- expression of receptors, Chromosomal inactivation.
Unit – 4:
Spermatogonic stem cell, epiblast, trophoblast cell lineage, blastocyst formation and axis
specification. Generation of Primordial germ cells (PGC), gonad and liver.
Unit – 5:
Therapeutic applications of Embryonic stem cells, Bone marrow stem cells, Adipose
derived stem cells and Hematopoietic stem cells in Heart regeneration and neural defects. Ethics
in human stem cell research.
Recommended Texts:
1. Ann A.Kiessling “ Human Embryonic Stem Cells” Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Inc.
second edition, (2006).
2. Institute of Medicine (Corporate Author): “Stem Cells and The Future Of Regenerative
Medicine” National Academy Press ( 2002).
3. Robert Lanza: “Essentials of Stem Cell Biology” Academic Press (2005).
4. Kursad Turksen : “Adult Stem Cells” Humana Press, Inc (2004).
5. James Thomson et al : “Handbook of Stem Cells: Embryonic/Adult and Fetal Stem
Cells”, vol 1 & 2; Academic Press (2004).
109
Elective offered to other Dept.
Title of the paper Principles of Gene Manipulation Technology

Elective II III 3
Unit – 1:
Restriction enzymes, DNA modifying enzymes, cloning vectors, prokaryotic hosts-

Creating Recombinant DNA Molecules-Isolation and Cloning of genes.-Construction of
representative cDNA and genomic libraries-polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications-
Southern / Northern blotting analysis.
Unit – 2:
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries- polymerase chain reaction

(PCR) and applications- Southern/Northern bloting analysis, RFLP, RAPD, AFLP analysis.
Genomics- Structural genomics-Gene mapping-Comparative genomics -Functional genomics
-Gene expression -EST’s-DNA arrays.
Unit – 3:
Gene transfers - Introduction of Foreign Genes into Cells: electroporation, biolistic

transfer, Transfection, selectable markers, microinjection, embryonic stem cells, reporter
transgenes, Homologous recombination - "knock-ins / outs”.
Unit – 4:
Transgenics- Approaches to transgenesis: Microinjection / Embryonic stem cells/Sperm-

mediated transfer -Mammalian cloning by nuclear transfer - "Dolly” as an example. Production
of transgenic sheep, cattle, pigs and plants. - BT cotton, Transgenesis and growth- performance
in farm livestock, & plants-The growth hormone in both bovine and porcine systems.
Unit – 5:
Edible vaccines, Disease resistance in transgenic organisms, Pest and herbicide resistant
plants. The Mx gene system for anti-viral disease resistance in animals. Issues in Genetic
Engineering - Biosafety of transgenic organisms.-Food safety of GMOs-Environmental safety .
110
Recommended Texts:
1. Old, R,W. and Primrose, S.B., Principles of Gene Manipulation (5th edition)
2. Blackwells Scientific Publications, Oxford, U.K. 1997
3. Strachan, T. and Read, A.P. Human Molecular Genetics 2 ( 2nd edition), BIOS
Scientific Publications, John Wiley and Sons , Toronto, Canada. 1999
4. Watson, J.D., Gilman, M., Witkowski, J., and Zoller, M., Recombinant DNA (2nd
edition),Scientific American Books, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York, N.Y., U.S.A.
5. Cantor and Smith (1999). Genomics. Wiley & Sons.
6. T.A. Brown (1999). Genomes. Bios Publishers.
7. K.Dharmalingam (1987). M13 cloning manual. MacMIllan, Chennai.
Paper – 19
Title of the paper Environmental Biotechnology and Nano

Biotechnology
Core II IV 4
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Concept and scope of environmental biotechnology, The natural cycles of environment

(Hydrological, Oxygen, Nitrogen, Phosphate and Sulphur cycle), Toxic chemicals in the
environment (Arsenic, Cadmium, Mercury and Lead), Carcinogens. Air pollutants (Carbon
monoxide, Nitrogen oxide, Sulphur dioxide, acid rain), Air quality standards, air sampling and
air monitoring.
Unit – 2:
Water pollutants, waste water treatment, physical, chemical, biological characterization

of waste water, BOD, COD, TOC, use of indicator organism for biological characterization of
waste water treatment processes (aerobic and anaerobic). Sewage and waste treatment,
Biodegradation, Bioremediation, Engineering strategies for bioremediation – Evaluating
bioremediation.
111
Unit – 3:
Denitrification: Physiology of denitrifying bacteria - Tertiary denitrification – One-

sludge denitrification-Drinking Water treatment: Anaerobic treatment by methanogenesis-Uses
for methanogenic treatment-Reactor configurations-Special factors for the design of anaerobic
sludge disasters.
Unit – 4:
Introduction to nanobiotechnology. Status of nanobiotechnology in India. Nanomaterials,

Nanostructures and dynamics of biocompatible materials. Bioactive nanomaterials in bone
grafting and tissue engineering. Nanocomposites in bone replacement therapy.
Unit – 5:
DNA based artificial nanostructures. Carbon nanotubes, Biosensors, Nanorobots, Biochips and
their application in agriculture and medicine. Nanofibers and their application in tissue engineering.
Nanaomaterials and Drug delivery.
Recommended Texts
1. Environmental chemistry 5th edition by A.K.De. 1997.

2. Environmental Biotechnology :Principles and applications. McGraw Hill, Newyork. Bruce E.
Rittmann and Perry L. McCarty. 2001.
3. Industrial and Environmental Biotechnology. Horizon Press. Ahmed N, Qureshi, F.M. and Khan,
O.Y. 2001.
4. Challa S.S.R.Kumar (Ed). 2006. Biologicals and pharmaceutical nanomaterials, Wiley-VCH
Verlag Gmbh & Co, KgaA.
5. K.K.K.Jain 2006. Nanobiotechnology in Molecualr Diagnostics: Current Techniques and
Applications Horizon Bioscience
6. Niemeyer, C.M., Mirkin, C.A. (Eds). 2004. Nanobiotechnology Concepts, Applications and
Perspectives, Wiley-VCH, Weinheim.
112
Title of the paper Animal Biotechnology

Elective II IV 3
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
History of animal biotechnology: Basic principles as applicable to animal science-

Conventional methods of animal improvement, selective breeding and cross breeding. Oestrus
synchronization. In vitro fertilization, Embryo preservation, Embryo collection, evaluation and
transfer.
Unit – 2:
Animal health – disease diagnosis, hybridoma technique, monoclonal antibodies,

application of probes for disease diagnosis of existing and emerging animal diseases.
Prophylaxis - Vaccines, Oral vaccines – DNA Vaccines in animal disease.
Unit – 3:
Cell culture: primary and established culture; organ culture; tissue culture;
Disaggregation of tissue and primary culture; cell separation, Slide and coverslip cultures, flask
culture, test tube culture techniques, cell synchronization, cryo preservation. Scaling up of
animal cell culture, cell line and cloning – micromanipulation and cloning, somatic cell cloning.
Biology and characterization of cultured cells. Karyotyping; measuring parameters for growth,
measurement of cell death, apoptosis and its determination, cytotoxicity assays.
Unit – 4:
Nuclear magnetic resonance methods of monitoring cell metabolism- culturing animal

cells in fluidised bed reactors- GPI- Anchored fusion proteins- harvesting GPI- anchored proteins
from CHO cells- Hematopoietic cells for cellular and gene therapy.
Unit – 5:
Identification and isolation of genes of economic importance. Transgenic animals:

Production and application; transgenic animals in livestock improvement, transgenic animals as
model for human diseases. Impact of gene cloning and Bioethics. Biosafety – Regulations on
experiments and release of Genetically Modified Organisms.
113
Recommended Texts:
1. Culture of animal cells. 3rd edition. Ian Freshney, Wiley-Liss.1996.

2. Recombinant DNA. 2nd edition. J.D.Watson, M.Gillman, J.Witknowski and M.Zoller,
Scientific American Books, NY, 1992.
3. Animal cell biotechnology: Methods and protocols by Nigel Jenkins (Ed). Humana Press,
New Jersey. Pp 1-302, 1999.
4. Genetic Engineering of Animals by (Ed) A.Puhler, VCH Publishers, Weinheim, FRG,
1993.
5. Animal Cell culture – Practical approach. Ed. John R.W.Masters, Oxford.2004.
Title of the paper Bioethics, Human rights and Social issues

Elective II IV 3
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Introduction: Historical development of Human Rights and Human Relations –
International and National. International Instruments: United Nation Commission for Human
Rights,
Unit – 2:
European Convention for Human Rights, UDHR, Civil and Political Rights-National
Instruments:National and State Instruments: Development of Human Rights – Article 21 of
Indian Constitution.
Unit – 3:
Human Relations: Political relations, Ethnic and Communal relations, Socio-cultural
relations, Organisation relation etc., and related Human Rights.Economics of Human Rights and
Relations – Adam Smith’s thoughts on moral sentiments – Economic philosophy of
Thiruvalluvar.
114
Unit – 4:
Student’s Activity: Assignment/Case study/Term paper etc.,
Unit – 5:
Impact of gene cloning and Bioethics. Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) and patents,
biosafety, containment facilities for Genetic Engineering experiments, Regulations on field
experiments and release of GMO’s (Genetically Modified Organisms), labeling of GM
(Genetically Modified) Foods.
Recommended Texts:
1. Trayror, P.C., Frederic.R. and Koch, M. 2002. Biosafety. Board of Trustees, Michigan
State University, USA.
2. Benjamin Lewin, 2000, Genes VII, First edition, Oxford, New York.
3. Paul R.C., 2000.Situations of Human Rights in India.Efficient offset printers.
4. Beauchamp, T.L. and Leroy, W.1999.Contemporary issues in bioethics.Wardsworth
publishing Co. Belmont, California.
5. Bishop.M.J and Rawlings, 1987, Nucleic acid and protein sequence analysis, First, IRL
Press, England.
6. William, S Klug and Michel, R Cummings, 2003, Concepts of Genetics, Seventh
edition , Pearson Education, Singapore.
7. Paul, R.C., 2000.Situations of Human Rights in India, Efficient Offset printers,
8. Marc Galanter, Social Inequality.
9. Adam Smith, Theory of Moral Sentiments
10. Thiruvlalluvar, Thirukural: Arathuppal and Porutpal
11. Kretch & Crutchfield, Social Psychology
115
6. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY & MANAGEMENT
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
Paper –13
Title of the paper Enzyme Technology

Core II III 4
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Enzyme nomenclature and classification, General properties of enzymes and the factors
that affect their activity and the associated changes: Extraction and purification of enzymes:
Membrane bound enzymes – their extraction, enzyme assay methods.
Unit – 2:
Enzyme kinetics –pre –steady state kinetics, steady state, fast kinetics to elucidate the
intermediate and rate limiting steps (flow & relaxation techniques); complex kinetics and
analysis.
Unit – 3:
Michaels –menton equation derivation , determination of km value and studying kinetics

using Line weaver –Burke plot, Eadie- Hofstee plot and Hans Woolf equations, enzyme
inhibitors
Unit – 4:
Enzyme specificity – Evidence for enzyme substrate complex –Enzyme catalysis -

Nucleophilic and Electrophilic attack –Role of metal ions in enzyme catalysis, Acid Base
catalysis, Covalent catalysis, Proximity & Orientation catalysis: Mechanism of enzyme action –
lysozyme , chymotrypsin , DNA polymerase , RNase etc, Zymogen and enzyme activators,
Active site determination.
Unit – 5:
Regulation of enzymes-Allosteric interactions and Product inhibition: Coenzymes,

Isoenzymes, Immobilization of enzymes, Clinical and Industrial applications of enzymes;
Enzyme engineering
116
Recommended Texts
1. Voet & Voet 1995. Biochemistry .John wiley & sons, Inc.USA
2. Dixon & Webb .Enzymes
3. Palmer. Enzyme technology
Paper – 14
Title of the paper Operational Management

Core II III 4
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit -1:
Production System , Introduction , Scope , Objectives, Functions; Production , Productivity
Production Planning and Control-Routing , Scheduling , Dispatching ; maintenance
management, types of maintenance, breakdown, preventive routine, linear programming
problem.
Unit 2
Process design, plant capacity, capacity planning, make or buy decision, plant location,
factors controlling the selection.
Plant layout- meaning, factors influencing principles, types of layout, material equipment
handing, distribution method-MODI method.
Unit 3
Job design, objectives, factors affecting job design, techniques of job design, human factor,
ergonomics, work study, motion study, and work measurement.
Unit 4
Inventory management – meaning, objectives, factors influencing, benefits. Inventory
control techniques, JIT, MRP- I, II, Basic inventory models.
Unit 5
Quality control, quality Assurance, Quality control techniques, TQM.
Recommended Text:
1. Evertt E, Adam Jr& Ronald J Ebert, Production & Operations management, Prentice Hall
of India.
2. P.Gopalkrishnan – purchase Materials Management- Tata Mc-Graw Hill Publishing, New
Delhi-11 th edition 2001.
117
Paper – 15
Title of the paper Genomics and Proteomics

Core II III 4
COURSE OUTLINE:
Unit – 1:
Genomics and cDNA sequences and output management from different biological output
sources, gene prediction rules and software – Human Genome project.
Unit – 2:
Analysis of genomic and proteomic information with respect to biological systems-

Genome applications – pathway regulatory networks. Drug design/ discovery and identification,
synthesis of new drugs.
Unit – 3:
Management of diverse chemical libraries, Gene expression, Microarrays and recent

development in expression analysis; Applications of Microarrays in drug toxicity testing,
metabolic pathways.
Unit – 4:
Sequences Analysis – Protein and Nucleic acid sequence Alignment methods-

proteomics- protein analysis – structural comparison – 2D gel, Mass spectrometry, and protein
and Antibody arrays.
Unit – 5:
Protein Databases – comparison of protein sequences and database searching-Methods

for Protein structure prediction –Conserved patterns in protein sequences and structures-
Comparison of protein 3D structures – predicting functions based on DNA and protein
sequences.
118
Recommended Texts:
1. Grandi Guido, Genomics, Proteomics and Vaccines, John wiley and sons.
2. Maleolm & J.Goodship.2001. Genotype to phenotype, s2 nd Edition .Bios scientific
publishers Ltd.
3. Brown, T.A, 1999, Genomics, 1 st Edition, John wiley and sons.
4. B.Primrose, 1998. Principles of genome analysis. 2 nd Edition .Blackwell science.
Paper – 16 Practical-III
Title of the paper Enzyme Technology, Genomics and Proteomics

practical,
Core II III 4
Enzyme Technology Practicals
1. Isolation, purification of Amylase and Alkaline Phosphatase(Ammonium sulphate

precipitation, Ion exchange chromatography, Native PAGE, Gel permeation
chromatography, SDS PAGE).
2. Kinetic studies – Effect of pH, Temperature, Substrate Concentration, - -Km Determination, L.B
Plot. Determination of enzyme activity, Effect of inhibitors, purification chart
3. Enzyme immobilization by entrapment method and covalent method.
4. Chemical modification of enzyme by any two methods.
Genomics and Proteomics Practicals

1. Sequence identity search- Sequence similarity search using BLAST, FASTA, PSI & PHI-
BLAST.
2. SEQUENCE ANALYSIS- Pattern Search (Domains & Motifs)-ORFs Search-Sequence
translation.
3. SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT- Pair-wise (Needleman-Wunsch & Smith-Waterman)-
Multiple using CLUSTAL.
4. PHYLOGENY- Phylogenetic tree using PHYLIP.
5. PROTEOMICS- Structure Prediction (Secondary and Tertiary)-Molecular visualization
of proteins using RASMOL.
119
Paper -17- Elective
Title of the paper Entrepreneurial Development Project

Management
Elective II III 3
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit 1
Entrepreneurship- meaning, types, qualities of an Entrepreneur, classification of
entrepreneurs, factors influencing entrepreneurship, functions of entrepreneurs.
Unit 2
Commercial banks, district industries centre, national small industries corporation, small
industries development organization, small industries service institute, all
India financial institutions- IDBI, IFCI, ICICI-IRDBI.
Unit 3
Knowledge management and project management in Biotech fields – IPR ,identifying and
protecting IPR, licensing , regulatory approvals, compliance and managing intellectual property
and regulatory processes.
Unit 4
Entrepreneurial development programmes (EDP) –Their role, relevance and achievements,
role of government in organizing EDPs, critical evaluation
Unit 5
Economic development and Entrepreneurial growth, role of entrepreneur in economic
growth, strategic approaches in the changing economic scenario for small Entrepreneurs.
Networking, Franchising /Dealership, Development of women Entrepreneurship.
Recommended Text
Srinivasan, N.P.2003.Entrepreneurial Development. 5 Th edition .Sultan Chand & sons.
New Delhi
Saravanavel 2003 Entrepreneurial Development, 4 Th editions Ess Pee Kay, Chennai.
120
Title of the paper Principles of Gene Manipulation Technology

Elective II III 3
Unit – 1:
Restriction enzymes, DNA modifying enzymes, cloning vectors, prokaryotic hosts-

Creating Recombinant DNA Molecules-Isolation and Cloning of genes.-Construction of
representative cDNA and genomic libraries-polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and applications-
Southern / Northern blotting analysis.
Unit – 2:
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries- polymerase chain reaction

(PCR) and applications- Southern/Northern bloting analysis, RFLP, RAPD, AFLP analysis.
Genomics- Structural genomics-Gene mapping-Comparative genomics -Functional genomics
-Gene expression -EST’s-DNA arrays.
Unit – 3:
Gene transfers - Introduction of Foreign Genes into Cells: electroporation, biolistic

transfer, Transfection, selectable markers, microinjection, embryonic stem cells, reporter
transgenes, Homologous recombination - "knock-ins / outs”.
Unit – 4:
Transgenics- Approaches to transgenesis: Microinjection / Embryonic stem cells/Sperm-

mediated transfer -Mammalian cloning by nuclear transfer - "Dolly” as an example. Production
of transgenic sheep, cattle, pigs and plants. - BT cotton, Transgenesis and growth- performance
in farm livestock, & plants-The growth hormone in both bovine and porcine systems.
Unit – 5:
Edible vaccines, Disease resistance in transgenic organisms, Pest and herbicide resistant
plants. The Mx gene system for anti-viral disease resistance in animals. Issues in Genetic
Engineering - Biosafety of transgenic organisms.-Food safety of GMOs-Environmental safety .
121
Recommended Texts:
8. Old, R,W. and Primrose, S.B., Principles of Gene Manipulation (5th edition)
9. Blackwells Scientific Publications, Oxford, U.K. 1997
FOURTH SEMESTER
Paper – 19
Title of the paper Strategic Management

Core II IV 4
Unit 1
Frame work of strategic management – Basic concepts of Strategic Management; Phases of
Strategic Management, Benefits & Challenges to Strategic Management, Impact of Globalization
in Strategic Management.
Unit 2
Corporate governance – the role of Board of Directors & Top management in Corporate
Governance, Agency theory versus Stewardship theory in corporate governance social
responsibility of strategic decision makers.
Environmental Scanning, Industrial Analysis & Organizational Analysis including

Porter’s approach to industry analysis.
Unit 3
Strategy Formulation- SWOT Analysis for generation of alternatives, TOWS Matrix ,
Corporate Strategy ,Types of strategies, Portfolio Analysis ( BCG Matrix, GE Business Screen &
Corporate parenting).
122
Unit 4
Strategic choice & Implementation, Functions & Importance of Functional Strategies;
Strategy alternatives; Considering Strategic Variations & Strategic Choice, Strategic
Implementation
Unit 5
Evaluation & Control of Strategy –Measuring Performance & Strategic Information
Systems. Challenges of Strategic Management with respect to technology and Innovation.
Recommended Text
1. Thomas L Wheelmen, J. David Hunger and Krish Rangarajan, Strategic Management and
Business Policy, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Lawrance, Jaunch & William Blucck Business Policy and Strategic Management, McGraw
Hill Intl, 2003
3. P.K.Ghosh, Business Policy and strategic Management, Sultan Chand and sons
Paper -20 - Elective
Title of the paper Animal Biotechnology

Core II IV 3
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
History of animal biotechnology: Basic principles as applicable to animal science-

Conventional methods of animal improvement, selective breeding and cross breeding. Oestrus
synchronization. In vitro fertilization, Embryo preservation, Embryo collection, evaluation and
transfer.
Unit – 2:
Animal health – disease diagnosis, hybridoma technique, monoclonal antibodies,

application of probes for disease diagnosis of existing and emerging animal diseases.
Prophylaxis - Vaccines, Oral vaccines – DNA Vaccines in animal disease.
123
Unit – 3:
Cell culture: primary and established culture; organ culture; tissue culture;
Disaggregation of tissue and primary culture; cell separation, Slide and coverslip cultures, flask
culture, test tube culture techniques, cell synchronization, cryo preservation. Scaling up of
animal cell culture, cell line and cloning – micromanipulation and cloning, somatic cell cloning.
Biology and characterization of cultured cells. Karyotyping; measuring parameters for growth,
measurement of cell death, apoptosis and its determination, cytotoxicity assays.
Unit – 4:
Nuclear magnetic resonance methods of monitoring cell metabolism- culturing animal

cells in fluidised bed reactors- GPI- Anchored fusion proteins- harvesting GPI- anchored proteins
from CHO cells- Hematopoietic cells for cellular and gene therapy.
Unit – 5:
Identification and isolation of genes of economic importance. Transgenic animals:

Production and application; transgenic animals in livestock improvement, transgenic animals as
model for human diseases. Impact of gene cloning and Bioethics. Intellectual Property Rights
(IPR), Patents. Biosafety – Regulations on experiments and release of Genetically Modified
Organisms.
Recommended Texts:
1. Culture of animal cells. 3rd edition. Ian Freshney, Wiley-Liss.

2. Recombinant DNA. 2nd edition. J.D.Watson, M.Gillman, J.Witknowski and M.Zoller,
Scientific American Books, NY, 1992.
3. Animal cell biotechnology: Methods and protocols by Nigel Jenkins (Ed). Humana Press,
New Jersey. Pp 1-302, 1999.
4. Genetic Engineering of Animals by (Ed) A.Puhler, VCH Publishers, Weinheim, FRG,
1993.
5. Animal Cell culture – Practical approach. Ed. John R.W.Masters, Oxford.
124
Extra Disciplinary Elective – Paper-21
Title of the paper Bioethics, Biosafety, IPR, Human rights and
Social issues
Core II IV 3
COURSE OUTLINE
Unit – 1:
Introduction: Historical development of Human Rights and Human Relations –
International and National. International Instruments: United Nation Commission for Human
Rights,
Unit – 2:
European Convention for Human Rights, UDHR, Civil and Political Rights-National
Instruments:National and State Instruments: Development of Human Rights – Article 21 of
Indian Constitution.
Unit – 3:
Human Relations: Political relations, Ethnic and Communal relations, Socio-cultural
relations, Organisation relation etc., and related Human Rights.Economics of Human Rights and
Relations – Adam Smith’s thoughts on moral sentiments – Economic philosophy of
Thiruvalluvar.
Unit – 4:
Student’s Activity: Assignment/Case study/Term paper etc.,
Unit – 5:
Impact of gene cloning and Bioethics. Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) and patents,
biosafety, containment facilities for Genetic Engineering experiments, Regulations on field
experiments and release of GMO’s (Genetically Modified Organisms), labeling of GM
(Genetically Modified) Foods.
Recommended Texts:
1. Trayror, P.C., Frederic.R. and Koch, M. 2002. Biosafety. Board of Trustees, Michigan
State University, USA.
2. Benjamin Lewin, 2000, Genes VII, First edition, Oxford, New York.
3. Paul R.C., 2000.Situations of Human Rights in India.Efficient offset printers.
4. Beauchamp, T.L. and Leroy, W.1999.Contemporary issues in bioethics.Wardsworth
publishing Co. Belmont, California.
125
5. Bishop.M.J and Rawlings, 1987, Nucleic acid and protein sequence analysis, First, IRL
Press, England.
6. Krech, D., David, K., Crutchfield, R.S. and Ballachey E.L. 1962. Individual in society.
A textbook of social psychology. Mc Graw- Hill.
7. William, S Klug and Michel, R Cummings, 2003, Concepts of Genetics, Seventh edition
Pearson Education, Singapore.
8. Paul, R.C., 2000.Situations of Human Rights in India, Efficient Offset printers,
9. Marc Galanter, Social Inequality.
10. Adam Smith, Theory of Moral Sentiments
11. Thiruvlalluvar, Thirukural: Arathuppal and Porutpal
12. Kretch & Crutchfield, Social Psychology
126
7. M. Sc . DEGREE COURSE IN BOTANY
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
Title of the Course/ Paper PAPER-IX

CORE- CELL BIOLOGY, GENETICS,
BIOSTATISTICS AND PLANT BREEDING
Category of the Course Year/ Semester Credit- 4 Subject Code
II Year
III Semester
Prerequisites Basic Fundamental Knowledge on subjects
Objectives of the Course Imparts Advance level knowledge in above subjects
CELL BIOLOGY, GENETICS, BIOSTATISTICS AND PLANT BREEDING
UNIT I
Prokaryotes and eukaryotes, -Cytoplasm - Physical and chemical properties.

Plasma membrane molecular structure, chemical nature, function; Signal transduction G
proteins- secondary messengers- Cell organelles- Endoplasmic Reticulum, dictyosomes,
Microbodies-Iysosomes, glyoxysomes and peroxisomes.
Mitochondria occurrence ultra structure, chemical composition and function. Plastid

classification, morphology, ultra structure, origin, development chemistry and function.
Mitochondrial and chloroplast DNA-semi autonomy of the organelle DNA
UNIT- II
Nucleus -General structure- Nuclear envelope, Concepts on nucleoplasmic index and nuclear
volume, nuclear pore complex, nucleo cytoplasmic relationship. Ultra structure and chemistry.
Nucleolus - Ultra structure - chemistry- Nucleolar DNA, RNA and proteins, nucleo-cytoplasmic
relations, persistence nucleolus.
Cell division - mitosis,; cell cycle - significance, abnormal mitosis in cancer mitotic movement
and mitotic apparatus and significance, mitotic inducers and inhibitors.
Meiosis: Biochemical (Molecular) and cytological changes – significance- synaptonemal
complex- significance..
127
Chromosomes - morphology, fine structure - telomere-types: lamp brush, polytene,
isochromosomes - heterochromatin and euchromatin, chromosome identification - banding
techniques
Unit- III
Mendelian and Non Mendelian inheritance; linkage, crossing over, chiasma frequency;
chromosome mapping, tetrad analysis.
Genetics of sex - sex determination in plants, sex linkage - dominant and recessive sex linked
genes - holandric genes; sex linked diseases - hemophilia, colour blindness - Pedigree chart.
Multiple alleles, pseudo alleles - Complementation test polygenes quantitative inheritance.
Extranuclear inheritance, mitochondrial genome -Yeast and higher eukaryotes, Male sterility in
corn. Immunogentics- Nature and types of antigen and antibodies. Genetic theories of Antibody
formation
Mutation- classification- detection- characterization, mutagens - chemical and physical agents

clastogens, carcinogens. Transposons . Chromosomal aberration- structural types .Polyploidy-
types- and significance.
Bacterial genetics - transformation, transduction and conjugation; biochemical genetics -

Neurospora, Beadle and Tatum experiment.
UNIT IV
Population genetics - Gene frequency and gene pool- Hardy-Weinberg Law - Factors affecting -
genetic drift.
Eugenics- types- Human karyotypes - variation - syndromes - Genetic counseling-Gene concept -
fine structure - split gene - exon and introns. Gene function - protein synthesis, genetic code, -
Biostatics- Analysis of quantitative characters on the basis of mean, standard deviation and
standard error .- Chi-square test for goodness of Fit; Null hypothesis, level of Significance-
Student's t-distribution ; " t " test
UNIT V
Objectives - genetic variability and its role in plant breeding. Breeding methods self and cross
pollinated plants, vegetatively propagated and apomictic plants.
Heterosis and in breeding depression-genetic basis use of polyploidy and mutant varieties in the
improvement of crop plants.
128
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Brown and Berke: Text Book of Cytology, Blackstains Sons & Co.
2. Brachet and Mirsky (ed.): The Cell, Academic Press, Vols. 16.
3. Darlington, C.D. : Recent Advances in Cytology, Blarkstains Sons & Co.
4. Lewin, B. 2000. Genes VII, Oxford University Press, USA.
5. DeRobertis, E.D.P. and De Robertis, E.M.F. 2001. Cell and Molecular Biology, Lippineott
Williams & Wilkins, Bombay.
6. Sharma, A.K. and Sharma, A. 1980. Chromosome Techniques. Theory and Practice,
Butterworth.
7. Stebbins, J.L. Chromosomal Evolution in Higher Plants, Edward Arnold Publ., London.
8. Roy, S.C. and Kumar, K.D.C. 1977. Cell Biology, New Central Book Agency, Calcutta.
9. Wolfe, S.L. 1993. Molecular and Cellular Biology, Wordsworth Publ. Co., California, USA..
10)Singleton, W.R. 1963. Elementary Genetics.
11)Gardner, E.J. 1972. Principles of Genetics.
12)Levin B. 2000. Genes VIII
13)Stansfield, W.D. 1969. Theory and problems of Genetics.
14) Stick Berger, M. W. 1976. Genetics.
15)Sinnott, E.W. Dunn, L.E. and Dobzhansky, T. 1973. Principles of Genetics.
16)Hays, K.K. Immer, F.R. and Smith D.C. 1985. Methods of Plant Breeding.
17)Chaudhari, H.K.1984. Elementary Principles of Plant Breeding.
18)Kenneth, J and Frey. 1980. Plant Breeding.
19)Gustafson, J.P. 1984. Gene manipulation In Plant Breeding and Evolution.
20)Ahluwaalia, K. B. 1996. Genetics.
21 )Genetics, Winter,P.C., Hickey,G.I. and Fletcher, H.L., Viva Books 2002
22). Klug, Concepts of Genetics, Pearson Education
23.) Genes VII, Benjamin Lewin, OUP
24). Genetics a Molecular Approach, 2nd Ed. Brown, T.A., Chapman and Hall, 1992
25. Burnham, C.R. 1962. Discussions in Cytogenetics, Burgess Publishing Comp. Minnesota.
26. . Khush,G.S. 1973. Cytogenetics of aneuploids, Academic Press, New York.
27. . Sybenga, J. 1975. Meiotic configurations. Springer Verlag, Berlin Heidel Berg.
28. . Lewin, B. 2004. Gene VIII, Prentice Hall.
29. . Russel, P.J. 1998. Genetics (5 th edition), The Benjamin / Cummings Publishing
Company, Inc., USA.
32. . Strickberger, Genetics, Prentice Hall.
Russel, P.J. 1998. Genetics. The Benjamin/Cunnings Publishing Co., Inc., USA.
33.. Khush, G.S. 1973. Cytogenetics of Aneuploids, Academic Press, London.
36. . Chahal, G.S. and Gosal, S.S. Principles and Procedures of Plant
BreedingBiotechnological
and Conventional Approaches, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
37. . Darbeshwar Roy, 2000. Plant Breeding: Analysis and Exploitation of variation, Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi.
38. . Singh, P. 2001. Essentials of Plant Breeding, Kalyani Publishers, Hyderabad.
129
Title of the Course/ Paper PAPER-X
CORE- PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
Category of the Course Year/ Semester Credit-4 Subject Code
II Year III Semester
PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
UNIT I
Nucleic acids - Base pairing and variations in base composition.

Types of DNA. Chargaff's rule - DNA size - fragility - melting curves -hydrophobic interactions
denaturation - renaturation - circular and superhelical DNA - topoisomerase - special base -
Repeated sequence - Single stranded DNA - DNA methylation, structure of RNA. Inhibitors of
nucleic acid biosynthesis- DNA synthesis and sequencing
UNIT II
DNA replication - basic rule of replication – DNA replication in prokaryotes enzymology DNA
topoisomerase - DNA polymerase - ligase, helicase Termination of DNA replication -
Replication of eukaryotic chromosomes- Eukaryotic DNA polymerase- DNA repair mechnism-
DNA methylation- DNA gyrase.
UNIT- III
Transcription - Enzymology - RNA polymerase - classes of RNA molecules - transcription in
Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - splicing mechanisms - Reverse transcriptions. Inhibitors of
nucleic acid biosynthesis
UNIT- IV
Translation: Outline of translation. Post transcriptional processing of mRNA Inhibitors of
translation- Genetic code – characters- codon and anticodons- Wobble hypothesis .
UNIT V
Gene regulation - Operon concept - Lac repressor- -c-AMP, Catabolic repression-, ara - operon
and trp operons - Gene expression in eukaroytes- gal gene expression in Yeast
130
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Alberts, B., Bray, D., Lewis, J. Raff, M., Roberts, K. and Watson, J.D. 1989. Molecular
Biology of the cell, Garland Publishing Inc., New York.
2. Lodish, H., Berk, A., Zipursky, S.L., Matsudaira, P., Baltimore, D. and Darnell, J. 2000.
Molecular Cell Biology, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York, USA.
3. Richard, M., Twyman and Wisden, W. 1999. Advanced Molecular Biology, Viva Books Pvt.
Ltd.
4. Turner, P.C., Mclenann,A.G., Bates, A.D. and White, M.R.H. 2001. Instant notes on
molecular biology.
5. Snustad Peter, D. Michael J. Simmons. Principles of Genetics, John Wiley Sons.
6. Robert H. Tamarin. Principles of Genetics, Tata McGraw Hill Company.
7. Benjamin Lewin . Genes VIII, Prentice Hall.
8. Westhead, D.R. J.H. Parish & R.M. Twyman. Bioinformatics, Viva Books.
Title of the Course/ Paper PAPER-XI

CORE- PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
II Year III Semester
PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT-I
Recombinant DNA technology – Tools of recombinant DNA: restriction endonucleases and
other enzymes; vectors; plasmid, bacteriophage and other viral vectors, cosmids, Ti plasmid,
yeast artificial chromosome- choice of vectors- gene cloning principles and techniques-
construction of genomics/ cDNA libraries, , PCR, PAGE, Northern and Southern blotting RFLP,
RAPD, AFLP based DNA finger printing.
UNIT II
Methods of crop improvements- gene transfer- indirect method- Agrobacterium mediated gene
transfer gene transfer- Direct DNA gene transfer technology- liposome mediated gene transfer-
biolistic gun( Shot gun method)- Electroporation- silicon carbide method -microinjection
131
UNIT- III
Biotechnology and transgenics- Herbicide resistance- resistance against glyphosate and Basta-
Resistance against pests and insects- Bacillus thuringiensis – Bt genes endotoxins- resistance
against pathogens
UNIT- IV
Novel introduction and expression. - antisense and sense gene suppression- biosynthetic
pathways to produce/accumulate alternative products.
UNIT- V
Transgenic plants as bioreactors, Transgenic plants as vaccine production systems, Transgenics
for Phytoremediation of contaminated soils, Regulation and release of Genetically modified
organism in India- Recombinant DNA guidelines, 1990-Guidelines for research in transgenic
crops, 1998 – Regulation of GM food – Status of development of GM food in India .
REFERNCE BOOKS
Trigiano, R.N., and D.J. Gray (eds.). 2000. Plant tissue culture concepts and laboratory exercises.
CRC Press. (Textbook). 2nd Edition.
Kyte, M., and Kleyn, J. 1996. Plant from test tubes. Timber Press. Auge, R. et al., 1995. In vitro
culture and its applications in horticulture. Science Publishers, Inc.
Crispeels, M.J. and D. E. Sadava. 2003. Plants, genes and agriculture. Jones and Bartlett
Publishers.
Gamborg, O.L. and G. C. Phillips (eds). 1995. Plant cell, tissue and organ culture. Springer Lab
Manual.
Potrykus, I, and G. Spangenberg (eds.). 1995. Gene transfer to plants. Springer Lab Manual.
Jones, H. 1996. Plant gene transfer and expression protocols. Methods in molecular biology . 49.
Humana Press.
Kreuzer, H, and A. Massey. 1996. Recombinant DNA and biotechnology. A guide for teachers.
ASM Press.
132
1) Freidfelder 1990. Molecular Biology.
2) Rasthogi 1997. Concept in Molecular Biology.
3) Brown. T.A. 1999. Genomes John & Sons (Asin). Singapore.
4) Howkins J.D. 1996. Gene structure and expression. Cambridge.
5) Twyman. R.M. 1998. Advanced Molecular Biology. ViVa book, Chennai.
6) Benjamin Lewin, 2000. Gene VII.
7) Watson, 1996 4th Ed. Molecular biology of the gene. Benjamin and cumming publication.
8) Datnel, Lodish and Baltimore 1968. Molecular cell biology. Scientific American
publication
9) Lycett and Grierson ed. Genetic engineering of crop plants.
10) Brown ,T.A. 1990. Gene cloning. An introduction.
11) Ole R.W. , and S. B. Primrose. Principles of gene manipulation. An introduction to
genetic engineering.
12) Brown. T.A. 1999. Genomes. John Wiley & Sons Singapore.
Title of the Course/ Paper PAPER-XII

PRACTICAL- IV ( COVERING THEORY PAPERS
IX, X & XI
Category of the Course Year/ Semester Credit- 4 Subject Code
I Year I Semester
Objectives of the Course Imparts Advance level training in above subjects
CELL BIOLOGY
1. Study of dividing cells – squash
2. Calculate the mitotic index of onion root tip cells
3. Smear techniques
4. Study of induced aberrations in onion root tips employing chemicals and plant extracts.
5. Calculation of aberration percentage of chemical treated onion root tip cells
6. Demonstration of Banding techniques
7. .Induction of polyploidy using colchicine
8. .Observation of Bchromosomes in suitable material
9. Study of sub cellular organelles from electron micrographs
10. Nuclear stains
11. Pre fixatives
12. Demonstration of Salivary gland chromosomes
13. Hybridisation techniques - emasculation – bagging
133
GENETICS
13.Genetics problem based on the theory

14.Chromosome mapping
15. Calculation of variation pattern in fruits/leaves/ seeds - standard deviation standard error
– based on the data given.
16. Chi square test
17. Students “t” Test
18. Plant breeding spotters taken from standard text books
PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND BIOTECHNOLOGY

14. Isolation of Genomic DNA
15. Isolation of RNA
16. Electrophoresis of nucleic acids
17. Encapsulation of callus cells/protoplast in alginate leads (Demonstration only. Expected
to know protocols)
18. Preparation of competent E.Coil cells
19. Transformation and recovery of plasmid clones
20. Isolation of plasmid DNA
21. RE1striction analysis of DNA
22. Southern blotting
23. Northern blotting
24. Hybridization analysis of DNA and RNA
25. Molecular. cloning and screening for recombinants
26. RFLP techniques
27. PCR techniques
Cot curve, DNA melting curve, tertiary structure of protein, tRNA, reco\1nition site for HIND
III, EGO RI, Bam H1, Puc Plasmid, PCR flow chart, SDS, Southern blotting, X-ray diffraction
protein DNA, Ethidium bromide, Lac Operon. Simple problems based on the theory syllabus.
134
Title of the Course/ Paper
ELECTIVE SUBJECT- III- BIOINFORMATICS
II Year III
Semester
BIOINFORMATICS
UNIT- I
Introduction to Bioinformatics – Definitions Proteomics, genomics , Need, Development and

Potential of bioinformatics, Basic on internet- Biological Data bases Sequence Data Banks –
protein sequence data bank. SWISSPROT, Nucleic acid sequence data bank – GenBank, EMBL
nucleotide sequence data bank,– protein Data Bank (PDB), Genome data bank .
UNIT-II
Predicting functional domains of gene, Predicting secondary structure of RNA Predicting

molecular structure and functional domains of proteins,
UNIT-III
Bioinformatics in Taxonomy and Biodiversity – Taxonomic data base design and, - Cladistic
analysis using models - Molecular phylogeny
UNIT-IV
Microarray- Protein array, RNA arrays, DNA microarrays- Applications. Human genome
project and medically relevant genes, Drug targeting-
UNIT-V
Techniques in Bioinformatics- FASTABLAST, Multiple Sequence Analysis- Open Reading

Frame
135
Reference books:
AndrewsR. Leach. Molecular Modeling: Principles and Applications
Ignacimuthu, S. Plant Biotechnology, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
Leonard , Banaszak. Foundation of Structural Biology
Rastogi, S. C1993, Mandiratta,Namita, Rastogi, Parag.. Bioinformatics-Concepts, Skill

Applications
Shanmugavel. P. Principles of Bioinformatics Pointer Publication Jaipur
Title of the Course/ Paper EXTRA DISCIPLINARY- I - HERBAL DRUG

BIOTECHNOLOGY
II Year III
Semester
HERBAL DRUG BIOTECHNOLOGY

Unit I:
Crude Drugs – Scope & Importance, Classification (Taxonomical, Morphological Chemical,

Pharmacological); Cultivation, Collection & processing of Crude Drugs.
Unit II:
Medicinal & Aromatic Plants-Cultivation and Utilization of Medicinal & Aromatic Plants in
India. Genetics as applied to Medicinal herbs.
Unit III:
Tissue Culture of medicinal Plants Plant Tissue Culture as source of medicines, Plant Tissue
Culture for enhancing secondary metabolite production (Withania somnifera, Rauwolfia
serpentina, Catheranthus roseus, Andrographis paniculata, Dioscorea sp.); Anticancer drugs,
Biogenesis of Phytopharmaceuticals.
136
Unit IV:
Analysis of Phytochemicals
Methods of Drug evaluation (Morphological, Microscopic, Physical & Chemical). Preliminary
screening, Assay of Drugs – Biological evaluation / assays, Microbiological methods- Chemical
Methods of Analysis and Detection of Adulterants: Chemical estimations, Spectrophotometry &
Fluorescene analysis. Drug adulteration – Types of adulterants.
Unit V:
Types of Phytochemicals_
Carbohydrates & derived products; Glycosides - extraction methods (Digitalis, Aloe,
Dioscorea,); Tannins (Hydrolysable & Condensed types); Volatile Oils - extraction methods
(Clove, Mentha); UNIT VII : Types of Phytochemicals_II -Alkaloids - extraction methods
(Taxus, Papaver, Cinchona); Flavonoids- extraction methods,
Resins- extraction methods.-: Applications of Phytochemicals Application of phytochemicals in
industry and healthcare; Biocides, Biofungicides, Biopesticides.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Pharmacognosy, C. K. Kokate, A. P. Purohit & S. B. Gokhale (1996), Nirali Prakashan, 4th
Ed.
2. Natural Products in medicine: A Biosynthetic approach (1997), Wiley.
3.. Hornok,L. (ed.) (1992). Cultivation & Processing of Medicinal Plants, Chichister, U. K: J.
Wiley & Sons.
4. . Trease & Evans, Pharmacognosy – William Charles Evans, 14th ed. (1989), Harcourt
Brace & Company.
137
FOURTH SEMESTER
Title of the Course/ Paper PAPER-XIII

CORE- PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS
II Year IVSemester
PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS

UNIT- I
Atomic structure; chemical bonds - Ionic bond, covalent bond, co-ordination bond, hydrogen
bond; Radioactivity; Hydrogen ion concentration (pH), buffers.
Biomolecules: Carbohydrates - properties of mono, oligo and polysaccharides. Structure and
functions of trioses, tetroses, pentoses, hexoses, maltose, sucrose, starch and pectin-glycosidic
linkage, deoxy sugars, glycoproteins, aminosugars, isomerism and mutarotation.
UNIT- II
Biomolecules: Amino acids and proteins, ionic forms of amino acids -zwitterion, isoelectric pH,
optical isomers of amino acids, physical properties of amino acids. Formation of peptide bond -
peptides – structure of polypeptides primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary-protein
structure. Ramachandran plot - denaturation of proteins. Protein purification - types of
chromatography. Electrophoresis of proteins (native and SDS-PAGE) and protein sequencing.
UNIT- III
Biomolecules: Lipids - structure of fatty acids and glycerol - phospholipids, glycolipids, steroids.
– Biosynthesis and Oxidation of fatty acid - Glyoxalate pathway – Gluconeogenesis
UNIT- IV
Bioenergetics - Laws of thermodynamics - enthalpy, entropy and free energy. Exergonic and
endergonic reactions. Redox potential. Structure and hydrolysis of ATP, high energy
compounds-
UNIT- V
Enzymes- Properties- apoenzyme, Cofactors, metallic activators- coenzymes. Nomenclature and
Classification- Enzyme kinetics – Concept of active sites Michaelis-Menton equation - enzyme
inhibition - enzyme regulation.
General principles of extraction and purification of enzymes. Multienzyme complex – Enzyme
immobilization. Application of enzymes in industry and medicine.
138
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Principles of Biochemistry by A.L.Lehninger, D.L.Nelson & M.M.Cox. (1993) Worth
Publishers, New York.
2. Biochemistry by L.Stryer (1994) Freeman & Co, New York.
3. Biochemistry by G. Zubay (1988) Macmillan Publishing Co, New York.
4. The vital force: A study of Bioenergetics by F.M.Harold (1986) Freeman & Co,
New York.
Title of the Course/ Paper PAPER- XIV

CORE- PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
II Year IVSemester
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
UNIT- I
Photosynthesis – Properties of light – Interaction between radiant energy and matter,
fluorescence and phosphorescence. Ultrastructure of chloroplast – Biosynthesis of chlorophyll –
Van Niel’s hypothesis. Hills Reaction – Red drop phenomenon – Emerson enhancement effect,
two pigment system – I & II. Light harvesting systems(LHS). Reaction centre, P680, P700, water
oxidation complex, electron transport system – Z-scheme – cyclic – non cyclic – pseudocyclic
electron flow – photophosphorylation- mechanism – photosynthetic carbon reduction (PCR)
pathways in C3, C4 and CAM plants Biochemical variants of C4 pathway. C3-C4 intermediates.
CO2 concentration mechanism in C4 plants – C2 cycle-photorespiration and its significance.
Biochemistry and molecular biology of RUBISCO.
UNIT- II
Respiration – RQ – Glycolysis – pentose phosphate pathway – Kreb’s cycle – significance -
Modern concept on Electron transport system and oxidative phosphorylation – Ultrastructure of
mitochondria-Energetics of respiration – Respiratory inhibitors – Cyanide resistant respiration.
Amphibolic role of respiration.
139
UNIT-III
Secondary metabolites. Biosynthesis and functions of flavonoids, terpenoids, alkaloids, steroids.

Anthocyanin and Lignin – Role of secondary metabolites in plant –
Nitrogen metabolism – Source of soil nitrogen. Range of nitrogen fixing organisms – Legume -
Rhizobium, symbiosis, biochemistry and physiology. Nitrogenase, characteristics and functions
of Leghaemoglobin, Genetics of nitrogen fixation. Nitrate reduction – Biochemistry and
characteristics of NR and NIR – assimilation of ammonia. GDH and GS-GOGAT pathways –
Transamination, Reductive amination .Aminoacid families. Synthesis of amino acids. Aspartate
synthesis, aromatic amino acid synthesis. Interaction between photosynthesis and nitrogen
metabolism.
UNIT IV
Water relations of plants: physico-chemical properties of water – water potential. Mechanism of

absorption of water – active and passive transport – Apoplast and symplast concept. Ascent of
sap. Transpiration – types-Movement of stomata- mechanism and transpiration.
Antitranspirants, Guttation-.Mineral nutrition – criteria for essentiality. Macro and micro
nutrients and their ‘role. Deficiency symptoms. Absorption of solutes – passive, active diffusion
and facilitated diffusion – symport and antiport – translocation of solutes – pathways and
mechanism.
UNIT- V
Growth and development: Growth kin~tics – Biosynthesis and mode of action of phytohormones
– auxins, gibberellins, cytokinins, abscissic acid. Phytochrome – properties and photochemical
transformation. Movement – nastic and tropic movements. Seed dormancy – causes and methods
to break seed dormancy – physiology of seed germination – abscission – and senescence. -Stress
physiology.- Biotic stresses- Pathogens and insects- Abiotic stresses:- Cold, heat ,light, oxidative
and pollutants
Reference Books
1. Bidwell. R. G. S. 1979 Plant Physiology. Macmillon Delhi.
2. Datta. S. C. 1989.Plant Physiology. Central Book Depot. Allahabad.
3. Gauch. H. G.1972 Inorganic Plant Nutrition. Hutchinson & Dowd. New York.
4. Govindji. 1982. Photosynthesis. AP. New York
5. Hall. D. V. K. K. Rao. Photosynthesis. Arnold London
6. Jacob. W. P. 1979. Plant Hormones and Plant Development. Cambridge University Press.
Cambrigde
7. Khan. A. A. 1982. The Physiology and Biochemistry of Seed development, Dormancy
and Germination. Elesiver. Amsterdam
8. Salisbury. F. B., C. W. Ross.1991 Plant Physiology. Wassworth Pub. Co. Belmont
9. Ting. I. P. 1982.Plant Physiology. Addison Wesley Pb. Philippines
10.Michealis. I. And J. C. Torry. 1956. Plant in Action W. H. Freeman
140
11.Lea, P. J. and R. C. Leegood. 1993. Plant Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, John
Wiley & Sons. New York.
12. Gregory, R. P. F. 1989. Biochemistry of Photosynthesis Wiley Chichester
13. Sage, R. and R. K. Monson (eds). 1999. The Biology of C4 Plants AP New York.
14. Dixon, R. O. D. and C. T. Wheller 1986. Nitrogen Fixation in Plants Blackie. Glasgow.
15. Postgate. J. 1987. Nitrogen Fixation 2 nd Edition Cassel, London
17. Stacey,G., R. H. Burris and Evans, H. J. 1992. Biological Nitrogen Fixation. Chapman
and Hall, New York
18. Mann, J. 1987, Secondary Metabolism Clarendron Press, Oxford
19. Harborne, J. B. Introduction to Ecological Biochemistry. Academic Press. Oxford.
20.Bonner, J. and J. E. Varner. 1979.Plant Physiology. Macmillon Delhi

21.Conn. E. E. and P. K. Stump. 1976.Outlines of Biochemistry Wiley Eastern
22. Robert Horton, H. L. A. Moran, R. S. Ochs, J. D. Rawn and K. G. Scrimgeour. 1996. 22.
Principles of Biochemistry. Printice hall International. NJ.
23. Fersht. A. 1985. Enzyme Structure and Metabolism. W. H. Freeman New York
24. Lewin. B.1994. Genes. V. Oxford University Press. New York
25. Ferrier, R. J. and Collind, R. M. 1995. Monassaharides Wiley, New York.
26. Moore, T. S. (ed).1993. Lipid Metabolism in Plants. CRC Press. Boca Raton
27. Murphy, D. J (ed) 1994. Designer Oil Crops. VCH Press. Germany
28. Dey, P. M. J. B. Harborne (eds)1997 Methods in Plant Biochemistry, Academic Press
London
29. Dey, P. M. J. B. Harborne (eds)1997.Plant Biochemistry, Academic Press London
30. Hopkins, W.G. 1995. Introduction to Plant Physiology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York,
USA.
31. . Nobel, P.S. 1999. Physiochemical and Environmental Plant Physiology, Academic Press,
San Diego, USA.
32. . Taiz and Zeiger, 1998. Plant Physiology (2 nd ed.)
33.. Voet and Voet, 1992. Biochemistry, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, USA.
141
Title of the Course/ Paper PAPER - XV
CORE: APPLIED PLANT CELL AND TISSUE
CULTURE
II Year IV
Semester
APPLIED PLANT CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE

UNIT-I
Laboratory organization, methods of sterilization (including ozonization, airpurification), Media
composition- standard media – MS and B5 media -growth of callus and cell cultures,
Regeneration, methods of micro propagation and their use in forestry, horticulture, agriculture
and floriculture.- Culture initiation; cell suspension culture; micropropagation of herbaceous &
woody plants; comparative study of solid & liquid media for micropropagation; suitabilities of
different matrices for micropropagation; cell suspension culture in bioreactors; production of a
secondary metabolite in culture; biotransformation by cell line.
UNIT-II
Haploids – production of homozygous lines and uses. Somatic embryogenesis and synthetic
seeds, cryo preservation and germplasm storage
UNIT- III
Protoplast isolation and culture and somatic hybridization- Somaclonal and gemotoclonal
variations.
meristem tip culture for virus free plants,
UNIT-IV
Approaches and factors affecting the production of secondary metabolites in in vitro. Principal
classes of secondary metabolites. Production of pharmaceutically important drugs – alkaloids,
food adititives and insecticides in vitro system.
UNIT-V
Bioreactors; types of bioreactors- stirred tank, air lift, membrane type process and
operation. Bioreactor for production of biomass (secondary metabolites)- Design of TC
laboratory and management
142
Reference Books :
Trigiano, R.N., and D.J. Gray (eds.). 2000. Plant tissue culture concepts and laboratory exercises.
CRC Press. (Textbook). 2nd Edition.
Kyte, M., and Kleyn, J. 1996. Plant from test tubes. Timber Press. Auge, R. et al., 1995. In vitro
culture and its applications in horticulture. Science Publishers, Inc.
Crispeels, M.J. and D. E. Sadava. 2003. Plants, genes and agriculture. Jones and Bartlett
Publishers.
Gamborg, O.L. and G. C. Phillips (eds). 1995. Plant cell, tissue and organ culture. Springer Lab
Manual.
Potrykus, I, and G. Spangenberg (eds.). 1995. Gene transfer to plants. Springer Lab Manual.
Jones, H. 1996. Plant gene transfer and expression protocols. Methods in molecular biology . 49.
Humana Press.
Bhojwani, S.S. and Razdan, M.K. 1996. Plant Tissue Culture: Theory and Practice (a
revised edition). Elsevier Science Publishers, New York, USA.
Bojwani, S.S. 1990. Plant Tissue Culture: Applications and Limitations, Elsevier
Science Publisher, New York, USA.
Collins, H.A. and Edwards, S. 1998. Plant Cell Culture, Bios Scientific Publishers, Oxford, UK.
Hall, R.D. (Ed.) 1999. Plant Tissue Culture: Techniques and Experiments, Academic
Press, New York.
Kartha, K.K. 1985. Cyropreservation of plant cells and organs. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida.
Khasim, S.M. 2002. Botanical Microtechnique: Principles and Practice, Capital

Publishing Company, New Delhi.
Vasil, I.K. and Thorpe, T.A. 1994. Plant Cell and Tissue Culture, Kluwer Academic Press, The
Netherlands.
143
Title of the Course/ Paper PAPER-XVI
PRACTICAL- V: ( Covering theory paper XIII, XIV &
XV)

II Year IV
Semester
PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY
1. Basic Biochemistry - Preparation of different types of solutions
2. Principles of Photometry - Colorimeter and Spectrophotometer- principles and
Applications.
3. To find complimentary colour for different coloured solutions by using colorimeter.
4. Preparation of standard graph for potassium dichromate (K2 Crp7) by using colorimeter
(OR) Verification of Beer- Lambert Law by using colorimeter.
5. Principles of pH meter and application
6. Determination of pH of lemon juice and detergent powder by using pH meter.
7. Determination of neutralization point of acid- base mixture by titration method using pH
meter.
8. Estimation of glucose by anthrone reagent method colorimetrically.
9. Estimation of aminoacids by ninhydrin method colorimetrically.
10. Estimation of proteins (Lowry's method and Bradford method ).
11. Extraction and separation of known and unknown amino-acids by using Paper
Chromatographic method.
12. Assay of the enzyme Catalase
13. Assay of the enzyme Peroxidase
14. Assay of the enzyme Dehydrogenase
(DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS)
1. Dialysis
2. Warburg manometer
3. Preparation of Buffers
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
1. Extraction and separation of photosynthetic pigments of Ca and C4 plants by paper

chromatographic method.
144
2. Extraction and separation of photosynthetic pigments of Ca and C4 plants by thin layer
chromatographic (TLC)method.
3. Extraction and separation of photosynthetic pigments of C3 and C4 plants by Column
chromatographic method.
4. Extraction and separation of photosynthetic pigments by Chemical method.
5. Estimation of Chlorophyll a, Chlorophyll b and Total chlorophyll by Arnon's method.
6. Estimation of Carotenoids by using colorimeter.
7. Determination of absorption spectra of Chlorophyll a and Chlorophyll b by using
colorimeter.
8. Determination of water potential by Plasmolytic method
9. Deficit (DPD) by weighing method.
10. Determination of effect of Chemicals on membrane permeability (Colorimetricaly)
11. Determination of effect of Temperature on membrane permeability (Colorimetricaly)
12. Effect of varying intensities of light on the rate of photosynthesis of an aquatic plant by
using Wi1mott's Bubble Counter
13. Effect -of varying wave lengths of light (Or Quality of light)on the rate of photosynthesis
of an aquatic plant by using Wilmot’s Bubble Counter.
14. Effect of varying concentrations of CO2 on the rate of photosynthesis of an aquatic plant
by using Wilmot’s Bubble Counter.
15. Determination of rate of respiration of different respiratory substrates by using Titration
method.
(DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS PLANT PHYSIOLOGY)
1. Dye reduction test (Hill's Reaction)

2. Polyacrylamide Gel Electrophoresis (PAGE and SDS PAGE)
3. Estimation of total nitrogen by Kjaldhal method.
4. Bio- assay of 2,4-D.
Bioassay of kinetin.
APPLIED PLANT CELL AND TISSUE CULTURE
Tissue culture laboratory design

Streilization
Inoculation of explant
Media preparation
Callus Culture and Cell suspension Culture
Organ Culture
Plant regeneration- Anther culture- Root culture
Morphogenetic studies
Cytodifferentation
Embryo dissection and embryo culture
145
Title of the Course/ Paper ELECTIVE -IV: ALGAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
II Year IV
Semester
ALGAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
UNIT- I
Objectives of algal biotechnology, Resource potential of algae. Commercial utility of algae.
Algae as a source of food and feed, algae as therapeutants, pigments, fine chemicals, fuel,
biofertilizers and hormones.
Classification of oceanic environments, biological importance of sea food from sea,
knowledge of Indian Ocean and adjacent seas.
UNIT-II
Phytoplankton (Fresh water and marine) seasonal succession, factors affecting distribution
and succession.Algae as a source of food and feed. Algae as biofertilizers and seaweed liquid
fertilizers, industrial uses of algae. Algae as food for fish, poultry and animals. Mass
cultivation of micro algae as source of protein and as feed.
UNIT-III
Therapeutic uses. Remedial compounds, antioxidant, antithromombiotic, anticoagulants,
wound healing, skin diseases, antiulcerogenic, antifungal, antibiotics and ant tumor, antiviral
compounds. Production of pigments and utilization.
Industrial application of algal fuel, algal lipids- transesterification to ester fuel- substitutes for
petroleum derived fuel, production of fine chemicals.
Positive and negative roles of algae in agriculture and aquaculture.Role of algae in closed
systems; symbiotic algae, parasitic algae; phycopathology.
UNIT-IV.
Immobilization of algae: Aim recent approaches in applied algology- secondary metabolites-
bioreactors, natural compounds of immobilization-methods of immobilization-alginate
beads--extraction of compounds.
Recombinant DNA technology in algae, cloning of algal genomics and genetic engineering
with reference to algae. Transformation systems in algae. Isolation of protoplasts,
regeneration of fusion of macro algae.
146
UNIT- V
Role of algae in environmental health; Sewage treatment, treating industrial effluent, heavy
metal removal, algae as indicators in assessing water quality and pollution; Saprobies index;
Monitoring , assessment, restoration and management of coastal and marine ecosystem
environment.
References:
Baddiley, S. Carey, N.H. Higgins, I.J. and Potter , W.G. 1994 .Micro algae: Biotechnology and
Microbiology. Cambride University Press.. Cambridge.
Becker. E.W. 1994. Micro algae Biotechnology and Microbiology. Cambridge University press.
Borowitzka, M.A. and borowizka, L.J. Microalgal Biotechnology.
Ignacimuthu, S. 1996. Basic Biotechnology. Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Ltd. New Delhi.
Trehan, K. 1990. Biotechnology. Naroisa Pub. House. London.
Trivedi, P.C. 2001. Algal Biotechnology.. Point publisher, Jaipur. India.
Alexopoulos, C. J. And Bold, H. C. Algae and Fungi. The Macmillion Co. London
Bold, H. C and Wynne, M. J. 1978.Introduction to the Algae: Structure and Function. Prantice
Hall of India New Delhi
Chapman,V. J. 1962. The Algae. Macmillan and Co. Ltd. New York.
Dioxn, P. S. 1973. Biology of Rhodophyta. Hafner Press. New York.
Dodge, J. E. The Fine Structure of Algal Cells. AP London
Fogg., G. E. 1953. The Metabolism of Algae. Methuen & Co. London
Fott, B.1959. Studies in Phylogy. Academia Prague
Fritsch, F. E.1935. The Structure and Reproduction of Algae, Vol. I. University Press Cambridge
Fritsch, F. E.1945. The Structure and Reproduction of Algae, Vol Il. I. University Press
Cambridge
Kumar H. D and H. N. Singh.1982. A text Book on Algae. Affiliated East- West Press Pvt. Ltd
Morris, I. 1968. An Introduction to the Algae, Hutchinson University Library, London
Pickett_ Heaps, J. D.1975. Green Algae. Sinauer Associates, Sunderland, Mass
Prescott, G. W. 1969.The Algae: A Review. Thomson Nelson & Sons. London
Round, F. E. 1973. The Biology of Algae. Edward Arnold. London
Smith, G. M.1955. Crytogamic Botany Vol. IMc Graw – Hill Co.New York
Smith, G. M.1955. Crytogamic Botany Vol. IMc Graw – Hill Co.New York
Smith, S and Reed, D. J.1997. Mycorrhizal mSymbiosis Academic Press.
Stein, J. R. Hand Book of Phycological Methods. University Press. Cambridge
147
8. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN CHEMISTRY
SECOND YEAR
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
CORE IX - ORGANIC CHEMISTRY – III
(90 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
The first part of the paper explains the instrumental methods and their application in the
determination of structure of organic molecules . The second part includes the basic concepts
of aromaticity and photochemistry . A detailed account of orbital symmetry which forms the
basis of many organic reactions is also included The last part of the subject deals with
heterocyclics, terpenoids and steroids.
UNIT I – PHYSICAL METHODS OF STRUCTURE DETERMINATION :
Principles and applications of ultraviolet and infra – red spectroscopy in organic structure
determination. Mass spectrometry and its applications. Optical rotatory dispersion and its
applications. Cotton effect, axial haloketone rule and octant rule. Problem solving approach. (for
molecules with a maximum number of C10) Woodward Fieser Rule (only application).
UNIT – II – NMR SPECTROSCOPY :
Nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy. Proton chemical shift, spin-spin coupling,
coupling constants and applications to organic stuctures-FT NMR 13C resonance spectroscopy
(elementary treatment).
148
UNIT III – ORGANIC PHOTOCHEMISTRY AND AROMATICITY :
Aromaticity of benzenoid, heterocyclic and non-benzenoid compounds, Huckel’s rule-
Aromatic systems with pi electron numbers other than six non-aromatic (cyclooctatetraene etc)
and anti-aromatic systems (cyclobutadiene etc)-systems with more than 10pi electrons –
Annulenes up to C18 (synthesis of these compounds is not expected).
.Photo chemistry of ketones, photo reduction, photocycloaddition, Paterno - Buchi
reaction, Di –p- methane rearrangement. cis- trans isomerisation, Barton reaction, photo- Fries
reaction, photochemistry of cyclohexadienones synthesis of Vit - D.
UNIT IV – ORBITAL SYMMETRY AND CORRELATION :
Pericyclic reaction-classification-orbital symmety-Woodword Hoffman rules, FMO-
Analysis of electrocyclic, cycloaddition and sigmatropic reactions-correlation diagram for,
cycloaddition reaction (2s + 2s) and (4s + 2s) – butadiene – cyclobutene system and Inter
conversion of hexatriene to cyclohexadiene. Structure of bulvalene, a fluxional molecule- Cope
and Claisen rearrangements.
UNIT V – HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS , TERPENOIDS AND STEROIDS :
Flavones, isoflavones, anthocyanins,.( Synthesis of parent and simple alkyl or aryl
substituted derivatives are expected). Synthesis of carotenoids - licopenes and Vitamin A1
(Reformatsky and Wittig reaction methods only). .
Elucidation of structure of cholesterol (by chemical degradation). Conversion of
cholestrol to progestrone, esterone and testosterone
TEXT BOOKS :
1. R.M. Silverstein, G.C. Bassler and Morril, 1991, Spectrometric identification of Organic
Compounds, 5th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, New York.
2. I.L. Finar, 1986, Organic Chemistry – Vol.II, 5th edition, ELBS Publication.
3. P.S. Kalsi, 2002, Spectroscopy of Organic Compounds, Wiley Eastern Ltd, Chennai.
4. H. Depuy and Orville, Molecular reaction and Photochemistry Charles, L.Chapman,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
149
5. L.A. Pacquette, 1978, Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry, Benjamin
Cummings Publishing Co., London.
6. J. March, 1992, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Singapore
7. F.A. Carey and R.J. Sundberg, 1990, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Plenum
Press, New York.
8. Neil S. Issacs, 1987, Physical Organic Chemistry, ELBS Publication.
9. P.S. Kalsi, 1999, Texbook of Organic Chemistry, Mcmillan India Ltd.
WEBSITES :
1. http :// info dome. sdsu, ./research/ guides/ science/ org chemistryblr. html
2. http :// www.liv.ac.uk/chemistry/links /reactions.html
3. http ://orgchem.chem..uconn.edu/namereact/named.html
4. www.gcocities.com/ chempen softwar4ee/reactions.html
CORE X - INORGANIC CHEMISTRY - III

(90 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the structures of solids and their properties.
To introduce applications of different spectroscopic methods in the study of Inorganic
compounds.
UNIT I SOLID STATE CHEMISTRY I
1.1 Structure of Solids; Comparison of X-Ray, Neutron and Electron Diffraction.
1.2 Structure of ZnS, Rutile, Pervoskite, Cadmium iodide and nickel arsenide; spinels and
inverse spinels.
1.3 Defects in solids, non-stoichometric compounds.
1.4 Use of X-ray powder diffraction data in identifying inorganic crystalline solids, details
for cubic systems.
150
UNIT II SOLID STATE CHEMISTRY II
2.1 Band theory, Semiconductors, Superconductors, Solid State Electrolytes.
2.2 Magnetic Behaviour - Dia, Para,,Ferro, Antiferro and Ferrimagnetism, Hysterisis,
Ferrites, Garnets.
2.3 Solid State Lasers, Inorganic Phosphorus
2.4 Diffusion in solids , types, Diffusion Coefficient, Diffusion Mechanisms, Vacancy and
Interstitial Diffusion, Formation of Spinels.
2.5 Reactions in Solid State and Phase Transitions. Solid Solutions: Order-Disorder
Transformations and Super Structure.
Unit III
3.1 Term states for dn - ions, energy diagrams, d-d transitions, Orgel and Sugano - Tanabe
diagrams, spin- orbit coupling, nephelauxetic effect.
3.2 Applications to inorganic systems of the following: Ultraviolet, visible, Infrared and
Raman spectroscopy of metal complexes, organometallic and simple inorganic
compounds with special reference to coordination sites, isomerism.
Unit - IV
Applications to inorganic systems of the following:
NMR, NQR, Mossbauer spectra: NMR spectra of 31P, 19F, NMR shift reagents, NQR-
Nitrosyl compounds. Mossbauer of Fe and Sn systems.
Unit-V
5.1 ESR introduction-Zeeman equation, g value, nuclear hyperfine splitting, Interpretation of
the spectrum, simple carbon centered free radicals. Anisotropy in g value and hyperfine
splitting constant. McConnels equation, Kramer’s theorem, esr of transition metal
complex of copper, manganese and vanadyl complexes.
5.2 Photoelectron spectroscopy – UPS and XPS-Photoelectron spectra – Koopman’s
theorem,-Fine structure in PES, Chemical shift and Correlation with electronic charges..
Text Books.
1. L.Smart, E.Moore – Solid State Chemistry – An Introduction-2nd Edition
2. A.R.West – Basic Solid state Chemistry 1961 – John Wiley
3. A.R.West – Solid state Chemistry and its applications 2007 – John Wiley
151
4. W.E Addison, 1961, Structural principles in Inorganic Chemistry, Longman
5. Structural principles in inorganic Chemistry –Adams
6. Physical methods in inorganic Chemistry – Russel Drago
7. Physical methods in inorganic Chemistry – E.A.V Ebsworth, Rankin and Caddock. 1987
References
1. R.B.Heslop and K.Jones, inorganic Chemistry, Elsevier Scintific Publ .1976.
2. H.A.O Hill and P.Day, physical methods in dvanced Inorganic Chemistry, John wiley
1968.
3. C.N.R Rao, J.R.Ferraro, Spectrosopy in inorganic chemistry, Vol.I and Vol II, Academic
press, 1970.
4. G.Aruldhas, molecular structures and spectroscopy-Prentice hall.
5. M.F.Lappert –Physical inorganic Chemistry-inorganic Electron Spectrosopy 1968
CORE – XI - PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY - III

(90 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
To understand and appreciate the significance and applications of classical thermodynamics,
solution electrochemistry and to learn the principle and applications of optical and resonance
spectroscopy.
UNIT I - THERMODYNAMICS - I :
Partial molar properties - Partial molar free energy (Chemical potential) - Partial molar volume
and partial molar heat content - their significance and determination of these quantities. Variation
of chemical potential with temperature and pressure.
Thermodynamics of real gases - gas mixture - fugacity definition - determination of fugacity
variation of fugacity with temperature and pressure -thermodynamics of ideal and non ideal
binary solutions-dilute solutions-excess functions for non-'ideal solutions and their
determination-the concepts of activity and activity coefficients-determination of standard free
energies.
Choice of standard states - determination of activity and activity coefficients for non-electrolytes.
152
UNIT 2 - SPECTROSCOPY I :
Interaction of matter with radiation-Einstein's theory of transition probability-rotational
spectroscopy of a rigid rotor- non-rigid rotor-diatomic and polyatomic molecules. Vibrational
spectroscopy-harmonic oscillator-anharmonicity-vibrational spectra of polyatomic molecules-
vibrational frequencies-group frequencies-vibrational coupling-overtones-Fermi resonance.
Raman Spectra.
Electronic spectra of polyatomic molecules, selection rules-types of transition in saturated and
unsaturated hydrocarbons, effect of conjugation,and solvent effects .
UNIT 3 – SPECTROSCOPY II :
Resonance spectroscopy-Zeeman effect-equation of motion of spin in magnetic fields-chemical
shift-spin-spin coupling-NMR of simple AX and AMX type molecules- H1 -13C, 19F, 31P NMR
spectra - a brief qualitative discussion of Fourier transform spectroscopy.
UNIT 4- ELECTROCHEMISTRY OF SOLUTION:

Mean ionic activity and activity coefficient-concept of ionic strength, Debye-Huckel theory of
strong electrolytes-activity coefficient of strong electrolytes-determination of activity coefficient
-Debye Huckel limiting law at appreciable concentration of electrolytes - Debye Huckel
Bronsted equation-qualitative and quantitative verification.
UNIT 5 –QUANTUM CHEMISTRY -IV
Approximation methods –perturbation and variation method –application to hydrogen ,helium
atoms –R.S. coupling and term symbols for atoms in the ground state – Slater orbital and HF –
SCF methods Born – Heimer approximation –valence bond theory for hydrogen molecule –
LACO –MO theory for di and polyatomic molecules –concept of hybridization – Huckel theory
for conjugated molecules (ethylene , butadiene and benzene)- semi empirical methods .
153
TEXT BOOKS :
1. S. Glasstone, 1960, Thermodynamics for chemists, Affiliated East West Press, New
Delhi.
2. J. Rajaram and J.C. Kuriacose, 1986, Thermodynamics for students of chemistry, Lal
Nagin Chand, New Delhi.
3. A. Caringtion and A.D Mc Lachlan, 1967, Introduction to Magnetic Resonance Harper
and Row, New York.
4. G. Aruldas, 2002, Molecular structure and spectroscopy, Prentice Hall.
5. C.N. Banwell, 2003, Fundamentals of Molecular ,Spectroscopy Tata McGraw Hill.
6. D.N. Sathyanarayana vibrational spectroscopy
7. D.N. Sathyanarayana electronic spectroscopy
8. J.O.M. Bokris and A.K.N. Reddy, 1977, Electrochemistry, VoIs1 and 2 Plenum, New
York..
9. J. Robbins -1993, Ions in Solution-An Introduction in electrochemistry, Clarendon press,
Oxford
10. R.K.Prasad, 1992, Quantum Chemistry, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.
11. D.A. Mcquarrie, 1983, Quantum Chemistry, University Science Books, Mill Valley,
Calfornia.
SUGGESTED REFERENCE BOOKS :

1. R.L. De Koch and H.B. Gray, Chemical Structure and Bonding, Benjamin/Cumming,
Menlo Park, California.
2. J.N. Murrell, S.F.A. Kettle and J.M. Tedder, 1985, The Chemical Bond, Wiley.
3. P.W. Atkins, 1983, Molecular Quantum Mechanics, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
4. P.H. Rieger, 1994, Electrochemistry, Chapman and Hall, New York.
5. W. Kemp, 1986, NMR in Chemistry McMilan Ltd.
6. G.W. King, 1964, Spectroscopy and Molecular Structure, Holt Rieneheart and Winston.
7. K.D. Mclauchlan, 1970, Magnetic Resonance, Oxford chemistry Series, Oxford.
8. B.P.Staughan and S.Walker, 1976, Spectroscopy Vol. 1 , 11 and 111, Chapman and Hall.
154
9. B.W. Cook and K. Jones, 1972, A.Programmed Introduction to Infra red spectroscope,
Heydon and Son Ltd.
10. F.A. Rushworth and D.P Tunstal, 1973, Nuclear Magnetic Rewsonance Gorden and
Breaqch Science Publishing, New York.
11. J.K. Sanders and B.K.Hunther, 1987, Mordern NMR Spectroscopy, A Guide for
Chemists, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
12. J.K.M. Sanders, E.C. Constable and B.K. Huntherm Morden, 1989, NMR Spectroscopy -
A World Book of chemical problems, Oxford.
CORE XII –PHYSICALCHEMISTRY PRACTICALS

(120 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and verify the concepts and equations in physical chemistry by carrying out
suitable experiments . Typical list of possible experiments are given .A minimum of 10 – 12
experiments have to be performed .
1. Study of the adsorption of acetic acid or oxalic acid on charcoal , verification of
Freundlich isotherm and determination of concentration of given acetic acid or oxalic
acid.
2. Construction of phase diagram for a simple binary system ;naphthalene – biphenyl,
naphthalene –p-dichlorobenzene , naphthalene-diphenylamine.
3. Construction of phase diagram for the three component system(partially miscible liquid
system) acetone – chloroform – water ; chloroform –aceticacid – water.
4. Determination of the equilibrium constant of the reaction between iodine and potassium
iodide by partion method ..
5. Determination of the concentration of given potassium iodide solutions by partition
method.
6. Determination of molecular weight of benzoic acid in benzene and the degree of
association of benzoic acid in benzene using partition method .
7. Kinetic study and comparison of rate constant for the inversion of cane sugar in presence
of acid using polarimeter
155
8. Kinetic study of the reaction between acetone and iodine in acidic medium and
determination of the order with respect to iodine and acetone
.9. Kinetic study of saponification of ethylacetate by sodium hydroxide conductometrically
and determination of order of the reaction.
10. Kinetic study and comparison of acid strengths using acid catalysed hydrolysis of methyl
acetate
11. Determination of temperature coefficient and energy of activation for the acid catalysed
hydrolysis of methylacetate.
12. Determination of the rate constant and order for the reaction between potassium
persulphate and potassium iodide
13. Study of the primary salt effect on the kinetics of oxidation of iodide by persulphate
14. Kinetic study of the decomposition of sodium thiosulphate by mineral acid.
ELECTIVE – III MATERIALS SCIENCE

(60 HOURS)
Unit -I:
1.1 Structure and bonding in solids-cohesive forces in crystals-van der waal’s interactions,
ionic bonding, covalent bonding and hydrogen bonding in solids.
1.2 Techniques of structure determination in solid state- X-ray diffraction, electron and
neutron diffractions and electron microscopy-principle, instrumentation and applications.
Unit - II:
2.1 Theories of metallic state- free electron theory, Brillouin and Band models.
2 .2. Smart metals – binary and ternary – examples and applications.
2 .3 Defects in crystals-Frenkel and Schotky defects, f centers, effect of defects on the
electrical, optical, magnetic, thermal and mechanical properties of crystals.
156
Unit - III
3.1 Optimized ionic conductors – silver ion, copper ion, alumina and related electrolytes,
alkali metal ion and fluoride ion and proton conductors- super conductors- principle and
applications..
3 .2 Photoconducting materials- principle and applications
UNIT -IV
4.1 Charge transfer complexes-characterization and their electrical properties.
4.2 Conducting polymers – polyacetylenes, polyanilines and polyvinylidenes – preparation
and applications.
4.3 Liquid crystals – classification-thermotropic and lyotropic –nematic, smectic and
cholesteric and their applications. (15 hrs)
UNIT –V:
5.1 Preparation and properties of nanoparticles –Materials-metals, semiconductors, ceramics
(oxides, carbides, sulphides, nitrides )-Pysical methods-Physical vapour deposition(
evaporation and sputtering) –chemical methods-reduction methods –sol-gel methods-
optical properties ,electrical properties and magnetic properties
5.2 Carbon nano structures: carbon clusters, C60- alkali doped C60- carbon nanotubes -
preparation- arc-discharge, laser ablation and catalytic decomposition of hydrocarbons-
electronic and mechanical properties- applications – field emission. Sensors- mechanical
reinforcement.
References:
1. Materials Science – Raghavan
2. Materials Science - Manas Chanda Vol I &II
3. A.F.Wells, 1984, Structural Inorganic Chemistry, V.Edition, Oxford.
4. A.R. West, Solid State Chemistry and applications 1991,John Wiley
5. Lesley Smart and Elaine Moore , Solid State Chemistry,
6. Kenneth, J. Klabunde, Nanoscale materials in chemistry, Wiley Interscience, 2001
7. T . Pradeep , Nano : The Essentials ,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,
2007.
157
8. Sulabha K. Kulkarni, Nano technology, Principles and practices, Capital publisher 2007.
ELECTIVE III – ELEMENTARY BIOCHEMISTRY

(60 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES:
This course aims to explain the basic concepts in chemistry and metabolism of carbohydrates,
amino acids ,proteins and lipids. Role of nucleic acid , enzymes and vitamins are also included in
this paper.
UNIT – I
1.1 Classification and biological role of carbohydrates
1.2 Monosaccharides – Linear and ring structures (Haworth formula) of ribose, glucose,
fructose,and mannose(structural determination not required) – physical and chemical
properties of glucose and fructose.
1.3 Disaccharides – Ring structures – physical and chemical properties of maltose,
lactose,and sucrose.
1.4 Polysaccharides – starch, glycogen and cellulose – structure and properties.
1.5 Glycolysis of carbohydrates.
UNIT – II
2.1 Amino acids ; classifications, essential amino acids, physical properties and reactions
2.2 Proteins : Classifications based on shape, composition and solubility – physical properties
2.3 Primary structure of proteins – End group analysis(N-terminal analysis –Edman’s
method, dansyl chloride method :C- terminal analysis – hydrazinolysis and biochemical
method )
2.4 Secondary and tertiary structure of proteins
2 .5 Biological functions of proteins, deamination, transamination reactions, urea cycle.
UNIT – III
3.1 Definition and classification of lipids.
3.2 Saponification number, Acetyl number.
3.3 Chemical properties and biological importance of cholesterol.
3.4 Functions of bile acids.
158
3.5 Biological functions of lipids.
UNIT -IV
4.1 Purine and pyrimidine bases
4.2 Nucleosides, nucleotides, polynucleotides.
4.3 DNA and RNA –structure and types.
4.4 Biological functions of DNA and RNA – genetic code.
UNIT – V
5.1 Enzymes : definition , nomenclature, sources, classification and specificity – isoenzymes
– factors affecting enzyme activity – substrate, pH, temperature, enzyme concentration.
5.2 Vitamins : definition, classification – water soluble vitamins –B1, B2, B3, B6, B12 and
vit- C –fat soluble vitamins – A, D, E, K –structure, deficiency diseases, biochemical
rules and daily requirements.
5.3 Minerals ; Ca, P, Na, K and Mg. and trace elements –Fe, Cu and Se
Suggested Reference Books:
1. C.B.Powar and G.R.Chatwal, Biochemistry.
2. Ragunatha Rao, Elements of Biochemistry
3. U.Sathyanarayana, Essential Biochemistry
4. J.L.Jain, Elementary biochemistry
ELECTIVE III - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

(60 HOURS)
UNIT – I
1.1 Objectives of research ,types of research – basic, applied, and othertypes
1.2 Problem selection – project proposal - funding agencies
UNIT – II
2.1 Chemistry literature survey –primary, secondary and tertiary sources
2.2 Journals published by the ACS and RSC – CA and its importance –Indian Journals –
reviews , monographs, data books and indexes
2.3 Methods of searching, compilation, preservation and retrieval of collected literature
159
2.4 Impact factor and citation index
UNIT -III
3.1 Planning and conducting experiments
3.2 Methods of collecting data – primary and secondary –sources of secondary data
3.3 Classification and tabulation of data – types of classification –general rules for tabulation
–types of tables
3.4 Simple sampling techniques and size of the sample
UNIT -IV
4.1 Presentation of data - Types of errors – Gross, Systematic and Random errors
4.2 Measures of central tendency, mean, standard deviation and measures of variability.
4.3 Linear regression , correlation and method of least squares
UNIT –V
5.1 Project report writing – general format, chapter format, page format
5.2 Procedure for presenting tables, graphs and figures, foot-notes, bibliography and
appendices
5.3 Abbreviations, symbols and SI units
5.4 Plagiarism, copy right and patent laws
5.5 Publication of research paper.
SUGGESTED REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thesis and Assignment Writing – J Anderson, B.H. Dursten and M. Poole, Wiley Eastern
(1977).
2. Statistical Method, Gupta S. P, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi, 2004
3. Hand Book For Authors –Journal of the American Chemical Society Publications
4. Chemical publications – Their nature and uses
5. Organic Chemistry, Jerry March, 4th edition, McGraw - Hill
160
FOURTH SEMESTER
CORE -XIII - ORGANIC CHEMISTRY - IV
(75 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
This paper introduces the basic methodologies for the synthesis of organic compounds. A brief
introduction to biosynthesis of alkaloids and terpenoids is also included. Certain aspects of free
radical chemistry also will be discussed.
UNIT I - BIO-ORGANIC CHEMISTY :
Pyrimidines (cytocine and uracil ) and purines (adenine and guanine only)
Structure and role of nucleic acids. DNA and RNA Genetic code.
Biosynthesis of Cholestrol , phenanthrene alkaloids and bile acids
UNIT 2 - ALKALOIDS AND PROTEINS :
Peptides and their synthesis (Synthesis of tripeptide using the Amino acids - Glycine, Alanine,
Lysine, Cysteine, Glutamic acid, Arginine).Merrified synthesis, Determination of primary,
secondary and tertiary structure of proteins. Total synthesis of , morphine, resperine and cocaine.
UNIT 3 - MODERN SYNTHETIC METHODOLOGY :
Retro synthetic analysis and Synthesis of simple organic molecules using standard reactions like
acetylation and alkylation of enamines and active methylene compounds, Grignard reactions,
Phosphorus and sulphur ylides, Robinson annulation. Formation of C-C and C=C bonds.
UNIT 4 - USE OF REAGENTS IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS:
Diels-Alder reactions ENE reaction, protection and deprotection of functional groups (R-OH,
RCHO, R-CO-R, R-NH2 and R-COOH). Uses of the following reagents : DCC, trimethyl silyl
iodides, 1, 3-dithiane (Umpolung), diisobutyl aluminimumhydride (DIBAL), 9BBN,
trimethylsilylchloride. and tributyl tinhydride .
Application of synthetic methodology for the synthesis of simple cyclic and acyclic target
molecules -synthesis of cubane, 5 - hexenoicacid , bicyclo (4, 1, 0) heptane-2-one.,trans 9-
methyl-1- decalone ,longifolene and onocerin
UNIT 5 - FREE RADICAL REACTIONS :
Long lived and short lived free radicals, methods of generation of free radicals. Adddition of free
radicals to olefinic double bonds. The following aromatic radical substituents are to be studied :
161
decomposition of diazocompounds, phenols-coupling - Sandmayer reaction - Gombereg-
Gauchmann reaction, Pschorr reaction, Ulmann reaction, mechanism of Hunsdicker reaction
Detection of free radicals by ESR.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. R.K. Mackie and D.M. Smith. 1998, Guide book to organic synthesis, ELBS Publication.
2. I. L. Finar, 1986, Organic Chemistry, 5th Edition, Vol .II, ELBS Publication.
3. L. Smith, Robert L. Hill .1. Robert Lehman, Robert J .Iet Rowitz, Philp Handler and
abrahim white principles of Biochemistry General aspects, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill Int.
4. L. Stryer, Biochemistry, W.H.Freeman and Co., New York.
5. Agarwal, Chemistry of Organic Natural Products, Goel Publishing House.
6. B.l. Smith, 1980, Organic synthesis, Chapman and Hall, NY.
7. Francis.A. Carey, Richard J. Sundbreg, 2001, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition,
Plenum Press, New York.
8. N.J. Turro, 1978 Modern Molecular Photochemistry, Benjamin, Cummings, California.
WEBSITES :
1. http://infodome.sdsu,./research/guides!science!orgchemistryblr. html
2. http://www.liv.ac.uklchemistry/links/reactions.html
3. http://orgchem.chem..uconn.edu/namereacVnamed.html
4. www.gcocities.com/chempensoftwar4ee/reactions.html)
162
CORE XIV - INORGANIC CHEMISTRY - IV
(75 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES:
This paper exposes the student to the reaction mechanisms of inorganic complexes and the
chemistry of organometallic compounds and their industrial applications.
UNIT I - COORDINATION CHEMISTRY - REACTION MECHANISMS:
1.1 Electron transfer reactions; outer and inner sphere processes; atoms transfer reaction,
complementary and non-complementary reactions.
1.2 Formation and rearrangement of precursor complexes, the bridging ligand, successor
complexes, Marcus theory.
UNIT 2 - SUBSTITUTION REACTIONS IN COORDINATION COMPOUNDS

2.1 Substitution Reactions : Substitution in square planar complexes, reactivity of platinum
complexes, influences of entering, leaving and other groups, the trans-effect.
2.2 Substitution of octahedral complexes of cobalt and chromium, replacement of
coordinated water, solvolytic (acids and bases) reactions applications in synthesis
(platinum and cobalt complexes only).
2.3 Rearrangement in 4 and 6 coordinate complexes : reaction at coordinated ligands-
template effect.
Unit 3 Organo Metallic Chemistry

3.1 Carbon donors: Alkyls and Aryls, metalation, bonding in carbonyls and nitrosyls, chain
and cyclic donors, olefin, acetylene, and allyl systems, synthesis, structure and bonding,
metallocenes.
3.2 Reactions: Assciciation, Substitution, Addition, Eleimination, Ligand protonation,
Electrophilic and Nucleophilic attack on ligands, carnonylation and decarboxylation,
oxidative addition and fluxionality.
Unit 4 Industrial applications of Organo Metallic compounds
4.1 Catalysis – Hydrogenation of olefins(Wilkinson’s catalyst), hydroformylation of olefins
using cobalt or rhodium catalyst(Oxo process), oxidation of olefins to aldehydes and
163
ketones(Wacker process):polymersisation(Ziegler-Natta catalyst); Cyclo oligomerisation
of acetylene using nickel catalyst(Reppe’s catalyst), polymer bound catalysts.
Unit - V
5.1 Lanthanides and actinides: Occurrence and isolation of the metals, electronic structure -
Lanthanide contraction and significance. Oxidation states magnetic and spectral
properties - Important co-ordination compounds of lanthanide -nuclear and non-nuclear
applications of lanthanides including use of lanthanides as shift reagents.
5.2 Inorganic Photochemistry – Photoredox reactions and photosubstitution reactions in
coordination complexes with particular reference to Co(III), Cr(III) and Pt(II) complexes.
Photosensitisation reactions of [Ru(bpy)3]2+ complex and its applications in solar energy
conversions.
TEXT BOOKS
1. N,J,Turro, 1978, molecular photochemistry.
2. K.K.Rohatgi Mukherjee
3. Purcell, K.F. and Kotz, J.C., - Inorganic Chemistry
4. D.F.Shrivers, Atkins.Inorganic Chemistry
5. J.E. Huheey, 1993, Inorganic Chemistry - Principles, Structure and Reactivity; IV
Edition, Harper Collins, NY.
6. S. Manku, 1984, Inorganic Chemistry, TMG Co.,
7. Selected Topics in Inorganic Chemistry, U.Malik, G.D.Tuli, R.D.Madan, 1992.
8. Basolo and R.G. Pearson, 1967, Mechanism of Inorganic Reactions, Wiley, NewYork.
9. R.Sarkar, general and Inorganic chemistry, (Parts I and II), New Book Agency, Calcutta
REFERENCES:
1. S.F.A. Kettle, 1973, Coordination Chemistry, ELBS
2. G.Coates, M.L.green and K.Wade, Priciples of Organometallic Chemistry, !988
3. R.B.Jordan, Reaction Mechanism of Inorganic and Organo Metallic systems – OUP
1991.
4. P.Powell, Principles of Organometakkic chemistry, Chapman and hall 1998.
5. R.C.Mehothra, A.Singh, Organo Metallic Chemistry, Wiley Eastern Comp.1992.
6. V.Balzani & Carrasitti – Photochemistry of coordination compounds
164
CORE - XV- PHYSICALCHEMISTRY – IV
(75 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
To learn the principles of photophysics and photochemistry and their applications in organic and
inorganic chemistry and energy conversion .Principles and applications of statistical
thermodynamics and electrode kinetics are also included in this paper.
UNIT I - FUNDAMENTALS
Absorption and emission of radiation-Franck-Condon Principle-decay of electronically excited
states-radiative and non radiative processes-fluorescence and phosphorescence-spin forbidden
radiative transition internal conversion and intersystem crossing-energy transfer process-
excimers and exciplexes-static and dynamic quenching-Stern Volmer analysis.
UNIT II - TECHNIQUES AND PHOTOCHEMICAL REACTIONS
Quantum yield and Life time measurements, Flash photolysis, Actinometry. Photo physical
process and kinetics of photochemical reactions.
Photoredox reactions and photosubstitution reactions in coordination chemistry - photovoltaic
and photogalvanic cells. photoelectrochemistry, Aspects of solar energy conversion
UNIT III – ELECTRODE KINETICS
Electrode-electrolyte interface - electrical double layer-electrocapillary phenomena - Lippmann
equation-Structure of double layer-Helmholtz -Perrin, Guoy Chapmann and Stern models of
electrical double layer.
Mechanism of electrode reaction - polarization and overpotential, the Butler - Volmer
equation for one step and multistep electron transfer reactions- significance of exchange current
density and symmetry factor-transfer coefficient and its significance-mechanism of hydrogen and
oxygen evolution reactions. :
Corrosion and passivation of metals- Pourbaix diagram - fuel cells-electrodeposition - principle
and applications.
165
UNIT IV - THERMODYNAMICS - II :
Concept of thermodynamic probability - distribution of distinguishable and non-distinguishable
particles .Maxwell-Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac and Bose Einstein statistics - modes of contribution
to energy-. Partition function - translational, vibrational and rotational partition functions for
mono, diatomic and polyatomic ideal gases.
UNIT V - THERMODYNAMICS – III :
Thermodynamic functions in terms of partition functions, equilibrium constant for isotope
exchange and dissociation of diatomic molecules; heat capacity of solids (Einstein and Debye
Models) ortho and para hydrogen -Planck's radiation law - electron in metals
TEXT BOOKS :
1. J.O.M. Bokris and A.K.N. Reddy, 1977, Electrochemistry, VoIs1 and 2 Plenum, New
York.
2. P. Delahay - 1965, Electrode Kinetics and Structure of Double layer, Interscience, New
York.
3. S. Glasstone, 1960, Introduction to Electrochemistry, Affiliated East West Press, New
Delhi.
4. D.R. Crow, 1991, Principles and Applications of Electrochemistry, Chapman and Hall.
5 N.J. Turro, 1978, Modern Molecular Photochemistry, Benjamin, Cummings, Menlo Park,
California.
6 K.K. Rohatgi Mukherjee, 1978, Fundamentals of Photochemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
8. M.C. Gupta, 1990, statistical; thermodynamics, wiley eastern New Delhi
9. B.J. McClelland, 1973, Statistical Thermodynamics, Chapman and Hall, London.
SUGGESTED REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. J.G. Calvert and J.N. Pitts, 1966, Photochemistry, Wiley, London.
2. R.P. Wayne, 1970, Photochemistry, Butterworths, London.
3. R.P. Cundell and A. Gilbert, 1970, Photochemistry, Thomas Nelson London
166
ELECTIVE- IV - ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICALS
(120 HOURS)
OBJECTIVES :
To impart the techniques of analysis of ores, alloys , quantitative estimations of organic
compounds and inorganic metal ions and spectral interpretation ..
Unit I Estimation of Organic Compounds
1.1 Estimation of Phenol and Aniline – Bromination method
1.2 Estimation of ethyl methyl Ketone
1.3 Estimation of Glucose – Bertrand’s method
Unit II Quantitative analysis:
Gravimetric estimation of
2.1 magnesium in the mixture of Iron and magnesium
2.2 Nickel in the mixture of copper and nickel
2.3 Zinc in the mixture of copper and zinc.
2.4 Nickel in the mixture of iron and Nickel.
Unit - III. Analysis of Ores and Alloys:
3.1 Determination pf percentage of calcium and magnesium in dolomite.
3.2 Determination of percentage of Mn02 in pyrolusite.
3.3 Determination of copper and zinc in brass.
*Unit 1V Analysis of Inorganic Complex Compounds:

4.1 Preparation of cis and trans potassium bis (oxalato) diaquochromate and analysis of each
of these for chromium.
4.2 Preparation of potassium tris (oxalato) ferrate (III) and analysis for iron and oxaiate.
* UNIT V CHROMATOGRAPHIC SEPARATIONS
5.1 Separation of a mixture of two metal ions by paper chromatography.
5.2 Separation of zinc and magnesium on an anion exchanger
5.3 Thin layer chromatography – separation of green leaf pigments
5.4 Column chromatography – separation of o-nitro and p-nitro phenol
167
UNIT - VI SPECTRAL INTERPRETATION
6.1 List of inorganic spectra to be given for interpretation.
31
P NMR Spectra of methylphosphate
31
P NMR Spectra of HPF2
19
F NMR Spectra of CIF3
'H NMR Spectra of Tris (ethylthioacetoacetanato) cobalt (III)
Expanded high resolution NMR spectra of (N-propylisonitrosoacety lacetoneiminato) (acetylac
etoneiminato) Nicke! (II)
ESR Spectra of the aqueous ON (S03)22- ion.
ESR Spectra of the H atoms in CaF2
ESR Spectra of the [Mn (H20)6]2+ ion
ESR Spectra of the bis (salicyladiminato) copper (II)
IR Spectra of the sulphato ligand
IR Spectra of the nitro and nitritopentaminecobalt (III) chloride
IR Spectra of the dimethylglyoxime ligand and its Nickel (II) complex.
IR Spectra of carbonyls
Mossbauer spectra of FeS04.7H20
Mossbauer spectra of FeCl3
Mossbauer spectra [Fe (CN)6]3
Mossbauer spectra [Fe (CN)]4-
6.2 SPECIAL INTERPRETATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS. UV, IR, PMR AND

MASS SPECTRA OF 15 COMPOUNDS.
1. 1, 3, 5-Trimethylbenzene
2. Pinacolonen0
3. prophyl amine
4. p-Methoxybenzyl alcohol
5. Benzyl bromide
6. Phenyl acetone
7. 2-Methoxyethyl acetate
168
8. Acetone
9. Isopropyl alcohol
10. Acetaldehyde diacetate
11. 2-N, N-Dimethylamino ethanol
12. Pyridine
13. 4-Picoline
14. 1, 3 dibromo-1, 1-dichloropropene
15. Cinnamaldehyde
* Only for Internal Assessment
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vogel, Text book of Inorganic quantitative analysis.
2. Dougles A. Skoog, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 3rd Edition.
3. Arthur I. Vogel, A Text Book of Practical Organic Chemistry
169
9. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE
SYLLABUS
SECOND YEAR
Title of the Principles of Compiler Design

Course/ Paper
Core Second Year &Third Credit: 4 Sl. No.: 16
Semester
Objective of This course introduces various steps in the design of a compiler.
the course
Course Unit 1: Introduction to Compilers - Finite Automata and lexical
outline Analysis.
Unit-2: Syntax Analysis: Context free grammars - Derivations and parse
trees – Basic parsing techniques – LR parsing.
Unit 3: Syntax - directed translation, symbol tables.
Unit-4: Code optimization - More about code optimization.
Unit-5 : Code generation - Error detection and recovery.
1. Recommended Text
(i) A.V. Aho, J.D.Ullman, 1985, Principles of Compiler Design, Narosa
Pub-House.
2. Reference Books
(i) D.Gries, 1979, Compiler Construction for Digital Computers, John Wiley
& Sons.
(ii) A.V.Aho, Ravi Sethi, and J.D.Ullman, 1986, Compilers Principles,
Techniques and Tools, Addison Wesley Pub. Co.
Title of the Object Oriented Analysis & Design

Course/ Paper
Core Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 17
Semester
Objective of This course introduces the basic concepts of bject Oriented Analysis
the course and Design.
Course Unit 1: System Development - Object Basics - Development Life Cycle -
outline Methodologies - Patterns - Frameworks - Unified Approach - UML.
Unit 2: Use-Case Models - Object Analysis - Object relations - Attributes
- Methods - Class and Object responsibilities - Case Studies.
Unit 3: Design Processes - Design Axioms - Class Design - Object
Storage - Object Interoperability - Case Studies.
Unit 4: User Interface Design - View layer Classes - Micro-Level
Processes – View Layer Interface – Case Studies.
170
Unit 5: Quality Assurance Tests - Testing Strategies - Object orientation
on testing - Test Cases - test Plans - Continuous testing - Debugging
Principles - System Usability - Measuring User Satisfaction - Case
Studies.
1. Recommended Texts
(i) A. Bahrami, 1999, Object Oriented Systems Development, Tata McGraw
Hill International Edition.
2. Reference Books
(i) G. Booch, 1999, Object Oriented Analysis and design, 2 nd Edition,
Addison Wesley, Boston
(ii) R.S.Pressman, 2005, Software Engineering, 6th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi.
(iii) Rumbaugh, Blaha, Premerlani , Eddy, Lorensen, 2003, Object Oriented
Modeling And design , Pearson education, Delhi.
Title of the Digital Image Processing

Course/ Paper
Extra Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 18
Disciplinary Semester
Objective of This course introduces the various concepts related to Digital Image
the course Processing
Course Unit 1: Introduction – steps in image processing, Image acquisition,
outline representation, sampling and quantization, relationship between pixels. –
color models – basics of color image processing.
Unit 2: Image enhancement in spatial domain – some basic gray level
transformations – histogram processing – enhancement using arithmetic ,
logic operations – basics of spatial filtering and smoothing.
Unit 3: Image enhancement in Frequency domain – Introduction to
Fourier transform: 1- D, 2 –D DFT and its inverse transform, smoothing
and sharpening filters.
Unit 4: Image restoration: Model of degradation and restoration process
– noise models – restoration in the presence of noise- periodic noise
reduction.. Image segmentation: Thresholding and region based
segmentation.
Unit 5 : Image compression: Fundamentals – models – information
theory – error free compression –Lossy compression: predictive and
transform coding. JPEG standard.
(i) R.C. Gonzalez, R.E.Woods, 2002, Digital Image processing, 2 nd Edition,
Pearson
171
Education.
2. Reference Books
(i) Anil K. Jain, 1994, Fundamentals of Digital image Processing, 2nd
Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
(ii) Pratt. W.K., Digital Image Processing, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons.
(iii) Rosenfled A. & Kak, A.C, 1982, Digital Picture Processing, vol .I & II,
Academic
Press.
3. Website, E-learning resources
(i) http://www.imageprocesssingplace.com/DIP/dip-downloads/
Title of the Practical - V : Mini Project

Course/ Paper
Semester
Objective of This course gives practical training in design and implementation of a
the course single mini problem.
Course Each student will develop and implement individually application
outline software based on any emerging latest technologies.
Title of the Project & Viva-Voce

Course/Paper
Core Second Year & Fourth Semester Credit: 20 Sl. No. : 24
Objective of This course is to train the student in executing a project and preparing
the course the report of work done.
Course The project work is to be carried out either in a software industry or in an
outline academic institution for the entire semester and the report of work done
is to be submitted to the University.
172
Elective – II
Title of the Data Warehousing and Data Mining

Course/ Paper
Elective II Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 19 A
Semester
Objective of This course introduces the basic concepts of data warehousing and data
the course mining
Course Unit 1: Introduction: Data Mining tasks – Data Mining versus
outline Knowledge Discovery in Data bases – Relational databases – Data
warehouses – Transactional databases – Object oriented databases –
Spatial databases – Temporal databases – Text and Multimedia databases
– Heterogeneous databases - Mining Issues – Metrics – Social
implications of Data mining.
Unit 2: Data Preprocessing: Why Preprocess the data – Data cleaning –
Data Integration – Data Transformation – Data Reduction – Data
Discretization.
Unit 3: Data Mining Techniques: Association Rule Mining – The Apriori
Algorithm – Multilevel Association Rules – Multidimensional
Association Rules – Constraint Based Association Mining.
Unit 4: Classification and Prediction: Issues regarding Classification
and Prediction – Decision Tree induction – Bayesian Classification –
Back Propagation – Classification Methods – Prediction – Classifiers
accuracy.
Unit 5 : Clustering Techniques: cluster Analysis – Clustering Methods –
Hierarchical Methods – Density Based Methods – Outlier Analysis –
Introduction to Advanced Topics: Web Mining , Spatial Mining and
Temporal Mining.
(i) J. Han and M. Kamber , 2001, Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques,
Morgan Kaufmann, .New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) M. H.Dunham, 2003, Data Mining : Introductory and Advanced Topics ,
Pearson Education, Delhi.
(ii) Paulraj Ponnaiah, 2001, Data Warehousing Fundamentals, Wiley
Publishers.
(iii) S.N. Sivananda and S. Sumathi, 2006, Data Mining, Thomsan Learning,
Chennai.

(i) http://www. academicpress.com
(ii) http://www.mkp.com
173
Title of the Mobile Computing
Course/ Paper
Elective Second Year & Third Semester Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 19 B
Objective of This course introduces the basic concepts of mobile computing
the course
Course Unit 1: Introduction - Mobile and Wireless Devices – Simplified
outline Reference Model – Need for Mobile Computing –Wireless
Transmissions –Multiplexing – Spread Spectrum and Cellular Systems-
Medium Access Control – Comparisons.
Unit 2: Telecommunication Systems – GSM – Architecture – Sessions –
Protocols – Hand Over and Security – UMTS and IMT – 2000 – Satellite
Systems.
Unit 3: Wireless Lan - IEEE S02.11 – Hiper LAN – Bluetooth – Security
and Link Management.
Unit 4: Mobile network layer - Mobile IP – Goals – Packet Delivery –
Strategies – Registration – Tunneling and Reverse Tunneling – Adhoc
Networks – Routing Strategies.
Unit 5: Mobile transport layer - Congestion Control – Implication of
TCP Improvement – Mobility – Indirect – Snooping – Mobile –
Transaction oriented TCP - TCP over wireless – Performance.
(i) J. Schiller, 2003, Mobile Communications,2nd edition, Pearson Education,
Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) Hansmann, Merk, Nicklous, Stober, 2004, Principles of Mobile
Computing, 2nd Edition, Springer (India).
(ii) Pahlavan, Krishnamurthy, 2003, Principle of wireless Networks: A
unified Approach, Pearson Education, Delhi.
(iii) Martyn Mallick, 2004, Mobile and Wireless Design Essentials, Wiley
Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
(iv) W.Stallings, 2004, Wireless Communications and Networks, 2nd Edition,
174
Title of the Artificial Intelligence
Course/ Paper
Core Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 19 C
Semester
Objective of This course introduces the concepts of machine learning.
the course
Course Unit 1: Introduction - Intelligent Agents- Problem Solving - by Searching
outline - Informed Search and Exploration - Constraint Satisfaction Problems -
Adversarial Search
Unit 2: Knowledge and Reasoning - Logical Agents - First-Order Logic -
Inference in First-Order Logic - Knowledge Representation
Unit 3: Planning – Planning and Acting in the Real World - Uncertain
knowledge and reasoning - Uncertainty - Probabilistic Reasoning -
Probabilistic Reasoning Over Time - Making Simple Decisions - Making
Complex Decisions
Unit 4: Learning - Learning from Observations - Knowledge in
Learning - Statistical Learning Methods - Reinforcement Learning
Unit-5: Communicating, Perceiving, and Acting - Communication -
Probabilistic Language Processing - Perception – Robotics.
(i) Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, 2003, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern
Approach, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight, 1991, Artificial Intelligence, 2nd Edition,
Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
(ii) Herbert A. Simon, 1998, The Sciences of the Artificial Intelligence, 3rd
Edition, MIT Press.
(iii) N.J. Nilson, 1983, Principles of AI, Springer Verlag.
(i) http://aima.eecs.berkeley.edu/slides-pdf/
175
Elective -III
Title of the Artificial Neural Networks

Course/ Paper
Elective Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 20 A
Semester
Objective of This course introduces the fundamental concepts of Artificial Neural
the course Networks
Course Unit 1: Introduction to Neural Networks – Basic Concepts of Neural
outline Networks – Inference and Learning – Classification Models –
Association Models – Optimization Models – Self-Organization Models.
Unit 2: Supervised and Unsupervised Learning – Statistical Learning –
AI Learning – Neural Network Learning – Rule Based Neural Networks
– Network Training – Network Revision- Issues- Theory of Revision-
Decision Tree Based NN – Constraint Based NN
Unit 3: Incremental learning – Mathematical Modeling – Application of
NN- Knowledge based Approaches.
Unit 4: Heuristics- Hierarchical Models – Hybrid Models – Parallel
Models – Differentiation Models- Control Networks – Symbolic
Methods- NN Methods.
Unit 5: Structures and Sequences – Spatio-temporal NN – Learning
Procedures – Knowledge based Approaches.
(i) L. Fu, 1994, Neural Networks in Computer Intelligence, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) R. J. Schalkoff, 1997, Artificial Neural Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi.
(ii) Anderson, 2001, An Introduction to Neural Network, PHI, New Delhi.
176
Title of the Computer Simulation and Modeling
Course/ Paper
Elective Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 20 B
Semester
Objective of This course introduces the basic concepts of Computer Simulation and
the course Modeling
Course Unit 1: Introduction to Simulation -Simulation Examples: Simulation of
outline queuing systems, inventory systems and other examples - General
Principles: Concepts in discrete event system simulation - List
Processing.
Unit 2: Programming Languages for Simulation: FORTRAN, GPSS.
Simulation of Queueing Systems: Queueing System Characteristics -
Queueing Notation - Transient and Steady-State Behaviour of Queues -
Long-Run Measures of Performance of Queueing Systems - Steady-
State Behaviour of Infinite-Population Markovian Models - Network of
Queues.
Unit 3: Random-Number Generation: Properties of Random Numbers
- Generation of Pseudo-Random Numbers - Techniques for Generating
Random Numbers - Tests for Random Numbers. Random Variate
Generation: Inverse Transformation Technique:- Uniform
Distribution - Exponential Distribution - Weibull Distribution -
Triangular Distribution - Empirical Continuous Distribution -
Discrete Distribution - Direct Transformation for the Normal
Distribution - Convolution Method for Erlang Distribution -
Acceptance-Rejection Technique: Poisson Distribution - Gamma
Distribution.
Unit 4: Input Data Analysis: Data Collection - Identifying the
Distribution with Data - Parameter Estimation - Goodness-of- Fit
Tests: Chi-Square Test - Kolmogorov-Smirnov Test; Selecting Input
Models without Data - Multivariate and Time-Series Input Models.
Verification and Validation of Simulation Models: Model Building,
Verification and Validation - Verification of Simulation Models -
Calibration and Validation of Models:- Face Validity - Validation of
Model Assumptions - Validating Input-Output Transformations -
Input-Output Validation using Historical Input Data - Input-Output .
Validation using a Turing Test.
Unit 5: Output Data Analysis: Stochastic Nature of Output Data - Types
of Simulation with respect to Output Analysis - Measures of
Performance and their Estimation - Output Analysis for Terminating
Simulations - Output Analysis for Steady-State Simulation
(i) J. Banks, J. S.Carson II and B. L. Nelson, 1995, Discrete-Event System
Simulation, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
177
2. Reference Books
(i) Averill M.Law and W.David Kelton, 1991, Simulation Modeling &
Analysis, 2nd Edn., Tata McGraw Hill.
(ii) Geoffrey Gardon, 1992, System Simulation, 2nd Edn., Printice Hall of
India.
(iii) Narsingh Deo, 1979, System Simulation with Digital Computers,
Prentice Hall of India.
(iv) C.Dennis Pegden, Robert E.Shannon and Randall P.Sadowski, 1995,
Introduction to Simulation using SIMAN, 2nd Edn., Tata McGraw-Hill.
(i). http://www.bcnn.net
Title of the Cryptography

Course/ Paper
Core Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 20 C
Semester
Objective of This course introduces the basic concepts and for computing related
the course applications.
Course Unit 1: Conventional Encryption: Conventional encryption model –
outline DES –RC 5 – Introduction to AES - Random number generation.
Unit 2: Number Theory: Modular arithmetic – Euler’s theorem –
Euclid’s algorithm – Chinese remainder theorem – Primarily and
factorization –Discrete logarithms – RSA algorithm
Unit 3: Public key Cryptography: Principles – RSA algorithm – key
management- Diff – Hellman key exchange
Unit 4: Message Authorization and Hash functions: Hash functions-
Authentication requirements –Authentication function- Message
authentication codes –Secure Hash algorithms
Unit 5: Digital Signature and Authentication Protocols : Digital
Signature-Authentication Protocols –Digital signature standard.
(i) Stallings, W., 2005 , Cryptography and Network Security Principles and
Practice, Pearson Education, Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman, Mike specimen, Network Security-
Private Communication in a public world.
(ii) Michael Welsehenbach, 2005, Cryptography in C & C++”, John Wiley.
(iii) Bruce sehneier , 2001 Applied Cryptography , John Wiley and sons.
(iv) Kailash N.Gupta , Kamlesh N. Agarwala, Pratek A. Agarwala, 2005,
Digital signature Network security practices , PHI, New Delhi.
178
FOURTH SEMESTER
Core:
Project and Viva-Voce
179
10. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
(FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED)
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER III
CST201 – Computer Oriented Mathematics
Unit-I: Propositions and Compound Propositions - Logical Operations - Truth tables -

Tautologies and Contradictions - Logical Equivalence - Algebra of propositions -
Conditional and Biconditional Statements - Arguments - Logical Implications -
Quantifiers - Negation of Quantified Statements - Basic Counting Principles - Factorial -
Binomial Coefficients - Permutations - Combinations - Pigeonhole Principle - Ordered
and Unordered partitions.
Unit-II: Order and Inequalities - Mathematical Induction - Division Algorithm -

Divisibility - Euclidean Algorithm - Fundamental theorem of Arithmetic - Congruence
relation - Congruence Equations - Semigroups - Groups - Subgroups - Normal subgroups
- Homomorphisms - rings - Integral Domains - Fields - Polynomials over a Field.
Unit-III: Roots of Equations: Graphical Methods - Bisection Methods -False-Position

Method - Fixed-point Iteration - Newton-Raphson Method - Secant Method - Multiple
Roots - System of Nonlinear Equations - Roots of Polynomials: Conventional Methods -
Mueller's Method - Bairstow's Method.
Unit-IV: Algebraic Equations: Gauss Elimination - Non-linear system of Equations -

Gauss-Jordan - LU Decomposition - Matrix Inverse - Error Analysis - Tridiagonal
Systems - Cholesky Decomposition - Gauss-Seidel.
Unit-V: Differentiation and Integration: Trapezoidal Rule - Simpson's Rule - Romberg

Integration - Gauss Quadrature - Richardson Extrapolation - Derivatives and Integrals for
Data with Errors.
Books for Study:
1. Seymour Lipschutz and Marc Lipson - Discrete Mathematics - Second Edition - Tata
McGraw Hill Edition - 1999.
180
2. Steven C. Chopra and Raymond P.Canale - Numerical Methods for Engineers - Third
Edition - McGraw Hill International Edition - 1998.
CST203 – Internet and its Applications
Unit-I: Internet Concepts - Internet Services - Types of Accounts - Media for Internet -
ISP - TCP/IP and Connection Software - - Disconnecting from the internet.
Dial-up Networking - Setting up and internet Connection - Testing Connection
Unit-II: Contenders - Issues in high-speed Connection - Connecting via ISDN, ADSL
and Cable Modem - Intranets - Components of an Intranet - Steps for Creating Intranet -
Maintenance - Connecting LAN to Internet.
Unit-III: E-mails - Downloading E-mails - Signatures and Stationery - Web Based E-

mail - E-mail tasks - Outlook Express - Sending and Receiving files using Eudora -
Outlook Express and Pine - Multiple e-mail accounts - Sending form letters - Formatting
e-mail - E-mail mailing lists.
Unit-IV: Forms of chat and Conferencing - Internet Relay Chat (IRC) - Chatting in
Microsoft Chat and V.Chat - Starting and managing a channel - Web-based Chat - Direct
Chat systems - MUDs, MOOs and mussles - Voice and Video Conferencing.
Unit-V: Elements of web - Browsers - Security and Privacy Issues - Purchasing Products
Online with wallet programs - Netscape Navigator and Communicator - Microsoft
Internet Explorer.
Books for Study:

1. Margaret Levine Young - Internet - The Complete Reference - Millennium Edition -
TMH Edition - 1999.
2. Harley Hahn - The Internet - Complete Reference - Second Edition - TMH Edition.
CST205: Microprocessors
Unit-I: Introduction to micro computers, microprocessors and assembly languages –

micro processor architecture and its operations – 8085 MPU – 8085 instruction set and
classifications
Unit-II: Writing assembly levels programs – programming techniques such as looping,

counting and indexing addressing nodes – data transfer instructions – arithmetic and logic
operations – dynamic debugging.
181
Unit-III: Counters and time delays – hexadecimal counter modulo10 counter – pulse
timings for flashing lights – debugging counter and time delay program – stack –
subroutine – conditional call and return instructions.
Unit-IV: BCD to binary and binary to BCD conversions – BCD to HEX and HEX to
BCD conversions – ASCII to BCD and BCD to ASCII conversions – BCD to seven
segment LED code conversions – binary to ASCII and ASCII to binary conversions –
multi byte addition – multi byte subtraction – BCD addition – BCD subtraction –
multiplication and division.
Unit-V: Interrupt – implementing interrupts – multiple interrupt 8085 – trap – problems

on implementing 8085 interrupt – DMA memory interfaces – RAM & ROM – I/O
interface – direct I/O memory trapped I/O.
Books for study:
1. R S Gaonkar – Microprocessor architecture – Programming and application with
8085/8080A – Wiley Eastern Limited – 1990
2. A Mathur – Introduction to Microprocessor – III Edition – Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd. – 1993
CST207: Programming in C
Unit-I: C fundamentals – character set – identifier and key works – data types –
constants – variables – declarations – expressions – statements – arithmetic, unary,
relational and logical, assignment and conditional operators – library functions.
Unit-II: Data input/output functions – simple c programs – flow of control – control

structures – switch, break and continue, go to statements – comma operator.
Unit-III: Functions – defining, accessing functions – functions prototypes – passing

arguments – recursions – storage classes – multi file programs.
Unit-IV: Arrays – defining and processing – passing arrays to functions –

multidimensional arrays – arrays and string – structures – passing structures to functions
– self referential structures – unions.
Unit-V: Pointers – declarations – passing pointers to functions – operation in pointers –

pointer and arrays – arrays of pointers – structures and pointers – files: creating,
processing, opening and closing – bit wise operations.
Books for study:
1. Gottfried B S – Programming with C – II Edition TMH Pub Co Ltd.
182
2. Kanetkar Y – Let us C - BPB Publication.
CST209: Practical – III : C Programming and Microprocessors Lab.
1. Summation of series
a. sin(x)
b. cos(x)
c. exp(x)
2. String manipulations
a. Counting the number of vowels, consonants, words white spaces in a line of text
and array of lines.
b. Reverse a string & check for palindrome
c. Sub string detection and count
d. Sub string removal
e. Find and replacing substrings
3. Recursion
a. nPr
b. nCr
c. GCD of two numbers
d. Maximum & minimum
e. Fibonacci sequence
f. Tower of Honoi
4. Matrix manipulation
a. Addition & subtraction
b. Multiplication
c. Transpose
d. Determinant of a matrix
e. Inverse of a Matrix
5. Sorting and searching
a. Insertion sort
b. Bubble sort
c. Selection sort
d. Linear search
e. Binary search
Microprocessors
1. Addition and subtraction

a. 8 bit addition
b. 16 bit addition
c. 8 bit subtraction
d. BCD subtraction
2. Multiplication and division
a. 8 bit multiplication
b. BCD multiplication
c. 8 bit division
183
3. Sorting and searching
a. searching for an element in a array
b. Sorting in Ascending order
c. Finding largest and smallest elements from an array
d. Reversing array elements
e. Block move
f. Sorting in descending order
4. Code conversion: BCD to HEX and HEX to BCD
5. Application: Traffic signal controller
SEMESTER IV
CST202-Software Engineering
Unit-I: The Product-The Process-Project Management Concepts-Software Projects And

Project Metrics
Unit-II: Software Project Planning-Risk Analysis And Management-Project Scheduling

And Tracking-Software Quality Assurance.
Unit-III: Software Configuration Management-System Engineering-Analysis

Concepts And Principles-Analysis Modeling .
Unit-IV: Design Concepts And Principles-Architectural Designs-User Interface Design.
Unit-V: Component level Design-Software Testing Techniques-Software Testing

Strategies-Technical Metrics For Software.
Books for Study:
1. Roger S. Pressman - Software Engineering A Practitioner’s approach – 5 th edition -

McGraw Hill.
2. Ian Sommerville – Software Engineering - 5th Edition – Addison Wesley.
184
CST204 - Data Structures
Unit-I: Abstract Data Types – Asymptotic Notations- Complexity Analysis – Arrays –

Representation of Arrays – Operations on Arrays - Ordered Lists - Polynomials.
Unit-II : Singly Linked Lists – Circular Linked Lists – Doubly Linked Lists – General
Lists – Stacks – Queues – Circular Queues – Evaluation of Expressions .
Unit-III : Trees – Binary Trees – Binary Tree Traversals – Binary Tree Representations
– Binary Search Trees – Threaded Binary Trees – Application of Trees (Sets) –
Representation of Graphs – Graph Implementation – Graph Traversals- Application of
Graph Traversals- Minimum Cost Spanning Trees – Shortest Path Problems .
Unit-IV: Internal Sorting – Optimal Sorting Time – Sorting Large Objects – Sorting
with Tapes- Sorting with Disks.
Unit-V: Hashing – AVL Trees - Red-Black Trees – Splay Trees - B-Trees.
Books for study :
1. E.Horowitz, S.Sahni and Mehta – Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++ -

Galgotia- 1999.
2. Gregory L.Heileman – Data Structures , Algorithms and Object Oriented

Programming – Mc-Graw Hill International Editions – 1996.
CST206 - Computer Graphics
Unit-I: Video Display Devices – Raster Scan Systems – Input Devices – Hard Copy
Devices- Graphics Software – Output Primitives- Attributes of Output Primitives.
Unit-II: Two – Dimensional Transformation – Clipping – Window-view port mapping.
Unit-III: User dialogue – Input of Graphical Data- Input Functions- Input Device
Parameters- Picture Construction Techniques- Virtual Reality Environments.
Unit-IV: Three Dimensional Concepts – 3D Transformations- 3D Viewing.
Unit-V: Visible-Surface Detection : Back-Face Detection - Depth- Buffer Method –

Scan Line Method – A-Buffer Method- Properties of Light – Infinitive Color Concepts-
RBG Color Models- Computer Animation.
185
Books for Study :
1. D.Hearn and M.P.Baker – Computer Graphics- Second Edition – PHI- 1996.
2. W.M.Neumann and R.F.Sproull – Principle of Interactive Computer Graphics-

McGraw Hill – 1979.
3. Foley, Van Dan, Feiner, Hughes – Computer Graphics – Addison Wesley – 2000.
CST208: Programming in C++
. Unit-I: Principles of Object Oriented Programming (OOP) – Software Evaluation --

OOP Paradigm – Basic Concepts of OOP – Benefits of OOP – Applications of OOP.
Unit-II: Introduction to C++ -- Tokens – Keywords – Identifiers – Variables – Operators

– Manipulators – Expressions and Control Structures – Pointers – Functions – Function
prototyping – Parameters Passing in Functions – Values Return by Functions – Inline
Functions – Friend and Virtual Functions.
Unit-III: Classes and Objects – Constructors and Destructors -- Operator overloading

-- Type Conversions – Type Conversions – Type of Constructors – Function
Overloading.
Unit-IV: Inheritance – Types of Inheritance – Virtual Functions and Polymorphism

Constructors in inheritance – Mapping Console I/O operations.
Unit-V: Files – File Streams – File operations – File pointer – Error Handling during file
operations – Command line arguments.
Books for Study:
1. Stanley Lippmann, Josee Lajoie – C++ Primer – Third Edition – Addison Wesley.
2. Robert Lafore – Object Oriented Programming in Microsoft C++ - Galgotia
186
CST210 - Practical-IV: Data Structures using C++
1. Implements PUSH,POP operations of stack using arrays.

2. Implements PUSH,POP operations of stack using pointers.
3. Implement add, delete operations of a queue using arrays.
4. Implement add, delete operations of a queue using pointers
5. Conversion of infix to postfix using stack operations.
5. Postfix expression evaluation.
6. Addition of two polynomials using Arrays and Pointers.
7. Polynomial multiplication using singly linked list
8. Creation , Insertion and deletion in doubly linked list.
10.Binary tree traversals (inorder, preorder and post order) using linked list and
recursion.
11.Non- recursive inorder traversal
12.Non- recursive preorder traversal
13. Non- recursive postorder traversal
14. Depth first search for graphs using recursion
15.Breadth first search for graphs.
SEMESTER V
CST301 - DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
UNIT I: Advantages and Components of a Database Management Systems – Feasibility

Study – Class Diagrams – Data Types – Events – Normal Forms – Integrity – Converting
Class Diagrams to Normalized Tables – Data Dictionary.
UNIT II: Query Basics – Computation Using Queries – Subtotals and GROUP BY
Command – Queries with Multiple Tables – Subqueries – Joins – DDL & DML – Testing
Queries.
UNIT III: Effective Design of Forms and Reports – Form Layout – Creating Forms –
Graphical Objects – Reports – Procedural Languages – Data on Forms – Programs to
Retrieve and Save Data – Error Handling.
UNIT IV: Power of Application Structure – User Interface Features – Transaction –

Forms Events – Custom Reports – Distributing Application – Table Operations – Data
Storage Methods – Storing Data Columns – Data Clustering and Partitioning.
UNIT V: Database Administration – Development Stages – Application Types – Backup

and Recovery – Security and Privacy – Distributed Databases – Client/Server Databases
– Web as a Client/Server System – Objects – Object Oriented Databases – Integrated
Applications.
187
References:
1. G. V. Post – Database Management Systems Designing and Building Business

Application – McGraw Hill International edition – 1999.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan – Database Management Systems – WCB/McGraw Hill –
1998.
3. C.J. Date – An Introduction to Database Systems – 7th Edition – Addison Wesley
- 2000.
CST303 - Operating Systems
Unit-I: Introduction - Multiprogramming - Time sharing - Distributed system - real-time

Systems - I/O structure - Dual-mode operation - Hardware protection - General system
architecture - Operating system services - System calls - System programs - System
design and implementation. Process Management: Process concept - Concurrent process
- scheduling concepts - CPU scheduling
Unit-II: Process Management contd.: Scheduling algorithms, Multiple processors

Scheduling - Critical section - Synchronization hardware - Semaphores, classical problem
of synchronization, Interprocess communication. Deadlocks: Characterization,
Prevention, Avoidance and Detection.
Unit-III: Storage management - Swaping, single and multiple partition allocation -

paging - segmentation - pages segmentation, virtual memory - demand paging - page
replacement and algorithms, thrashing. Secondary storage management - disk structure -
free space management - allocation methods - disk scheduling - performance and
reliability improvements - storage hierarchy.
Unit-IV: Files and protection - file system organisation - file operations - access methods
- consistency semantics - directory structure organisation - file protection -
implementation issues - security - encryption.
Unit-V: Case Studies: MS-DOS and UNIX operating systems.
Books for study:
1. A. Silberschatz and P.B. Galvin - Operating System Concepts - Addison-Wesley

Publishing Company.
2. A.S. Godbole – Operating Systems – Tata McGraw Hill – 1999.
188
CST305 - Visual Programming
Unit-I: Customizing a Form - Writing Simple Programs - Toolbox - Creating Controls -

Name Property - Command Button - Access Keys - Image Controls - Text Boxes - Labels
- Message Boxes - Grid - Editing Tools - Variables - Data Types - String - Numbers.
Unit-II: Displaying Information - Determinate Loops - Indeterminate Loops -

Conditionals - Built-in Functions - Functions and Procedures.
Unit-III: Lists - Arrays - Sorting and Searching - Records - Control Arrays - Combo
Boxes - Grid Control - Projects with Multiple forms - DoEvents and Sub Main - Error
Trapping.
Unit-IV: VB Objects - Dialog Boxes - Common Controls - Menus - MDI Forms -

Testing, Debugging and Optimization - Working with Graphics.
Unit-V: Monitoring Mouse activity - File Handling - File System Controls - File System
Objects - COM/OLE - automation - DLL Servers - OLE Drag and Drop.
Books for Study:

1. Gary Cornell - Visual Basic 6 from the Ground up - Tata McGraw Hill - 1999.
2. Noel Jerke - Visual Basic 6 (The Complete Reference) - Tata McGraw Hill - 1999.
CST307 Computer Networks
Unit 1: Introduction – Network Hardware – Software – Reference Models – OSI and

TCP/IP models – Example networks: Internet, ATM, Ethernet and Wireless LANs -
Physical layer - guided transmission media
Unit 2: Wireless transmission - Communication Satellites – Telephones structure –local
loop, trunks and multiplexing, switching. Data link layer: Design issues – error
detection and correction.
Unit 3: Elementary data link protocols - sliding window protocols – Data Link Layer in
the Internet - Medium Access Layer – Channel Allocation Problem – Multiple Access
Protocols.
Unit 4: Network layer - design issues - Routing algorithms - Congestion control
algorithms – IP protocol – IP Address – Internet Control Protocol.
Unit 5 : Transport layer - design issues - Connection management - Addressing,
Establishing & Releasing a connection – Simple Transport Protocol – Internet Transport
Protocol (TCP).
189
(i) A. S.Tanenbaum, 2003, Computer Networks, Fourth Edition, - Pearson
Education, Inc, (Prentice hall of India Ltd), Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) B. Forouzan, 1998, Introduction to Data Communications in Networking,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
(ii) F. Halsall, 1995, Data Communications, Computer Networks and Open
Systems, Addison Wessley.
(iii) D. Bertsekas and R. Gallagher, 1992, Data Networks, Prentice hall of
India, New Delhi.
(iv) Lamarca, 2002, Communication Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi.
(i) http://authors.phptr.com/tanenbaumcn4/
CST309 - Practical-V: RDBMS with visual programming Lab.
Students are advised to use the concepts like Data Normalization, Link between table by
means of foreign keys and other relevant data base concepts for developing databases for
the following problems. The implementation of each problem should have necessary
input screen Menu-driven query processing and pleasing reports. The choice or RDBMS
is left to the students. Necessary validations must be done after developing database.
1. Library Information Processing.

2. Students Mark sheet processing.
3. Telephone Directory maintenance.
4. Gas booking and delivering system.
5. Electricity Bill Processing.
6. Bank Transactions.
7. Pay roll processing.
8. Personal Information System.
9. Question Database and Conducting quiz.
190
SEMESTER VI
CST302 - Multimedia Systems
Unit-I: What is Multimedia: Definitions - CD-ROM and the Multimedia Highway -

Where to use Multimedia - Introduction to Making Multimedia: The stages of a
Project - What You Need - Multimedia Skills and Training: The team - Macintosh and
Windows Production Platforms: Macintosh Versus PC - The Macintosh Platform - The
Windows Multimedia PC Platform - Networking Macintosh and Windows Computers-
Hardware Peripherals: Connection - Memory and Storage Devices - Input Devices -
Output Hardware - Communication Devices
Unit-II: Basic Tools: Text Editing and Word Processing Tools - OCR Software -
Painting and Drawing Tools - 3-D Modeling and Animation Tools - Image-Editing Tools
- Sound Editing Tools - Animation, Video and Digital Movie Tools - Helpful Accessories
- Making Instant Multimedia: Linking Multimedia Objects - Office Suites - Word
Processors - Spreadsheets - Databases - Presentation Tools. Multimedia Authoring
Tools: Types of Authoring Tools - Card-and-Page-Based Authoring Tools - Icon-Based
Authoring Tools - Time-Based Authoring Tools - Object-Oriented Authoring Tools -
Cross-Platform Authoring Notes
Unit-III: Text: The Power of Meaning - About Fonts and Faces - Using Text in
Multimedia - Computers and Text - Font Editing and Design Tools - Hypermedia and
Hypertext - Sound: The Power of Sound - Multimedia System Sounds - MIDI Versus
Digital Audio - Digital Audio - Making MIDI Audio - Audio File Formats - Working
with Sound on the Macintosh - Notation Interchange File Format (NIFF) - Adding Sound
to Your Multimedia Project - Toward Professional Sound: The Red Book Standard -
Production Tips
Unit-IV: Images: Making Still Images -Color - Image File Formats. Animation: The
Power of Motion - Principles of Animation - Making Animations That Work - Video:
Using Video - How Video works - Broadcast Video Standards - Integrating Computers
and Television - Shooting and Editing Video - Video Tips - Recording Formats - Digital
Video.
Unit-V: Planning and Costing : Project Planning - Estimating - RFPs and Bid
Proposals - Designing and Producing : Designing - Producing - Content and Talent :
Acquiring Content - Using Content Created by Others - Using Content Created for a
Project - Using Talent - Delivering : Testing - Preparing for Delivery - Delivering on
CD-ROM - Compact Disc Technology - Wrapping It Up - Delivering on the World Wide
Web.
191
Books for Study:
1. Tay Vaughan - Multimedia: Making it Work. - Fourth Edition - Tata McGraw-Hill

Edition - 1999.
2. Walterworth John A - Multimedia Technologies and Application - Ellis Horwood
Ltd. - London - 1991.
3. John F Koegel Buford - Multimedia Systems - Addison Wesley - First Indian Reprint
- 2000.
CST304 - Java Programming
Unit-I: Introduction to Java - Features of Java - Object Oriented Concepts - Lexical

Issues - Data Types - Variables - Arrays - Operators - Control Statements.
Unit-II: Classes - Objects - Constructors - Overloading method - Access Control - Static

and fixed methods - Inner Classes - String Class - Inheritance - Overriding methods -
Using super-Abstract class.
Unit-III: Packages - Access Protection - Importing Packages - Interfaces - Exception

Handling - Throw and Throws - Thread - Synchronization - Messaging - Runnable
Interface - Inter thread Communication - Deadlock - Suspending, Resuming and stopping
threads - Multithreading.
Unit-IV: I/O Streams - File Streams - Applets - String Objects - String Buffer - Char
Array - Java Utilities - Code Documentation.
Unit-V: Networks basics - Socket Programming - Proxy Servers - TCP/IP Sockets - Net
Address - URL - Datagrams - Working with windows using AWT Classes - AWT
Controls - Layout Managers and Menus.
Books for Study:
1. Cay S.Horstmann, Gary Cornell - Core Java 2 Volume I –Fundamentals - Addison

Wesley.
2. P. Naughton and H. Schildt - Java2 (The Complete Reference) - Third Edition.
3. K. Arnold and J. Gosling - The Java Programming Language - Second Edition.
192
CST306 Computer Architecture
Unit-I : Central Processing Unit : General Register and Stack Organization – Instruction
Formats – Addressing Modes- Data Transfer and manipulation – Program Control –
RISC.
Unit-II : Pipelining – Arithmetic , Instruction and RISC Pipelining- Vector Processing

– Array Processors.
Unit-III : Computer Arithmetic- Addition and Subtraction – Multiplication and Division

Algorithms – Floating Point and decimal Arithmetic operations.
Unit-IV : Input–Output Organization – Peripheral devices - I/O Interface –

Asynchronous Data Transfer – Modes of Transfer – Priority Interrupt - Direct Memory
Access – I/O Processor – Serial Communications.
Unit-V : Memory Organization – Memory Hierarchy – Main Memory – Auxiliary

Memory- Associative Cache and Virtual Memory - Interconnection Structures -
Interprocessor Arbitration.
Books for Study :
1. M.M.Mano – Computer System Architecture – 3 rd Edition – PHI – 1994.

2.J.P.Hayes – Computer System Architecture – McGrawHill – 1988.
CST308 - Object Oriented Analysis and Design
Unit-I: System Development - Object Basics - Development Life Cycle - Methodologies

- Patterns - Frameworks - Unified Approach - UML.
Unit-II: Use-Case Models - Object Analysis - Object relations - Attributes - Methods -

Class and Object responsibilities - Case Studies.
Unit-III: Design Processes - Design Axioms - Class Design - Object Storage - Object
Interoperability - Case Studies.
Unit-IV: User Interface Design - View layer Classes - Micro-Level Processes - View
Layer Interface - Case Studies.
Unit-V: Quality Assurance Tests - Testing Strategies - Object orientation on testing -

Test Cases - test Plans - Continuous testing - Debugging Principles - System Usability -
Measuring User Satisfaction - Case Studies.
193
Books for Study:
1. Ali Bahrami - Object Oriented Systems Development - McGraw Hill International
Edition - 1999.
2. Grady Booch- Object Oriented Analysis and design –Addison Wesley.
CST310 : Practical VI- Java Programming Lab.
Application
1. Finding area and Perimeter of a circle. Use Buffered Reader class.

2. Substring Removal from a String. Use String Buffer Class.
3. Determining the order of numbers generated randomly using Random Class.
4. Implementation of Point Class for Image manipulation.
5. Usage of Calender Class and manipulation.
6. String Manipulation using Char Array.
7. Database Creation for storing e-mail addresses and manipulation.
8. Usage of Vector Classes.
9. Implementing Thread based applications & Exception Handling.
10.Application using synchronization such as Thread based, Class based and
synchronized statements.
Applets
11.Working with Frames and various controls.

12. Working with Dialogs and Menus.
13. Working with Panel and Layout.
14. Incorporating Graphics.
15. Working with Colours and Fonts.
194
SEMESTER VII
CST401:Advanced Java Programming
Unit-I: Servlet overview – the Java web server – your first servlet – servlet chaining –
server side includes- Session management – security – HTML forms – using JDBC in
servlets – applet to servlet communication.
Unit-II: The software component assembly model – the Java beans development kit –
developing beans – notable beans – using infobus – glasgow developments.
Unit-III: EJB architecture- EJB requirements- design and implementation- EJB session
beans- EJB entity beans.
Unit-IV: EJB clients- deployment- tips,tricks and traps for building distributed and other
systems- implementation and future directions of EJB.
Unit-V:Variable in pearl – pearl control structures and operators – functions and scope.
Books for Study:
1. Karl Moss - Java servlets – second edition– Tata McGraw Hill Edition.
2. Dustin R.Callaway-Inside Servlets - Addison Wesley.
3. Joseph O’Neil - Java Beans Programming –TMH.
4. TomValesky - Enterprise JavaBeans - Addison wesley.
5. Cay S Horstmann & Gary Cornell – Core Java – Vol II Advanced Features - Addison
Wesley Pvt. Ltd. Indian Branch.
CST403 – Design and Analysis of Algorithms
Unit 1: Introduction - Definition of Algorithm – pseudocode conventions – recursive

algorithms – time and space complexity –big-“oh” notation – practical complexities –
randomized algorithms – repeated element – primality testing - Divide and Conquer:
General Method - Finding maximum and minimum – merge sort.
Unit 2: Divide and conquer – Quicksort, Selection, Strassen's matrix multiplication –

Greedy Method: General Method –knapsack problem - Tree vertex splitting - Job
sequencing with dead lines – optimal storage on tapes.
Unit 3: Dynamic Programming: General Method - multistage graphs – all pairs shortest
paths – single source shortest paths - String Editing – 0/1 knapsack. Search techniques
for graphs – DFS-BFS-connected components – biconnected components.
195
Unit 4: Back Tracking: General Method – 8-queens - Sum of subsets - Graph Coloring –
Hamiltonian cycles. Branch and Bound: General Method - Traveling Salesperson
problem.
Unit 5: Lower Bound Theory: Comparison trees - Oracles and advisory arguments -
Lower bounds through reduction - Basic Concepts of NP-Hard and NP-Complete
problems.
(i) E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and S. Rajasekaran, 1999, Computer Algorithms,
Galgotia, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) G. Brassard and P. Bratley, 1997, Fundamentals of Algorithms, PHI, New
Delhi.
(ii) A.V. Aho, J.E. Hopcroft, J.D. Ullmann, 1974, The design and analysis of
Computer Algorithms, Addison Wesley, Boston.
(iii) S.E.Goodman and S.T.Hedetniemi, 1977, Introduction to the Design and
Analysis of algorithms, Tata McGraw Hill Int. Edn, New Delhi.
(i) http://www.cise.ufl.edu/~raj/BOOK.html
CST405 - Web Technologies
Unit 1: Introduction to Javascript – Advantage of Javascript – Javascript Syntax –

Datatype – Variable – Array – Operator and Expression – Looping Constructor –
Function – Dialog box.
Unit 2: Javascript document object model – Introduction – Object in HTMl – Event

Handling – Window Object – Document object – Browser Object – Form Object –
Navigator object – Screen object – Build in Object – User defined object – Cookies
Unit 3: Features of C# - C# and .NET framework – Getting started – C# language

fundamentals – classes and objects – Inheritance and Polymorphism –Interfaces-Arrays –
Indexers and Collections – Strings and Regular Expressions – Handling Exceptions –
Delegates and Events.
Unit 4: ASP. NET Language Structure – Page Structure – Page event, Properties &
Compiler Directives. HTML server controls – Anchor, Tables, Forms, Files. Basic Web
server Controls – Lable, Textbox, Button, Image, Links, Check & Radio button,
Hyperlink. Data List Web Server Controls – Check box list, Radio button list, Drop
down list, List box, Data grid, Repeater.
Unit 5: Request and Response Objects, Cookies, Working with Data – OLEDB
connection class, command class, transaction class, data adaptor class, data set class.
Advanced Issues – Email, Application Issues, Working with IIS and page Directives ,
196
Error handling. Security – Authentication , IP Address, Secure by SSL & Client
Certificates.
(i) I. Bayross, 200, Web Enable Commercial Application Development Using
HTML, DHTML, Javascript, Perl CGI, BPB Publications.
(ii) G.Buczek, 2002, ASP.NET Developers Guide, TMH.
(iii) Jesse Liberty, 2002, Programming C#”, Second Edition, O’Reilly Press.
2. Reference Books
(i) J. Jaworski, 1999, Mastering Javascript, BPB Publications.
(ii) T. A. Powell, 2002, Complete Reference HTML (Third Edition),Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
(iii) Richard Anderson, Professional ASP.NET, Wrox Press Ltd.
(iv) Jeffrey Ritcher, 2002, Appplied Microsoft .NET framework
Programming, Microsoft Press.
(v) Kumar Sanjeev and Shibi Panikkar, Magic of ASP.NET with C#, Firewall
Media.
CST407:-Practical – VII: Advanced Java Programming - Lab
BEANS PROGRAMMING
1. Write a quiz applet and use gauge bean to update the score
2. Create a time zone list and retrieve any time which is given with zone using java
beans
3. Develop a bean program that display a sequece of images in the form of slide show
4. Create a bean that displays a 3D plot of the following function
Z = f(x,y) = 0.01 *(x^2 – y^2)
5. Create a frame that instantiates the beans registers paints to receive color event
notifications from selectors adds the beans to the frame and makes the frame visible
6. Create a bean that displays a pie chart and use pie customizer to update the pie chart
7. Develop a bean that takes date and year and represent it in the local language in the
form of a calender For (Eg.) French , Italian etc
SERVLETS PROGRAMMING
1. Write a servlet to display

a. IP address and Port no. of server
b. The host name and address of the computer on which your browser visits
2. Use a servlet as RMI client to enable a method given
3. Using servlet create a form which contain a text area, checkbox, radio button, label
and text field with buttons
4. Create a chat program that uses servlets to communicate with 2 machines.
5. Create a servlet that gets the date and time of the system
197
CST409:Practical –VIII: Web Applications Lab.
1.Write a script to create an array of 10 elements and arrange them in the ascending or
descending order.
2. Write a function in Javascript that takes a string and looks at it character by
character and perform all the String manipulation..
3. Create a simple calculator which should perform all the mathematical operations.
4. Create a document and add a link to it. Create a new window on that document.
When the user moves the mouse over the link , it should load the linked
document on it.
5. Create a document that accepts the user’s name in a text field form and displays
the same the next time when the user visits the site informing him that he has
accessed the site for the second time, and so on.
6. Create a Web form for an online library. This form must be able to accept the
Membership Id of the person borrowing a book, the name and ID of the book, and
the name of the book’s author. On submitting the form, the user (the person
borrowing the book) must be thanked and informed of the date when the book is
to be returned. You can enhance the look of the page by using various ASP.NET
controls.
7. Use a calendar control in the page to determine the current date (when the book is
borrowed) and calculate the due date, which must be three weeks from the current
date. Display the due date to the user.
8. Create an array containing the titles of five new movies. Use this array as a data
source for a drop down list control. The page must be capable of displaying the
selected movie title to the user when the user clicks on the submit button.
9. Create a virtual directory in IIS. Create a global.asax file and include the
“Session_Start” and “Session_End” and, “Application_BeginRequest” and
“Application_EndRequest” events. Write a simple ASP.NET page and execute it
in the browser. What is the output that you get?
10. Create an ASP.NET application. The application must consist of a form that
accepts the user’s credentials and validate the same. The user is then allowed to
purchase items from the site by filling in a form. The user is finally informed
when the purchased goods will be delivered to him/her.
a. Create a single default error page for any errors occurring in the application.
b. Use ASP.NET debugger to debug the application during its development
c. Enable tracing for the application. Display the user entered data in the
purchase form as trace information at the bottom of the purchase page.
d. Switch off tracing for the application.
11. Create the Employee information and perform all the validator controls.
198
Elective – I :CST411 - Parallel Algorithms
Unit-I: Need for parallel computers, Modules of Computation, Analyzing Algorithms,

Expressing Algorithms - Broadcast, All sum and selection algorithms on SIMD model -
Searching a sorted sequence: EREW, CREW SMSIMD algorithms, Searching a Random
sequence on shared memory SIMD, Tree and mesh interconnected computers.
Unit-II: Sorting on a Linear Array, Sorting on a Mesh, Sorting on EREW SIMD

computer, MIMD Enumeration sort, MIMD Quick sort. Sorting on other Networks.
Unit-III: Matrix Transposition: Mesh Transpose, Shuffle Transpose, EREW transpose.

Matrix by matrix Multiplication: Mesh multiplication, Cube multiplication. Matrix by
vector Multiplication: Linear Array Multiplication, Tree Multiplication.
Unit-IV: Solving Numerical problems, solving systems of Linear equations: An SIMD

algorithm, An MIMD algorithm. Finding Roots of Nonlinear Equations: MIMD
algorithm. Solving partial Differential Equations, Computing Eigen values.
Unit-V: Solving Graph Theoretical problems, Computing the connectivity matrix.

Finding connected components, All-Pairs shortest paths, Traversing combinatorial
spaces, sequential tree traversal. The minimal alpha-Beta Tree, MIMD Alpha-Beta
algorithm, parallel cutoffs. Storage requirements.
Books for Study:
1. Selim G. AKL - The Design and Analysis of parallel algorithm - Prentice hall.
2. Michael Quinn - Parallel Algorithms - McGraw Hill.
Elective – I : CST413 – Artificial Intelligence

And Expert Systems
Unit-I : Introduction – Evaluation of Artificial Intelligence production Systems- search

strategies Hill climbing back tracking graph search ( Algorithm A and A*) properties of
A* algorithm , monotone restriction specialised production systems – AO* algorithm.
Unit – II: Searching game trees : Minimax procedure alphabeta pruning – Introduction to
predicate calculus Answer extraction – Introduction to Knowledge based systems –
Knowledge Processing techniques- Knowledge inference techniques.
Unit – III: Expert System Definition – Various stages in developing expert system-
Knowledge representation using sematicness, predicate calculus, frames- scripts-
knowledge acquisition techniques- factors to be considered while expert systems.
199
Unit – IV: Forward Chaining , Backward Chaining- Tools for developing an expert
system – Explanation facilities- Meta Knowledge – fuzzy reasoning.
Unit -V: Building various expert systems- case study Dendral, Mycin etc. Introduction to
various applications of A.I. Natural Language processing – Natural Language
understanding – perception – Learning using neuralnets.
Books for Study:
1. Elaine Rich , Artificial Intelligence McGraw Hill International.

2. P.H.Winston - Artificial Intelligence, Addison wessley.
3. Fredrick Hayes Roth , Donald A Waterman and Doughlas B.Leant (editors) -
Building Expert System - Addison wesley - 1983.
References:
1. N.J. Nilson – Spring verlag - Principles of AI - 1983.

2. David W.Rolston - Principles of AI & Expert Systems Developmenet -
McGrawHill.
3. Donald A Waterman - A guide to expert systems.
Elective – I : CST415: Systems Software
Unit-I: Introduction – System Sotware – Components of System software Evolution by

System software – Model of Computer System; Introduction to software processors.
Unit-II: Assemblers: Elements of Assembly language programming – Overview of the

Assembly process – Design of Two-pass Assembler – A single pass Assembler for the
IBM PC – Macros and Macro processors.
Unit-III: Compilers: Aspects of compilation – Overview of the compilation process –

Programming languages grammers – Scanning – Parsing – Storage allocation –
Compilation of Expressions and Control structures – Code optimization – Compiler
writing tools, Software processors for Interactive Environments.
Unit-IV: Loaders and Linkage Editors: Loading, linking and Relocation – Program
relocatability – Overview of linkage editing – A linkage editor for the IBM PC – Linking
for program over-lays.
200
Unit-V: Software tools: Spectrum of software tools – Text editors – Interpreters and
program generators – Debug monitors – Programming environments.
Book for Study:
1. Dhamdhere – Introduction to systems software – Tata Mc-Graw Hill.
Reference:
1. Leland L. Beck – System Software, An Introduction to System Programming” –

Addison-Wesley.
SEMESTER VIII
CST402 Unix And Shell Programming
Unit I: INTRODUCTION: File and common commands – Shell – More about files -
Directories – Unix system – Basics of file Directories and filenames - Permissions –
Inodes – Directory hierarchy - Devices – the grep family – Other filters – the stream
editor sed – the awk pattern scanning and processing language – files and good filters.
Unit II: CONCEPTS OF SHELL: Command line structure – Metacharacters – Creating

new commands – Command arguments and parameters – program output as arguments –
Shell variables – More on I/O redirection – loop in shell programs – Bundle – Setting
shell attributes, Shift command line parameters - Exiting a command or the shell,
evaluating arguments – Executing command without invoking a new process – Trapping
exit codes – Conditional expressions.
Unit III: SHELL PROGRAMMING: Customizing the cal command, Functions of

command, While and Until loops – Traps – Catching interrupts – Replacing a file –
Overwrite – Zap – Pick command – News command – Get and Put tracking file changes.
Unit IV: FEATURES IN UNIX: Standard input and output – Program arguments – file
access – A screen at a time printer – On bugs and debugging – Examples – Zap – pick –
Interactive file comparison program – Accessing the environment – Unix system calls –
Low level I/O, File system Directories and inodes, Processors, Signal and Interrupts.
201
Unit V: PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT AND DOCUMENT PREPARATION: Program
development – Four function calculator – Variables and error recovery – Arbitrary
variable names, Built in functions, Compilation into a machine, Control flow and
relational operators, Functions and procedures – Performance evaluation – Ms macro
package – Troff level – Tbl and eqn preprocessors – Manual page – Other document
preparation.
Book for Study:
1. Brian W. Kernighan, Rob Pike - The UNIX Programming Environment - Prentice

Hall of India(1984).
References:
1. Steven Earhart - The UNIX System for MSDOS Users - Galgotia book source P.
Ltd. (1990).
2. Stefen Prata - Advanced UNIX – A Programmer Guide.
CST404: Distributed Databases
Unit–I: Features of Distributed versus Centralized Databases – Why Distributed

Databases – Distributed Database Management Systems (DDBMSs)- Review of
Databases – Review of Computer Networks-Levels of Distribution Transparency-
Reference Architecture for Distributed Databases – Types of Data Fragmentation –
Distribution Transparency for read-only Applications – Distribution transparency for
Update Applications – Distributed Database Access Primitives – Integrity Constraints in
Distributed Databases - A Framework for Distributed Database Design – The Design of
Database Fragmentation – The Allocation of Fragments.
Unit–II: Equivalence Transformations for Queries – Transforming Global Queries into

Fragment Queries – Distributed Grouping and Aggregate Function Evaluation –
Parametric Queries -Optimization of Access Strategies - A Framework for Query
Optimization – Join Queries – General Queries. A Framework for Transaction
Management – Supporting Atomicity of Distributed Transactions – Concurrency Control
for Distributed Transactions – Architectural Aspects of Distributed Transactions
Unit–III: Foundations of Distributed Concurrency Control – Distributed Deadlocks –

Concurrency Control Based on Timestamps – Optimistic Methods for Distributed
Concurrency Control - Reliability – Basic Concepts Nonblocking Commitment Protocols
– Reliability and Concurrency Control – Determining a Consistent View of the Network
– Detection and Resolution of Inconsistency – Checkpoints and Cold Restart -
202
Distributed Database Administration – Catalog Management in Distributed Databases –
Authorization and Protection.
Unit–IV: Distributed object database management systems – Fundamental object

concepts and Models – Object – Abstract Data Types – Composition (Aggregation) –
Class – Collection – Subtyping and Inheritance. – Object Distribution Design –
Horizontal Class Partitioning – Vertical Class Partitioning – Path Partitioning – Class
Partitioning Algorithms – Allocation – Replication – Alternative Client / Server
Architectures – Cache Consistency – Object Identifier Management – Pointer Swizzling
Object Migration – Distributed Object Storage – Object Query Processor Architectures –
Query Processing Issues – Query Execution – Correctness Criteria – Transaction Models
and Object Structures – Transactions Management in Object DBMSs – Transactions as
Objects – Conclusion – Bibliographic Notes – Exercises.
Unit–V: Parallel Database Systems – Database Server Approach – Database Servers and
Distributed Databases – Parallel System Architectures – Objectives – Functional Aspects
– Parallel Data Processing – Parallel Query Optimization – Data Placement – Query
Parallelism – Parallel Execution Problems – Initialization – Interferences and Convoy
Effect – Load Balancing – Parallel Execution for Hierarchical Architecture – Problem
Formulation – Basic Concepts – Load Balancing Strategy – Performance Evaluation –
Conclusion – Bibliographic Notes – Exercises
Books for Study:
1. Stefano Ceri, Giuseppe Pelagatti - Distributed Databases Principles &Systems-

McGraw-Hill.
2. M.Tamer Ozsu, Patrick Valduriez - Distributed database systems- Prentice Hall-

Second Edition.
CST406: E-Commerce
Unit-I: Overview of electronic commerce: introduction-definition of electronic

commerce-potential benefits of electronic commerce-internet and www as enablers of
electronic commerce-impact of electronic commerce on business models-electronic
commerce security-organization of topics-implications for the accounting. Electronic
commerce and the role of independent third parties: introduction-consulting practices and
accountants-independence-cpa vision problem- new assurance services identified by the
aicpa-impact of Electronic commerce on the traditional assurance function-third party
Assurance of web based electronic commerce-implications for the accounting.
Regulatory environment: introduction-cryptography issues-privacy issues-web linking-
domain name dispuits-internet sales tax-electronic agreement and digital signature –
Internet service providers and international libel laws-implications for the accounting.
203
Unit-II: Edi electronic commerce and the internet: introduction-traditional Edi system-
data transfer and standards-financial Edi-Edi systems and the internet-impact of Edi
internet applications on the accounting profession. Risks of insecure system:
introduction-overview of risks associated with internet transactions-internet associated
risk- intranet associated risk-social engineering-risks associated with business
transactions- risks associated with confidentially maintained archival-Master file and
reference data- risks associated with virus and malicious-implications of the accounting.
Risks management: introduction- control weekness vs control risks – Risk management
paradigm – disaster recovery plans- Implications of the accounting.
Unit-III: Internet security standards:-introductions- standard setting issues and

Committiees - security committiees and organization - security protocols and languages-
messaging protocols –secure electronic payments and protocols-the role of accountants in
internet related standard setting process. Cryptography and authentication: introduction-
message security issues- Encryption techniques-key management-additional
authentication methods-additional non repudiation techniques- implications of the
accounting .
Unit-IV: Firewalls: introduction – firewall defined – TCP/IP-open system interconnect

(OSI)-components of firewall-typical functionality of firewalls- network topology-
securing the firewall-factors to consider in firewall design – in-house solutions Vs
commercial fire wall software-limitations of security prevention provided by firewall –
Implications of the accounting. Introduction-the set protocol – magnetic strip cards-smart
cards-electronic check-electronic cash- implications of the accounting.
Unit-V: Intelligent agent: introduction-definition of intelligent agent-capabilities of

intelligent agent-level of agent sophistication-agent societies- intelligent agents and
electronic commerce-online information Chain - limitations of agents- implications of the
accounting. Web based marketing: introduction-the scope of marketing-business
marketing and information technology-strategy congruence-the four ps applied to internet
marketing – the fifth “P”personalization- in ternet marketing techniques-online adv.
mechanisms –web site design issues- Intelligent agent and their impacts on marketing
techniques- Implications of the accounting.
Books for Study:
1. Marilyn Greenstein, Todd M Feinman - Electronic Commerce - Tata McGraw Hill -

2000.
2. Kalakota & Whinston – Frontiers of Electronic Commerce – 5 th Indian Reprint –
Addison Wesley – 2000.
204
CST408: Information Security
Unit 1: Introduction: Security- Attacks- Computer criminals- Method of defense Program

Security: Secure programs- Non-malicious program errors- Viruses and other malicious
code- Targeted malicious code- Controls against program threats.
Unit 2 : Operating System Security: Protected objects and methods of protection-

Memory address protection- Control of access to general objects- File protection
mechanism- Authentication: Authentication basics- Password- Challenge-response-
Biometrics.
Unit 3 : Database Security: Security requirements- Reliability and integrity- Sensitive

data- Interface- Multilevel database- Proposals for multilevel security.
Unit 4 : Security in Networks: Threats in networks- Network security control- Firewalls-

Intrusion detection systems- Secure e-mail- Networks and cryptography- Example
protocols: PEM- SSL- Ipsec.
Unit 5 : Administrating Security: Security planning- Risk analysis- Organizational

security policies- Physical security - Legal- Privacy- and Ethical Issues in Computer
Security - Protecting programs and data- Information and law- Rights of employees and
employers- Software failures- Computer crime- Privacy- Ethical issues in computer
society- Case studies of ethics.
1. C. P. Pfleeger, and S. L. Pfleeger, Security in Computing, Pearson
Education, 4th Edition, 2003
2. Matt Bishop, Computer Security: Art and Science, Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Reference Books
1. Stallings, Cryptography And Network Security: Principles and
practice, 4th Edition, 2006
2. Kaufman, Perlman, Speciner, Network Security, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition,
2003
3. Eric Maiwald, Network Security : A Beginner’s Guide, TMH, 1999
4. Macro Pistoia, Java Network Security, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 1999
5. Whitman, Mattord, Principles of information security, Thomson, 2nd Edition,
2005
205
CST410: Practical – IX: Unix Lab
Students can refer the following book for further details.

Charles Crowley - Operating Systems ( A Design Oriented Approach) - TMH - 1998.
1. Inter Process Communication (IPC) using Message Queues.
2. IPC using pipes.
3. Implementation of wait and signal using counting semaphores.
4. Implementation of wait and signal using binary semaphores.
5. Atomic Counter update problem.
6. Counting Semaphores at the user level using binary semaphores.
7. Signaling processes.
8. Deadlock detection (for processes passing messages)
9. Process Scheduling: FCFS
10.Process Scheduling: Least Frequently Used.
11.Process Scheduling: Round Robin.
12.Producer-Consumer problem with limited buffers.
13.Dining-Philosopher Problem.
14.Reader-Writer problem.
15.Two Process Mutual Exclusion.
Elective –II - CST412: Software Project Management
Unit-I: Introduction to Software Project Management- Software project versus other

types of project- problems- management control- Stakeholders- Requirement
Specification – Information and control in organizations Introduction to step wise project
planning- Select-identify scope and objectives- identify project infrastructure- Analyse
project characteristics- products and activities- Estimate effort for each activity- Identify
activity risks- Allocate resources- Review/ publicize plan- Execute plan and lower levels
of planning. Project evaluation- Introduction – Strategic assessment- technical
assessment- cost benefit analysis- cash flow forecasting- cost- benefit evaluation
techniques- risk evaluation
Unit-II: Selection of an appropriate project approach- choosing technologies- technical

plan contents list- choice of process models- structured methods-rapid application
development- waterfall model- v-process model-spiral model- software prototyping-
ways of categorizing prototypes- tools- incremental delivery- selecting process model -
Software effort estimation- introduction- where-problems with over and under estimates-
basis for software estimating- software effort estimation technique- expert judgement-
Albercht function point analysis- Function points Mark II- Object points- procedural
code oriented approach- COCOMO. Activity Planning- Objectives- Project schedules-
projects and activities- sequencing and scheduling activities- network planning models-
formulating a network model- using dummy activities- representing lagged activities-
adding time dimension- forward pass- backward pass- identifying the critical path-
206
Activity float- shortening project duration – identifying critical activities-precedence
networks
Unit-III: Risk Management- nature of risk- managing- identification-analysis- reducing-

evaluating- z values. Resource allocation- nature of resources- requirements-scheduling-
critical paths- counting the cost-resource schedule- cost schedule- scheduling sequence.
Monitoring and control- creating the frame work- collecting the data- visualizing the
progress- cost monitoring-earned value- prioritizing monitoring-Change control.
Unit-IV: Managing contracts- types of contract- stages in contract placement- terms of a

contract-contract management- acceptance. Managing people and organizing teams-
organizational behaviour background- selecting the right person for the job- instruction in
the best methods-motivation- decision making-leadership-organizational structures.
Software quality- importance- defining –ISO9126- practical measures- product versus
process quality management- external standards-techniques to help enhance software
quality
Unit-V: Small projects- some problems- content of a project plan. PRINCE 2- an

overview-BS6079:1996- an overview - Euro method- an overview
Books for Study:

1. Bob Hughes and Mike Cotterell – Software project management-second edition-
McGraw Hill.
2. Walker Royce - Software Project Management - Addison Wesley.
Elective II - CST414: Fuzzy Logic
Unit-I: Introduction – Classical sets and Fuzzy Sets – Classical sets – fuzzy sets – sets as
points in hyper cubes – classical relations and fuzzy relations – Cartesian product – crisp
relations – fuzzy relations – tolerance and equivalence relations – fuzzy tolerance and
equivalence relations – Value assignments.
Unit-II: Membership functions – Features of the membership functions – standard forms

and boundaries – Fuzzification – Membership value assignments – Fuzzy to crisp
conversions – Lambda cuts for fuzzy sets – Lambda cuts for fuzzy relations –
Defuzzification methods – Fuzzy arithmetic, numbers, vectors and the extension principle
– Extension principle – Fuzzy numbers – Interval Analysis in arithmetic – Approximate
methods of extension – Fuzzy vectors.
Unit-III: Classical logic and fuzzy logic – Classical predicate logic – fuzzy logic –
approximate reasoning – fuzzy tautologies, contradictions, equivalence and logical
proofs – other forms of the implication operation – other forms of the composition
operation – Fuzzy rule based system – natural language – linguistic hedges – rule
based systems – graphical techniques of inference.
207
Unit- IV: Fuzzy nonlinear simulation – fuzzy relational equations – partitioning –
nonlinear simulation using fuzzy rule based systems – fuzzy associative memories
(FAMs) – Fuzzy decision making – fuzzy synthetic evaluation – fuzzy ordering –
preference and consensus – multiobjective decision making - fuzzy Bayesian decision
method – decision making under fuzzy states and fuzzy actions .
Unit-V: Fuzzy classification – classification by equivalence relations – cluster analysis –

cluster validity – c-Means clustering – classification metric – hardening the fuzzy c-
Partition – similarity relations from clustering – Fuzzy pattern recognition – feature
analysis – partitions of the feature space- single sample identification - multi feature
pattern recognition – image processing – syntactic recognition.
Book for Study:
1. Timothy J Ross - Fuzzy Logic With Engineering Applications - McGraw Hill

International Editions – Electrical Engineering Series.
Elective –II: CST416 – Computer Simulation and System Modeling
Unit-I: Introduction to Simulation: Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation –

Areas of Application – Systems and System Environment- Components of a System –
Discrete and Continuous System – Model of a System – Types of Models – Discrete-
Event System Simulation – Steps in a Simulation Study: Simulation Examples.
Programming Languages for Simulation: FORTRAN, GPSS, SIMAN, SIMSCRIPT,
SLAM and MODSIM III.
Unit-II: Statistical Models in Simulation: Useful Statistical Models- Discrete

Distributions – Continuous Distributions-Poisson Process – Empirical Distributions.
Simulation of Manufacturing and Material Handling Systems : Modeling of
Manufacturing Systems- Models of Material Handling Systems – Goals and Performance
measures- Issues in simulating Manufacturing and Material Handling Systems-
Simulators and Languages for Manufacturing and Material Handling Systems.
Simulation of Queueing Systems: Queueing System Characteristics- Queueing Notation –
Transient and Steady – State behavior of queues- Long-Run-Measures of Performance of
Queuing Systems- Steady – State – Behavior of Infinite Population Markovian Models-
Network of Queues.
Unit-III: Random Number Generation: Properties of Random Numbers- Generation of

Pseudo Random Numbers- Techniques for Generating Random Numbers- Tests for
208
Random Numbers. Random Variate Generation: Inverse Transformation Technique-
Uniform Distribution – Exponential Distribution – Weibull Distribution- Triangular
Distribution- Empirical Continous Distribution – Discrete Distribution – Direct
Transformation for the Normal Distribution – Convolution Method for Erlang
Distribution – Acceptance-Rejection Technique: Pisson Distribution- Gamma
Distribution.
Unit-IV: Input Data Analysis : Data Collection – Identifying the Distribution with Data-
Parameter Estimation-Goodness-of-Fit Tests:- Chi-Square Test- Kolmogrov- Smirnov
Test; Selecting Input Models without Data – Multivariate and Time Series Input Models.
Verification and Validation of Simulation Models: Model Building , Verification and
Validation – Verification of Simulation Models- Calibration and Validation of Models:-
Face Validity- Validation of Model Assumptions- Validating Input-Output
Transformations- Input-Output Validation using a Turing Test.
Unit-V: Output Data Analysis : Stochastic Nature of Output Data – Types of Simulation
with respect to output Analysis- Measures of Performance and their Estimation – Output
Analysis for Terminating Simulations- Output Analysis for Steady-State Simulations.
Comparison and Evaluation of Alternative System Designs: Comparison of Two System
Designs – Comparison of Several System Designs – Statistical Models for Estimating the
Effect of Design Alternatives – Metamodeling.
Books for Study:

1. Jerry Banks , John S.Carson, II and Barry L.Nelson - ‘Discrete-Event System
Simulation’ - 2nd Edition. - Printice Hall - 1995.
2. Averill M. Law and W. David Kelton - Simulation Modeling and Analysis – TMH -
2000.
209
SEMESTER IX
CST501 - Network Programming
Unit-I: Overview of ActiveX Scripting – Java Scripting- Stand-Alone Scripts- ActiveX

Controls- Creating ActiveX Controls.
Unit-II: ActiveX Documents- ActiveX Document Architecture- Creating ActiveX

Documents.
Unit-III: URL Monikers- Hyperlinking- Hyperlink Interface- Working with URL

Monikers- Overview of ISAPI- ISAPI Extension- ISAPI Filter.
Unit-IV: Designing IIS Applications - Building IIS Applications- Building Data Driven
DHTML Applications.
Unit-V: ActiveX Documents - Technology – Migration Wizard- Modifying Code-

Launching and Testing Document- Testing the DLL.
Books for Study:
1. John Paul Muller – Visual C++ 5 from the GroundUp- Tata McGraw Hill Edition –
1998 (For first three units)
2. Noel Jerke – Visual Basic 6 (The Complete Reference) – Tata McGraw Hill Edition –
1999(For fourth and fifth units)
CST503: Software Testing
Unit 1: Introduction: Purpose – Productivity and Quality in Software – Testing Vs

Debugging – Model for Testing – Bugs – Types of Bugs – Testing and Design Style.
Unit-2: Flow/Graphs and Path Testing – Achievable paths – Path instrumentation –

Application – Transaction Flow Testing Techniques – Data Flow Testing Strategies
Unit 3: Domain Testing: Domains and Paths – Domains and Interface Testing –
Linguistic –Metrics – Structural Metric – Path Products and Path Expressions.
210
Unit-4: Syntax Testing – Formats – Test Cases – Logic Based Testing – Decision Tables
– Transition Testing – States, State Graph, State Testing.
Unit-5 : Verification and Validation – Fundamental Tools - Levels of Testing – Testing

Approaches – Types of Testing – Test Plan – Software Testing Tools: WinRunner – Silk
Test
(i) B. Beizer , 2003, Software Testing Techniques, II Edn., DreamTech India,
New Delhi.
(ii) K.V.KK. Prasad , 2005, Software Testing Tools, DreamTech. India, New
Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) I. Burnstein, 2003, Practical Software Testing, Springer International Edn.
(ii) E. Kit, 1995, Software Testing in the Real World: Improving the Process,
(iii) R.Rajani, and P.P.Oak, 2004, Software Testing, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New
Delhi.
(i) http://www.amazon.com/gp/reader/0201877562/ref=sib_dp_pt/102-1957971-
9723354#reader -link
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
Data Warehousing and Data Mining
Unit 1: Introduction: Data Mining tasks – Data Mining versus Knowledge Discovery in
Data bases – Relational databases – Data warehouses – Transactional databases – Object
oriented databases – Spatial databases – Temporal databases – Text and Multimedia
databases – Heterogeneous databases - Mining Issues – Metrics – Social implications of
Data mining.
Unit 2: Data Preprocessing: Why Preprocess the data – Data cleaning – Data Integration
– Data Transformation – Data Reduction – Data Discretization.
Unit 3: Data Mining Techniques: Association Rule Mining – The apriori Algorithm –
Multilevel Association Rules – Multidimensional Association Rules – Constraint Based
Association Mining.
Unit 4: Classification and Prediction: Issues regarding Classification and Prediction –

Decision Tree induction – Bayesian Classification – Back Propagation – Classification
Methods – Prediction – Classifiers accuracy.
Unit 5 : Clustering Techniques: cluster Analysis – Clustering Methods – Hierarchical

Methods – Density Based Methods – Outlier Analysis – Introduction to Advanced
Topics: Web Mining , Spatial Mining and Temporal Mining.
211
(ii) J. Han and M. Kamber , 2001, Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques,
Morgan Kaufmann, .New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(iv) M. H.Dunham, 2003, Data Mining : Introductory and Advanced Topics ,
(v) Paulraj Ponnaiah, 2001, Data Warehousing Fundamentals, Wiley
Publishers.
(vi) S.N. Sivananda and S. Sumathi, 2006, Data Mining, Thomsan Learning,
Chennai.

(i) http://www. academicpress.com
(ii) http://www.mkp.com
CST507-Practical–X-Network Programming Lab
1. Working with Java Scripts.

2. Creating ActiveX Controls.
3. OLE Server.
4. OLE Container.
5. Working with URL Monikers.
6. Creating an ISAPI Extension.
7. Creating an ISAPI Filter.
8. Building IIS Application.
9. Data- Driven DHTML Application.
10. ActiveX Documents.
Elective –III: CST509-TCP/IP Networks
Unit-I: TCP/IP layering- Link Layer- ethernet and IEEE – Trailer encapsulation- SLIP-
Address Resolution Protocol- example- ARP cache- ARP packet format- ARP examples-
proxy ARP- Internet control message protocol- Ping program- Trace route program-
introduction – operation- LAN output- WAN output- IP source routing option.
Unit-II: IP routing- introduction- routing principles- ICMP host and network

unreachable errors- ICMP redirect errors- ICMP router discovery messages- Dynamic
routing protocols- Unix routing daemons- RIP : Routing Information protocol- OSPF-
BGP- CIDR User datagram Protocol: - UDP header- UDP checksum- example- IP
fragmentation- Determining the path MTU using Traceroute- Maximum UDP datagram
212
size- ICMP Source Quench error- UDP server design – Broadcasting and multicasting-
Internet Group Management Protocol- example
Unit-III: The domain name system- message format- Pointer queries- Resource
records- Caching- TFTP: Trivial File Transfer Protocol- example – security- Bootstrap
Protocol- BOOTP Packet format- Server design- Through a router- vendor specific
information.
Transmission Control Protocol – TCP services- TCP header- TCP connection
establishment and termination- Timeout of connection establishment- Maximum segment
size- TCP half close- State Transition diagram- Reset segments- TCP server design. TCP
Interactive dataflow- interactive input- delayed acknowledgements- Nagle algorithm-
Window size advertisements - TCP Bulk data flow- Normal data flow- Sliding windows-
window size – push flag- Slow start- Bulk Data throughput- Urgent mode.
Unit-IV: TCP timeout and retransmission- example- RTT example- congestion example-
Fast retransmit and Fast recovery algorithms- ICMP errors- TCP persist timer- Silly
window syndrome- TCP keep alive timer- example-TCP futures and performance-
PAWS- T/TCP. SNMP- Simple Network Management Protocol- Object identifies-
Instance Identification – Management Information Base – Additional Examples.
Unit V: Rlogin Protocol – Rlogin Examples – Telnet Protocol – Telnet Examples – File
Transfer Protocol – FTP Examples – Simple Mail Transfer Protocol – SMTP Examples –
SMTP Futures.
Books for Study:
1. W.Richard Stevens - TCP/IP - Illustrated Volume 1 - The Protocols –Addison

Wesley.
2. Behrouz A.forouzan - TCP/IP – TMH.
Elective – III: CST-511 - Artificial Neural Networks
Unit I : Introduction to Neural Networks – Basic Concepts of Neural Networks –

Inference and Learning – Classification Models – Association Models – Optimization
Models – Self-Organization Models.
Unit II : Supervised and Unsupervised Learning – Statistical Learning – AI Learning –

Neural Network Learning – Rule Based Neural Networks – Network Training – Network
Revision- Issues- Theory of Revision- Decision Tree Based NN – Constraint Based NN.
Unit III : Incremental learning – Mathematical Modeling – Application of NN-

Knowledge based Approaches.
Unit IV: Heuristics- Hierarchical Models – Hybrid Models – Parallel Models –

Differentiation Models- Control Networks – Symbolic Methods- NN Methods.
213
Unit V: Structures and Sequences – Spatio-temporal NN – Learning Procedures –
Knowledge based Approaches.
Books for Study:

1. Limin Fu - Neural Networks in Computer Intelligence – McGraw Hill International
Edition – 1994.
2. Robert J Schalkoff – Artificial Neural Networks – McGraw Hill – 1997.
Elective- III: CST513 - Windows Programming
Unit-I : Windows Fundamentals – Programming Concepts and Vocabulary for

Windows – Windows Development Tools – Resource Information.
Unit-II : Application Framework- Project Utility – Writing Windows Programming

(Procedure Oriented) – Pie-chart Application.
Unit-III : MFC Library – MFC Design Considerations – Key features of MFC Library
– C Object – Simple Application and Template- Drawing in Client Area- Fourier Series
application with Resources- Bar Chart with Resources.
Unit-IV : Graph Applications – Word Processor Applications – OLE Features and

Specifications - Container Application.
Unit-V: Active X Controls – Create simple Active X Controls with MFC – Customizing
Controls – COM – DHTML- ATL vs. ActiveX.
Books for Study :
1. C.H.Pappas and W.H.Murray- Visual C++ 6 (The Complete Reference) Tata

McGraw Hill Edition – 1999.
2. Lars Klander - Core Visual C++ 6 –Addison wesley- First Indian reprint – 2000.
3. Herbert Schildt – Windows 98 Programming from the GroundUp – Tata McGraw
Hill Edition – 1999.
Elective –IV:-CST515- CAD/CAM
Unit-I: Introduction-CAD/CAM Contents and Tools – History of CAD/CAM

Development - CAD/CAM Market Trends – Definition of CAD/CAM Tools – Industrial
Look at CAD/CAM – Book Approach – Book Organization. CAD/CAM Hardware –
Introduction – Types of Systems - CAD/CAM Systems Evaluation Criteria – Input
Devices – Output Devices – Hardware Integration and Networking – Hardware Trends.
214
Unit-II: CAD/CAM Software – Introduction – Graphics Standards – Basic Definitions –
Modes of Graphics Operations – User Interface – Software Modules – Modeling and
Viewing – Software Documentation – Software Development – Efficient Use of
CAD/CAM Software – Software Trends. Microcomputer-Based CAD/CAM –
Introduction – General Features – System Implementation – Hardware Components and
Configuration – Micro-Based CAD Software – Customizing the Software – File
Translation – Operating Systems – Mechanical Applications – MicroCAD Trends –
Product Distribution Trends.
Unit-III: Types and Mathematical Representations of Curves – Introduction –

WireFrame Models – WireFrame Entities – Curve Representation – Parametric
Representations of Analytic Curves – Parametric Representation of Synthetic Curves –
Curve Manipulations – Design and Engineering Applications.
Unit-IV: Types and Mathematical Representations of Surfaces – Introduction – Surface

Models – Surface Entities - Surface Representation – Parametric Representation of
Analytic Surfaces – Parametric Representation of Synthetic Surfaces – Surface
Manipulations – Design and Engineering Applications. Types and Mathematical
Representations of Solids – Introduction – Solid Models – Solid Entities – Solid
Representation – Fundamentals of Solid Modeling – Half-spaces – Boundary
Representation (B-rep) – Constructive Solid Geometry (CSG) – Sweep Representation –
Analytic Solid Modeling (ASM).
Unit-V: CAD/CAM Data Exchange – Introduction – Evolution of Data Exchange Format

– IGES – PDES. TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL GRAPHICS CONCEPTS:
Geometric Transformations – Introduction – Transformations of Geometric Models –
Mappings of Geometric Models – Inverse Transformations and Mappings – Projections
of Geometric Models – Design and Engineering Applications.
Book for Study:

1. Ibrahim Zeid - CAD/CAM Theory and Practice - Tata McGraw-Hill Edition -2000.
Elective – IV: CST517 - Distributed Computing
Unit-I: Hardware Concepts - Switched Multiprocessor - Bus-based multicomputers -

Switched Multicomputers - Software concepts - Network Operating Systems and NFS -
Time Distributed Systems. Design Issues: Transparency - Flexibility - Reliability -
Performance and scalability.
Unit-II: Communications in distribute systems - The Client/Server Model - Blocking

versus unbuffered primitives - Implementation of Client/Server model.
Unit-III: Synchronization in distributed systems - Clock synchronization - Mutual

exclusion - Election algorithms - Atomic transactions - Dead lock distributed system -
Threads - Thread usage and implementation of thread packages - Processor allocation.
215
Unit-IV: Distributed File System: File Service interface - Semantics of file sharing -
Distributed file system - Implementation of new trends in distributed file system.
Unit-V: Distributed databases: Distributed DBMS Architecture - Sorting Data in a

Distributed DBMS - Distributed Catalog Management - Distributed query processing -
Updating distributed data - Distributed transaction management - Distributed
Concurrency control - Recovery.
Book for Study:
1. A.S. Tanenbaum - Modern Operating Systems - Prentice Hall.
Elective – IV: CST519:-Image Processing
Unit 1: Introduction – steps in image processing, Image acquisition, representation,

sampling and quantization, relationship between pixels. – color models – basics of color
image processing.
Unit 2: Image enhancement in spatial domain – some basic gray level transformations –
histogram processing – enhancement using arithmetic , logic operations – basics of
spatial filtering and smoothing.
Unit 3: Image enhancement in Frequency domain – Introduction to Fourier transform: 1-

D, 2 –D DFT and its inverse transform, smoothing and sharpening filters.
Unit 4: Image restoration: Model of degradation and restoration process – noise models –
restoration in the presence of noise- periodic noise reduction.. Image segmentation:
Thresholding and region based segmentation.
Unit 5 : Image compression: Fundamentals – models – information theory – error free

compression –Lossy compression: predictive and transform coding. JPEG standard.
(i) R.C. Gonzalez, R.E.Woods, 2002, Digital Image processing, 2 nd Edition,
Pearson Education.
2. Reference Books
(i) Anil K. Jain, 1994, Fundamentals of Digital image Processing, 2nd
Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
(ii) Pratt. W.K., Digital Image Processing, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons.
(iii) Rosenfled A. & Kak, A.C, 1982, Digital Picture Processing, vol .I & II,
Academic Press.

(i) http://www.imageprocesssingplace.com/DIP/dip-downloads/
216
SEMESTER X
CST502 - Project
Each student shall carry out an individual project for the full semester in an IT or related
industry or in the department and a report of work done shall be submitted.
217
11. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN ELECTRONIC MEDIA
SYLLABUS
Semester III
Core Paper – 9 - Communication Research Methods-I

Unit 1: Fundamentals of Social Research
Unit 2: Varieties of Research Designs
Unit 3: Social Measurement & Statistical Techniques
Unit 4: Qualitative Research Approaches
Unit 5: Data Analysis & Interpretation
Core Paper – 10 Film Studies

Unit 1: Film theories, film aesthetics and film genres
Unit 2: Major film movements (German expressionism, French new wave, Italian
neorealism, Indian new wave and Soviet montage)
Unit 3: History of early cinema with special reference to India
Unit 4: The history of political cinema and the dynamics of the cinema-society interface
in Tamil Nadu
Unit 5: Film analysis techniques
Core Paper -11 Radio Production

Unit 1: Basics of Radio Programming
Unit 2: Formats and style of Radio Production
Unit 3: Advanced Radio Production –Digital Techniques
Unit 4: Radio Organization and Production Management
Unit 5: Hands on Training
Elective - 5
Technical Communication
Unit1 Areas of technical communication
Unit2 Tools of the trade and the requirements of the profession.
Unit3 Principles of technical report and manual writing
Unit4 Visual design strategies for technical communication
Unit5 Organizing ideas and developing persuasive skills for technical communication
Elective – 6
Public Relations and Corporate Communication
Unit 1: Introduction to PR
Unit 2: PR Process and Practice
Unit 3: Stake holder Communication
Unit 4: Advanced PR
Unit 5: Ethics and Research
218
Core Paper – 12 Communication Research Methods - II
Unit 1: Dissertation Writing-Research Project Management
Unit 2: Research Design-Mixed Methodologies
Unit 3: Qualitative Research Approaches- Interpretive Paradigms
Unit 4: Quantitative and Qualitative Data Analysis & Interpretation
Unit 5: Quantitative & Qualitative Content Analysis
Core Paper – 13 Cross Cultural Communication

Unit 1: The contexts of cross-cultural communication
Unit 2: Principles of cross-cultural communication
Unit 3: Theories of cross-cultural communication
Unit 4 : The role of ‘cultural distance,’ ‘cultural identity’-cultural other’ in cross- cultural
communication
Unit 5: Cross cultural communication in the age of globalization
Core Paper – 14 Research Project
Core Paper – 15 Specialization (Video Magazine)
Core Paper – 16 Media Practice (Internship-II)
Elective -7
Media Analysis Techniques

Unit 1: Approaches to Media Analysis
Unit 2: Visual Persuasion Techniques
Unit 3: Media Aesthetics
Unit 4: Analyzing Media Analysis
Unit 5: Cases Studies and Exercises in media analysis
219
12. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN FOOD SCIENCE NUTRITION AND
DIETETICS
THIRD SEMESTER
PAPER: IX - ADVANCED HUMAN NUTRITION – MACRO NUTRIENTS
Time: 6 Hrs
Credit: 5
PRE – REQUISITES:
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND,B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with PG
Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics / PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
OBJECTIVE OF THE COURSE:
To enable the students to Understand the relationship between lipid, carbohydrate,
protein and mineral metabolism.
To learn about the therapeutic uses of carbohydrates and the role of fat in CHD’s.
To get insights in the inborn errors of metabolism of few amino acids.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT I:
Energy- Historical review of energy metabolism, energy from carbohydrates, fats and
proteins – current research studies. Estimation of total energy requirements (BMR, REE
and physical cost of activities)
Protein – Historical review of protein metabolism, amino acid patterns in protein & of
animals and vegetable origin, critical study of methods of assessment of protein quality.
UNIT II:
Essential amino acids, amino acid balance and imbalance, requirement of individual
amino acid, inborn errors in metabolism – phenyl ketonuria, alcaptonuria, homocystinuria
and albinism.
Supplementation of individual amino acids like glutamine.
Carbohydrates – Adaptive effects of dietary carbohydrates on intestinal disaccnaridase
activity in man. Therapeutic uses of carbohydrates – sugars in parenteral nutrition
(glucose, fructose and xylitol).Toxic effects of fructose , xylitol and galactose.
220
Role of carbohydrates in dental caries, obesity, CVD’s and Diabetes Mellitus current
research studies.
UNIT III:
Transport of lipids in the blood- composition and function of serum lipo proteins, inter
relationship with lecithin cholesterol acyl transferase. Lipid transformation in the liver –
lypotrophic factors. Adipose tissue – Lipogenesis and lipolysis, Fatty liver.
Storage of body fat, effects of deficiency and excess of fat.
UNIT IV:
Role of ascorbic acid in transforming cholesterol to bile acids.
Hypocholesterolemic foods – garlic, fiber and plant proteins.
Interrelationship of lipids, carbohydrates and proteins and other nutrients.
UNIT V:
Research studies on calcium, phosphorus, magnesium and sulphur- Metabolism.
Calcium in body tissues and fluids – factors affecting calcium absorption, calcium
phosphorus ratio, interrelationship between calcium, protein and vitamin D, bone
density tests.
1. RECOMMENDED TEXTS:
a. Guthire, H.A. (2001) – “Introductory Nutrition” Tenth edition, C.V. Mosby Company,
St. Louis.
b. Bogert, J.G.V., Briggs, D.H, Calloway, (2000), “Nutrition and physical fitness”, 11 th
edition W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
c. Wardlaw, G.M and kessel, M, (2002) “ Perspectives in Nutrition”, 5 th edition, Mc
Graw Hill, New York, New Delhi
d. William, S.R. (2000), “Nutrition and Diet Therapy”, Mosby Co., St. Louis,
e. Sizer, F.S and whitney E.R. (2003). “ Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”. 9 th
edition, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
f. Brown, J.E. (2002), “Nutrition Now”, 3 rd edition, Wadsworth Thomson Learning New
York.
221
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Maurice, E.Shills, James A, obson, Moshe shike, (2000), “Modern Nutrition in Health
and Disease”, Eight edition, vol I and II, Lea & Febiger Philadelphia, A Waverly
Company.
b. Mahan L.K. and stump, S.E (2002), “Krause’s Food Nutrition and Diet Therapy”, 10 th
edition, W.B. Saunder’s company, Philadelphia.
c. Toteja,G.S and singh P (2004), “Micronutrient Profile of Indian Population”, ICMR
Publication, New Delhi.
d. M. Swaminathan (2002), “Principles of Nutrition and Dietetics”, BAPPCO, 88,
Mysore Road Bangalore – 560 018.
3. WEBSITE, E- LEARNING RESOURCES:

www.nutrition.gov – Service of National agricultural library, USDA
www.nal.usdfa.gov/fnic - Food and nutrition information center
www.fantaproject.org- Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
http://dietary-supplements.info.nih.gov – Officer of dietary supplements,national institute
of health.
4. JOURNALS:
American Journal of Clinical Nutrition,Official journal of the American Society for
clinical nutrition, Inc
World review of nutrition and dietetics. Ed. Bourne, G.D.S Karger, Nutrition.
The Journal of Nutrition, Official journal of the American Institute of Nutrition
Nutrition reviews. The nutrition foundation Inc, New York,USA.
Nutrition Today, Published by Nutrition Today Inc. Annapolis, USA.
European Journal of Clinical Nutrition.
Indian Journal of nutritionand dietetics, Avinashilinagm Deemed University, Coimbatore
Indian Journal of Human Service, JBAS College for Women, Chennai.
222
CORE PAPER X -ADVANCED DIETETICS
Hours 6
Credits 5
Pre-requisites
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D, B.Sc. CND, B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with
PG Diploms in Nutrition and Dietetics\ PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
Objectives of the Course

To obtain knowledge regarding metabolic processes of normal and diseased organs.
To be familiar with dietary\ behaviour modifications based on physiological changes
occuring in diseased conditions.
To acquire Knowledge regarding the effect of various diseases on nutritional status and
nutrient requirement
To understand the role of die titian
To develop skills and techniques in the planning and preparation of therapeutic diets for
various diseases and nutritional deficiencies.
To gain knowledge in diet counselling and educating patients.
Course Outline
Unit1
Nutrition and Diet Counselling -
Nutritional assessment of patients, dietary prescription and counselling following up,
patient education and diet. Preparation of pamlohets for patient education
Routine Hospital diets-

Pre - operative and post operative diets, study and review of hospital dites, basic
concepts and methods.
Oral feeding, tube feedinh , parenteral nutrition and intravenous feedinh. Diet in surgical
condition, burns and cancer.
Unit II
Obesity and leanness-
Causes, complications and health effects, dietary treatment and other recommendations.
Diets in fevers and infections -
Types, metabolism in fevers, generak dietary considerations, diet in influenza, typhoid,

recurrent malaria tunerculosis.
Unit III
Diet in Gastritis and peptic Uicer (Gastric and Duodenal)
223
Symptoms and clinical findings,treatment, dietary modification, adequate nutrition,
amount of food, inrervals of feeding , chemically and thermally irritating foods. A four
stage diet - Liquid, soft, Convalescence and Liberalised diets.
Diseases of the Gastro - Intestinal Tract

1. Recommended Texts:
a. Sue Rodwell Williams (1985), Nutrition and Diet therapy,. the CV. Mosby saint
Louls.
b. Bogeri, J.G.V. Brigg D.H. Colloway, (1973), Nutrition and physical fitness, W.B.
Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London.
c. M.V. Krause and M.A. Mahan. (1992), Food Nutrition and Diet therapy. W.B.
Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London , Toronto
d. Robinson, C.H.Lawles, M.R. Chenoweth. W.L. Garwick, A.E. (1990), Normal and
Therapeutic Nutrition the Macmillian company, New York.
e. Garrow et. Al (2000) “Human Nutrition and Dietetics”, 10th Edition, Churchill
Livingstone
f. Wilson, E.P. Fisher K.H. and Fuqua M.E. (1975), Principles of Nutrition. Jhon
Willey and Sons New York, London
g. G.A.Helen (1974), Introductory Nutrition; C.V. Mosby Company Saint Louis.
h. C.Gopalan, S.C.Balasubramanian, S.V.Ramasastri and Visvesara Rao, ,Diet Atlas,
ICMR, New Delhi, India
i. Wadlock, G.M. and Kessel, M (2002), “ Perpectives in nutrition “,Mc Graw Hill,
New York.
j. Davidson and passmore R and Brock J.B. (1976), Human nutrition and Dietetics.
The English Languages book society and Churchill Living Stone.
k. David M. Paize et.al (1988), Clinical Nutrtion, C.V. Mosby Co. St. Louis.
2. Reference Books
a. Antia, F.P.and Abraham P (1994), “Clinical dieteties and nurtrition”, 4th edition
Oxford univristy press
b. M.Swaminathan, (1974), Essential of Nutrition Vol. I and II, The Ganesy and
company, Madras - 17
c. Srilakshmi B (2005), :Dietetics”, revised fifth edition, New Age International (P)
limited
d. Sizer, F.S. and Whitney E.R. (2003), “Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”. 9th
edition, Thomson Wadsworth, Austrialia.
e. Brown, J.W (2006), “Clinical Nutrition, case studies”, Thomas Wadsworth,
Austrialia.
f. Brown, A (2004), “understanding Food, Principles and Preparation”. Thomson
Wadworth,Austrialia.
224
3. Wedsite, e-learning resources
www.nal.usda.gov/fnic/etext/000058.html - food and Nutrition Information Centre
www.fantaproject.org - Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
www.americianhear.org - AMerican heart assocition
www.nhlbi.nih.gov/chd/ - National Cholesterol education program
PAPER: XI - DIETETICS PRACTICAL

Time: 6 Hrs
Credit: 3
PRE – REQUISITES:

To enable students to know to plan, prepare and serve diets for diseases.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT 1:
Planning, preparation and services of diets for different conditions.
1. Celiac diseaselactose intolerance.
UNIT II:
Pancreatitis.
Insulin Dependent Diabetes Mellitus
Non Insulin dependent Diabetes Mellitus.
UNIT III:
Cardio Vascular Diseases.
(a). atherosclerosis
(b). hypertension.
UNIT IV:
Renal Diseases
(a). Nephritis
225
(b). Nephrosis.
(c). Renal Failure.
UNIT V:
Serve burns – Total Parenteral nutrition (TPN)
AIDS
a. Sue Rodwell Williams (1985), Nutrition and Diet therapy,. The CV> Mosby saint
Louis.
Saunders Philadelphia, London.
Saunders company, Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
d. Robinson, C.H. Lawles, M.R. Chernoweth. W.L. garwick, A.E.(1990), Normal and
Therapeutic Nutrition the Macmillan company, New York.
e. Garrow et.A1 (20/ Nutrition and Dietetics”, 10th Edition,Churchill Livingstone
f. Wilson, E.P. Fisher K.H. and Fuqua M.E. (1975), Principles of Nutrition. John Willey
and Sons New York, London.
g. G.A. Helen (1974). Industry Nutrition; C.V. Mosby Company Saint Louis.
h. C. Gopalan,S.C. Balasubramanian, S.V. Ramasastri and Vivesara Rao, Diet Atlas,
ICMR, New Delhi, India.
i. Wadlock, G.M. and Kessel, M. (2002), “ Perspectivesa in nutrition”, Mc Graw Hill,
New York.
j. Davidson and Passmore R and Brock J.B (1976), Human nutrition and dietetics. The
English languages book society and Churchill Living Stone.
k. David M. Paize et.al. (1988), Clinical nutrition, C.V.Mosby Co.St.Louis.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Antia, F.P. and Abraham P (1994), “ Clinical dietetics and nutrition”, 4 th edition,
Oxford university press.
b. M. swaminathan, (1974), essential of Nutrition Vol. I and II. The Ganesy and
company, Madras- 17.
226
c. Srilakshmi B (2005), “ Dietetics”, revised fifth edition, New Age International (P)
limited.
d. Sizere, F.S and Whitney E. R. (2003). “ Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”, 9the
e. Brown, j.E. (2006), “ Clinical Nutrition, Case studies”, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
f. Brown, A (2004), “ Understanding Food , Principles and Preparation”, Thomas
Wadsworth, Australia.
3. WEBSITE, E-LEARNING RESOURCES:

www.nal.usdfa.gov/fnic/etext/000058.html - Food and nutrition information center
www.americanheart.org –American heart association
www.nhlbi.nih.gov/chd/- National cholesterol education program
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY PAPER II

PAPER – IV - CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY
Time: 5 Hrs
Credit: 3
PRE – REQUISITES:
To enable students to
Understand the basis principles of Clinical biochemistry
Acquire basic knowledge on analytical techniques
Know the Clinical significance of biochemical findings.
227
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT I:
Analytical techniques and instrumentation:
Chromatography – paper, absorption, gel –HPLC. Electrophoresis –paper, gel.
Photometry – colorimetry- spectrophotometry and flourimetry. Polarimetry and electron
microscopy.
Immune assay- radio active isotopes- priciples detection measurement, GM counter,
scintillation, scintillation counter, scanning techniques.
UNIT II:
Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism:
Blood glucose- homeostasis, ketosis, ketogenesis, Diabetes Mellitus- GTT,
Hypoglycemia, glycohaemoglobins.
Disorders of lipid metabolism:
Lipid profile- disorders of lipoproteins, phospholipids and cholestral metabolism, liver
function tests, diagnosis of apolipoproteins, LDL,HDL and Triglycerides.
UNIT III:
Disorders of Protein metabolism
Plasma protein, immuno deficiency syndrome, Nitrogen, albumin, alpha and beta
globulin. Amino acid deficiency, urea.
UNIT IV
Disorders of purine and pyrimidine metabolism
Gout,Xanthonuria.
Mineral and Vitamin Matabolism
Abnormalities – hyper calcemia, hypocalcemia, kalemia, nitremia and phosphatemia.
Water metabolism.
Acid base and Electrolyte balance- Abnormalities – electrolytes, Blood gases, respiratory
and metabolic acidosis and alkalosis.
UNIT V:
Inborn errors of metabolism
Fanconi’s syndrome, phenylketonuria, Von – Gierke’s disease , cystinuria, Galactosemia
and Albinism.
228
a. Harper H.A., (1997) Review of Physiological Chemistry, Lange Medical Publications,
Los Angeles.
b. Ramakrishnan (1994), Text book of Clinical Biochemistry and Human Biology, New
Delhi, Prentice hall.
c. Talwar G.P. Srinivatsava L.N and Mondgil. K.D.Text Book of Biochemistry and
Human Biology, New Delhi, Prextice Hall
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Jean F. Zilwa, Peter R. Pannale, Philip R. (1998), Clinical Chemistry in Diagnosis and
Treatment, New York.
b. Devlin (1994), Text Book of Biochemistry with Clinical correlations, New York, John
Wiley and Sons.
c. Plummer D.T (1997), An introduction to practical Biochemistry, New Delhi McGraw
Hill Publishing Company.
d. Cromwell L., Weibel F.J and Pfeiffer E.A (1996) Measurments, New Delhi, Prentice
Hall.
e. Eccles R. (1993), electrolytes, Body fluids and Acid Basebalance Edward Arnold – A
division of Hodder and Stoughton.
f. Andrew Travens, (1993), DNA Protein interactions, Chapman and Hall Pub, London.
http://www.gwu.edu/mpb -metabolic pathways of biochemistry
http://www.indstate.edu/thcme/mwking/inborn.html - inborn errors of metabolism
http://www.worthington-biochem.com/introBiochem/introEnzymes.html -enzymes
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Biochemistry -biochemistry encyclopedia
229
FOURTH SEMESTER
PAPER: XIII- ADVANCED HUMAN NUTRITION MICRO NUTRIENTS

Time: 6 Hrs
Credit: 5
PRE – REQUISITES:

To learn the functions, deficiency symptoms, food sources and requirements of the
different micro nutrients.
To learn to estimate Vitamin C, total nitrogen, lipids, iodine, vitamin A, beta carotene,
and iron in foods.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT I:
Distribution in the body; functions, effects of deficiency, food sources and requirement of
Micro Minerals – iron,zinc, fluoride and copper
Ultratrace Minerals- Iodine, Selenium, Manganese, Chromium, Molybdenum, Boron and
Cobalt
UNIT II:
Fat Soluble Vitamins – Functions, effects of deficiency, food sources, requirements, units
of measurements and hyper vitaminosis of vitamins A,D,E and K
UNIT III:
Water soluble vitamins – Functions,effects of deficiency, food sources and requirements
of ascorbic acid, falacin B12 and B6.
UNIT IV:
Other water soluble vitamins – Functions, effects of deficiency, sources and requirements
of thiamin, riboflavin, niacin, pantothenic acid and biotin Other vitamin like factors-
cholin, carnetine, Myo- inositol, Ubiquinines and Bioflavonoids.
230
UNIT V:
Water – Functions, Distributions, balance and requirements
Distribution of Water in the body – ICF & ECF, Composition of body fluids, Water
balance in the body, Electrolytes- sodium, Potassium & chloride, Hypernatremia,
Hyponatremia, Hyperkalmeia, Hypokalmeia and Electrolyte balance in the body.
Acid base balance – Acid Generation and Regulation
Acid base disorders- Metabolic Acidosis, Metabolic Alkalosis,Repiratory Acidosis,
respiratory Alkalosis and compensation.
a. Guthrie, H.A. (2001) – “Introductory Nutrition”, Tenth edition, C.V. Mosby Company,
St. Louis.
b. Bogert, J.G.V., Briggs,D.H, Calloway, (2000). “ Nutrition and physical fitness”, 11 th
edition W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
c. Wardlaw, G.M and Kessel, M, (2002) “ Perespective in Nutrition”, 5 th edition, Mc
Graw Hill, New York, New Delhi.
d. Willium, S. R. (2000), “ Nutrition and Diet Therapy”, Mosby Co., St. Louis.
e. Sizer, F.S and Whitney E. R. (2003), “ Nutrition , Concepts and Controversies” 9 th
f. Brown, J.E. (2002), “ Nutrition Now”, 3 rd edition, Wadsworth Thomson Learning New
York.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Maurice, E. Shils, James A. Obson, Moshe shike, (2000), “ Modern Nutrition in Health
and Disease”, 8th Edition, Vol I and II, Lea & Febiger Philadelphia, A Waverly Company.
b. Mahan L.K. and stamp, S.E (2000), “Krause’s Food Nutrition and Diet Therapy”, 11 th
edition, W.B. saunder’s Company, Philadelphia.
c. Toteja, G.S and Singh P (2004), “ Micronutrient Profile of Indian Population”, ICMR
d. M. Swaminathan (2002), “ Principles of Nutrition and Dietetics”, BAPPCO, 88,
Mysore Road Bangalore – 560 018.
231
3. WEBSITE, E- LEARNING RESOURCES:
www.nutrition.gov – Service of National agricultural library, USDA

www.nal.usdfa.gov/fnic - Food and nutrition information center
http://dietary-supplements.info.nih.gov – Officer of dietary supplements,national institute
of health.
ELECTIVE EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
PAPER – V - PRINCIPLES OF GENE MANIPULATION TECHNOLOGY

(Dept. of Biotechnology)
Unit – 1:
Restriction enzymes, DNA modifying enzymes, cloning vectors, prokaryotic

hosts-Creating Recombinant DNA Molecules-Isolation and Cloning of genes.-
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries-polymerase chain reaction
(PCR) and applications-Southern / Northern blotting analysis.
Unit – 2:
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries- polymerase chain

reaction (PCR) and applications- Southern/Northern bloting analysis, RFLP, RAPD,
AFLP analysis. Genomics- Structural genomics-Gene mapping-Comparative genomics
-Functional genomics -Gene expression -EST’s-DNA arrays.
Unit – 3:
Gene transfers - Introduction of Foreign Genes into Cells: electroporation,

biolistic transfer, Transfection, selectable markers, microinjection, embryonic stem cells,
reporter transgenes, Homologous recombination - "knock-ins / outs”.
232
Unit – 4:
Transgenics- Approaches to transgenesis: Microinjection / Embryonic stem

cells/Sperm- mediated transfer -Mammalian cloning by nuclear transfer - "Dolly” as an
example. Production of transgenic sheep, cattle, pigs and plants. - BT cotton,
Transgenesis and growth- performance in farm livestock, & plants-The growth hormone
in both bovine and porcine systems.
Unit – 5:
Edible vaccines, Disease resistance in transgenic organisms, Pest and herbicide
resistant plants. The Mx gene system for anti-viral disease resistance in animals. Issues in
Genetic Engineering - Biosafety of transgenic organisms.-Food safety of GMOs-
Environmental safety .
Recommended Texts:
1. Old, R,W. and Primrose, S.B., Principles of Gene Manipulation (5th edition).
Blackwells Scientific Publications, Oxford, U.K. 1998.
2001.
PAPER VI- COMMUNITY RELATIONS

(Dept. of Mass Media and Communication Studies)
Unit 1: Role of Public Relations in Community Developments

Definitiions and Functions of Community Relations and Community development
Unit 2: Corporate Social Responsibility,
Need for CSR. Difference between CSR and Cause Related Marketing, Cases studies
Unit 3: Public Relations in Non-government Organizations
PR& NGOs-Media Advocacy, Fund Raising and Media Relations
233
Unit 4: Strategies for Community Relation building
Participatory Approaches, Community Involvement, Tools and Techniques
Unit 5: Media Advocacy-Case Studies (E.g Health Campaign)
Case Studies of NGO-Relations-Health Communication and Awarness Campaigns
References
Kumar, Smessh (2002) Methods of Community Participation.A Complete Guide to

Practioners Vistaar Publication
Mikkelsen, Birtha(1995).Methods for Development Work and Research.A Guide for
Practioners.Sage Publicatiuon
ELECTIVE – INTER DISCIPLINARY
PAPER – VII - FUNDAMENTALS OF CHILD GUIDANCE AND

COUNSELLING
Hours 5
Credit 3
Pre - requisites
B.Sc.Home Science, B.Sc. Nutrition, FSM and Dietetics, B,Sc, Clinical Nutrition, B.Sc.
Interior Design and decor, Any UG Degree plus Diploma in Early childhood education,
Any UG Degree plus Diploma in Child Psychology, B.Sc. Psychology, B.A. Applied
Psychology, Any UG Degree with B.ED in Science subiects, PG Diploma in teaching
children with special needs.

To enable the students to understand the basics of guidance and counselling.
To impart knowledge on educational and vocational guidance.
To enable students to understand the concept of mental health and hygiene, causes and
adjustment.
Course Outline
Unit 1
The concept of guidance
a. Meaning, nature and scope of guidance

b. Philosophical, Psychological and sociological bases of guidance
c. Need and importance of educational guidance services in schools.
234
Unit II
Vocational Guidance
a. Purpose and functions of vocational guidance

b. Relationship between educational and vocational guidance
c. Relation between vocational guidance and work education
Uint III
Educational Guidance
a. Basic data necessary for educational guidance - Pupil’s abilities, aptitude, interest.
b Construction, administration and interpretation of Cumulative record cards and
individual inventories
Unit IV
The concept of counselling

a. Meaning, nature and scope of counselling
b. Different types of counselling
c. Varioussteps and techniques of counselling
235
13. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN FOOD SERVICE
MANAGEMENT AND DIETETICS
THIRD SEMESTER
PAPER IX - FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT

Hours: 6
Credits: 4
Pre-requisite
B.SC. Nutrition FSM D,B.Sc. CND, B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate
with PG Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics\PG Diploma in Catering Technology.

To enable students to Develop capacity and aptitude for food administration in
institutions Apply knowledge in qyantity food service.
Course Outline -
Unit I
Organisation:
Definition, types of organization in different institution
Unit II
Management:
Definitions and functioons Delegation of responsibilities and authority - tools of
management such as organizxation chart, job analysis, job specification and work
sheet - work improvement and work simplification time and motion economy and
their application to food preparation and service - time scheduledaily, weekly,
monthly and annually in relation to food planning, preparation, cooking and
service - planning for special occasions. Planning for use and care of equiment -
record kepping and monthly accounts.
Unit III
Personnel Management:
Personnel and leadership qualifications for the foods service administrator-
responsibilities and importance of good human relationship in organzation of
personnel - criteria for selection and enroloment of personnel education and
training of personnel - labour management relations - supervision - self appraisal
and employee - rating - personnel policies related to salaries, other emoluments,
236
allowances, leave, unifrom and other fringy benefits - labour laws and
organizations.
Unit IV
Food plant:
Space allocation of food plant according to different capacities - flow or traffic-
receiving food, preparing food and storage - food storage - food preparation and
cooking -food service -removing soiled utensils to dishwashing area - dish storage
area - traffic of guests -entrances and exits - hand washing and latrines -cashier
and control supervision - study of equipment lay out with reference to electrical
and plumbing installations - remodeling, renovation and repair.
Unit V
Sanitation & Hygiene
a) Personnel
b) Equipment & facilities
c) Waste Management
d) Past control.
a. Jain S.P and Narang (1999), “Hotel Accountancy and Finance, Kalyani
publishers, Ludhiana.
b. Thulsian, P.C. (2000), Financial and management Accounting”, Tata
McGraw Hill publishing company ltd, New Delhi.
c. Verghese, B. (1994), professional Food and Beverage Service
Management, McMillan India Limited, Bangalore.
d. Bemmion, M and Hughers, d (1975), Introductory foods, Macmillan
publishing Co. New York.
e. Kotas, R. and Davis B. (1973), “ Food Cost Control”, International
Textbook Company Ltd. London.
f. West B.B., Wood L and Harger F (1976), Food service in institutions, John
Wiley and Sons’Inc , New York.
g. Lawrence A.A., (1970), “ Management in action, Times of India Press.
h. Finely R.E (1971), “ The Personnel man and his part, D.B Toreprevale.
237
2 Reference Books:
a. Kinton, R et. al (2002), “ Theory of catering”,9th edition, ELST, London
b. Manay Shakunthala, N and Shadaksharaswamy, M (1987) - Foods, Facts
and Principles, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi, Bangalore.
c. Decenzo, D.A and Robbins, S.P. (2002), Prentice Hall of India pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi
d. Dharmaraj, E (2002), “Food and Hotel Legislations and policies,

New Age International Publishers, New Delhi
3. Website, e-learning resources:
http:\\infotree. library. ohiou, edu\bysuject\health -and -life- sciences\food\food-

service-management\
http:\\ www. capitol.state.tx.us\statutes\dies\HS\content\htm\hs.006.00.000437. 00
htm
http:\\www.managementhelp.org\finance\np fncehtm.
CORE PAPER X -ADVANCED DIETETICS

Hours 6
Credits 5
Pre-requisites
B.Sc. Nutrition FSM D, B.Sc. CND, B.Sc. Home Science or any Science graduate with
PG Diploms in Nutrition and Dietetics\ PG Diploma in Catering Technology.
To obtain knowledge regarding metabolic processes of normal and diseased organs.

To be familiar with dietary\ behaviour modifications based on physiological changes
occuring in diseased conditions.
To acquire Knowledge regarding the effect of various diseases on nutritional status and
nutrient requirement
To understand the role of die titian
To develop skills and techniques in the planning and preparation of therapeutic diets for
various diseases and nutritional deficiencies.
To gain knowledge in diet counselling and educating patients.
238
Course Outline
Unit1
Nutrition and Diet Counselling -
Nutritional assessment of patients, dietary prescription and counselling following up,
patient education and diet. Preparation of pamlohets for patient education
Routine Hospital diets-

Pre - operative and post operative diets, study and review of hospital dites, basic
concepts and methods.
Oral feeding, tube feedinh , parenteral nutrition and intravenous feedinh. Diet in surgical
condition, burns and cancer.
Unit II
Obesity and leanness-
Causes, complications and health effects, dietary treatment and other recommendations.
Diets in fevers and infections -
Types, metabolism in fevers, generak dietary considerations, diet in influenza, typhoid,

recurrent malaria tunerculosis.
Unit III
Diet in Gastritis and peptic Uicer (Gastric and Duodenal)
Symptoms and clinical findings,treatment, dietary modification, adequate nutrition,
amount of food, inrervals of feeding , chemically and thermally irritating foods. A four
stage diet - Liquid, soft, Convalescence and Liberalised diets.
Diseases of the Gastro - Intestinal Tract

a. Sue Rodwell Williams (1985), Nutrition and Diet therapy,. the CV. Mosby saint
Louls.
Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London.
Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London , Toronto
d. Robinson, C.H.Lawles, M.R. Chenoweth. W.L. Garwick, A.E. (1990), Normal and
Therapeutic Nutrition the Macmillian company, New York.
e. Garrow et. Al (2000) “Human Nutrition and Dietetics”, 10th Edition, Churchill
Livingstone
f. Wilson, E.P. Fisher K.H. and Fuqua M.E. (1975), Principles of Nutrition. Jhon
Willey and Sons New York, London
g. G.A.Helen (1974), Introductory Nutrition; C.V. Mosby Company Saint Louis.
239
h. C.Gopalan, S.C.Balasubramanian, S.V.Ramasastri and Visvesara Rao, ,Diet Atlas,
ICMR, New Delhi, India
i. Wadlock, G.M. and Kessel, M (2002), “ Perpectives in nutrition “,Mc Graw Hill,
New York.
j. Davidson and passmore R and Brock J.B. (1976), Human nutrition and Dietetics.
The English Languages book society and Churchill Living Stone.
k. David M. Paize et.al (1988), Clinical Nutrtion, C.V. Mosby Co. St. Louis.
2. Reference Books
a. Antia, F.P.and Abraham P (1994), “Clinical dieteties and nurtrition”, 4th edition
Oxford univristy press
b. M.Swaminathan, (1974), Essential of Nutrition Vol. I and II, The Ganesy and
company, Madras - 17
c. Srilakshmi B (2005), :Dietetics”, revised fifth edition, New Age International (P)
limited
d. Sizer, F.S. and Whitney E.R. (2003), “Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”. 9th
edition, Thomson Wadsworth, Austrialia.
e. Brown, J.W (2006), “Clinical Nutrition, case studies”, Thomas Wadsworth,
Austrialia.
f. Brown, A (2004), “understanding Food, Principles and Preparation”. Thomson
Wadworth,Austrialia.
3. Wedsite, e-learning resources

www.nal.usda.gov/fnic/etext/000058.html - food and Nutrition Information Centre
www.fantaproject.org - Fanta technical assistance for nutrition
www.americianhear.org - AMerican heart assocition
www.nhlbi.nih.gov/chd/ - National Cholesterol education program
240
PAPER: XI - DIETETICS PRACTICAL
Time: 6 Hrs
Credit: 3
PRE – REQUISITES:

To enable students to know to plan, prepare and serve diets for diseases.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT 1:
Planning, preparation and services of diets for different conditions.
1. Celiac diseaselactose intolerance.
UNIT II:
Pancreatitis.
Insulin Dependent Diabetes Mellitus
Non Insulin dependent Diabetes Mellitus.
UNIT III:
Cardio Vascular Diseases.
(a). atherosclerosis
(b). hypertension.
UNIT IV:
Renal Diseases
(a). Nephritis
(b). Nephrosis.
(c). Renal Failure.
UNIT V:
241
Serve burns – Total Parenteral nutrition (TPN)
AIDS
a. Sue Rodwell Williams (1985), Nutrition and Diet therapy,. The CV> Mosby saint
Louis.
Saunders Philadelphia, London.
Saunders company, Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
d. Robinson, C.H. Lawles, M.R. Chernoweth. W.L. garwick, A.E.(1990), Normal and
Therapeutic Nutrition the Macmillan company, New York.
e. Garrow et.A1 (20/ Nutrition and Dietetics”, 10th Edition,Churchill Livingstone
f. Wilson, E.P. Fisher K.H. and Fuqua M.E. (1975), Principles of Nutrition. John Willey
and Sons New York, London.
g. G.A. Helen (1974). Industry Nutrition; C.V. Mosby Company Saint Louis.
h. C. Gopalan,S.C. Balasubramanian, S.V. Ramasastri and Vivesara Rao, Diet Atlas,
ICMR, New Delhi, India.
i. Wadlock, G.M. and Kessel, M. (2002), “ Perspectivesa in nutrition”, Mc Graw Hill,
New York.
j. Davidson and Passmore R and Brock J.B (1976), Human nutrition and dietetics. The
English languages book society and Churchill Living Stone.
k. David M. Paize et.al. (1988), Clinical nutrition, C.V.Mosby Co.St.Louis.
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Antia, F.P. and Abraham P (1994), “ Clinical dietetics and nutrition”, 4 th edition,
Oxford university press.
b. M. swaminathan, (1974), essential of Nutrition Vol. I and II. The Ganesy and
company, Madras- 17.
c. Srilakshmi B (2005), “ Dietetics”, revised fifth edition, New Age International (P)
limited.
d. Sizere, F.S and Whitney E. R. (2003). “ Nutrition, Concepts and Controversies”, 9the
242
e. Brown, j.E. (2006), “ Clinical Nutrition, Case studies”, Thomas Wadsworth, Australia.
f. Brown, A (2004), “ Understanding Food , Principles and Preparation”, Thomas
Wadsworth, Australia.

www.nal.usdfa.gov/fnic/etext/000058.html - Food and nutrition information center
www.americanheart.org –American heart association
www.nhlbi.nih.gov/chd/- National cholesterol education program
ELECTIVE - EXTRA DISCIPLINARY

PAPER – IV - CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY
Time: 5 Hrs
Credit: 3
PRE – REQUISITES:
To enable students to
Understand the basis principles of Clinical biochemistry
Acquire basic knowledge on analytical techniques
Know the Clinical significance of biochemical findings.
COURSE OUTLINE:
UNIT I:
Analytical techniques and instrumentation:
Chromatography – paper, absorption, gel –HPLC. Electrophoresis –paper, gel.
Photometry – colorimetry- spectrophotometry and flourimetry. Polarimetry and electron
microscopy.
Immune assay- radio active isotopes- priciples detection measurement, GM counter,
scintillation, scintillation counter, scanning techniques.
243
UNIT II:
Disorders of carbohydrate metabolism:
Blood glucose- homeostasis, ketosis, ketogenesis, Diabetes Mellitus- GTT,
Hypoglycemia, glycohaemoglobins.
Disorders of lipid metabolism:
Lipid profile- disorders of lipoproteins, phospholipids and cholestral metabolism, liver
function tests, diagnosis of apolipoproteins, LDL,HDL and Triglycerides.
UNIT III:
Disorders of Protein metabolism
Plasma protein, immuno deficiency syndrome, Nitrogen, albumin, alpha and beta
globulin. Amino acid deficiency, urea.
UNIT IV
Disorders of purine and pyrimidine metabolism
Gout,Xanthonuria.
Mineral and Vitamin Matabolism
Abnormalities – hyper calcemia, hypocalcemia, kalemia, nitremia and phosphatemia.
Water metabolism.
Acid base and Electrolyte balance- Abnormalities – electrolytes, Blood gases, respiratory
and metabolic acidosis and alkalosis.
UNIT V:
Inborn errors of metabolism
Fanconi’s syndrome, phenylketonuria, Von – Gierke’s disease , cystinuria, Galactosemia
and Albinism.
a. Harper H.A., (1997) Review of Physiological Chemistry, Lange Medical Publications,
Los Angeles.
b. Ramakrishnan (1994), Text book of Clinical Biochemistry and Human Biology, New
Delhi, Prentice hall.
c. Talwar G.P. Srinivatsava L.N and Mondgil. K.D.Text Book of Biochemistry and
Human Biology, New Delhi, Prextice Hall
244
2. REFERENCE BOOKS:
a. Jean F. Zilwa, Peter R. Pannale, Philip R. (1998), Clinical Chemistry in Diagnosis and
Treatment, New York.
b. Devlin (1994), Text Book of Biochemistry with Clinical correlations, New York, John
Wiley and Sons.
c. Plummer D.T (1997), An introduction to practical Biochemistry, New Delhi McGraw
Hill Publishing Company.
d. Cromwell L., Weibel F.J and Pfeiffer E.A (1996) Measurments, New Delhi, Prentice
Hall.
e. Eccles R. (1993), electrolytes, Body fluids and Acid Basebalance Edward Arnold – A
division of Hodder and Stoughton.
f. Andrew Travens, (1993), DNA Protein interactions, Chapman and Hall Pub, London.
http://www.gwu.edu/mpb -metabolic pathways of biochemistry
http://www.indstate.edu/thcme/mwking/inborn.html - inborn errors of metabolism
http://www.worthington-biochem.com/introBiochem/introEnzymes.html -enzymes
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Biochemistry -biochemistry encyclopedia
FOURTH SEMESTER
ELECTIVE – EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
PAPER – V - PRINCIPLES OF GENE MANIPULATION TECHNOLOGY

(Dept. of Biotechnology)
Unit – 1:
Restriction enzymes, DNA modifying enzymes, cloning vectors, prokaryotic
hosts-Creating Recombinant DNA Molecules-Isolation and Cloning of genes.-
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries-polymerase chain reaction
(PCR) and applications-Southern / Northern blotting analysis.
Unit – 2:
Construction of representative cDNA and genomic libraries- polymerase chain
reaction (PCR) and applications- Southern/Northern bloting analysis, RFLP, RAPD,
AFLP analysis. Genomics- Structural genomics-Gene mapping-Comparative genomics
-Functional genomics -Gene expression -EST’s-DNA arrays.
245
Unit – 3:
Gene transfers - Introduction of Foreign Genes into Cells: electroporation,
biolistic transfer, Transfection, selectable markers, microinjection, embryonic stem cells,
reporter transgenes, Homologous recombination - "knock-ins / outs”.
Unit – 4:
Transgenics- Approaches to transgenesis: Microinjection / Embryonic stem
cells/Sperm- mediated transfer -Mammalian cloning by nuclear transfer - "Dolly” as an
example. Production of transgenic sheep, cattle, pigs and plants. - BT cotton,
Transgenesis and growth- performance in farm livestock, & plants-The growth hormone
in both bovine and porcine systems.
Unit – 5:
Edible vaccines, Disease resistance in transgenic organisms, Pest and herbicide
resistant plants. The Mx gene system for anti-viral disease resistance in animals. Issues in
Genetic Engineering - Biosafety of transgenic organisms.-Food safety of GMOs-
Environmental safety .
Recommended Texts:
1. Old, R,W. and Primrose, S.B., Principles of Gene Manipulation (5th edition).
Blackwells Scientific Publications, Oxford, U.K. 1998.
2001.
PAPER-VI- COMMUNITY RELATIONS

(Dept. of Mass Media and Communication Studies)
Unit 1: Role of Public Relations in Community Developments

Definitiions and Functions of Community Relations and Community development
Unit 2: Corporate Social Responsibility,
Need for CSR. Difference between CSR and Cause Related Marketing, Cases studies
Unit 3: Public Relations in Non-government Organizations
PR& NGOs-Media Advocacy, Fund Raising and Media Relations
Unit 4: Strategies for Community Relation building
Participatory Approaches, Community Involvement, Tools and Techniques
246
Unit 5: Media Advocacy-Case Studies (E.g Health Campaign)
Case Studies of NGO-Relations-Health Communication and Awarness Campaigns
References
Kumar, Smessh (2002) Methods of Community Participation.A Complete Guide to

Practioners Vistaar Publication
Mikkelsen, Birtha(1995).Methods for Development Work and Research.A Guide for
Practioners.Sage Publicatiuon
ELECTIVES INTER DISCIPLINARY

PAPER – VII - FUNDAMENTALS OF CHILD GUIDANCE AND
COUNSELLING
Hours 5
Credit 3
Pre - requisites
B.Sc.Home Science, B.Sc. Nutrition, FSM and Dietetics, B,Sc, Clinical Nutrition, B.Sc.
Interior Design and decor, Any UG Degree plus Diploma in Early childhood education,
Any UG Degree plus Diploma in Child Psychology, B.Sc. Psychology, B.A. Applied
Psychology, Any UG Degree with B.ED in Science subiects, PG Diploma in teaching
children with special needs.

To enable the students to understand the basics of guidance and counselling.
To impart knowledge on educational and vocational guidance.
To enable students to understand the concept of mental health and hygiene, causes and
adjustment.
Course Outline
Unit 1
The concept of guidance
a. Meaning, nature and scope of guidance

b. Philosophical, Psychological and sociological bases of guidance
c. Need and importance of educational guidance services in schools.
247
Unit II
Vocational Guidance
a. Purpose and functions of vocational guidance

b. Relationship between educational and vocational guidance
c. Relation between vocational guidance and work education
Uint III
Educational Guidance
a. Basic data necessary for educational guidance - Pupil’s abilities, aptitude, interest.
b Construction, administration and interpretation of Cumulative record cards and
individual inventories
Unit IV
The concept of counselling

a. Meaning, nature and scope of counselling
b. Different types of counselling
c. Varioussteps and techniques of counselling
248
14. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN GENERAL GENETICS
SYLLABUS
Paper XIV Recombinant DNA Technology

Title of the
PAPER XIV RECOMBINANT DNA TECHNOLOGY
Course / Paper
Category of the Second year and third Credits Subject Code
Course C semester 4 MGC 10
Pre - requisites Paper IV completion.
Objectives of the This course introduces the students to understanding the
Course techniques of Molecular Biology.
Course Outline Unit 1
Basic Techniques: Southern, Northern, Western Blotting,
Agarose Gel electrophoresis, pulse fielded Gel electrophoresis,
PCR and Autoradiography and Bacterial transformation.
Unit 1
Basic Techniques: Southern, Northern, Western Blotting,
Agarose Gel electrophoresis, pulse fielded Gel electrophoresis,
PCR and Autoradiography and Bacterial transformation.
Unit 2
Restriction modification, restriction enzymes, cutting and
joining of DNA molecules. Cloning Vectors: Plasmids, Cosmid,
BAC, PAC and YAC.
Unit 3
Cloning Strategies, Construction of genomic and c-DNA
libraries, Recombinant selection and Screening. Expression of
cloned DNA in E.coli. Cloning in Saccharomyces cervesia,
Unit 4
PCR and its applications, DNA sequencing database and
homology search, Site-directed mutagenesis
Unit 5
Gene transfer to plants, Introducing genes into animal cells,
gene knockout. Applications of recombinant DNA technology.
Recommended Text
1. S.B Primrose, R.M. Twyman and O.W. Old (2001). Principles of Gene manipulation-
an introduction to genetic engineering. Blackwell Scientific Publications.
Reference Books
1. Tom Strachan and Adrew P. Read (2004). Human Molecular Genetics 3. III rd
edition, Garland publishing company.
2. Miodos, D. A and Treyer, G.A. (2003). DNA Science. Third edition, Cold Spring
Harbor Press, New York.
Website: http://gslc.genetics.utah.edu/teachers/index.cfm
249
Paper XV Human Genetics II
Title of the
PAPER XV HUMAN GENETICS II
Course / Paper
Category of the Second year and Credits Subject Code
Course C fourth semester 4 MGC 11
Pre - requisites Paper IX completion,
Objectives of the The course provides knowledge in Human genetics.
Course
Mendelian and Non-Mendelian inheritance patterns in Human
Families: Autosomal dominant, autosomal recessive, x-linked
dominant, x-linked recessive, y-linked inheritance and
mitochondrial inheritance.
Unit 2
Complication to basic pedigree patterns: Non-penetrance, late-
onset, variable expression, genomic imprint, genetic heterogeneity,
new mutations, male lethality, lionization, mosaicism and
chimerism.
Unit 3
Multifactorial inheritance: Liability and threshold, two classes-one
thresholds heritability of liability. Criteria for Multifactorial
inheritance.
Unit 4
Genetic Counselling: Objectives, requirements and process of
genetic counselling; Risk estimation and genetic counselling to
single gene disorders, chromosomal disorder and complex
disorders.
Unit 5
Fetal Diagnosis: Pre-implantation diagnosis, post-implantation
diagnostic techniques- ultrasonography, amniocentesis, chorionic
villus sampling, fetal cell sorting, maternal serum markers. Ethical
issues and impact on medical practice.
Recommended Text
1. Thompson and Thompson, 2004, Genetics in Medicine, Sixth edition, Elsevier’s
Health Sciences Rights Department in Philadelphia, USA.
Reference Books
1. T. Strachan and A.P. Read, 2003, Human Molecular Genetics, Third edition,
BIOS Scientific Publishers Ltd, UK.
2. Jack J.Pasernak, 2005, Introduction to Human Molecular Genetics, second
edition, A john wiley and sons, Inc., publication, Canada.
Website
http://gslc.genetics.utah.edu/teachers/index.c
250
Paper XVI Developmental Genetics
Title of the
PAPER XVI DEVELOPMENTAL GENETICS
Course / Paper
Course C third semester 4 MGC 12
Pre - requisites General biology at graduation level.
Objectives of the Elaborates how genes influence the morphogenesis.
Course
Principles – Differentiation and morphogenesis in Dictyostelium –
Cell specification autonomous and conditional – Morphogenesis –
Cell adhesion – Cadherins – Differential cell affinity.
Unit 2
Genomic equivalence – Differential gene expression –
Transcriptional and translational controls – Methylation –
Hierarchy of gene expression – Drosophila.
Unit 3
Cell-cell communication – Induction and competence – Paracrine
factors – Cell surface receptors and signaling pathways.
Unit 4
Early embryonic development – fertilization – cleavage –
gastrulation in C. elegans – Axis specification – C. elegans and
Drosophila - Role of organizer in amphibian development.
Unit 5
Late embryonic development – Vertebrate eye development –
Tetrapod limb – Sex determination – Drosophila and mammals.
Recommended Text
1. Scott F. Gilbert, 2003, Developmental biology, VII Ed., Sinnauer Associates Inc.,
Publishers, Sunderland, Massuchusetts.
Reference Books
1. J.M.W.Slack, 2001, Essential Developmental Biology, First Edition,Blackwell
Publishing Ltd,USA.
2. Wener.A.Miller and Wener Muller, 1996, Developmental Biology, Springer-
veilag, New York.
Website
www.devbio.com
251
Paper XVII Practical III
Title of the
PAPER XVII PRACTICAL III
Course / Paper
Course C First semester 4 MGC 13
Pre - requisites Registration to Paper XIV to XVI.
Objectives of the To introduce some basic techniques in Molecular Biology,
Course Developmental Biology, Immunology and Human genetics.
1. Isolation of Genomic DNA from Human Leucocytes
2. Isolation of bacterial DNA
3. Isolation of Plasmid DNA
Unit 2 rDNA Technology
1. Restriction digestion of DNA and Agarose gel
electrophoresis.
2. Transformation of Bacteria with plasmid
3. PCR amplification
Unit 3
1. Dissection of Salivary gland chromosomes from
Chironomus larva.
2. Identification of developmental stages during Drosophila
embryogenesis (0-24 hrs)
3. Whole mount preparation of Chick embryo- observations
of developmental stages – early and late stages (24 and 33
hours of hatching)
Unit 4
1. Pedigree drawing for Mendelian and Mitochondrial
inheritance
2. Risk estimation for single gene disorder
Unit 5
1. Molecular and cytological diagnosis of specific genetic
disorders
2. Estimation of Protein by Lowry method.
252
Paper XVIII Gene Therapy
Title of the
PAPER XVIII GENE THERAPY
Course / Paper
Course E Third semester 5 MGE 04
Pre - requisites Paper IV completion
Objectives of the Students will appreciate new developments, approachs human
Course genetic disorder.
Gene Therapy strategies: Gene augmentation, gene replacement,
and mutation of gene expression, targeted cell killing- prodrug
activation, bystander effect immunomodulation.
Unit 2
Gene transfer / Delivery system: Principles of in vivo and ex vivo
transfer; Gene delivery system – physical methods:
Calcium phosphate mediated transformation, antibody mediated
gene transfer, cationic lipids and liposomes, polycationic
molecular conjugates, gene gun and naked DNA administration,
nebulization, microinjection, electroporation. Biological gene
delivery vectors: Adenoviruses, adenoassociated viruses, herpes
simplex viruses, and mammalian artificial chromosome vectors.
Unit 3
Role of promoters in Gene therapy: Tissue targeted (tissues
specific) gene therapy.
Unit 4
Targeted Diseases: Cystic fibrosis, hemophilia, ADA deficiency,
muscular dystrophy and cancer.
Unit 5
Ethical considerations and limitation of gene therapy
Recommended Texts
1. N.R. Lemoine and D.N. Cooper, 1996, Gene Therapy, Bios scientific publishers,
Oxford, UK.
2. J.Thomas August, 1997, Gene Therapy- Advances in pharmacology,Academic
press, San Diego,USA.
Reference Books
1. N.R. Lemoine, 1999, Understanding Gene Therapy, Bios scientific publishers,
Oxford, UK.
2. C.Dennis, R.Gallagher, 2001, The Human Genome, Nature publications groups,
New York.
Websites
www.ornl.gov/sci/techresources/human genome/medicine/genetherapy.html
www.asgt.org
www.nature.com/gt/index.html
253
Paper XIX Genomics and Proteomics
Title of the
PAPER XIX GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS
Course / Paper
Course E Fourth semester 5 MGE 05
Pre - requisites Paper IV completion.
Objectives of the Introduces the students to the whole genome analysis and protein
Course analysis of biological sequences and use of databases.
Genome size: Number of genes, gene related sequences, organellar
DNA.
Unit 2
Experimental techniques for gene location: Hybridization tests to
tests to determine expressed sequences, cDNA sequencing, and
mapping of ends of transcripts, location of exon-intron boundaries.
Unit 3
Locating genes in DNA sequences: by sequence inspection – ORF-
homology searches; determining the function of a gene: homology
and evolutionary relationships, homology analysis to determine the
function of a gene. Gene inactivation and functional analysis, gene
over expression and assessment of function. Reporter genes and
immunocytochemistry in locating gene expression in cells and
tissues. Comparative genomics in the study of human disease
genes. Current state of the human genetic map.
Unit 4
Proteomics: Protein functions and malfunction in cells, defective
proteins – dominance and recessiveness, functional division:
nucleic acid binding proteins; transcription factors, Chaperons, cell
cycle regulators, enzymes, storage, structural proteins, enzyme
inhibitors, tumour suppressors.
Unit 5
Databases, Entrez – programme, BLAST and uses, finding
conserved domains, determining protein structure, measuring
phylogenetic distances.
Recommended Texts
1. Cantor & Smith, 1999, Genomics, John-Willey &Sons
2. T.A. Brown, 1999, Genomes, John-Willey &Sons
References Book
1. R. Durbin, S. Eddy, A. Krogh, G. Mitchison, 1998, Biological sequences analysis.
2. P. Clote, R. Backofen, 2000, Computational Molecular Biology. Wiley, West
Sussex
3. M.J. Bishop, 1999, Genetic Database, Academic press, London.
Websites
254
http://www.dna.affrc.go.jp/nakamura/codon/html
http://imgt.cnusc.fr:8104/
http://transfac.gbf.de/TRANSFAC/
http://www.expasy.eh/prosite/
Useful Internet starting points for Genetics
http://www.accessexcellence.org/RC/genetics.html
http://www.kensbiorefs.com/genbkgd.html
http://www.kensbiorefs.com/cellchem.html
http://www.kensbiorefs.com/cellstructure.html
http://www.kensbiorefs.com/MendelGen.html
http://www.kensbiorefs.com/Microbio.html#anchor25270
http://www.kensbiorefs.com/MolecularGen.html
http://www.kumc.edu/gec/
http://www.genome.gov/10005911
http://www.genome.gov/10000464
http://www.cals.ncsu.edu/genetics/net-resources.html
http://www3.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/entrez/query.fcgi?db=OMIM
http://gslc.genetics.utah.edu/teachers/index.cfm
http://www4.umdnj.edu/camlbweb/teachgen.html
http://www.trends.com/tig/default.htm
http://www.trends.com/tcb/default.htm
http://www.trends.com/tibs/default.htm
http://arjournals.annualreviews.org/loi/biochem
http://arjournals.annualreviews.org/loi/genet
http://arjournals.annualreviews.org/loi/immunol
http://arjournals.annualreviews.org/loi/cellbio
http://arjournals.annualreviews.org/loi/genom
http://www.nature.com/nrm/index.html
http://www.nature.com/nrg/index.html
255
15. M.Sc. HOTEL AND CATERING MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the student to acquire computer skills, marketing skills in tourism and to get
advance knowledge in Hospitality Management and Yield Management.
CORE PAPER XI
HOTEL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
UNIT I
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
 Financial Funtions
 Nature and Scope
 Its relationship with other functions
 Finance Organizations
UNIT II
FINANCIAL FORECASTING
 Interpretation and Analysis of Financial Statement
 Actual performance and modet statements
 Preparation and uses
UNIT III
FINANCIAL PLANNING AND CONTROL
 Break even Analysis operation leverage
 Profit cost analysis
UNIT IV
LIQUIDITY MANAGEMENT
 Current asset management – Cash receivables – Inventories liquidity, profitability
and solvency criteria
 Current liabilities management – Size and source – Money market, banks –
regulation of working capital finance Dehejia Committee – Marathe Committee
UNIT V
LONG TERM CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
 Cost of capital, basic concepts, rational and assumption, cost of retained earnings.
 Capital structurre, decision of the firm – composition and source of long term
funds
 Financial leverage – factors determining fund requirements
 Bugetery control – performance – zero base budgeting – financial information
systems
REFERENCE
256
Fundamentals of Financial Management – James .C. Vanhorne
Financial Management and Policy – James .C. Vanhorne
Financial Management – Theory and Practice – Prassana Chandra
Fundementals of Financial Management – Prassana Chandra.
*******
CORE PAPER - XII

TOURISM MARKETING AND TRAVEL OPERATIONS
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION
 Defining tourism and marketing concepts
 Tourism as a product
 Tourism planning
 Tourism Development
UNIT - II
MARKETING TOOLS AND PLANNING
 The product mix
 Interactive marketing
 International marketing
 Private and public tourism marketing
 Business perspectives and planning for marketing
UNIT – III
RESEARCH AND MANAGEMENT
 Research and tourism
 Types of research
 The research process
 Research consultants
UNIT – IV
TOURISM POLICY
 Policy defined
 US Tourism policy
 Tourism policy around the world
 International tourism organization.
UNIT - V
TRAVEL & TRANSPORT OPERATIONS
 Introduction
 Travel decision
 Scheduled airline development
 Technical aspects of airline services
 Airline costs
 Air fares
 Revenues and load factors
257
 Business travel
 Responding to delayed
 Travelers
 Management strategies to gain passenger loyality
REFERENCE:
1. Tourism & Hospitality industry by Fridgen
2. Hotels for Tourism Development by Dr. Jagmohan Negi
3. Marketing Research – G.C.Beri
4. Tourism and Travel Management – Bishwar R.Ghosh.
***********
CORE PAPER - XIII

MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM
UNIT - I
INTRODUCTION
System Concept – system classification - elements of systems; Input, Output, process,
Information system for managers – Role of MIS.
UNIT – II
SYSTEM ANALYSIS & DESIGN:
The work of system analyst – The assignment brief and mutual investigation – feasibility
study system design – Data collection and prepartion – Detailed system Design –
Implementation – Evaluation and maintenance of MIS –Pitfalls in mis-development.
UNIT - III
FUNCTIONAL MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS:
Production information system – marketing information system – Accounting Financial
Information System - Personal information system. Interrelationship of functional
management information systems.
UNIT – IV
FUNDAMENTAL OF COMPUTER & DATABASE SYSTEMS:
General characteristics of Computer information system: The important of computer –
Type of computers - information systems CPU 1/0 devices , computer software –
operating systems programming language – Application software. Manual system
computer system.
Information as a resources – meaning of Data base components of database – DBMS –
Data Base Technology – Operations data base – comparison of DBMS – Design
Principles of data base – Data base administration – Advantages and disadvantages of
data base
UNIT V
COMPUTER POWER - SOURCE & SELECTION :
Collection purchase – Computer rental from the manufacture – Computer lease from a
third party – Acquision of a used Computer – Computers – Service centres – third
258
Sharing Companies Facilities management companies – The criteria for choice –
Computer system selection Acquiring a small business computer – Source selection.
REFERENCE:
1. Principles of Management information Systems by G.M. Scott Ph.D Mcgraw
– Hill Education
2. Management information system by Davis and Oison Mcgraw Fill Education.
********
CORE PAPER XIV

ADVANCED FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT
UNIT - I
FRONT OFFICE OPERATIONS:
 The guest cycle
 Front office system
 Front office forms
 The front desk
 Front office equipments
 Front office computers application
UNIT – II
FRONT OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES:
 Front office communication
 Inter departmental communications
 Guests service
 Guest relations
 Front office security functions
UNIT – III
FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT:
 Management functions
 Establishing Room rates
 Forecasting room availability
 Budgeting for operations
 Evaluation front office operation
UNIT – IV
YIELD MANAGEMENT:
 The concept of yield and management
 Measuring yield
 Elements of yield management
 Using yield management
259
UNIT – V
THE NIGHT AUDIT:
 Functions
 Operation modes
 Night audit process
 Verifying night audit
 Automated system update
REFERENCE:
1. Front office procedure – By Seaton
2. Basic Hotel Front Office Procedures (II edn.) – Peter Renner.
3. Front Office Procedures – Peter Abbott
4. Principles of hotel front office operations – Sue Becker, Pam Bradley and Feremy
Hyton
5. Managing Front office operations – Michael and Kasavana
6. Hotel and motel front desk personnel – Grace Paige
7. Front office procedures – social skills and management – Petrabbol & Sue Lewry.
************
CORE PAPER XV
KITCHEN OPERATION AND COST CONTROL
UNIT 1
KITCHEN MANAGEMENT
 Kitchen Management Skills
 Attitude, Behavior in Kitchen
 Personal Hygiene
 Importance of Sanitation in Kitchen
 Safety procedures to be followed in Kitchen
 Handling Modern Kitchen Equipments
 Rechauffing.
UNIT 2
KITCHEN LAYOUT
 General Planning Layout of Kitchen in a star hotel,
 Types of Kitchen,
 Layout of Receiving area,
 Storage area, Service & Wash up area.
UNIT 3
KITCHEN COMMODITIES
 Extensive study of Kitchen ingredients and its various characters of Vegetables, Fruits,
Meat,Poultry, Game, Fish, Rice, Cereals, Cocoa, Chocolate.
260
UNIT 4
COST CONTROLS
 Menu Compilation & Balancing of Recipes
 Portion Control, Standard portion Sizes,
 Receiving: Definition, Functions ,Blind Receiving
 Indenting: Definition, Functions Principles of Indenting,
 Food Cost Control Importance, Relevance of Food Costing System.
 Purchasing: Definition. Types, Importance Purchase Order
 Cost Controls Procedures & Methods.
 Inventory. Records
 Bin Card, Stock Card, Perpetual Inventory.
REFERENCE:
Practical Cookery By Ronald Kington victor Ceserani

The Theory of Catering – Kinton & Ceserani – Hoddel & Strouhton Educational, London.
Practical Professional Catering – Kauffman and Cracknell
Food & Beverage Management – Richard Kotas & Chandana Jayawardena
Food & Beverage Management & Cost Control – D. Antony Ashok Kumar.
*************
IV SEMESTER
OBJECTIVE
The student is given an introduction to Research Methodology which helps him in his
project work. Two subject related electives are dealt with in detail. Also the student is
equipped with research orientation.
CORE PAPER XVI - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION
 Meaning of research
 Objectives of Research
 Types of Research
 Research Approaches
 Importance of knowing how research is done
 Research process
 Criteria of good research
UNIT - II
RESEARCH DESIGN
UNIT - III
SAMPLING DESIGN
261
UNIT –IV
METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION AND PROCESSING
UNIT – V
ANALYSIS OF DATA AND REPORT WRITING
REFERENCE:
Research Methodology – C.R.Kothari
***************
CORE PAPER XVII
FOOD AND BEVERAGE DEPARTMENT ORGANISATION
UNIT I
FUNCTIONS OF FOOD & BEVERAGE DEPARTMENT.
 Planning,
 Coordinating
 Controlling
 Duties & Responsibilities of F& B Personnel.
UNIT II
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
 Span of Control,
 Levels of Management,
 Delegation of Authority,
 Division of Work
UNIT III
STAFFING
 Recruitment and Training,
 Duty Rota
 Motivation,
 Performance Appraisals
UNIT IV
FOOD & BEVERAGE COMMUNICATION SKILLS
 Internal & External Communication.
 Channels of Communications
 Handling F& B Complaints
UNIT V
SERVICE CONCEPTS
 Service Standards
 Standard Specifications
262
 Service Methods.
REFERENCE:
Food & Beverage Management & Cost Control – D. Antony Ashok Kumar
Food & Beverage Service - Dennis R.Lillicrap. & John .A. Cousins.
Modern Restaurant Service – John Fuller.
********
CORE PAPER XVIII
CONCEPTUAL SKILLS OF ACCOMMODATION OPERATIONS
UNIT – I
CONCEPTUAL PLANNING
 Organizing House Keeping department.
 Importance of fore casting
 Coordinating
 Controlling
UNIT – II
STAFFING AND WAVE SCHEDULING
 Selecting & Training
 Job description & Job Specification
 Work Scheduling – Rotational & tight
 Contract Service
 Criteria for Work – load
 (Equal distribution of Work)
UNIT – III
BUDGET BUDGETARY CONTROL
 Importance of Budgetary Control
 Capital of Operational Expenditure Budget.
 Variance analysis
 Preopening Budget.
 Inventory Control
UNIT – IV
MATERIAL PLANNING – SUPPLIES & EQUIPMENT
 Selection Criteria
 Guest Supplies
 Selection of Cleaning Equipment & Cleaning Agents
 Storage & Care.
UNIT – V
HOUSE KEEPING & ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
 Pest Control
 Waste water treatment & disposal
 Environmental Service
 Environmental Pollution
263
REFERENCES:
House Craft – Valerie Paul
Commercial HouseKeeping & Maintenance – Stanley Thornes
Hotel, Hostel and Hospital Housekeeping – John C. Bronson and Margaret Lennox
Hotel and Catering Studies – Ursula Jones
Housekeeping and Front Office – Jones
Managing housekeeping Custodial Operation – Edwin B. Feldman
Professional Management of Housekeeping Operations (II Edn.)- Robert J. Martin & Thomas
J.A. Jones
Housekeeping Management – Margaret M. Leappa & Aleta Nitschke.
*************
CORE PAPER XIX
ROOMS DIVISION YIELD MANAGEMENT
UNIT – I
FRONT OFFICE MANGEMENT
 Planning & Organizing
 Coordinating
 Staffing
 Controlling & Evaluating
UNIT - II
ESTABLISHING ROOM RATES & FORECASTING
 Market Conditions
 Rule of Thumb & Hubbart formula
 Forecasting Room Availability
 Forecasting Data
UNIT – III
YIELD MANAGEMENT
 Definition & concept
 Meaning
 Elements
 Yield Management Strategies.
UNIT- IV
ROOMS DIVISION MANAGEMENT
 Forecasting Rooms Revenue
 Estimating Expenses
 Revenue analysis
 Rooms Division income statement
 Rooms Division Budget Reports
264
REFERENCE:
Front Office Procedure – By Seaton
Basic Hotel Front Office Procedures (II den).-) – Peter Renner.
Front Office Procedures – Peter Abbott
Principles of hotel front office operations – Sue Becker, Pam Bradley and Feremy Hyton
Managing Front Office Operations – Michael and Kasavana
Hotel and motel front desk personnel – Grace Paige
Front office Procedures – Social skills and management – Petrabbol & Sue Lewry.
************
CORE PAPER XX
PROJECT & VIVA VOCE
Project topic should be selected based on hospitality industry (The topics may cover hotels,
restaurant, Front Office and Accommodation Operations, and resort management, Catering
establishments like air, rail, industrial, Convenience foods and health foods)
The topic should be approved by the Head of the Department. The presentation of the project
should strictly follow the guidelines.
************
265
16. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
SYLLABUS
Title of the Computer Networks

Course/ Paper
Core Second Year & Third Semester Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 15
Objective of This course gives an insight into various network models and the general
the course network design issues and related algorithms.
Course Unit 1: Introduction – Network Hardware – Software – Reference
outline Models – OSI and TCP/IP models – Example networks: Internet, ATM,
Ethernet and Wireless LANs - Physical layer – Theoretical basis for data
communication - guided transmission media
Unit 2: Wireless transmission - Communication Satellites – Telephones
structure –local loop, trunks and multiplexing, switching. Data link
layer: Design issues – error detection and correction.
Unit 3: Elementary data link protocols - sliding window protocols – Data
Link Layer in the Internet - Medium Access Layer – Channel Allocation
Problem – Multiple Access Protocols.
Unit 4: Network layer - design issues - Routing algorithms - Congestion
control algorithms – IP protocol – IP Address – Internet Control
Protocol.
Unit 5 : Transport layer - design issues - Connection management -
Addressing, Establishing & Releasing a connection – Simple Transport
Protocol – Internet Transport Protocol (TCP) - Network Security:
Cryptography.
(i) A. S.Tanenbaum, 2003, Computer Networks, Fourth Edition, - Pearson
Education, Inc, (Prentice hall of India Ltd), Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) B. Forouzan, 1998, Introduction to Data Communications in Networking,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
(ii) F. Halsall, 1995, Data Communications, Computer Networks and Open
Systems, Addison Wessley.
(iii) D. Bertsekas and R. Gallagher, 1992, Data Networks, Prentice hall of
India, New Delhi.
(iv) Lamarca, 2002, Communication Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi.
(i) http://authors.phptr.com/tanenbaumcn4/
266
Title of the Design and Analysis of Algorithms
Course/ Paper
Core Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No.: 16
Semester
Objective of This course gives insight into the design and analysis for selected
the course problems.
Course Unit 1: Introduction - Definition of Algorithm – pseudocode conventions
outline – recursive algorithms – time and space complexity –big-“oh” notation –
practical complexities – randomized algorithms – repeated element –
primality testing - Divide and Conquer: General Method - Finding
maximum and minimum – merge sort.
Unit 2: Divide and conquer contd. – Quicksort, Selection, Strassen's
matrix multiplication – Greedy Method: General Method –knapsack
problem - Tree vertex splitting - Job sequencing with dead lines –
optimal storage on tapes.
Unit 3: Dynamic Programming: General Method - multistage graphs – all
pairs shortest paths – single source shortest paths - String Editing – 0/1
knapsack. Search techniques for graphs – DFS-BFS-connected
components – biconnected components.
Unit 4: Back Tracking: General Method – 8-queens - Sum of subsets -
Graph Coloring – Hamiltonian cycles. Branch and Bound: General
Method - Traveling Salesperson problem.
Unit 5 : Lower Bound Theory: Comparison trees - Oracles and advisory
arguments - Lower bounds through reduction - Basic Concepts of NP-
Hard and NP-Complete problems.
(i) E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and S. Rajasekaran, 1999, Computer
Algorithms, Galgotia, New Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) G. Brassard and P. Bratley, 1997, Fundamentals of Algorithms, PHI,
New Delhi.
(ii) A.V. Aho, J.E. Hopcroft, J.D. Ullmann, !974, The design and analysis
of Computer Algorithms, Addison Wesley, Boston.
(iii) S.E.Goodman and S.T.Hedetniemi, 1977, Introduction to the Design
and Analysis of algorithms, Tata McGraw Hill Int. Edn, New Delhi.
(i) http://www.cise.ufl.edu/~raj/BOOK.html
267
Title of the Advanced Java Programming
Course/ Paper
Semester
Objective of This course gives an insight into advanced features of Java
the course
Course Unit 1: Servlet overview – the Java web server – your first servlet –
outline servlet chaining – server side includes- Session management – security –
HTML forms – using JDBC in servlets – applet to servlet
communication.
Unit 2: Java Beans :The software component assembly model- The java
beans development kit- developing beans – notable beans – using infobus
- Glasgow developments - Application Builder tool- JAR files-
Introspection-Bound Properties-Persistence-customizers - java beans
API.
Unit 3: EJB: EJB architecture- EJB requirements – design and
implementation – EJB session beans- EJB entity beans-EJB Clients –
deployment tips, tricks and traps for building distributed and other
systems – implementation and future directions of EJB-Variable in perl-
perl control structures and operators – functions and scope
Unit 4: RMI – Overview – Developing applications with RMI:Declaring
& Implementing remote interfaces-stubs & skeletons,Registering remote
objects,writing RMI clients –Pushing data from RMI Servlet – RMI over
Inter-ORB Protocol
Unit 5: JSP –Introduction JSP-Examining MVC and JSP -JSP scripting
elements & directives-Working with variables scopes-Error Pages -
using Java Beans in JSP Working with Java Mail-Understanding
Protocols in Javamail-Components-Javamail API-Integrating into J2EE-
Understanding Java Messaging Services-Transactions.
1. Recommended Text:
(i) J. McGovern,R. Adatia,Y. Fain, 2003, J2EE 1.4 Bible, Wiley-dreamtech
India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
(ii) H. Schildt, 2002, Java 2 Complete Reference, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi.
2. Reference books:
(i) K. Moss, 1999, Java Servlets, Second edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi.
(ii) D. R.Callaway, 1999, Inside Servlets, Addison Wesley, Boston
(iii) Joseph O’Neil, 1998, Java Beans from the Ground Up, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi.
268
(iv) TomValesky, Enterprise JavaBeans, Addison Wesley.
(v) Cay S Horstmann & Gary Cornell, Core Java Vol II Advanced Features,
Addison Wesley.
Title of the Information Security

Course/ Paper
Extra Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 18
-Disciplinary Semester
Objective of This course studies on some basics of Information Security
the course
Course Unit 1: Introduction: Security- Attacks- Computer criminals- Method of
outline defense Program Security: Secure programs- Non-malicious program
errors- Viruses and other malicious code- Targeted malicious code-
Controls against program threats.
Unit 2: Operating System Security: Protected objects and methods of
protection- Memory address protection- Control of access to general
objects- File protection mechanism- Authentication: Authentication
basics- Password- Challenge-response- Biometrics.
Unit 3: Database Security: Security requirements- Reliability and

integrity- Sensitive data- Interface- Multilevel database- Proposals for
multilevel security.
Unit 4: Security in Networks: Threats in networks- Network security

control- Firewalls- Intrusion detection systems- Secure e-mail- Networks
and cryptography- Example protocols: PEM- SSL- Ipsec.
Unit 5: Administrating Security: Security planning- Risk analysis-
Organizational security policies- Physical security - Legal- Privacy-
and Ethical Issues in Computer Security - Protecting programs and data-
Information and law- Rights of employees and employers- Software
failures- Computer crime- Privacy- Ethical issues in computer society-
Case studies of ethics.
1. C. P. Pfleeger, and S. L. Pfleeger, Security in Computing, Pearson
Education, 4th Edition, 2003
2. Matt Bishop, Computer Security: Art and Science, Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Reference Books
1. Stallings, Cryptography And Network Security: Principles and
practice, 4th Edition, 2006
2. Kaufman, Perlman, Speciner, Network Security, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition,
2003
3. Eric Maiwald, Network Security : A Beginner’s Guide, TMH, 1999
4. Macro Pistoia, Java Network Security, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 1999
5. Whitman, Mattord, Principles of information security, Thomson, 2nd Edition,
269
2005
Title of the Practical - V: Advanced Java Lab.

Course/ Paper
Core Second Year & Third Semester Credit: 2 Sl. No. : 20
Objective of This course gives practical training in Advanced java programming
the course
Course 1. HTML to Servlet Applications
outline 2. Applet to Servlet Communication
3. Designing online applications with JSP
4. Creating JSP program using Java Beans
5. Working with Enterprise Java Beans
6. Performing Java Database Connectivity.
7. Creating Web services with RMI.
8. Creating and Sending Email with Java
9. Building web applications
Title of the Project & Viva-Voce

Course/Paper
Core Second Year & Fourth Semester Credit: 20 Sl. No. : 24
Objective of This course is to train the student in executing a project and preparing
the course the report of work done.
Course The project work is to be carried out either in a software industry or in an
outline academic institution for the entire semester and the report of work done
is to be submitted to the University.
Elective – V
Title of the Mobile Computing
Course/ Paper
Elective Second Year & Third Semester Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 19A
Objective of This course introduces the basic concepts of mobile computing
the course
Course Unit 1: Introduction - Mobile and Wireless Devices – Simplified
outline Reference Model – Need for Mobile Computing –Wireless
Transmissions –Multiplexing – Spread Spectrum and Cellular Systems-
Medium Access Control – Comparisons.
Unit 2: Telecommunication Systems – GSM – Architecture – Sessions –
Protocols – Hand Over and Security – UMTS and IMT – 2000 – Satellite
Systems.
Unit 3: Wireless Lan - IEEE S02.11 – Hiper LAN – Bluetooth – Security
and Link Management.
270
Unit 4: Mobile network layer - Mobile IP – Goals – Packet Delivery –
Strategies – Registration – Tunneling and Reverse Tunneling – Adhoc
Networks – Routing Strategies.
Unit 5: Mobile transport layer - Congestion Control – Implication of TCP
Improvement – Mobility – Indirect – Snooping – Mobile – Transaction
oriented TCP - TCP over wireless – Performance.
(i) J. Schiller, 2003, Mobile Communications,2nd edition, Pearson
Education, Delhi.
2. Reference Books
(i) Hansmann, Merk, Nicklous, Stober, 2004, Principles of Mobile
Computing, 2nd Edition, Springer (India).
(ii) Pahlavan, Krishnamurthy, 2003, Principle of wireless Networks: A
unified Approach, Pearson Education, Delhi.
(iii) Martyn Mallick, 2004, Mobile and Wireless Design Essentials, Wiley
Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
(iv) W.Stallings, 2004, Wireless Communications and Networks, 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education, Delhi.
Title of the Artificial Intelligence

Course/ Paper
Core Second Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 19B
Semester
Objective of This course introduces the concepts of machine learning.
the course
Course Unit 1: Introduction - Intelligent Agents- Problem Solving - by Searching
outline - Informed Search and Exploration - Constraint Satisfaction Problems -
Adversarial Search
Unit 2: Knowledge and Reasoning - Logical Agents - First-Order Logic -
Inference in First-Order Logic - Knowledge Representation
Unit 3: Planning – Planning and Acting in the Real World - Uncertain
knowledge and reasoning - Uncertainty - Probabilistic Reasoning -
Probabilistic Reasoning Over Time - Making Simple Decisions - Making
Complex Decisions
Unit 4: Learning - Learning from Observations - Knowledge in
Learning - Statistical Learning Methods - Reinforcement Learning
Unit-5: Communicating, Perceiving, and Acting - Communication -
Probabilistic Language Processing - Perception – Robotics.
(i) Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, 2003, Artificial Intelligence: A
Modern Approach, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
271
3. Reference Books
(i) Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight, 1991, Artificial Intelligence, 2nd Edition,
Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
(ii) Herbert A. Simon, 1998, The Sciences of the Artificial Intelligence, 3rd
Edition, MIT Press.
(iii) N.J. Nilson, 1983, Principles of AI, Springer Verlag.
(i) http://aima.eecs.berkeley.edu/slides-pdf/
Title of the Computer Graphics

Course/ Paper
Elective II Year & Third Credit: 4 Sl. No. : 19C
Semester
Objective of This course introduces the basic concepts of Computer Graphics which
the course shall be useful for virtual modeling.
Course Unit 1: Introduction to graphic devices - picture representation, display
outline devices , display adapters , Types of printers , Plotters & input devices
Unit 2: Transformations - Basic 2D & 3D transformations - translation ,
scaling , rotation , reflection, shearing, Multiple transformations,
Rotation about an axis parallel to a coordinate axis, Rotation about an
arbitrary axis in space, Affine and perspective Geometry , Orthographic
projections and Axonometric projections
Unit 3: Raster Scan Graphics - Bresenham's line and circle drawing
algorithms, scan conversion, RLE, Frame buffer, Scan converting
polygons - Edge fill and Seed fill algorithms, Anti aliasing and Half
toning
Unit 4: Clipping and Display file Compilation - Sutherland - Cohen line
clipping algorithm, Windowing and Viewporting - Segmented display
file, structure and compilation. - Hidden Surface and hidden Line
Removal - Backface removal algorithm, Z- buffer, Warnock algorithm,
Hidden line elimination.
Unit 5 : Plane Curves and Space Curves - Curve Representation, Non-
parametric and parametric curves, representation of space curves, Cubic
Spline, Parabolic Blended curves, Bezier curves and B-spline curves.
Recommended Text
272
(i) D. F. Rogers, J. A. Adams, 2002, Mathematical elements for Computer
Graphics, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
(ii) D. F. Rogers, 2001, Procedural elements for Computer Graphics, 2nd
Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
273
Reference Books
(i) W.M. Neumann and R. F. Sproull, Principles of Interactive Computer

Graphics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
(ii) D. Hearn and M. P. Baker, 2004, Computer Graphics (C Version), 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education.
(iii) S. Harrington, 1989, Fundamentals of Computer Graphics, Tata McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi.
(iv) Foley, Van Dan, Feiner, Hughes, 2000, Computer Graphics, Addison
Wesley, Boston
274
17. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN MATHEMATICS
SYLLABUS
Title of the Course COMPLEX ANALYSIS-I

Paper Number XIV
Category Core Year II Credits 4 Course
Semester III Code
Pre-requisite Real Analysis and UG level Complex Analysis
UNIT-I : Cauchy’s Integral Formula: The Index of a point with respect to a

Course Outline closed curve – The Integral formula – Higher derivatives.
Local Properties of analytical Functions :
Removable Singularities-Taylors’s Theorem – Zeros and poles – The local

Mapping – The Maximum Principle .
Chapter 4 : Section 2 : 2.1 to 2.3, Section 3 : 3.1 to 3.4
UNIT-II : The general form of Cauchy’s Theorem : Chains and cycles-
Simple Connnectivity - Homology - The General statement of Cauchy’s
Theorem - Proof of Cauchy’s theorem - Locally exact differentials- Multilply
connected regions - Residue theorem - The argument principle.
Chapter 4 : Section 4 : 4.1 to 4.7, Section 5: 5.1 and 5.2
UNIT-III : Evaluation of Definite Integrals and Harmonic Functions:
Evaluation of definite integrals - Definition of Harmonic functions and basic
properties - Mean value property - Poisson formula.
Chapter 4 : Section 5 : 5.3, Section 6 : 6.1 to 6.3
UNIT-IV : Harmonic Functions and Power Series Expansions:
Schwarz theorem - The reflection principle - Weierstrass theorem – Taylor
Series – Laurent series .
Chapter 4 : Sections 6.4 and 6.5
Chapter 5 : Sections 1.1 to 1.3
UNIT-V: Partial Fractions and Entire Functions: Partial fractions - Infinite
products – Canonical products – Gamma Function- Jensen’s formula –
Hadamard’s Theorem
Chapter 5 : Sections 2.1 to 2.4, Sections 3.1 and 3.2
Recommended Text Lars V. Ahlfors, Complex Analysis, (3rd edition) McGraw Hill Co., New York,
1979
Reference Books 1.H.A. Priestly, Introduction to Complex Analysis, Clarendon Press,Oxford,
2003.
2.J.B.Conway, Functions of one complex variable Springer International
Edition, 2003
3.T.W Gamelin, Complex Analysis, Springer International Edition, 2004.
4.D.Sarason, Notes on complex function Theory, Hindustan Book Agency,
1998
275
Title of the Course TOPOLOGY
Paper Number XV
Semester III Code
Pre-requisite Real Analysis
Course Outline UNIT-I : Metric Spaces: Convergence, completeness and Baire’s
Theorem; Continuous mappings;Spaces of continuous functions;
Euclidean and Unitary spaces. Topological Spaces: Definition
and Examples; Elementary concepts.
Chapter Two (Sec 12 - 15) Chapter Three (Sec 16 & 17)
UNIT-II : Topological Spaces (contd…) Open bases and
subbases; Weak topologies; the function algebras C(X,R) and
C(X,C): Compact spaces.
Chapter Three (Sec 18 - 20) Chapter Four (Sec 21)
UNIT-III : Tychonoff’s theorem and locally compact spaces;
Compactness for metric spaces; Ascoli’s theorem.
Chapter Four (Sec 23 - 25)
UNIT-IV : T1 – spaces and Hausdorff spaces; Completely regular
spaces and normal spaces; Urysohn’s lemma and the Tietze
extension theorem; The Urysohn imbedding theorem.
Chapter Five (Sec 26 - 29)
UNIT-V: The Stone – Cech compactification; Connected spaces;
The components of a space; Totally disconnected spaces; Locally
connected spaces; The Weierstrass approximation Theorem.
Chapter Five (Sec 30) Chapter Six (Sec 31 - 34)
Chapter Seven (Sec 35)
Recommended Text George F.Simmons, Introduction to Topology and Modern
Analysis, Tata-McGraw Hill. New Delhi, 2004
Reference Books 1. J.R. Munkres, Topology (2nd Edition) Pearson Education Pvt.
Ltd., Delhi-2002 (Third Indian Reprint)
2. J. Dugundji , Topology , Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
1975.
3. J.L. Kelly, General Topology, Springer
4. S.Willard, General Topology, Addison - Wesley, Mass., 1970
276
Title of the Course OPERATIONS RESEARCH
Paper Number XVI
Semester III Code
Pre-requisite UG Level Operations Research
Course Outline UNIT-I : Decision Theory : Steps in Decision theory Approach – Types
of Decision-Making Environments – Decision Making Under Uncertainty –
Decision Making under Risk – Posterior Probabilities and Bayesian
Analysis – Decision Tree Analysis – Decision Making with Utilities.
Chapter 10 : Sec. 10.1 to 10.8

UNIT-II : Network Models : Scope of Network Applications – Network
Definition – Minimal spanning true Algorithm – Shortest Route problem –
Maximum flow model – Minimum cost capacitated flow problem -
Network representation – Linear Programming formulation – Capacitated
Network simplex Algorithm.

H.A.Taha : Operations Research
UNIT-III : Deterministic Inventory Control Models: Meaning of
Inventory Control – Functional Classification – Advantage of Carrying
Inventory – Features of Inventory System – Inventory Model building -
Deterministic Inventory Models with no shortage – Deterministic Inventory
with Shortages
Probabilistic Inventory Control Models:

Single Period Probabilistic Models without Setup cost – Single Period
Probabilities Model with Setup cost.
Chapter 13: Sec. 13.1 to 13.8
UNIT-IV : Queueing Theory : Essential Features of Queueing System –
Operating Characteristic of Queueing System – Probabilistic Distribution in
Queueing Systems – Classification of Queueing Models – Solution of
Queueing Models – Probability Distribution of Arrivals and Departures –
Erlangian Service times Distribution with k-Phases.
UNIT-V : Replacement and Maintenance Models: Failure Mechanism
of items – Replacement of Items that deteriorate with Time – Replacement
of items that fail completely – other Replacement Problems.
Recommended Texts 1. For Unit 2 : H.A. Taha, Operations Research, 6th edition, Prentice Hall of
India
2. For all other Units: J.K.Sharma, Operations Research , MacMillan
India, New Delhi, 2001.
277
Reference Books 1. F.S. Hiller and J.Lieberman -,Introduction to Operations Research (7th
Edition), Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhui, 2001.
2. Beightler. C, D.Phillips, B. Wilde ,Foundations of Optimization (2nd
Edition) Prentice Hall Pvt Ltd., New York, 1979
3. Bazaraa, M.S; J.J.Jarvis, H.D.Sharall ,Linear Programming and Network
flow, John Wiley and sons, New York 1990.
4. Gross, D and C.M.Harris, Fundamentals of Queueing Theory, (3rd
Edition), Wiley and Sons, New York, 1998.
278
Title of the Course MECHANICS
Paper Number XVII
Semester III Code
Pre-requisite Calculus and Differential equations.
Course Outline UNIT-I : Mechanical Systems : The Mechanical system- Generalised
coordinates – Constraints - Virtual work - Energy and Momentum

UNIT-II : Lagrange's Equations: Derivation of Lagrange's equations-
Examples- Integrals of motion.
Chapter 2 : Sections 2.1 to 2.3 (Omit Section 2.4)

UNIT-III : Hamilton's Equations : Hamilton's Principle - Hamilton's
Equation - Other variational principles.
Chapter 4 : Sections 4.1 to 4.3 (Omit section 4.4)

UNIT – IV : Hamilton-Jacobi Theory : Hamilton Principle function –
Hamilton-Jacobi Equation - Separability

UNIT-V : Canonical Transformation : Differential forms and generating
functions – Special Transformations– Lagrange and Poisson brackets.
Chapter 6 : Sections 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3 (omit sections 6.4, 6.5 and 6.6)
Recommended Text D. Greenwood, Classical Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
1985.
Reference Books 1. H. Goldstein, Classical Mechanics, (2nd Edition) Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi.
2. N.C.Rane and P.S.C.Joag, Classical Mechanics, Tata McGraw Hill,
1991.
3. J.L.Synge and B.A.Griffth, Principles of Mechanics (3rd Edition)
McGraw Hill Book Co., New York, 1970.
279
Title of the Course COMPLEX ANALYSIS- II
Paper Number XX
Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Complex Analysis-I and Real Analysis
Course Outline UNIT-I : Riemann Zeta Function and Normal Famalies :
Product development – Extension of (s) to the whole plane – The zeros of
zeta function – Equicontinuity – Normality and compactness – Arzela’s
theorem – Families of analytic functions – The Classcial Definition
Chapter 5 : Sections 4.1 to 4.4, Sections 5.1 to 5.5
UNIT-II : Riemann mapping Theorem : Statement and Proof –
Boundary Behaviour – Use of the Reflection Principle.
Conformal mappings of polygons : Behaviour at an angle
Schwarz-Christoffel formula – Mapping of a rectangle.
Harmonic Functions : Functions with mean value property –
Harnack’s principle.
Sections 2.1 to 2.3 (Omit section 2.4), Section 3.1 and 3.2
UNIT-III : Elliptic functions : Simply periodic functions – Doubly
periodic functions
Chapter 7 : Sections 1.1 to 1.3, Sections 2.1 to 2.4
UNIT-IV : Weierstrass Theory : The Weierstrass -function – The
functions (s) and (s) – The differential equation – The modular equation
() – The Conformal mapping by ().
UNIT-V: Analytic Continuation : The Weiesrtrass Theory – Germs and
Sheaves – Sections and Riemann surfaces – Analytic continuation along
Arcs – Homotopic curves – The Monodromy Theorem – Branch points.
Recommended Text Lars V. Ahlfors, Complex Analysis, (3rd Edition) McGraw Hill Book
Company, New York, 1979.
Reference Books 1.H.A. Priestly, Introduction to Complex Analysis, Clarendon
Press,Oxford, 2003.
2.J.B.Conway, Functions of one complex variable, Springer International
Edition, 2003
3.T.W Gamelin, Complex Analysis, Springer International Edition, 2004.
4.D.Sarason, Notes on Complex function Theory, Hindustan Book Agency,
1998
280
Title of the Course DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY
Paper Number XXI
Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Linear Algebra and Calculus

Course Outline UNIT-I : Space curves: Definition of a space curve – Arc length –
tangent – normal and binormal – curvature and torsion – contact between
curves and surfaces- tangent surface- involutes and evolutes- Intrinsic
equations – Fundamental Existence Theorem for space curves- Helices.
Chapter I : Sections 1 to 9.
UNIT-II : Intrinsic properties of a surface: Definition of a surface –
curves on a surface – Surface of revolution – Helicoids – Metric- Direction
coefficients – families of curves- Isometric correspondence- Intrinsic
properties.
Chapter II: Sections 1 to 9.
UNIT-III : Geodesics: Geodesics – Canonical geodesic equations –
Normal property of geodesics- Existence Theorems – Geodesic parallels –
Geodesics curvature- Gauss- Bonnet Theorem – Gaussian curvature-
surface of constant curvature.
Chapter II: Sections 10 to 18.
UNIT-IV : Nonintrinsic properties of a surface:
The second fundamental form- Principal curvature – Lines of curvature –
Developable - Developable associated with space curves and with curves
on surfaces - Minimal surfaces – Ruled surfaces.
Chapter III: Sections 1 to 8.
UNIT-V : Differential Geometry of Surfaces :
Compact surfaces whose points are umblics- Hilbert’s lemma – Compact
surface of constant curvature – Complete surfaces and their characterization
– Hilbert’s Theorem – Conjugate points on geodesics.
Chapter IV : Sections 1 to 8
Recommended Text T.J.Willmore, An Introduction to Differential Geometry, Oxford
University Press,(17th Impression) New Delhi 2002. (Indian Print)
Reference Books 1. Struik, D.T. Lectures on Classical Differential Geometry, Addison –
Wesley, Mass. 1950.
2. A.Pressley, Elementary Differential Geometry, Springer International
Edition, 2004
3. Wilhelm Klingenberg: A course in Differential Geometry, Graduate
Texts in Mathematics, Springer-Verlag 1978.
4. J.A. Thorpe Elementary Topics in Differential Geometry, Springer
International Edition, 2004.
281
Title of the Course FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
Paper Number XXII
Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Basic Analysis, Topology and Linear Algebra
Course Outline
UNIT-I : Normed Spaces : Definition – Some examples – Continuous
Linear Transformations – The Hahn-Banach Theorem – The natural
embedding of N in N**
Chapter 9 : Sections 46 to 49
UNIT-II : Banach spaces and Hilbert spaces: Open mapping theorem –
conjugate of an operator – Definition and properties – Orthogonal
complements – Orthonormal sets
Chapter 9 : Sections 50 and 51
Chapter 10 : Sections 52, 53 and 54.
UNIT-III : Hilbert Space : Conjugate space H* - Adjoint of an operator
– Self-adjoint operator – Normal and Unitary Operators – Projections
Chapter 10 : Sections 55 to 59.
UNIT-IV : Preliminaries on Banach Algebras : Definition and some
examples – Regular and singular elements – Topological divisors of zero –
spectrum – the formula for the spectral radius – the radical and semi-
simplicity.
UNIT-V: Structure of commutative Banach Algebras : Gelfand
mapping – Spectral radius formula - Involutions in Banach Algebras –
Gelfand-Neumark Theorem.
Recommended Text G.F.Simmons , Introduction toTopology and Modern Analysis, McGraw
Hill International Book Company, New York, 1963.
Reference Books 1.W.Rudin Functional Analysis, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company,
New Delhi , 1973
2. G. Bachman & L.Narici, Functional Analysis Academic Press, New
York ,1966.
3.C. Goffman and G.Pedrick, First course in Functional Analysis, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 1987
4. E. Kreyszig Introductory Functional Analysis with Applications, John
wiley & Sons, New York.,1978.
5. M.Thamban Nair, Functional Analysis. A First Course, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2002
Group C: Elective III (Semester III)
282
Title of the Course ALGEBRAIC THEORY OF NUMBERS
Paper Number XVIII
Category Elective Year II Credits 4 Course
– III Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Algebra and Linear Algebra
Course Outline UNIT-I : Algebraic background: Rings and Fields- Factorization of
Polynomials – Field Extensions – Symmetric Polynomials – Modules –
Free Abelian Groups.
UNIT-II : Algebraic Numbers: Algebraic numbers –Conjugates
and Discriminants – Algebraic Integers – Integral Bases – Norms
and Traces – Rings of Integers.
Chapters 2: Sec. 2.1 to 2.6

UNIT-III : Quadratic and Cyclotomic Fields :Quadratic fields and
cyclotomic fields
Factorization into Irreducibles: Trivial factorization – Factorization
into irreducibles – Examples of non-unique factorization into
irreducibles.
Chapter 3: Sec. 3.1 and 3.2 ; Chapter 4: Sec. 4.1 to 4.4
UNIT-IV : Prime Factorization – Euclidean Domains – Euclidean
Quadratic fields - Consequences of unique factorization – The
Ramanujan –Nagell Theorem.
UNIT-V : Ideals: Prime Factorization of Ideals – The norms of an Ideal
– Non-unique Factorization in Cyclotomic Fields..
Recommended Text I. Stewart and D.Tall. Algebraic Number Theory and Fermat’s Last
Theorem (3rd Edition) A.K.Peters Ltd., Natrick, Mass. 2002.
Reference Books 1. Z.I.Borevic and I.R.Safarevic, Number Theory, Academic
Press, New York, 1966.
2. J.W.S.Cassels and A.Frohlich, Algebraic Number Theory,
Academic Press, New York, 1967.
3. P.Ribenboim, Algebraic Numbers, Wiley, New York, 1972.
4. P. Samuel, Algebraic Theory of Numbers, Houghton Mifflin
Company, Boston, 1970.
283
Title of the NUMBER THEORY AND CRYPTOGRAPHY
Course
Paper Number XVIII
Category Elective- Year II Credits 4 Course
III Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Elementary number theory and calculus
Course Outline UNIT-I :
Elementary Number Theory: Time Estimates for doing
arithmetic – divisibility and Euclidean algorithm – Congruences –
Application to factoring. (Chapter 1)
UNIT-II :
Introduction to Classical Crypto systems – Some simple crypto
systems – Enciphering matrices DES (Chapter 3)
UNIT-III :
Finite Fields, Quadratic Residues and Reciprocity (Chapter 2)
UNIT-IV :
Public Key Cryptography (Chapter 4)
UNIT-V:
Primality , Factoring, Elliptic curves and Elliptic curve crypto
systems (Chapter 5, sections 1,2,3 &5 (omit section 4), Chapter 6,
sections 1& 2 only)
Recommended Neal Koblitz, A Course in Number Theory and Cryptography,
Text Springer-Verlag, New York,1987
Reference Books 1.I. Niven and H.S.Zuckermann, An Introduction to Theory of
Numbers (Edn. 3), Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,1976
2. David M.Burton, Elementary Number Theory, Brown
Publishers, Iowa,1989
3. K.Ireland and M.Rosen, A Classical Introduction to Modern
Number Theory, Springer Verlag, 1972
4. N.Koblitz, Algebraic Aspects of Cryptography, Springer 1998
284
Title of the Course STOCHASTIC PROCESSES
Paper Number XVIII
Pre-requisite Probability Theory
Course Outline UNIT-I : Markov Chains :Classification of General Stochastic Processes
– Markov Chain – Examples – Transition Probability Matrix –
Classifications of States – Recurrence – Examples of recurrent Markov
Chains.
Chapter 1 : Section 3 only
Chapter 2 : Sections 1 to 6 (Omit section 7)
UNIT-II : Limit Theorems of Markov Chains: Discrete renewal
equation and its proof – Absorption probabilities – criteria for recurrence –
Queueing models – Random walk.
Chapter 3 : Sections 1 to 7
UNIT-III : Continuous Time Markov Chains: Poisson Process – Pure
Birth Process – Birth and Death Process – Birth and Death process with
absorbing states – Finite State Continuous time Markov Chains.
Chapter 1 : Section 2 (Poisson Process)
Chapter 4 : Sections 1,2 and 4 to 7 (Omit sections 3 and 8)
UNIT-IV : Renewal Processes: Definition and related concepts –

Some special Renewal processes – Renewal equation and Elementary
Renewal Theorem and its applications.
UNIT-V : Brownian Motion : Definition – Joint probabilities for

Brownian Motion – Continuity of paths and the maximum variables –
Variations and extensions – Computing some functionals of Brownian
Motion by Martingale methods.
Chapter 1 : Section 2 (Brownian Motion)
Chapter 6 : Sections 1 to 5 and 7A only (Omit Sections 6, and 7B,C)
Recommended Text S.Karlin and H.M.Taylor. A First Course in Stochastic Processes( 2nd
edition), Academic Press, New York, 1975.
Reference Books 1. Cinler E., Introduction to Stochastic Processes, Prentice Hall Inc., New
Jersey, 1975
2. Cox D.R. & H.D.Miller, Theory of Stochastic Processes (3rd Edn.),
Chapman and Hall, London, 1983
3. Kannan D., An Introduction to Stochastic Processes, North Holland,
New York 1979
4. Ross S.M., Stochastic Processes, John Wiley and Sons, New ork,1983
5. H.W.Taylor and S.Karlin, An Introduction to Stochastic Modeling (3rd
Edition), Academic Press, New York, 1998
285
Title of the Course DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS
Paper Number XVIII
Pre-requisite
Course Outline UNIT-I : Algorithms and Elementary Data Structures :
Algorithms – Structures programs – Analysis of algorithms – Stacks and
Queues – Trees – Heaps and Heapsort – Sets and disjoint set union – Graphs –
Hashing.
UNIT-II : The Divide and Conquer Method : The general method – Binary
search – Finding the maximum and minimum – Mergesort – Quicksort –
Selection sort – Strassen’s matrix multiplication.
UNIT-III : The Greedy Method : The General method – Optimal storage on
tapes – Knapsack problem – Job Scheduling with deadlines – Optimal merge
pattern – Minimum spanning trees – Single source shortest paths.
UNIT-IV : Backtracking : The general methods – The 8-queens problem -
sum of subsets – Graph colouring – Hamiltonian Cycles – Knapsack problem.
Chapter 7 : Section 7.1 to 7.6
UNIT-V : Branch-and-Bound and NP-Hard and NP-Complete problems :
Branch and Bound Method – 0/1 knapsack problem – Traveling salesperson –
Efficiency Considerations – Basic concepts of NP-Hard problems – Cook’s
theorem - NP-Hard graph problems - NP-Hard Scheduling Problems.
Chapter 11: Sections 11.1 to 11.4 (omit 11.5 and 11.6)
Recommended Text E.Horowitz and S.Sahni. Fundamentals of Computer Algorithm, Galgotia
Publications New Delhi, 1984
Reference Books 1. D.E.Knuth, The Art of Computer Programming, Sorting and Searching.
Vol.3. Addism tresher mass.1973.
2. A.Nijenhuis and H.S.Wilf, Combinatorial Algorithms, Academic Press.
New York 1975.
3. M.Garey and D.Johnson, Computers and Intractability: A Guide to the

theory of NP.Completeners. Johnson, Freeman and San Francisco,
1979.
4. A.V.Aho, J.E.Hoperoft, JD Ullman, The Design and Analysis of

Computer Algorithms. Addison – Wesley, Reading’, MASS. 1974.
286
Computer Laboratory Exercise
(Data structure exercise for Programming in C++)
1. Arrays
1.1 Operations on Arrays

1.2 Linear Search
1.3 Binary Search
2. Sorting
2.1 Bubble Sort

2.2 Selection Sort
2.3 Insertion Sort
2.4 Shell Sort
2.5 Quick Sort
2.6 Heap Sort
3. Stacks and Queues

3.1 Operations on Stack
3.2 Operations on Queue
3.3 Operations on Priority Queue
3.4 Operations on Circular Queue
4. Linked Lists
4.1 Singly Linked List

4.2 Doubly Linked List
4.3 Double-ended List
5. Recursion
5.1 Towers of Honoi

5.2 Merge Sort
6. Binary Tree Traversal
7. Conversion of Polish Expression and Evaluation
287
Group D: Elective IV (Semester IV)
Title of the Course FLUID DYNAMICS

Paper Number XXIII
IV Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Basic Differential Equations, Vector Calculus and Complex Analysis
Course Outline UNIT-I : Kinematics of Fluids in motion. Real fluids and Ideal fluids-
Velocity of a fluid at a point, Stream lines , path lines , steady and unsteady
flows- Velocity potential - The vorticity vector- Local and particle rates of
changes - Equations of continuity - Worked examples - Acceleration of a fluid -
Conditions at a rigid boundary.
Chapter 2. Sec 2.1 to 2.10.
UNIT-II: Equations of motion of a fluid : Pressure at a point in a fluid at
rest.- Pressure at a point in a moving fluid - Conditions at a boundary of two
inviscid immiscible fluids- Euler’s equation of motion - Discussion of the case
of steady motion under conservative body forces.
Chapter 3. Sec 3.1 to 3.7
UNIT-III : Some three dimensional flows. Introduction- Sources, sinks and
doublets - Images in a rigid infinite plane - Axis symmetric flows - Stokes
stream function
Chapter 4 Sec 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5.
UNIT-IV : Some two dimensional flows : Meaning of two dimensional flow
- Use of Cylindrical polar coordinates - The stream function - The complex
potential for two dimensional , irrotational incompressible flow - Complex
velocity potentials for standard two dimensional flows - Some worked
examples - Two dimensional Image systems - The Milne Thompson circle
Theorem.
UNIT-V Viscous flows: Stress components in a real fluid. - Relations between
Cartesian components of stress- Translational motion of fluid elements - The
rate of strain quadric and principle stresses - Some further properties of the
rate of strain quadric - Stress analysis in fluid motion - Relation between stress
and rate of strain- The coefficient of viscosity and Laminar flow - The Navier
– Stokes equations of motion of a Viscous fluid.
Recommended Text F. Chorlton, Text Book of Fluid Dynamics ,CBS Publications. Delhi ,1985.
Reference Books 1. R.W.Fox and A.T.McDonald. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, Wiley, 1985.
2. E.Krause, Fluid Mechanics with Problems and Solutions, Springer, 2005.
3. B.S.Massey, J.W.Smith and A.J.W.Smith, Mechanics of Fluids,
Taylor and Francis, New York, 2005
4. P.Orlandi, Fluid Flow Phenomena, Kluwer, New Yor, 2002.
5. T.Petrila, Basics of Fluid Mechanics and Introduction to Computational
Fluid Dynamics, Springer, berlin, 2004.
288
Title of the Course COMBINATORICS
Paper Number XXIII
IV Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite
Course Outline UNIT-I : Classical Techniques : Basic combinatorial numbers -
Generator functions and Recurrence Relations – Symmetric functions –
Multinomials – Inclusion and Exclusion Principle.
Chapter 1 : Sections 1 to 5 only (avoid 6 ).
UNIT-II : Polya Theory : Necklace problem and Burnside’s lemma –
cycle Index of Permutation group – Polya’s Theorems and their
applications – Binary operations on permutation Groups.
Chapter 2 : Sections 1 to 4 only

UNIT-III : Schur Functions : Robinson–Schensted–Knuth
correspondence – Combinatorics of the Schur Functions
Chapter 3 : Sections 1 & 2 only .
More on Schur functions: Little wood – Richardson Rule – Plethysm and

Polya process – The Hook formula.
Chapter 5 : Sections 1 to 3 only

UNIT-IV : Character Theory of Sn : Character Theory of finite groups .
Chapter 6 : Sections 1 only
Matching Theory : Partially ordered set – Basic Existence Theory

Chapter 6 : Sections 1 & 2 only
UNIT-V : Inversion Techniques : Classical Inversion Formulae Inversion
via Mobius Function.
Chapter 7 : Sections 1 & 2 only.
Designs : Existence and construction .

Ramsey Theory : Ramsey Theorem.

Recommended Text V.Krishnamurthy, Combinatorics – Theory and Applications, Affiliated
East – West Press Pvt Ltd, New Delhi . 1985.
Reference Books 1. Aigner, M. Combinatorial Theory, Springer Verlag, Berlin 1979.
2. Liu, C.L. Introduction to combinatorial Mathematics . MC
3. Grimaldi,R.P. Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics : An
applied Introduction ( 4th Edition ).Pearson, (8th Indian Print)
.
289
Title of the Course MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS
Paper Number XXIII
IV Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Basic Probability Theory
Course Outline UNIT-I : Sample Moments and their Functions: Notion of a
_
sample and a statistic – Distribution functions of X, S2 and
_
( X , S2 ) - 2 distribution – Student t-distribution – Fisher’s Z-distribution
– Snedecor’s F- distribution – Distribution of sample mean from non-
normal populations
UNIT-II : Significance Test : Concept of a statistical test – Parametric
tests for small samples and large samples - 2 test – Kolmogorov Theorem
– Smirnov Theorem – Tests of Kolmogorov and Smirnov type – The
Wald-Wolfovitz and Wilcoxon-Mann-Whitney tests – Independence Tests
by contingency tables.
Chapter 10 : Sections 10.11
Chapter 11 : 12.1 to 12.7.
UNIT-III : Estimation : Preliminary notion – Consistency estimation –
Unbiased estimates – Sufficiency – Efficiency – Asymptotically most
efficient estimates – methods of finding estimates – confidence Interval.
UNIT-IV : Analysis of Variance : One way classification and two-way
classification. Hypotheses Testing: Poser functions – OC function- Most
Powerful test – Uniformly most powerful test – unbiased test.
Chapter 15 : Sections 15.1 and 15.2 (Omit Section 15.3)
Chapter 16 : Sections 16.1 to 16.5 (Omit Section 16.6 and 16.7)
UNIT-V : Sequential Analysis : SPRT – Auxiliary Theorem – Wald’s
fundamental identity – OC function and SPRT – E(n) and Determination of
A and B – Testing a hypothesis concerning p on 0-1 distribution and m in
Normal distribution.
Chapter 17 : Sections 17.1 to 17.9 ( Omit Section 17.10)
Recommended Text M. Fisz , Probability Theory and Mathematical Statistics, John Wiley and
sons, New Your, 1963.
Reference Books 1. E.J.Dudewicz and S.N.Mishra , Modern Mathematical Statistics,
John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1988.
2. V.K.Rohatgi An Introduction to Probability Theory and Mathematical
Statistics, Wiley Eastern New Delhi, 1988(3rd Edn )
3. G.G.Roussas, A First Course in Mathematical Statistics,
Addison Wesley Publishing Company, 1973
4. B.L.Van der Waerden, Mathematical Statistics, G.Allen &
Unwin Ltd., London, 1968.
290
Title of the Course ALGEBRAIC TOPOLOGY
Paper Number XXIII
IV Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Algebra, Topology
Course Outline UNIT-I : Homotopy of paths - Fundamental Group – Covering space
-The Fundamental Group of the circle – Retractions and Fixed points
Chapter 9: Sections 51 – 55.

UNIT-II : The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra – Borsuk–Ulam
Theorem – Deformation Retracts and Homotopy Type – The Fundamental
Group of S n - Fundamental Groups of some surfaces.
Chapter 9 : Sections 56 - 60
UNIT-III : Direct sums of Abelian Groups – Free products of Groups –
Free Groups – The Seifert–van Kampen Theorem – The Fundamental
Group of a wedge of circles.
Chapter 11 : Sections 67 -71.

UNIT-IV : Fundamental groups of surfaces – Homology of surfaces –
cutting and pasting – The classification theorem – constructing compact
surfaces.
UNIT-V : Equivalence of covering spaces – The Universal covering space
– covering transformations – Existence of covering spaces
Recommended Text J.R.Munkres, Toplogy, Pearson Education Asia , Second Edition 2002.
1. M.K.Agoston, Algebraic topology – A First Course, Marcel Dekker,
1962.
2. Satya Deo, Algebraic Topology , Hindustan Book Agency, New
Delhi, 2003.
3. M.Greenberg and Harper, Algebraic Topology – A First course,
Benjamin/Cummings, 1981.
4. C.F. Maunder, Algebraic topology, Van Nostrand, New York, 1970.
5. A.Hatcher, Algebraic Topology, Cambridge University Press, South
Asian Edition 2002.
6. W.S.Massey, Algebrai Topology : An Introduction, Springer 1990
291
Group E: Elective V (Semester IV)
Title of the Course TENSOR ANALYSIS AND RELATIVITY
Paper Number XXIV
Category Elective Year II Credits 4 Course
-V Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Vector Calculus and Mechanics
Course Outline UNIT-I : Tensor Algebra : Systems of Different orders – Summation
Convention – Kronecker Symbols - Transformation of coordinates in S n -
Invariants – Covariant and Contravariant vectors - Tensors of Second
Order – Mixed Tensors – Zero Tensor – Tensor Field – Algebra of Tensors
– Equality of Tensors – Symmetric and Skew-symmetric tensors - Outer
multiplication, Contraction and Inner Multiplication – Quotient Law of
Tensors – Reciprocal Tensor – Relative Tensor – Cross Product of Vectors.
Chapter I : I.1 – I.3,I.7 and I.8 and Chapter II : II.1 – II.19
UNIT-II : Tensor Calculus : Riemannian Space – Christoffel Symbols
and their properties.
Chapter III: III.1 and III.2
UNIT-III : Tensor Calculus(contd) : Covariant Differentiation of
Tensors – Riemann–Christoffel Curvature Tensor – Intrinsic Differentiation
Chapter III:III.3 – III.5
UNIT-IV : Special Theory of Relativity : Galilean Transformations –
Maxwell’s equations – The ether Theory – The Principle of Relativity.
Relativistic Kinematics : Lorentz Transformation equations – Events and
simultaneity – Example – Einstein Train – Time dilation – Longitudinal
Contraction - Invariant Interval - Proper time and Proper distance - World
line - Example – twin paradox – addition of velocities – Relativistic
Doppler effect.
UNIT-V : Relativistic Dynamics : Momentum – Energy – Momentum –
energy four vector – Force - Conservation of Energy – Mass and energy –
Example – inelastic collision – Principle of equivalence – Lagrangian and
Hamiltonian formulations.
Accelerated Systems : Rocket with constant acceleration – example –
Rocket with constant thrust.
Recommended Text U.C. De, Absos Ali Shaikh and Joydeep Sengupta, Tensor Calculus, Narosa
For Units I,II and III Publishing House, New Delhi, 2004.
For Units IV and V D.Greenwood, Classical Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
1985.
Reference Books 1. J.L.Synge and A.Schild, Tensor Calculus, Toronto, 1949.
2. A.S.Eddington. The Mathematical Theory of Relativitity,
Cambridge University Press, 1930.
3. P.G.Bergman, An Introduction to Theory of Relativity, Newyor,
1942.
4. C.E.Weatherburn, Riemannian Geometry and the Tensor Calculus,
Cambridge, 1938.
292
Title of the Course MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS
Paper Number XXIV
Category Elective - Year II Credits 4 Course
V Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite
Course Outline UNIT-I : Integral Equations, Sturm–Liouville Theorem and Green’s
Functions
Chapter 4: Sections 4.1 – 4.4 only.
UNIT-II : Methods of Non linear Dynamics – I : Phase Portraits .
Chapter 6 : Sections 6.1 – 6.4 only.
UNIT-III : Methods of Non linear Dynamics - II : Stability and
Bifurcation.
Chapter 7 : Sections 7.1 -7.4 only .
UNIT-IV : Non linear Differential Equations and their solutions.
Chapter 8 : Sections 8.1 - 8.3 only
UNIT-V : Non linear Integral Equations and their solutions.
Chapter 9 : Sections 9.1 – 9.7 only.
Recommended Text R.S.Kaushal and D.Parashar, Advanced Methods of Mathematical Physics
Reference Books 1. Arfken,G (1966) Mathematical Methods for Physicists, A.P.NY.
2. Butkor,E. (1968) Mathematical Physics, Addison –Wesley.
3. Strogatz,S.H.(1994) Non linear Dynamics and Chaos : With

Applications to Physics, Biology, Chemistry and Engineering.
Addison – Wesley
4. Tabor, M (1989) Chaos and integrability in Non linear systems:
An Introduction, John Wiley & Sons,NY.
5. Lakshmanan, M (1988). Solitons : Introduction and Applications,

Springer Verlag, Berlin
6. Debnath, Lokenath ( 1997). Introduction to Non linear PDE for

Scientists and Engineers , Birkhauser , Boston
293
Title of the Course FINANCIAL MATHEMATICS
Paper Number XXIV
V Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite Stochastic processes
Course Outline UNIT-I : Single Period Models : Definitions from Finance – Pricing a
forward One-step Binary Model – a ternary Model – Characterization of no
arbitrage – Risk-Neutral Probability Measure
Chapter 1
UNIT-II : Binomial Trees and Discrete parameter martingales
Multi-period Binary model – American Options – Discrete parameter
martingales and Markov processes – Martingale Theorems – Binomial
Representation Theorem – Overture to Continuous models
Chapter 2
UNIT-III : Brownian Motion : Definition of the process – Levy’s
Construction of Brownian Motion – The Reflection Principle and Scaling –
Martingales in Continuous time.
Chapter 3
UNIT-IV : Stochastic Calculus : Stock Prices are not differentiable –
Stochastic Integration – Ito’s formula – Integration by parts and Stochastic
Fubini Theorem–Girsanov Theorem – Brownian Martingale Representation
Theorem – Geometric Brownian Motion – The Feynman-Kac
Representation
Chapter 4
UNIT-V : Block-Scholes Model : Basic Block-Scholes Model – Block-
Scholes price and hedge for European Options – Foreign Exchange –
Dividends – Bonds – Market price of risk.
Chapter 5
Recommended Text Alison Etheridge, A Course in Financial Calculus, Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge, 2002.
Reference Books 1. Martin Boxter and Andrew Rennie, Financial Calculus : An
Introduction to Derivatives Pricing, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge, 1996.
2. Damien Lamberton and Bernard Lapeyre , (Translated by Nicolas
Rabeau and Farancois Mantion ), Introduction to Stochastic Calculus
Applied to Finance, Chapman and Hall, 1996
3. Marek Musiela and Marek Rutkowski, Martingale Methods in Financial
Modeling, Springer Verlag, New York, 1988.
4. Robert J.Elliott and P.Ekkehard Kopp, Mathematics of Financial
Markets, Springer Verlag, New York, 2001 (3rd Printing)
294
Title of the Course CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS AND INTEGRAL EQUATIONS
Paper Number XXIV
Category Elective-V Year II Credits 4 Course
Semester IV Code
Pre-requisite UG level Differential equations
Course Outline UNIT-I : The Method of Variations in Problems with Fixed Boundaries
Chapter 6 : Sections 1 to 7 (Elsgolts)
UNIT-II : Variational Problems with Moving Boundaries and certain other
problems and Sufficient conditions for an Extremum
Chapter 7 : Sections 1 to 4 (Elsgolts)
Chapter 8 : Sections 1to 3(Elsgolts)
UNIT-III : Variational Problems Involving a conditional Extremum
Chapter 9 : Sections 1 to 3. (Elsgolts)
UNIT-IV : Integral Equations with Separable Kernels and Method of
successive approximations.
Chapter 1 : Sections 1.1 to 1.7 (Kanwal)
UNIT-V: Classical Fredholm Theory , Symmetric Kernels and Singular
Integral Equations
Recommended Text For Units I,II and III : L. Elsgolts , Differential Equations and the
Calculus of variations, Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1973 (2nd Edition)
For Units IV and V :Ram P.Kanwal,Linear Integral Equations, Academic

Press, New York, 1971.
Reference Books 1. I.M.Gelfand and S.V.Fomin, Calculus of Variations, Prentice-Hall
Inc. New Jersey, 1963.
2. A.S.Gupta, Calculus of Variations with Applications, Prentice-Hall
of India, New Delhi, 1997.
3. M.Krasnov, A.Kiselev and G.Makarenko, Problems and Exercises
in Integral Equations, Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1979.
4. S.G.Mikhlin, Linear Integral Equations, Hindustan Publishing
Corp. Delhi,1960.
5. L.A.Pars, An Introduction to the Calculus of Variations,
Heinemann, London, 1965.
6. R.Weinstock, Calculus of Variations with Applications to
Physics and Engineering, McGraw-Hill Book Company
Inc. New York, 1952.
295
18. M.SC. DEGREE COURSE IN MEDICAL LABORATORY
TECHNOLOGY
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER- III
Title of the paper Microbiology –Core -7
Second year & 4
Third Semester
Objective To introduce to the students the various pathogens involved
in diseased conditions
Course outline: (Microbiology)
UNIT I
Introduction to microbiology, morphology and nature of micro-
organisms, growth and nutrition, classification and identification, sterilization
and disinfection, antimicrobial agents, bacterial genetics, antiviral agents.
Microbiology of special environments - air, water, soil, milk and foods,
UNIT II
Evolutionary relationships, morphologic changes during growth. Normal
flora of human body. Major groups of bacteria, classification, principles,
descriptions of principle groups, growth, survival and death of
microorganisms, cultivation of microorganisms, microbial metabolism. Bacteria
and nutrition.
296
UNIT III
Structure, properties and classification of plant and animal viruses,
bacteeriophages.
Structure, properties and classification of fungi, mycoplasmas and cell
wall defective bacteria, mycobacteria, spirochetes, chlamydiae.
UNIT IV
Microbial techniques: sterilization, disinfection and the treatment of
infected materials, culture media, cultural methods, staining and identification
methods, mycological methods, counting microorganisms, agglutination tests,
antibiotic sensitivity and assay tests, food preservation and food poisoning.
UNIT V
Strategy of anti-microbial therapy, epidemiology and control of
community infections, hospital infection, microbial genetics, industrial
microbiology and its applications.
Reference Books:

Recommended Books:
Microbiology - Presscot, 2003, 3rd edition, Mc-Graw hill, Boston.
Medical Microbiology:A guide to microbiological infection - David Slack Richard,
1992, 10th, edition, Churchill Livingstone, New York.
297
Indian Books:
Microbiology of Diseases - Gupta Yanka, 2000 ,1st edition, Sarup & Sons,
New Delhi.
Web sites:
www.mhhe.com
www.microbe.org
Title of the paper Medical Laboratory Technology and Biostatistics

Core -8
Second year & 4
Third Semester
Objective To understand the various aspects of Medical Laboratory
Technology and Biostatistics
Course outline: (Medical Laboratory Technology and Biostatistics)

UNIT I
General laboratory techniques, procedures and safety measures -
chemicals and related substances, laboratory ware, volumetric equipments
and its calibration, laboratory operations, buffer solutions and their actions,
Units of measurement.
UNIT II
298
Specimen collection, pre analytical variables, automation in clinical
laboratory - basic concepts, automation of analytical processes, integrated
automation, automation of point of care analyzers.
Analytical techniques and instrumentation - Basic concepts, definitions
and applications of chromatography - paper, Ion exchange, affinity, HPLC, Gel
filtration and Thin layer chromatography, radioactivity and UV - visible
spectrophotometry – Beer-Lambert's law.
UNIT III
Laboratory operation - evaluation of methods with an introduction to
statistical techniques - basic statistics, concepts, performance standards,
selecting an evaluating analytical methods, assessing method acceptability,
establishment and use of reference values, clinical laboratory informatics -
computer system, microcomputer applications, laboratory information
systems, future use of computers.
UNIT IV
Laboratory management- health care delivery and financial strategies,
laboratory strategies for managed care, financial management, human
resource management, space and facility management.
Quality management - fundamentals, total quality management, total
testing process, control of pre - analytical and analytical variables, external
quality assessment and proficiency testing, new quality initiatives.
UNIT V
Introduction, meaning and scope, classification of data, frequency
distribution, graphical representative, and measures of central tendency -
mean median, standard deviation, standard error, skewness and kurtosis,
probability, probability distribution, normal, binomial and Poisson distribution,
Hardy Weinberg law. Random variable - standard distributions and their
properties distribution, function, decomposition, of distribution, classification,
functions of random variables, Discrete and continuous distribution. ]
Applications in biology. Elements of sampling theory - simple, stratified
and systematic sampling schemes. Correlation and regression analysis -
299
multiple and partial correlation, rank correlation, large sample test, small
samples tests, tests of significance : Chi - square test, student t - test and
analysis of variance - one - way and two way analysis of variance, COANOVA
goodness of fit and homogeneity, elements of demography, computer
applications in biostatistics.
Reference Books:
A procedure manual for Rountine Diagnostic Tests, Volume I,II & III – Kanai L,
Mukerjee, 8th reprint, 2001, TATA Mc Graw-Hill publishing Co. Ltd.
Methods in Interpretations – Ramnik Soot, 1994, 4 th edition, Jaypee Prakash
Publications.
Title of the paper Practical III (Microbiology)- Core-9
Second year & 4
Third Semester
Objective To get hands on training in Microbial techniques and in the
field of Parasitology
Course outline: (Practical III - Microbiology)

1. Safety in microbiology, laboratory equipments, perparation of glass
wares and sterilization techniques.
2. Culture methods: isolation, maintenance, systemic study, staining and
identification.
3. Mycological methods, counting microorganisms, antibiotic sensitivity
and assay methods.
4. Agglutination tests, fluorescent antibody techniques.
Reference Books:
Clinical Pathology and parasitology for Medical Laboratory technology -
Sarkas
300
Medical Parasitology - N.C.Dey & T.K.Dey.
links.html
Title of the paper Parasitology – Elective 5
Second year & 3
Third Semester
Objective To introduce to the students the various parasites involved
in diseased conditions
Course outline: (Parasitology)
UNIT I
Taxonomy and classification of parasites, giardia lamblia, trichonomas,
intestinal parasites. Flagellates, homoflagellates and other intestinal amoebas,
free living amoeba.
UNIT II
Plasmodium, isospora, cryptosporodium, sarcocystis, toxoplasma
gondii, babesiea micrcti, balantidium coli, pneumocystis carinii
UNIT III
Identification, classification and properties of protozoa - rhizopoda,
mastigophora, sporoxoa and ciliated parasites in faeces and blood.
UNIT IV
Microfilaria. Helminthes - trematodes, nematodes, cestodes.
UNIT V
Anthropods - general features of insects of medical importance and
their role in the transmission of. diseases.
Reference Books:
301

Recommended Books:
Microbiology - Presscot, 2003, 3rd edition, Mc-Graw hill, Boston.
Medical Microbiology:A guide to microbiological infection - David Slack Richard,
1992, 10th, edition, Churchill Livingstone, New York.
Indian Books:
Microbiology of Diseases - Gupta Yanka, 2000 ,1st edition, Sarup & Sons,
New Delhi.
Web sites:
www.mhhe.com
www.microbe.org
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
Title of the paper Diagnostic Clinical Biochemistry-Elective 6

Category: ED Year & Semester Credits Subject code
302
Second year & 3
Third Semester
Objective To understand the basics of disease based clinical
investigations.
Course Outline : (Diagnostic Clinical Biochemistry)

UNIT I
Specimen Collection and preservation of samples, automation in clinical
laboratory – basic concepts.
UNIT II
Diagnostic significance of serum enzymes, - CPK, amylase,
transaminases, alkaline phosphatases and LDH.
UNIT III
Liver function test with special reference to hepatitis and jaundice, renal
function test and gastric function tests.
UNIT IV
Blood lipid profile – risk in cardiovascular diseases, routine urine
analysis and stone analysis. Composition analysis of gall stones and renal
calculi.
UNIT V
Prenatal and postnatal diagnosis of inborn errors using enzyme assays,
PCR, ARMS, RT-PCR, DHPLC in amniotic fluid, chorionic villi.
Reference Books:
Varley’s Practical Clinical Biochemistry by Alan H Gowenlock, published by
CBS Publishers and distributors, India Sixth Edition (1988).
Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical chemistry – Burtis and Ashwood, Fifth Edition, WB
Saunders Company, Oxford Science Publications USA, (2001)
Practical Biochemistry – Keith Wilson & John Walker, fifth edition, Cambridge
Universtiy Press, UK (2000).
Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – Palanivelu third edition
(2004).
303
Biochemical calculations – Irwin H. Segel, second edition, John Wiley & Sons,
USA (1976).
Introduction to Practical Biochemistry by Sawhney and Randhir Singh, Narosa
Publishing House, London (2000).
Experiments in Biochemistry – A Hands on Approach by Shawn O Farrell and
Ryan T Ranallo, Thomson Learning Inc., USA (2000)
Recommended Books:
Principles of Instrumental analysis – Skoog, Holler, Nieman, fifth edition
Published by Harcourt College Publishers, Singapore (2001).
Essentials of Practical Biochemistry by Lalit M Srivatsava, Nibhriti Das, Subrata
Sinha, Published by CBS Publishers and Distributors, India, (2002)
Indian Books:
Analytical Biochemistry & Separation Techniques – Palanivelu third edition
(2004).
Title of the paper Serology and Hematology-Core 10

Second year & 4
Third Semester
Objective To understand the various components involved in the field
of Serology and Hematology
Course outline: (Serology and Hematology)

UNIT I
Preparation of serology reagents and antisera. Storage and stability,
evaluation and interpretation -VDRL, Kahn flocculation test, Widal test, C-
304
reactive protein, anti streptolysis O, rheumatoid factors, Australia antigen, Hbs
Ag, serological diagnosis of rheumatic disorders with Rapi Tex RF, CRD, ASL
Rapid diagnostics in serology.
UNIT II
Immunization - bacterial, viral and polysaccharide vaccines, immunity to
bacterial, viral and parasitic infections, immunopathology, Herd immunity,
attenuation, classical methods of attenuation, by recombined DNA technology,
constraints on the use of attenuated vaccines, directions for future
development of live attenuated virus vaccines, vaccines containing individual
protective antigens, idiotypes, spectific vaccines, current vaccines,
experimental vaccines, adjuvants.
UNIT III
Sero diagnostic tests - General principles, serologic methods -
agglutination, precipitin, complement fixation, fluorescent antibody methods,
treponemal and non-treponemal antigen test, serologic response to infection -
salomonella, brucella, tularemia, ricketissial diseases, anistreptococcal
antibodies, streptococcus antibodies, cold agglutinins, hepatitis associated
antigens, antibodies to tissue antigens, serology in chronic liver disease,
antibodies to thyroid antigens, antinuclear antibodies, serologic procedures in
parasitic diseases.
UNIT IV
Virology -pathogenesis of viral infections, general principles and
specific steps in viral pathogenesis, diagnostic virology - introduction,
laboratory diagnosis of viral diseases, growth of viruses from clinical samples,
serologic methods, rapid methods for virus detection, clinician’s role,
approach to the major syndromes:
UNIT V
Composition and functions of Blood, plasma proteins and variations in
diseases. Haemopoiesis and diseases of hemopoietic stem cells, erythrocyte
disorders, granulocyte and monocyte disorders, lymphocytic disorders.
305
Structure, synthesis, metabolism and functions of haemoglobin,
haemoglobinopathies, anaemia, structure, synthesis, metabolism and
functions of porphyrin. Diseases related to porphyrins. Haemostases, clotting
mechanism, biochemistry of plasma coagulation factors hemorrhagic
diseases, disorders of clotting mechanism.
Lymphopoiesis, lymphatic system and lymphocytic disorders.
Biochemistry, metabolism and function of platelets. Preservation and clinic at
use of blood and blood components - blood banking, erythrocytes, leukocytes
and platelets.
Reference Books:
Notes on Hematology – Hughes Jones N.C, Vikramasinvhe S.N, 1973, 6 th
edition, Black Well Science Ltd.
Title of the paper Practical IV (Serology and Hematology) - Core - 11

Second year & 4
Third Semester
Objective To get hands on training in the field of Serology and
Hematology
Course outline: (Practical III - Serology and Hematology)

1. Introduction to serology and serodiagnostic procedures - principles of
immunologic neactiols, serodiagnosis
2. Laboratory procedures in serology - collection and preparation of
specimen, serological test for syphilis, agglutination test, C reactive protein
test, Rheumatoid arthritis test, serodiagnosis of streptococcal infection,
serodiagnostic test for AIDS, Rubella. Immunologic test for pregnancy
3. Blood group and Rh typing, blood banking, anti human globulin or
coombs test, cross matching, Blood transfusion process.
Hematology
306
1. TC & DC, Hb, ESR, PCV, MCV, MCHC, MCH, platelet count.
2. Clotting time, bleeding time, prothrombin time, whole blood coagulation
time
3. Blood film staining - Leishmann stain, Heinz body staining, reticulocyte
staining, test for Sickle cell Hb, Carboxy Hb, Met Hb and Sulp Hb.
4. Screening test for Factor XIII deficiency
5. Platelet aggregation factor
6. Complement assay.
7. Periodic acid Schiffs stain, Sudan Black stain for leukemia
Reference Books:
Medical Laboratory Technology - Ramnik Sood
Virology - Bernard Fields
Essential Immunology - Ivan Roitt
Clinical Diagnosis - Todd and Sanford
Haematology – Williams, Beutler, Erslev, Lichtman.
SEMESTER- IV
Title of the paper Pathology-Core -12

Second year & 3
Fourth Semester
Objective To understand the various pathogens involved in
307
pathological conditions
Course outline : (Pathology)

UNIT I
General pathology - Introduction to pathology, cellular structure and
metabolism, cell injury, causes of cell injury, cell injury and necrosis,
apoptosis, sub cellular responses to cell injury, cellular adaptations of growth
and differentiation, intracellular accumulation, pathologic calcification, hyaline
change, cellular ageing.
UNIT II
Inflammation and tissue repair - Acute and chronic inflammation,
chemical mediators of inflammation, morphologic patterns in acute and
chronic inflammation, systemic effects of inflammation, control of normal cell
growth, extra cellular matrix and cell matrix interactions, repair by connective
tissues, wound healing, overview of inflammatory - reparative response.
UNIT III
Hemodynamic, genetic and environmental disorders - edema,
hyperaemia and congestion, haemostasis and thrombosis, embolism,
infarction, shock, mutations, mendelian disorders, disorders with multifactorial
inheritance, single - gene disorders with none-classic inheritance, molecular
diagnosis, diagnosis of genetic diseases, humans and the environment,
common environmental and occupational exposure.
UNIT IV
Infectious diseases and diseases of child hood and infancy - general
principles of microbial pathogenesis, respiratory infections, gastrointestinal
infections, parasitic intestinal infections, sexually transmitted diseases, gram-
positive pyogenic bacterial infections, infections of childhood and
adolescence, opportunistic and AIDS associated infections, tropical, zoonotic
and vector - prone infection, birth weight and gestational age, birth injuries,
congenital malformation, perinatal infections, neonatal respiratory distress
syndrome (RDS), erythroblastosis fetalis, inborn errors of metabolism and
308
other genetic disorders, sudden infant death syndrome, tumors and tumor -
like lesions of infancy and childhood.
UNIT V
Histology and diseases of the organ systems - introduction to
histotechnology and cytotechnology, laboratory techniques - histochemistry
and histopathology, diagnostic exfoliative cytology, diseases of the heart,
lung, head and neck, Gl tract, liver and biliary tract, pancreas, kindey, genito -
urinary tract, eye, skin, central nervous system, muscles and bones.
Reference Books:
Robbins pathologic basis of disease - Ramzis. cotran, vinay kumar, tukar
Collins.
Essential pathology for dental students - Harsh mohan.
Medical laboratory technology - A procedure manual for routine diagnostic
tests - Kannai L.mukherjee.
Clinical diagnosis by lab methods - Isreal Davidson.
Clinical pathology and parasitology for medical Laboratory technology –
Sarkas.
Recommended Books:
Essentials of Histology – William Krause, Hary Clitts J, 1994, 1 st edition, Little
Brown & Company.
Title of the paper Practical V (Pathology) – Core 13
Second year & 4
Fourth Semester
Objective To get trained with various Pathological techniques
Course outline: (Practical V - Pathology)
309
1. Clinical pathology and urine analysis - Urine analysis, routine
examination of urine, rapid chemical test of urine.
2. Examination of miscellaneous body fluids - CSF, laboratory
investigations, serous fluids, synovial fluid, gastric juice.
3. Semen analysis - Clinical significance, specimen collection, laboratory
investigations, examination for the presence of semen.
4. Stool examination - Clinical significance, collection of faecal specimen,
laboratory investigation.
5. Histopathology of various organs - liver, kiney, heart, aorta, brain,
testis, ovary, spleen, pancreas and endocrine glands.
Reference Books:
Robbins pathologic basis of disease - Ramzis. cotran, vinay kumar, tukar
Collins.
Essential pathology for dental students - Harsh mohan.
Medical laboratory technology - A procedure manual for routine diagnostic
tests - Kannai L.Mukherjee.
Clinical diagnosis by lab methods - Isreal Davidson.
Clinical pathology and parasitology for medical Laboratory technology –
Sarkas.
Title of the paper Pharmacology and Toxicology-Elective -7

Second year & 3
Fourth Semester
Objective To understand the metabolism of drugs and its toxic effects
Course outline: (Pharmacology and Toxicology)

UNIT I
310
General principles of pharmacology. Routes of drug administration.
Modes of action of drugs. Methods and measurements in pharmacology.
Absorption and distribution of drugs. Drug elimination and pharmacokinetice.
Pharmacodynamics. Adverse drug effects.
UNIT II
Drugs acting on automonous Nervous systern-cholinergic and
adrenergic system and related drugs. Drugs acting on peripheral Nervous
System - skeletal muscle relaxant, local anesthetics. Drugs acting on Central
Nervous System - anesthetis, sedative, CNS stimulants and depressants,
drugs for epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's diseases and others and
antipsychotic drugs.
UNIT III
Drugs acting on Respiratory system - drugs for cough, asthma and
other related diseases. Drugs affecting Blood and Blood formation - effect on
coaulation, bleeding and thrombosis. Hormones and related drugs.
Cardiovascular drugs - cardiac glycosides, antiarrhythmic, antifungal,
antiischemic and antihypertensive drugs. Chemotherapy - anticancer and
neoplastic drugs.
UNIT IV
Drugs acting on Gastrointestinal system - drugs for ulcer, constipation,
diarrhea and other related drugs. Drugs acting on Kidney - diuretics and
antidiuretics. Antibiotics - antimicrobial, antifungal. antiviral, anti inflammatory,
antihelminthic, antiprotozoal drugs and immunosupprments. Miscellaneous
drugs - drugs for Skin diseases, antiseptic, disinfectants, chelating agents,
vitamins, vaccines and sera.
UNIT V :
General principles of toxicology. Introduction. Bioaccumulation,
Bioconcentration, Biomagnification. Food toxicology - toxins from common
food, food adulteration, synthetic chemicals used in food processing and acts
on food processing and acts on food processing. Industrial toxicology - Waste
311
materials from various industries and related toxicity. Drugs of abuse -
alcohol, morphine, codeine, heroin etc.
BOOKS
1. Essentials of Medical Pharmacology - K.D. Tripathi
2. General Principles of Toxicology - Gazerette and Doul
3. Pharmacology - H.P Rand, M.M Dale and J.M Ritter
Title of the paper Project + Viva voce-Core 14

Second year & 8
Fourth Semester
Objective -
C - Core; E- Elective; ED- Extra Discipliniary
1. Reference Books: Author–Year-Title-Edition-Publisher-Place

2. Recommended Books: Author–Year-Title-Edition-Publisher-Place
3. Websites: e-learning resources
19. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN PHYSICS

SECOND YEAR
SYLLABUS
Paper 11: STATISTICAL MECHANICS

(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, THIRD SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: Phase Transitions
312
Thermodynamic potentials - Phase Equilibrium - Gibb’s phase rule - Phase transitions
and Ehrenfest’s classifications –Third law of Thermodynamics.
Order parameters - Landau theory of phase transition - Critical indices - Scale

transformations and dimensional analysis.
UNIT 2: Statistical Mechanics and Thermodynamics
Foundations of statistical mechanics - Specification of states of a system -

Microcanonical ensemble - Phase space – Entropy - Connection between statistics and
thermodynamics – Entropy of an ideal gas using the microcanonical ensemble - Entropy
of mixing and Gibb’s paradox.
UNIT 3: Canonical and Grand canonical Ensembles
Trajectories and density of states - Liouville’s theorem - Canonical and grand canonical
ensembles - Partition function - Calculation of statistical quantities - Energy and density
fluctuations.
UNIT 4: Classical and Quantum Statistics
Density matrix - Statistics of ensembles - Statistics of indistinguishable particles -

Maxwell-Boltzman statistics - Fermi-Dirac statistics – Ideal Fermi gas – Degeneracy -
Bose-Einstein statistics - Plank radiation formula - Ideal Bose gas - Bose-Einstein
condensation.
313
UNIT 5: Real Gas, Ising Model and Fluctuations
Cluster expansion for a classical gas - Virial equation of state – Calculation of the first
virial coefficient in the cluster expansion - Ising model - Mean-field theories of the Ising
model in three, two and one dimensions - Exact solutions in one-dimension.
Correlation of space-time dependent fluctuations - Fluctuations and transport phenomena

- Brownian motion - Langevin theory - Fluctuation-dissipation theorem - The Fokker-
Planck equation.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. S.K.Sinha , 1990 , Statistical Mechanics , Tata Mc Graw – Hill, New Delhi.

2. B. K. Agarwal and M. Eisner, 1998, Statistical Mechanics, Second Edition New
Age International, New Delhi.
3. J. K. Bhattacharjee, 1996, Statistical Mechanics: An Introductory Text, Allied
4. F. Reif, 1965, Fundamentals of Statistical and Thermal Physics, Mac Graw-Hill,
New York.
5. C. Kittel, 1987, Thermal Physics, 2nd edition, CBS Publication, New Delhi.
6. M. K. Zemansky, 1968, Heat and Thermodynamics, 5th edition, Mc Graw-Hill
New York.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. R. K. Pathria, 1996, Statistical Mechanics, 2nd edition, Butter Worth-Heinmann,

New Delhi.
2. L. D. Landau and E. M. Lifshitz, 1969, Statistical Physics, Pergomon
Press,Oxford.
3. K. Huang, 2002, Statistical Mechanics, Taylor and Francis, London
4. W. Greiner, L. Neise and H. Stoecker, Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics,
Springer Verlang, New York.
5. A. B. Gupta, H. Roy, 2002, Thermal Physics, Books and Allied, Kolkata.
6. A. Kalidas, M. V. Sangaranarayanan, Non-Equilibrium Thermodynamics,
Macmllan India, New Delhi.
7. M. Glazer and J. Wark, 2001, Statistical Mechanics, Oxford University Press,
Oxford.
8. L. P. Kadanoff, 2001, Statistical Physics - Statics, Dynamics and Renormalization,
World Scientific, Singapore.
9. F. W. Sears and G. L. Salinger, 1998, Thermodynamics, Kinetic Theory and
Statistical Thermodynamics, 3rd Edition, Narosa, New Delhi.
314
WEB SITES
1. http://www.nyu.edu/classes/tuckerman/stat.mech/lectures.html
2. http://www.abo.fi/~mhotokka/mhotokka/lecturenotes/sm.html
3. http://www-f1.ijs.si/~vilfan/SM/cont.html
4. http://web.mit.edu/8.334/www/lectures/
5. http://cs.physics.sunysb.edu/verbaarschot/html/lectures/phy306-05/notes.html
Paper 12: NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS

Unit 1 – Nuclear interactions
Nucleon-nucleon interaction – Tensor forces – Meson theory of nuclear forces – Yukawa
potential – Nucleon-Nucleon scattering – Effective range theory – Spin dependence of
nuclear forces – Charge independence and charge symmetry of nuclear forces – Isospin
formalism
Unit 2 – Nuclear reactions
Types of reactions and conservation laws – Energetics of nuclear reactions –Dynamics of
nuclear reactions – Q-value equation – Scattering and reaction cross sections –
Compound nucleus reactions – Direct reactions – Resonance scattering – Breit-Wigner
one level formula
Unit 3 – Nuclear Models
Liquid drop model – Bohr-Wheeler theory of fission – Experimental evidence for shell
effects – Shell model – Spin-orbit coupling - Magic numbers – Angular momenta and
parities of nuclear ground states – Qualitative discussion and estimate of transition rates –
Magnetic moments and Schmidt lines – Collective model of Bohr and Mottelson
Unit 4 – Nuclear decay
Beta decay – Fermi theory of beta decay – Shape of the beta spectrum – Total decay rate
- Mass of the neutrino – Angular momentum and parity selection rules – Allowed and
forbidden decays – Comparative half-lives – Neutrino physics – Non-conservation of
parity – Gamma decay – Multipole transitions in nuclei – Angular momentum and parity
selection rules – Internal conversion – Nuclear isomerism
Unit 5 – Elementary particle physics
Types of interaction between elementary particles – Hadrons and leptons – Symmetries
and conservation laws – Elementary ideas of CP and CPT invariance – Classification of
hadrons – SU(2) and SU(3) multiplets – Quark model - Gell-Mann-Okubo mass formula
for octet and decuplet hadrons – Charm, bottom and top quarks
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. K. S. Krane, 1987, Introductory Nuclear Physics, Wiley, New York.
2. D. Griffiths, 1987, Introduction to Elementary Particle Physics, Harper & Row, New
York.
3. R. R. Roy and B.P. Nigam, 1983, Nuclear Physics, New age Intl. New Delhi.
315
1. H. A. Enge, 1983, Introduction to Nuclear Physics, Addison-Wesley, Tokyo

2. Y. R. Waghmare, 1981, Introductory Nuclear, Physics, Oxford-IBH, New Delhi.
3. Ghoshal, Atomic and Nuclear Physics, Vol. 2
4. J. M. Longo, 1971, Elementary particles, McGraw-Hill, New York.
5. R. D. Evans, 1955, Atomic Nucleus, McGraw-Hill, New York.
6. I. Kaplan, 1989, Nuclear Physics, Narosa, New Delhi
7. B. L. Cohen, 1971, Concepts of Nuclear Physics, TMH, New Delhi
8. M. K. Pal, 1982, Theory of Nuclear Structure, Affl. East-West, Chennai.
9. W. E. Burcham and M. Jobes, 1995, Nuclear and Particle Physics, Addison-
Wesley, Tokyo.
WEB SITES
1. http://ocw.mit.edu/OcwWeb/Physics/8-701Spring 2004/Lecture notes

2. http://faraday.physics.utoronto.ca/General Interest/D.Bailey/SubAtomic/ Lectures/
Lect.html
Paper 13 : COMPUTATIONAL METHODS AND PROGRAMMING

UNIT 1: SOLUTIONS OF EQUATIONS
Determination of zeros of polynomials –Roots of nonlinear algebraic equations and

transcendental equations – Bisection and Newton-Raphson methods – Convergence of
solutions.
UNIT 2: LINEAR SYSTEMS
Solution of simultaneous linear equations – Gaussian elimination – Matrix inversion –

Eignenvalues and eigenvectors of matrices – Power and Jacobi Methods.
UNIT 3 : INTERPOLATION AND CURVE FITTING
Interpolation with equally spaced and unevenly spaced points (Newton forward and
backward interpolations, Lagrange interpolation) – Curve fitting – Polynomial least –
squares fitting.
316
UNIT 4: DIFFERENTIATION, INTEGRATION AND SOLUTION OF
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Numerical differentiation – Numerical integration – Trapezoidal rule – Simpon’s rule –

Error estimates – Gauss-Legendre, Gauss-Laguerre, Gauss-Hermite and Gauss-
Chebyshev quadratures – Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations – Euler
and Runge Kutta methods.
UNIT 5: PROGRAMMING WITH FORTRON/C :
Flow-charts – Integer and floating point arithmetic expressions – Built-in functions –

Executable and non-executable statements – Subroutines and functions – Programs for
the following computational methods: (a) Zeros of polynomials by the bisection method,
(b) Zeros of polynomials/non-linear equations by the Newton-Raphson method, (c)
Lagrange Interpolation, (d) Trapezoidal and Simpson’s Rules, (e) Solution of first order
differential equations by Euler’s method.
Books for Study:
1. V. Rajaraman, 1993, Computer oriented Numerical Methods, 3 rd Edition. PHI, New

Delhi
2. M. K .Jain, S. R. Iyengar and R. K. Jain, 1995, Numerical Methods for Scientific and
Engineering Computation, 3 rd Edition, New Age Intl., New Delhi
3. S. S. Sastry, Introductory Methods of Numerical analysis, PHI, New Delhi
4. F. Scheid, 1998, Numerical Analysis, 2 nd Edition, Schaum’s series, McGraw Hill,
New York
5. W. H. Press, S. A. Teukolsky, W. T. Vetterling and B. P. Flannery, 1992,
Numerical Recipes in FORTRAN, 2 nd Edition, Cambridge Univ. Press
6. W. H. Press, S. A. Teukolsky, W. T. Vetterling and B. P. Flannery, 1992,
Numerical Recipes in C, 2 nd Edition, Cambridge Univ. Press
7. V. Rajaraman, Programming in FORTRAN / Programming in C, PHI, New Delhi
8. E. Balagurusamy, 1998, Numerical Methods, TMH
1. S. D. Conte and C. de Boor, 1981, Elementary Numerical analysis-an algorithmic

approach, 3 rd Edition, McGraw Hill,)
2. B. F. Gerald, and P. O. Wheatley, 1994, Applied Numerical analysis, 5th Edition.,
Addison-Wesley, MA.
3. B. Carnagan, H. A. Luther and J. O. Wilkes, 1969, Applied Numerical Methods,
Wiley, New York.
4. S. S. Kuo, 1996, Numerical Methods and Computers, Addison-Wesley.
WEB SITES
1. http://www.sst.ph.ic.ac.uk/angus/Lecturs/compphys/comphys.html
317
2. http://www.library.cornell.edu/nr (numerical recipes online book on C & FORTRAN)
PRACTICAL III
Paper 14 : COMPUTATIONAL METHODS – FORTRAN / C

PROGRAMMING
All TWELVE experiments:
Determination of zeros of polynomials (Tables of Legendre, Laguerre, Hermite &

Chebyshev polynomials should be provided during the Practical examination)
Bisection method / Newton-Raphson method
1. Zeros of the Legendre Polynomials Pn(x) (or roots of the equation Pn(x) = 0 or nodes
of the Gauss-Legendre quadrature), 2  n  6, with Algorithm, Flow-chart,
FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
2. Zeros of the Laguerre Polynomials Ln(x) (or roots of the equation Ln(x) = 0 or nodes
of the Gauss-Laguerre quadrature), 2  n  6, with Algorithm, Flow-chart,
3. Zeros of the Hermite Polynomials Hn(x) (or roots of the equation Hn(x) = 0 or nodes
of the Gauss-Hermite quadrature), 2  n  6, with Algorithm, Flow-chart,
4. Zeros of the Chebyshev Polynomials Tn(x) (or roots of the equation Tn(x) = 0 or nodes
of the Gauss-Chebyshev quadrature), 2  n  6, with Algorithm, Flow-chart,
5. Lagrange interpolation with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN/C PROGRAM, and

output.
6. Newton forward interpolation with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C

PROGRAM, and output.
7. Newton backward interpolation with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C

8. Curve-fitting: Least-squares fitting with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C

318
9. Numerical integration by the trapezoidal rule, with Algorithm, Flow-chart,
10. Numerical integration by Simpson’s rule, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN /
C PROGRAM, and output.
11. Numerical solution of ordinary first-order differential equations by the Euler
method, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
12. Numerical solution of ordinary first-order differential equations by the Runge- Kutta
method, with Algorithm, Flow-chart, FORTRAN / C PROGRAM, and output.
Paper 15: EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE

(ELECTIVE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, THIRD SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
This elective will be offered by Chemistry or Mathematics or Other departments
Paper 16: CONDENSED MATTER PHYSICS

(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: Crystal Physics
Types of lattices - Miller indices – Symmetry elements and allowed rotations - Simple
crystal structures – Atomic Packing Factor- Crystal diffraction - Bragg's law – Scattered
Wave Amplitude - Reciprocal Lattice (sc, bcc, fcc) – Diffraction Conditions - Laue
equations - Brillouin zone - Structure factor - Atomic form factor - Inert gas crystals -
Cohesive energy of ionic crystals - Madelung constant - Types of crystal binding
(general ideas).
UNIT 2: Lattice Dynamics
Lattice with two atoms per primitive cell - First Brillouin zone - Group and phase
velocities - Quantization of lattice vibrations - Phonon momentum - Inelastic scattering
by phonons - Debye's theory of lattice heat capacity - Thermal Conductivity - Umkalapp
processes.
UNIT 3: Theory of Metals and Semiconductors
Free electron gas in three dimensions - Electronic heat capacity - Wiedemann-Franz law -
Band theory of metals and semiconductors - Bloch theorem - Kronig-Penney model -
Semiconductors - Intrinsic carrier concentration – Temperature Dependence - Mobility -
Impurity conductivity – Impurity states - Hall effect - Fermi surfaces and construction -
Experimental methods in Fermi surface studies - de Hass-van Alphen effect .
319
UNIT 4: Magnetism
Diamagnetism - Quantum theory of paramagnetism - Rare earth ion - Hund's rule -

Quenching of orbital angular momentum - Adiabatic demagnetization - Quantum theory
of ferromagnetism - Curie point - Exchange integral - Heisenberg's interpretation of
Weiss field - Ferromagnetic domains - Bloch wall - Spin waves - Quantization - Magnons
- Thermal excitation of magnons - Curie temperature and susceptibility of ferrimagnets -
Theory of antiferomagnetism - Neel temperature.
UNIT 5: Superconductivity
Experimental facts: Occurrence - Effect of magnetic fields - Meissner effect – Critical

field – Critical current - Entropy and heat capacity - Energy gap - Microwave and
infrared properties - Type I and II Superconductors.
Theoretical Explanation: Thermodynamics of super conducting transition - London

equation - Coherence length – Isotope effect - Cooper pairs - BCS Theory - Single
particle tunneling - Josephson tunneling - DC and AC Josephson effects - High
temperature Superconductors - SQUIDS.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. C. Kittel, 1996, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 7th Edition, Wiley, New York.
2. M. Ali Omar, 1974, Elementary Solid State Physics - Principles and Applications,
Addison - Wesley
3. H. P. Myers, 1998, Introductory Solid State Physics, 2nd Edition, Viva Book, New
Delhi.
1. N. W. Aschroft and N. D. Mermin, Solid State Physics, Rhinehart and Winton, New
York.
2. J. S. Blakemore, 1974 , Solid state Physics, 2nd Edition, W.B. Saunder, Philadelphia
3. A. J. Dekker, Solid State Physics, Macmillan India, New Delhi.
4. H. M. Rosenburg, 1993, The Solid State, 3rd Edition, Oxford University Press,
Oxford.
5. S. O. Pillai, 1997, Solid State Physics, New Age International, New Delhi.
6. S. O. Pillai, 1994, Problems and Solutions in Solid State Physics, New Age
International, New Delhi.
7. S. L. Altmann, Band Theory of Metals, Pergamon, Oxford.
8. J. M. Ziman, 1971, Principles of the Theory of Solids, Cambridge University Press,
London.
320
9. C. Ross-Innes and E. H. Rhoderick, 1976, Introduction to Superconductivity,
Pergamon, Oxford.
10. M. Tinkham, Introduction to Superconductivity, McGraw-Hill, New York.
11. J. P. Srivastava, 2001, Elements of Solid State Physics, Prentice-Hall of India, New
Delhi.
WEB SITES
1. http://www.physics.brocku.ca/courses/4p70/
2. http://www.physics.brocku.ca/courses/4p70/
3. http://web.mit.edu/afs/athena/course/6/6.732/www/texts.html
4. http://jas.eng.buffalo.edu/education/semicon/fermi/functionAndStates/functionAndSt
ates.html
5. http://www.physics.uiuc.edu/research/electronicstructure/389/389-cal.html
6. http://www.cmmp.ucl.ac.uk/%7Eaph/Teaching/3C25/index.html
Paper 17: PRACTICAL IV

ANY TWO PARTS OUT OF PARTS A, B and C.

Part – A – Microprocessor 8086 & Microcontroller 8051
(Compulsory for those who take the Elective : Microprocessor and Microcontroller)
External Examination: 4 hrs., Marks:30 (5 marks for record & 25 marks for experiment)
Any SIX Experiments:

Microprocessor 8086 programs using MASM:
1. Addition & subtraction
2. Multiplication & division
3. Multibyte addition & subtraction
4. Sorting in ascending & descending order
5. Generation of Fibonacci series
Microcontroller 8051 Experiments:

6. Addition & subtraction
7. Multiplication & division
8. Sorting in ascending & descending order
9. LED interface
10. Stepper motor interface
321
Part – B – Advanced Experiments I
(Compulsory for those who take the Elective : Materials Science )
1. GM counter – Characteristics, inverse square law, absorption coefficient.

2. GM counter - Feather’s analysis : Range of Beta rays.
3. Michelson Interferometer – Wavelength, separation of wavelengths, thickness of
mica sheet.
4. Hall effect.
5. Molecular spectra – ALO band .
6. Susceptibility by Quincke’s method.
7. Susceptibility by Guoy’s method.
8. Ultrasonics – Compressibility of a liquid.
9. Dielectric measurements in Microwave test bench.
10. B-H curve using CRO.
11. Miscibility measurement using Ultrasonic diffraction method.
12. Conductivity measurement using four probe method.
Book for Reference:
1. D. Chattopadhyay, P. C. Rakshit, and B. Saha, 2002, An Advanced Course in

Practical Physics, 6th EditionBooks and Allied, Kolkata.
Part - C – Advanced Experiments II

(Compulsory for those who take the Elective : Advanced Spectroscopy)
1. Iodine Absorption Spectrum.

2. Molecular spectra – CN bands.
3. UV – Visible Spectroscopy – verification of Beer-Lambert’s law and identification of
wavelength maxima – Extinction Coefficient.
4..UV- Visible Spectroscopy – Identification and measurement of a component in a
mixture.
5. Infrared and Raman Spectra and Vibrational band assignments of Organic, Inorganic
and
Crystalline materials.
6. Infrared and Raman Spectra – Normal coordinate analysis of XY2 bent symmetrical
and XY3 pyramidal molecules.
322
7. Spectroflurometer – Characerization of materials.
8. Experiments on Optical fibers.
9. Laser Experiments
(a) Diffraction at straight edge.
(b) Interference of laser beams – Llyods single mirror method.
(c) Interference using an optically plane glass plate and a laser
(d) Laser diffraction at a straight wire
(e) Laser diffraction at a circular aperture.
10. Study of vibrational spectra – IR and Raman studies of Organic compounds.

11. Characterization of Organic Compounds using UV- Visible spectrometer.
12. Microwave bench – Microwave measurements.
Paper 18: ELECTIVE II

One of the courses listed below
Paper 19: ELECTIVE III

One of the courses listed below
ELECTIVES
Two out of the following 3 courses will be offered as Elective II and Elective III
1. Microprocessor and Microcontroller

2. Materials Science
3. Advanced Spectroscopy
Paper 18/19: MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER

(ELECTIVE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4 CREDITS)
UNIT 1: 8086 Architecture
8086 Architecture – Min.Mode, Max.Mode – Software Model – Segmentation-

Segmentation of address – Pipe line Processing – Interrupts in 8086 – Interrupt types and
8086 response – NMI- Internal Interrupts – Interrupt Priorities.
323
UNIT 2: 8086 Programming
Addressing Modes – Instruction Set- Constructing Machine Code –

Instruction Templates for MOV Instruction– Data Transfer Instructions– Arithmetic,
Logic, Shift, rotate instructions- Flag Control instructions- Compare, Jump Instructions–
Loop and String instructions -Assembly programs- Block move, Sorting, Averaging,
Factorial – Code Conversion : Binary to BCD , BCD to Binary.
UNIT 3: Microcontroller 8051
Introduction – 8 & 16 Bit Microcontroller families –Flash series – Embedded

RISC Processor – 8051 Microcontroller Hardware – Internal registers – Addressing
modes – Assembly Language Programming – Arithmetic, Logic & Sorting operations.
UNIT 4: Interfacing I/O and Memory With 8051
Interfacing I/O Ports, External memory, Counters & Timers. Serial data
input/Output, Interrupts – Interfacing 8051 with ADC, DAC, LED display, Keyboard,
Sensors and Stepper motor.
UNIT 5 : Embedded Microcontroller
Embedded Microcontroller system – Types of embedded Operating system –
Micro Chip P1C16C6X / 7X family – features –Architecture – Memory organization –
Register file map – I/O Ports – Data & Flash program memory – Asynchronous serial
port –Applications in Communication and industrial Controls.
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Douglas V. Hall : - Microprocessors and Interfacing programming and Hardware

(Tata Mc Graw Hill) (Unit 1)
2. W.A. Triebel and Avatar Singh, The 8086 /8088 Microprocessors- Programming,
Software, Hardware and application, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. (Unit 2)
3. Kenneth J. Ayala – The 8051 Micro Controller Architecture, Programming and
Applications. 3rd Edition , Penram International, (Unit 3)
4. John B. Peatman, 2004, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, 7th Indian reprint,
Pearson Education. (Unit 4 & 5)
324
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. B. Brey, 1995, Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186,80286,80486,80486,

Architecture, Programming and Interfacing
2. Yu – Cheng and Glenn A. Gibson, The 8086 / 8088 family Architecture,
Programming and Design, Prentice-Hall of India.
3. Muhammed Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillespie Mazidi, 2004, The 8051
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, Fourth Indian Reprint, Pearson Education.
4. Raj Kamal, 2002, Introduction to Embedded Systems, TMS
5. V. Vijayendran, 2002, Fundamentals of Microprocessor –8086- Architecture,
Programming (MASM) and interfacing, Viswanathan, Chennai.
Paper 18/19: MATERIALS SCIENCE

UNIT 1: Ceramics and Composites:
Structural features – production of ceramics – forming and post forming process –

mechanical properties – commercial ceramic system : Si-Al system technical ceramics –
Zr and Si alloys – cement and concrete – composite materials – continuous and
discontinuous fibre composites.
UNIT 2: Polymers:
Classification of polymers – structural features – mechanism – thermoplastics – rubber

and elastomers – physical, chemical and mechanical properties – cellular plastics – liquid
crystal polymers.
UNIT 3 : Dielectrics:
Electrical polarisation – mechanism of polarization – optical, molecular and interfacial

polarizability – classification of dielectric materials – piezoelectric, pyroelectric and
ferroelectric materials – temperature and frequency effects on dielectric materials –
applications of these materials.
UNIT 4: Electronic materials:
Purification of electronic materials – single crystal growth – pulling method – wafer

manufacture – oxidation – photolithography – doping technique – epitaxial growth –
metallization – circuits and process simulation and integration – junction formation –
junction lasers – contact formation.
325
UNIT 5: Magnetic materials:
Classification of magnetism – origin and size of domain structure – hard magnetic

materials – permanent magnetic alloys – magnetic steels and Al-Ni / Al-Ni-Co alloys –
fine particle alloys – rare earth cobalt alloys – applications of permanent magnets – soft
magnets – Si-Fe and nanocrystaline magnetic metals – microwave ferrites and garnets –
magnetic bubbles.
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. V. Raghavan, 2003, Materials Science and Engineering 4th Edition, (Printice-Hall

India, New Delhi,) (for units 2, 3, 4 and 5)
2. C.M. Srivastava and C. Srinivasan, 1987, Science of engineering materials, New
Age Intl, New Delhi. (for units 1, 3 and 5)
3. J. C. Anderson, K.D. Leaver, R.D. Rawlings and J.M. Alexander, 1990, Material
Science, 4th Edition, Chapman & Hall. London.
4. M. Arumugam, 2002, Materials Science, 3rd Edition, Anuradha Agencies.
BOOKS FOR REFERNCE:
1. G.K. Narula, K.S.Narula and V.K.Gupta, 1988, Materials Science, Tata McGraw-
Hill.
2. Lawrence H. Van Vlack, 1998, Elements of Materials Science and Engineering, 6th
Edition, second ISE reprint, Addison-Wesley
3. H. Iabch and H.Luth, 2001, Solid state Physics – An introduction to principles of
Material Science, 2nd Edition, Springer
Paper 18/19: ADVANCED SPECTROSCOPY

UNIT 1: Nuclear Quadruple Resonance

Hamiltonian for NQR – Energy levels of quadruple transitions for half integral and
integral spins – Design of NQR spectrometer – Principles of super regenerative oscillator
– CW Oscillator – Pulsed RF detection – Application of NQR to chemical bonding and
molecular structure.
UNIT 2: Mossbauer Spectroscopy

Principles of Mossbauer effects – Schematic arrangements of a Mossbaur spectrometer –
Chemical Isomer shift – Magnetic hyperfine interactions – Electric quadropole
interactions – Application to molecular and electronic structures.
326
UNIT 3: Surface Enhanced Raman Scattering(SERS)
Surfaces for SERS study – Enhancement mechanism – Surface selection rules – SERS
microprobe – SERS study of bio molecules – SERS in medicine.
UNIT 4: Surface Spectroscopies
Electron energy loss spectroscopy (EELS) – Reflectance – Absorbance – IR spectroscopy

(RAIRS) – Inelastic helium scattering – Photo electron spectroscopy (PES) – X ray photo
electron spectroscopy (XPES) – Ultraviolet PES – Auger electron spectroscopy (AES).
UNIT 5: Nonlinear Spectroscopic Phenomena
Nonlinear Raman phenomena – Hyper Raman effect – Experimental Techneque –

Stimulated Raman scattering – Inverse Raman effect – Coherent antistokes Raman
scattering – Photo acoustic Raman scattering – Multiphoton spectroscopy.
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. C. N. Banwell and E. M. McCash, 1994, Fundamentals of Molecular

Spectroscopy, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, New Delhi.
2. G. Aruldhas, 2001, Molecular structure and spectroscopy, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi
3. P. S. Sindhu, 1990, Molecular Spectoscopy, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, New Delhi.
1. G. W. King, 1964, Spectroscopy and molecular structure, Hoit Rinchart and

Winsten Inc, London
2. T. A. Carlson, 1975, Photo electron and Auger spectroscopy, Plenum Press
3. J . Loder, 1970, Basic Laser Raman spectroscopy, Hezdan and Son Ltd.
4. T. P. Das and E. L. Hehn, 1958, NQR Spectroscopy, Academic Press
5. Raymond Chang, 1980, Basic Principles of Spectroscopy Mc Graw-Hill Kogakusha
327
Paper 20: PROJECT
(CORE COURSE, SECOND YEAR, FOURTH SEMESTER, 4
CREDITS)
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVES (EDP)

To be offered to M Sc students in Chemistry, Mathematics, etc.,
1. BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS

2. INTELLIGENT INSTRUMENTATION
3. BASIC MATERIAL SCIENCE
4. MATHEMATICAL METHODS
5. CLASSICAL DYNAMICS
Each Course carries 4 Credits.
EDP - BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS
UNIT 1: Wave– Particle Duality
Particle properties of waves : PhotoelectRic effect and Compton effect - Wave

properties of matter: De Broglie waves - Phase and group velocity - Experimental
evidences for matter waves: Davisson and Germer experiment and G.P Thomson’s
experiment - Electron microscope – Heisenberg uncertainty principle and its
consequences.
UNIT 2: Schrodinger Equation
Basic postulates of quantum mechanics – Time independent and time dependent

Schrodinger equation - Properties of wave function - Probability interpretation of wave
function - Probability current – Normalisation of wave functions and conservation of
norm - Stationary states.
UNIT 3: Operator Formalism
Linear operators - Operators associated with different observables - Selfadjoint

(Hermitean) operators – Expectation value - Eigenvalues and eigenfunctions – Reality
of eigenvalues and orthogonality of eigenfunctions of a Hermitian operator – Examples -
Commutativity and compatibility.
328
UNIT 4: Angular Momentum in Quantum Mechanics
Orbital angular momentum operators and their commutation relations – Separation of

three dimensional Schrodinger equation into radial and angular parts - Solution of the
angular part and Spherical harmonics as the eigenfunctions of L2 and L z (Outline of
the steps only) - Elementary ideas of Spin angular momentum of an electron- – Pauli
matrices.
UNIT 5: Solutions of Schrodinger Equation
Free particle solution – Particle in a box - Potential well of finite depth (one dimension)
- Linear harmonic oscillator (one dimension) - Rigid rotator - Hydrogen atom.(only
outline of steps).
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. P. M. Mathews and S.Venkatesan, 1976, A Text book of quantum mechanics, Tata

Mc-Graw –Hill, New Delhi.
2. R. Murugeshan, 2001, Modern physics, 8th Edition, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi.
3. A. Beiser, 1997, Concepts of modern physics, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw –Hill,
New Delhi.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Pauling and Wilson, Introduction to Quantum mechanics, Edition, McGraw- Hill,

Place.
2. A. Ghatak, 2002, Basic Quantum Mechanics, Macmillan India, New Delhi.
EDP – INTELLIGENT INSTRUMENTATION
UNIT 1 – Transducers and Input Elements

Classification of Transducers – Selecting a transducer – Strain gauges – Gauge
factor – Metallic sensing elements – Gauge configuration – Displacement Transducers –
Capacitive, inductive and LVDT, Piezo electric and Potentiometric transducers –
Thermocouples and thermistor – Photosensitive devices.
UNIT 2 - Bridge Measurements
Wheatstone Bridge – Kelvin Bridge – AC Bridges – Maxwell Bridge – Hay
Bridge – Schering Bridge – Wien Bridge – Wagner ground connection.
329
UNIT 3 - Analog and Digital Principles
Operational amplifier ideal characteristics – Closed loop properties – Virtual
ground concept - Three modes of operation – Difference amplifier – Transducer bridge
Type instrumentation amplifier- Digital Principles – Logic gates – Flip Flops – Counters
– Registers – Digital to Analog conversion – Weighted resistor type DAC – Analog to
digital conversion concept – Flash type , Counter type and dual slope ADC – Successive
approximation technique ADC .
UNIT 4 – Instrumentation System
Analog data acquisition system – Digital data acquisition system – Interfacing
Transducers to Electronic and measuring systems – Multiplexing – Digital to analog
multiplexing – Analog to digital multiplexing.
UNIT 5 – Microprocessor Based Instrumentation

8085 Architecture – Addressing modes – Basic Instructions – Data Transfer and
I/O – Interrupts and Interrupt circuit – I/O operation – Interfacing keyboard, LED
display, ADC , DAC and stepper motor (Functional Block diagrams and FLOW chart
only) – Microprocessor based data acquisition system – Temperature controller, Lift
operation, Traffic lights control.
BOOKS FOR STUDY AND REFERENCE

1. Albert D. Helfrich and William D. Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and
Measurement Techniques, 5th Edition, - Prentice Hall of India
2. Milman and Halkias – Integrated Electronics,
3. Malvino Leech – Digital Principles,
4. R. S. Gaonkar, 1997, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications
with 8085, 3rd Edition, Penram International Publishing, Mumbai
EDP – BASIC MATERIAL SCIENCE

Unit 1 – Introduction:
Classification of materials – materials for engineering applications – different types of
chemical bonds – crystal structure s of important engineering materials – crystal
imperfection and types of imperfections
Unit 2 – Phase diagram:
Systems – components – phases – solid solutions – Hume-Rothery’s rule and Gibbs’
Phase rule – Lever rule – construction of phase diagrams – eutectic, peritectic, eutectoid
and peritectoid systems
Unit 3 – Phase transformation:
Mechanism – nucleation and growth – applications of phase transformations – cooling,
casting, solidification and heat treatment – TTT diagram – martensitic transformation
330
Unit 4 – Electron theory of metals:
Classical free electron theory – density of states – electron energies in a metal – energy
band and Fermi energy in solids – distinction between metals, insulators and
semiconductors on the basis of Fermi level – effect of temperature on Fermi level
Unit 5 – Electrical and magnetic properties of materials:
Electrical resistivity and conductivity of meterials – dielectric materials – electrical
polarization – piezo, pyro and ferroelectric materials – electrostriction – classification of
magnetic materials – domain structure – magnetostriction – soft and hard magnetic
materials
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. V. Raghavan, 2003, Materials Science and Engineering, 4th Edition, Printice-Hall

India, New Delhi (for units 2, 3, 4 and 5)
2. G.K. Narula, K.S. Narula and V.K. Gupta, 1988, Materials Science, Tata McGraw-
Hill
3. M. Arumugam, 2002, Materials Science, 3rd revised Edition, Anuradha Agencies
1. Lawrence H. Van Vlack, 1998, Elements of Materials Science and Engineering, 6th
Edition, second ISE reprint, Addison-Wesley
2. H. Iabch and H.Luth, 2001, Solid state Physics – An introduction to principles of
Material Science, 2nd Edition, Springer
EDP – MATHEMATICAL METHODS
UNIT 1: Matrix theory

Types of matrices – symmetric, anti-symmetric, Hermitian and unitary matrices –
Caley-Hamilton theorem – proof – applications to find the inverse of a matrix – eigen
values and eigen vectors – properties of eigen values and eigen vectors of hermitian and
unitary matrices
UNIT 2: Tensor analysis

Definitions of covariant, contravariant and mixed tensors – symmetric and anti-
symmetric tensors – higher order tensors – piezo-electric and moment of inertia tensors
UNIT 3: Special functions

Bessel’s differential equation – series solution- generating function – recurrence
relations – Hermite differential equation – series solution – Rodrigue’s formula –
generating function – recurrence relations – orthogonal property of Hermite polynomials
– Legendre differential equation – series solution- generating function – recurrence
relations
331
UNIT 4: Integral transforms
Fourier transforms – convolution theorem – properties of Fourier transforms –

simple applications – Laplace transforms – convolution theorem – properties of Laplace
transforms – simple applications
UNIT 5: Numerical methods
Solution of simultaneous linear system of equations – Gauss elimination method –

matrix inversion – Gauss-Jordan method – Eigen values and eigen vectors of matrices –
power and Jacobi methods
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. Schaum’s outline series, Matrices, McGraw Hill, New York.

2. A.W. Joshi, 1995, Matrices and tensor in Physics, New age Intl., New Delhi.
3. Schaum’s outline series, Vectors and introduction to tensors, New York.
4. M.K. Venkatraman, Higher Engineering Mathematics, National Publsh.
Co.,Chennai.
5. P.K. Chattopadhyayay, 1990, Mathematical Physics, New Age Intl., New Delhi
6. M.K. Venkatraman, Numerical methods, National Publsh. Co.,Chennai
7. R.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and M.K. Jain, 2002, Numerical methods for scientific
and engineering computation, New Age Intl., New Delhi.
8. V. Rajaraman, 1993, Computer oriented numerical methods, PHI, New Delhi.
1. G. Arfken and H.J. Weber, 2001, Mathematical methods for engineers and
Scientists, Hartcourt, India.
2. S. Sokolonikoff, Mathematical methods for Scientists and Engineers, McGraw Hill,
New York.
3. Sathya Prakash, 1985, Mathematical Physics, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
4. S.S. Kuo, 1996, Computer oriented numerical methods, Addison-Wesley, London.
EDP- CLASSICAL DYNAMICS
UNIT 1: Principles of classical mechanics
Mechanics of a single particle – mechanics of a system of particles – conservation laws

for system of particles – constraints – holonomic & non-holonomic constraints –
generalized coordinates – configuration space – transformation equations – principle of
virtual work
332
UNIT 2: Lagrangian formulation
D’Alembert’s principle – Lagrangian equations of motion for conservative systems –
applications: (i) simple pendulum (ii) Atwood’s machine (iii) projectile motion
UNIT 3: Hamiltonian formulation

Phase space – cyclic coordinates – conjugate momentum – Hamiltonian function –
Hamilton’s canonical equations of motion – applications: (i) simple pendulum (ii) one
dimensional simple harmonic oscillator (iii) motion of particle in a central force field
UNIT 4: Small oscillations

Formulation of the problem – transformation to normal coordinates – frequencies of
normal modes – linear triatomic molecule
UNIT 5: Special theory of relativity

Inertial and non-inertial frames – Lorentz transformation equations – length contraction
and time dilation – relativistic addition of velocities – Einstein’s mass-energy relation –
Minkowski’s space – four vectors – position, velocity, momentum, acceleration and force
in for vector notation and their transformations
BOOKS FOR STUDY:
1. H. Goldstein, 2002, Classical Mechanics, 3 rd Edition., Pearson edu.

2. Upadhyaya, Classical Mechanics, Himalaya Publshing. Co. New Delhi.
3. R. Resnick, 1968, Introduction to Special Theory of Relativity, Wiley Eastern, New
Delhi.
1. K. R. Symon, 1971, Mechanics, Addison Wesley, London.

2. S. N. Biswas, 1999, Classical Mechanics, Books & Allied, Kolkatta.
3. Gupta and Kumar, Classical Mechanics, Kedar Nath.
4. T.W.B. Kibble, Classical Mechanics, ELBS.
5. Greenwood, Classical Dynamics, PHI, New Delhi.
333
20. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN VISUAL COMMUNICATION
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER III
Core 9 - Visual Research Methods

Unit 1: Research Process, Design, Basic Terminology, Applications
Unit 2: Content Analysis of Visual Images-Measurement and Coding
Unit 3: Social Semiotic Approach to Visual Analysis-Meaning Categorization
Unit 4: Audience Survey, Reception Analysis
Unit 5: Researching for Story
Core 10 - Special Visual Effects (Practical)(Using Tools like Combustion)

Unit 1: Compositing-principles and pipelines, integration with compositing software
Unit 2: Paint, Particles Creating simple composites Matte Paintings, Animatronics, Sets,
etc
Unit 3: Pre-Production and Post-Production, Keying and Color correction
Unit 4: VFX and its Constitutes, Techniques of Compositing-Exercises
Unit 5: Compositing Techniques, Finishing Tools and Techniques
Core 11 - Video Editing (Practical)(FCP, AVID or Adobe Premier)

Unit 1: Basic Editing Principles &Techniques
Unit 2: Clipping, cutting, moving video clips & images, Fine tuning,
Unit 3: Transitions and Effects—
Unit 4: Non-linear Editing Software Interface and Functionalities
Unit 5: Exercises and Practice- Editing Problems/Solutions
Elective 5 - Entertainment & Society

Unit 1: Entertainment Definition-Characteristics of Mass Mediated Entertainment
Unit 2: Pleasure Principle, Narrative Theory, Dramatic Theory
Unit 3: Understanding Entertainment Audiences-
Unit 4: Media Effects (Cultivation/Cultural Effects), News as Entertainment
Unit 5: Business of Entertainment—Markets, Trends, Regulations, Interactive Media
Elective 6 - Film Analysis & Criticisms

Unit 1: Film as Art and Mass Communication
Unit 2: Early Film Theories Structuralisms Expressionism
Unit 3: Cinema Vetier Realism, Neo-Realism, Critical Marxist Approaches
Unit 4: Post-modern approaches, Feminist Approaches
Unit 5: Contemporary Cinema, Digital Cinema & Aesthetics
334
SEMESTER IV
Core 12 - Computer Graphics & Animation III (Practical) (Advanced

Techniques/Portfolio/Project)
Unit 1: Finishing Tools, Special Effects, Scripting
Unit 2: Advanced Tips and Techniques with Maya/3D Max/Combustion
Unit 3: Basic Animated Character, Movements shots (walk, run etc,) Logos/Titles
Unit 4: TV Commercial/Promotions, Public Service Announcements
Unit 5: Short Animation Film, Information-Educational Programs
Core 13 -Sound Recording & Editing (Practical)(Sound Forge, Pro-Tools )

Unit 1: Sound Recording—Basic Tools and Techniques for Animation
Unit 2: Voice-Over-Dialogue-Non Voice-Music Track
Unit 3: Sound Editing- -Dialogue and Lip syc.
Unit 4: Editing Software Interface and Functionalities
Unit 5: Exercises and Practice, Sound Effects for Animation
Core 14 -Project Management

Unit 1: Market-Industries, Applications (Movies, Television, Web, Education)
Unit 2: Project Management-Stages and Process-(Progress Charts etc.)
Unit 3: Team/ Talent Management –Roles/Responsibilities, Work Flow-Piping
Unit 4: Scheduling, Time Management, Delivery, Distribution, Contingency Plan
Unit 5: Project Finance and Budgeting, Licensing, Copyright, Contracts Ownership
Core 15 - Research Project Work
Core 16 - Specialization (Project)

Advanced Techniques in 3D Max and Maya
Audio and Video Editing Software
Advanced Effects/Finishing Tools
Elective 7 - Gaming & Game Design

Unit 1: Gaming History, Models of Games
Unit 2: Social and Cultural implications of games
Unit 3: Game design-Structure-Storytelling- Interactivity-Difficulty Level
Unit 4: Techniques, Stages and Process of Design- Game Scripting/Writing
Unit 5: Mobile Gaming, On-line Gamig-Social Games
335
21. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN ZOOLOGY
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER - III
Core - DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY
4 Credits
UNIT I: GAMETOGENESIS
History of Embryology - Ovists Vs Animalculist Preformation and Epigenesis -
Descriptive Embryology Experimental Embryology - Molecular Embryology -
gametogenesis: Growth of oocytes - Synthesis and storage of macromolecules in the
oocytes - Nuclear activities during oocytes growth. Hormonal and nervous control of
ovulation.
UNIT II: FERTILIZATION
Fertilization: polyspermy - Androgenesis - Egg activation - Electron microscopic
and biochemical aspects - Fertility of sperm and its in vitro fertilization - artificial
fertilization Chemodiffertiation.
UNIT III: EARLY DEVELOPMENT
Gastrulation movements: role of egg cortex - Cell surface in morphogenesis - Cell
adhesion and cell communication. Chemotatic induced aggregation - Aggregation in
sponges. Early development stage of fish. Experimental analysis in the early development
of Echinoderms, Amphibians and Birds.
UNIT IV: ORGANOGENESIS
Organogenesis - formation of organ. rudiments: Differentiation and development
of limb, thymus, spleen, salivary glands, heart and kidney in a mammal. Organiser:
Inductive tissue interactions in developments.
UNIT V: GENES AND DEVELOPMENT
Nuclear transplantation. Cellular differentiation and protein synthesis. Differential

activation. Developmental genetic defects. Role of cell death in development.
Teratogenesis - Ageing, transgenics.
336
UNIT VI: REGUALTION OF DEVELOPMENT
Metamorphosis - morphological and biochemical changes during amphibian
metamorphosis - Hormonal control of metamorphosis in amphibians - Neuro -
endocrine control of insect metamorphosis - Biochemistry and mechanism of action
of hormones during metamorphosis - Tissue reactivity in amphibian metamorphosis -
Neotany. Malignant growth - Neoplasia - Teratoma - Gene activation in neoplasia.
UNIT VII: INVERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY
Early development - larval metamorphosis and organogenesis in
Nemathelminthes, Platyhelminthes, Anneilds, Crustaceans and Molluscs.
REFERENCE/BOOKS
1. Balinsky, B. L., 1981. An introduction to embryology, Saunders, Philadelphia.
2. Karp. G. and Berrill, N.J. 1981. Development, McGraw Hill, New York.
3. Eber, J.D., 1970. Interacting system in Development, Holt Rein chart and
Winston, Inc. New York and Chicago.
4. Grant, P., 1978. Biology of developing systems, Hoit Rein chart and Winston,
Inc. New York and Chicago.
5. Saunders, J. W. 1982. Developmental Biology. Macmillan Co., London.
6. Brachet J. 1974. Introduction to Molecular Embryology. The English Universities
Press, London.
7. Nagabhushanam. R., and R. Sarojini. Invertebrate Embryology. Oxford and IBA
Publishing Co.
8. Gilbert, Scott. F. 1985. Developmental Biology. Sinauer Association, Inc.,
Publishers.
9. Tyagi, Rajiv and AN. Shukla, 2002. Development of fishes, Jaya publishing
house, New Delhi.
10. Raven, P. An outline of developmental physiology, Pergamon Press, New York.
11. Browder, W. 1984. Developmental Biology, Saunders College Publishing,
Rinchert and Winston.
337
Core - IMMUNOLOGY
4 Credits
UNIT I: BASIC OF IMMUNOLOGY
Introduction - Historical perspective. Innate immunity (Non-specific), Adaptive
immunity (Specific) - Humoral immunity, Cell Mediated immunity.
UNIT II: CELLS AND ORGANS OF IMMUNE SYSTEM
Cells of Immune system - Haematopoiesis, Stem cells, Lymphoid cells,
Mononuclear cells, Granulocytes, Mast cells, Dendritic cells. Organs of Immune system -
Primary lymphoid organs and Secondary lymphoid organs.
UNIT III: ANTIGENS
Antigens - Immunogenicity Vs Antigenicity, Haptens. Factors influencing
Immunogenicity. Epitopes - B cell epitope and T cell epitope.
UNIT IV: ANTIBODIES
Immunoglobulin - structure, isotypes and biological function. Immune response &
theories. Antigenic determinant on immunoglobulin - isotype, allotype and idiotype. B-
cell receptor, immunoglobulin superfamily, Monoclonal antibody, Polyclonal antibody.
Organization and expression of immunoglobulin genes. Synthesis of immunoglobulin and
disorders of immunoglobulin synthesis.
Antigen - Antibody interaction and immunodiagnostics. MHC - Restriction,
Organization and inheritance of MHC, Antigen processing and presentation.
UNIT V: MEDIATORS OF IMMUNE SYSTEM
T cell receptor, cytokine, adhesion molecules. Complement, Hypersensitive
reaction, Transplantation immunology.
UNIT VI: VACCINES
Vaccines - Principles and types of Vaccines - DNA Recombinant Vaccine, Serum
therapy.
338
REFERENCE/BOOKS
1. Roitt, I.M. 1994. Essential Immunology. Blackwell Scientific, Oxform ISBN.
2. Richard, A Golds, Thomas J. Kindt & Barbara A. Osborne. 2000. Kuby -
Immunology. Freeman and Co. New York.
3. D.P. Stites, A.I. Terr and T.G. Parsloio. 1997. Medical Immunology. Prentice
Hall, New Jersey.
4. Janeway, C.A. and P. Travers. 1997. Immunobiology. Current Biology Ltd.
London.
5. Paul, W.E. 1989. Fundamentals of Immunology. Raver Press. New York.
6. Srivastava, R., Ram, B.P. and Ty!e, P. 1991. Molecular mechanism of Immune
regulation. VCH Publishers, New York.
Core
LAB COURSE III: DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY
4 Credits
1. Different stages in developmental- Crustaceans (Crab/Prawn)-Insects.
(Drosophila) - Frog.
2. Demonstration: Experimental biology -Wound healing and cell aggregation in
frog embryo.
3. Developmental of chick stage- observation of living chick embryo and vital
staining demonstration only - slide showing C.S. of heart, kidney, lens and limb to
demonstrated induction and organization.
4. Slides showing the uterus cycles in mammals (Rat).
5. Development of invertebrates- Eggs- cleavage- Gastrula- Study of larva forms
Nauplius, Zoea, Veliger, Bipinnaria, Leptocephalus.
6. Developmental stage of fish.
7. Lymphoid organ anatomy - Rat Histology of lymphoid organs - Thymus, Spleen,
Bone morrow, Lymph node.
8. Haernagglutination - Qualitative analysis "ABO" blood group. .
9. Haemagglutination -Quantitative analysis - haemagglutination titration.
10. Preparation of Antigen; RBC- Demonstration.
339
11. Immunoelectrphoresis - Demonstration.
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - II
MICROBIOLOGY
3 Credits
UNIT I:
History and scope of Microbiology - Milestones in Microbiology.
UNIT II:
Anatomy of Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Morphology - Ultra structure of

bacteria, fungi and Viruses - Classification of microbes - Phenotypic and taxonomic
characters - Principles of classification - taxonomic structure - DNA analysis, Ribosomal
RNA analysis - Numerical Taxonomy - Molecular taxonomy - Methods of microbial
identification.
UNIT III:
Sterilization: Principles - dry heat, moist heat, filtration, Tantilization,
pasteurization, Radiation - disinfection - Antimicrobial chemotherapy - Antibiotics -
source - Classification -Mode of action Antimicrobial resistance - Tests for sensitivity to
antimicrobial agents and its quality control.
UNIT IV:
Culture techniques - media preparation - preservation of cultures - Aerobic and
anaerobic culture techniques- Wet mount - Hanging drop - staining methods - dyes
simple - differential and special staining techniques - acid fast stain, spore stain, capsule
stain, staining for pure and mixed cultures
UNIT V:
Environmental microbiology - Microbial ecology, role of microorganisms in the
productivity of ecosystems - Interactions between microorganisms, and with plants and
animals - microbes and biodegradation - microbes in waste treatment. Microbiology of
soil, water and air.
UNIT VI:
340
Medical microbiology - Pathogenic microbes of bacteria, viral, fungal and
protozoan diseases - cure, control and prevention.
UNIT VII:
Industrial microbiology - Industrial uses of microbes - fermentation products -
bioconversions - bioremediation. Products of industrial microbiology - Penicillin, fuels,
ethanol, vinegar, vitamin B12, citric acid, glutamic acid, protease etc. Food and Dairy
microbiology - Microbes in food - Role of microbes in food production; Dairy and non-
dairy products - fermented foods and alcoholic beverages. Pharmaceuticals (antibodies,
vaccines etc,).
UNIT VIII:
Biotechnology potentials of microbes - production of food (single cell protein),
Biofertilizers (BOA), Biopesticides (Bacillus. thrungiensis), Biopolymers, biosurfactants
etc., Use of microbes in Biotechnology - Streptomyces, Yeasts(Saccharomyces,
Hansenela), Spirulina and penciIIium etc., Disposals of microbes and biosafety.
REFERENCE / BOOKS
1. Pelczer MJ, Chao ECS, King NR, Mc Graw-HilI, Jnc. Ny. (1979) Microbiology
Concepts and AlpIications,
2. Haley JO, Klecin DA. Microbiology, Prescott Lm., WCB Publishers, Sydney.
3. Davis BD, Dulbecco R, Eisen HN, Gihsbercs HS, Harper & Row. (1990)
Microbiology, 4th edn. Publishers, Singapore.
4. Principle of Microbiology, (1997). RM atlas, WBC Pubkishers.
5. Raymond Rodriguez and David T. Denhard. (1988) Vectors - A survey of
Molecular cloning vectors and their uses.
6. Winnacker, E.L.(1987) From Genes of clones - Introduction to Gene Technology,
VCH publishers, New York.
341
SEMESTER IV
Core - BIOTECHNOLOGY
4 credits
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Biotechnology - Definition - Scope and importance - Historical background -
Global impact of biotechnology - Biotechnology in India - Achievements of
biotechnology - Prevention and misuse of biotechnology - Bioinformatics.
UNIT II: RECOMBINATION DNA TECHNOLOGY
Gene cloning - the basic steps - various types of restriction enzymes - ligases
linker and adaptors - DNA - transformation - Selection of recombination - Hybridization
techniques - chemical synthesis of oligonucleotides.
Gene probe - molecular finger printing (DNA finger printing) - RFLP - the PCR
techniques - Genomic library - Blotting techniques - Southern blotting - Northern &
Western blotting. cDNA - Changing genes - Site directed mutagenesis and protein
engineering.
UNIT III: GENE CLONING VECTORS
Plasmid biology - cloning vector based on E. coli PBR 322 and bacteriophage.
Cloning vector for yeast. Cloning vector for Agro bacterium tumefaciens. Cloning vector
for mammalian cells - Simian Virus 40 - Gene transfer technology - Particle
bombardment - Micro injection techniques.
UNIT IV: PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
Plants tissue culture techniques - cell fusion - protoplast fusion - gene for disease
resistance - salt tolerant varities. Transgenic plants- Nitrogen fixation - Transfer of Nif
genes to microorganisms - Biofertilizers - Cryobiology. Transposons and its applications.
UNIT V: ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
Cell culture - Organ culture - Whole embryo culture - Embryo transfer - In vitro
fertilization (IVF) technology - Dolly - In vitro fertilization and embryo transfer in
human. Transgenic animal. Human genome project- Human gene therapy.
UNIT VI: MICROBIAL & ENVIRONMENTAL BIOTECHNOLOGY
342
Fermentation - bioreactor - microbial products - primary & secondary metabolites
antibiotics - enzymes technology - single cell protein (SCP).
Bioremediation - bioremediation of hydrocarbons - Industrial wastes - Heavy
metals - Xenobiotics - bioleaching- biomining.
UNIT VII: IMMUNOTECHNOLOGY
Hybridoma technology - Monoclonal antibodies - Application in biotechnology.
Genetically modified organism (GMO's) - GM foods. Biotechnology & biosafety -
bioethics IPR - IPP - WIPO.
REFERENCE / BOOKS:
1. Purohit, S. S. and S. K. Mathur, (1999), Biotechnology: Fundamentals and
Application. Agro Botanica, New Delhi. ISBN. 81-87167-IO-b.
2. Alan scragg, (1999), Environmental Biotechnology; Long Mann Publication.
ISBN. 0582 276829.
3. R. C. Dubey, (2001). A text book of biotechnology, Rajendra Printer. New Delhi.
ISBN. 81-219-09 16-3.
4. T.A Brown Gene cloning and DNA analysis. (1996) Blackwell science, Osney
Mead, Oxford, OX20EL.
5. Sathyanarayane,U. (2006) Biotechnology Books and Allied (p) Ltd, India.
Core - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

4 Credits
1. Concepts of Scientific research - Scope - Null Hypothesis.
2. a) Literature collection - Primary, Secondary and tertiary sources Bibliography.
b) Use of internet facilities in literature collection - data bases.
c) Reviews monographs - Text books - Reference / Books – Scientific journals -

News letters - etc.,
3. Selection of Animals models - Maintenance - CPCSEA regulations.
4. Analytical tools: Microscopes (Light, Phase, Fluorescence), pH meter, 02 Electrodes,
Photometers: Colorimeter, Spectrophotometer (Single, Double beam and double array
Spectrophotometeric.
343
5. Chromatographic techniques - Paper - Gel matrices (gel filtration, lon Exchange,
affinity and HPLC) - Thin layer chromatography.
6. Enzyme kinetics - Lines weaver Burke plot - Vmax & Km determinations.
7. Histology & Histochemical Methods (Proteins, carbohydrates and lipids) Micrometry
and photomicrography.
8. Population Estimation - concepts Density - (Soil Fauna, aquatic fauna or terrestrial
fauna).
9. Presentation of Data- Preparation and Manuscript (Thesis & Publications)
Core
LAB COURSE IV: BIOTECHNOLOGY & RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
4 Credits
Visit to Biotechnology Laboratory to observe the demonstration of
1. Tissue culture.
2. Titration and preparation of virulent phage.
3. Isolation of DNA from the plasmids.
4. Restriction enzymes digestion of DNA.
5. DNA electrophorosis in Agarose gel.
Necessary book may be referred to learn the techniques and to be recorded in the
Record Note books. Observation of photographs of different instrument used in
Biotechnology, their principals and application.
6. Histological and Histochemical methods.
7. Electrophoresis.
8. Chromatography-Paper.
ELECTIVE I: FISHERY BIOLOGY

3 Credits
344
UNIT I: BIONOMICS AND CLASSIFICATION
Study of habit, food, feeding adaptations, growth, reproduction behaviour,
fecundity and spawning of Indian major carps, three live fishes, three exotic fishes and
six economically important marine fishes.
Classification of the above fishes as in Day’s volumes, or in Munro’s volume or
in FAO Publications.
UNIT II: REPRODUCTION BIOLOGY
Role of hormones in reproduction - maturity stages - morphological and
histological observation of gonads – Cryopreservation.
UNIT III: GROWTH STUDY
Age determination - length-weight relationship - factors influencing growth
-condition factor - tagging methods.
UNIT IV: FISH GENETICS AND IMMUNOLOGY
Sex determination in fish – monosex production - hormonal and chromosomal
methods - hybridization techniques in aquaculture androgenesis and Gynogenesis fish
immune system.
UNIT V: FISH AND PUBLIC HEALTH
Diseases caused by fishes in man - prevention. Uses of fishes as biological control
of diseases in man. Fish as food for human health.
UNIT VI: CAPTURE FISHERY OF INDIA
Fishery zones of India and the type of fishery in these zones. At least six types of
economically important marine pelagic, fishes to be studied with regards their fishery and
the methods of capture.
Reservoir fishery.
Preservation and processing. By-products.
REFERENCE/BOOKS:
1. Baluyut, E. A. (1989). Aquaculture systems and Practices. A selected review
345
2. Chondar, A (1970). Handbook of breeding of Indian major carps by pituitary
harm one injection. Agra Satisdh Book Enterprise.
3. Das M. C. and Patnaik, P. N. (1994). Brackish water culture. Palani paramount

Publications, Palani, T. N.
4. Day, F (1958). Fishes of Indiaa , Vol. I and Vol. II. William Sawson and Sons
Ltd., Londan.
5. Jhingran, C. G. (1981). Fish and Fisheries of India. Hindustan Publilcating Co.,

India.
6. Maheswari. K. (1983) Common fish disease and their control. Institute of

FIOsheries Education, Powarkads( M. P.)
ELECTIVE II: ENTOMOLOGY

3 Credits
UNIT I:
Biology of an insect with special reference to the following: Nutrition,
Development, Reproduction and Endocrinology.
UNIT II:
Insects and their interrelationships with environments (interspecific and
intraspecific).
UNIT III:
Insects as pollinators, predators, parasitoids, scavengers, weedkillers, etc.,
UNIT IV:
Biology of honeybees, lac insects and their management.
UNIT V:
Prospects of sericulture, Biology of silkworm (Nutrition, Genetics,
Endocrinology, Reproduction, Pest and Diseases).
UNIT VI:
Insects as crop pests: Types of injuries and loss caused to plants in general factors
governing the outbreak of pests.
346
UNIT VII:
Vector borne diseases: Method of transmission of parasitic agents reference to
mosquitoes and houseflies.
UNIT VIII:
Principles and methods of pest suppression: Conventional and Non-conventional,

Biological and Integrated pest management.
REFERENCES:
1. The Science of Entomology. William S. Romoser and John G. Stoffolano. Wm.

C. Brown Publishers, England. 1994.
2. The Silkwonn. An important laboratory tool. By Yataro Tazima, Kodarsha,
Scientific Book Ltd., Japan. 1978.
3. Sericulture Manual: FAD, Agril, Service Bulletin, Rome.
4. Applied Entomology: P. G. Fenemore, Allaprkash, Wiley Eastern Ltd., Delhi.

1992.
5. Park, J. E and K. Park. Textbook of social and preventive medicine. Publ. Mis.
Banarasides Bharol. Jabalpur.
6. Nayar, K. K, Ananthakrishnan, T. Nand B. V. David. General and Applied

Entomology. Tata McGraw Hill Publ., New Delhi. 1989.
7. Entomology and Pest M~agement. Larry, P. Pedigo Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
1989.
ELECTIVE III: ENDOCRINOLOGY

3 Credits
Unit I: Pituitary Gland
General characteristics of hormones - Pituitary gland - structural organization -
Pituitary hormones functions hypothalamic control.
Unit II: Thyroid Gland
Thyroid gland - structural organization - metabolic effects of thyroid hormone -
effects of thyroid on reproduction - Parathyroid - structure - functions of parathyroid
hormone.
347
Unit III: Pancreas and Adrenal Glands
Structure of pancreas- function of Insulin and glucagon- Adrenals - structural
organization. functions of cortical and medullary hormones.
Unit IV: Vertebrate Reproductive Endocrinology
Structure of mammalian testis and ovary - male and female sex accessory organs -
hormones of testis and ovary - estrus and menstrual cycle -, hormones of pregnancy -
parturition - hormonal control of lactation.
Unit V: Insect and Crustacean Endocrinology
The concepts of neurosecretion - Endocrine system in Crustacea - endocrine
control of moulting and metamorphosis - Neuroendocrine system in insects endocrine
control of moulting and metamorphosis.
Practicals
1) Dissection of pituitary, adrenal and gonad in vertebrate animals.
2) Dissection of reproductive systems in vertebrate animals.
3) Histological study of pituitary, adrenal. teMis, ovary, corpus luteum,
pancreas and thyroid gland.
4) Dissection of reproductive system neuroendocrine complex in insects.
5) Histology of ovary, accessory glands, corpus allatum, and brain in insects.
6) Parabiosis in cockroach.
7) Ovariectomy in cockroach.
Text Books
1. Turner, C.D., 1966. “General Endocrinology”, 4th Ed, W.B. Saunders Co.,
London.
2. Bentley, P.J., 1985. “Comparative Vertebrate Endocrinology”, S.Chand and Co.,
3. Barrington, E.J.W., 1968. “An Introduction to General and Comparative

Endocrinology”, Academic Press, London.
Reference Books
1) Harris, G.W. and B.T. Donovan, (Ed). 1968. “The Pituitary Gland”, Vo1.3.
348
2) Williams, R.M., 1974. “Text Book of Endocrinology”, 5th Ed.
3) Bentley, P.J., 1982. "Comparative Vertebrate Endocrinology", Cambridge University
Press.
4) Michael. P., 1968. “Endocrinology and Human Behaviour”, Oxford University Press,
New York.
ELECTIVE IV: TOXICOLOGY

3 Credits
Unit I: Absorption Distribution and Excretion of Toxicants
Definition and scope of toxicology - Chemical interaction - Membrane
permeability - Diffusion, filteration and engulfing by cells - Absorption distribution -
excretion.
Unit II: Bio-Transformation of Toxicants
Definition - general principles - receptor site degradation reaction - conjugation -
bio-activation - complex nature of bio--transformation - Antidotes - mechanism of
antidotal action - assessment of antidotal efficacy.
Unit III: Bio-chemical basis of Toxicology
Mechanism of Toxicity - receptor mediated events disturbance of excitable
membrane function, biochemical process - Ca+ homeostasis - covalent binding -
genotoxicity - Tissue specificity - Target organs mechanism of action.
Unit IV: Methods of Toxicology
Bioassay test - single species test - multi species test - acute toxicity test -
subacute toxicity test - chronic toxicity test - determination of LC50 value - Pathological
techniques - autopsy and histology - histopathology Histochemistry - cytochemistry -
morphometric methods.
Unit V: Chemical and Immuno toxicology

Toxic chemicals: Pesticides - automobile emission heavy metals - fertilizers -
food additives - animal, plant and mushroom toxins.
Immunotoxiclology - General concepts - lymphocytes Natural killer cells -
349
macrophages - hypersensitivity reaction - immuno suppression - moleculer immuno
toxicology.
Practicals
1. Determination of Sodium level in water samples
2. Determination of Potassium level in water samples.
3. Determination of Cadmium level in water samples
4. Determination of Mercury level in water samples
5. Estimation of SDH activity in liver tissue of normal and malathion treated fish
6. Estimation of total protein content in the muscle tissue of normal and endosulfan
treated fish
7. Estimation of Glucose and Glycogen level in the liver tissue of normal and Lead
treated fish
8. Estimation of AchE activity in brain tissues of normal and mercury treated mouse
9. Estimation of GSH level in liver tissue of normal and endrin treated mouse
10. Determination of cell volume in liver tissue of normal and copper treated fish
11. Histopathological observation of the following
1. Liver, 2. Kidney, 3. Brain, 4. Intestine, 5. Muscle
12. Determination of LCso value of Zinc on fish.
Text Books
1. Sharma, P.D., 1996. “Environmental Biology and Toxicology”, Rastrogi
Publication, meerut, India.
2. LU, F.C., 1985. “Basic Toxicology”, Hemisphere Publication,
Corporation, Washington, N.Y., London.
3. Gupta, P.K. and Salunka, D.K. 1985. Modern Toxicology”, Volume
I and II, Metropolitan, New Delhi.
4. Sood, A., 1999. “Toxicology”, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi
Reference Books
1. Butler, G.C. 1978. “The Principles of Ecotoxicology Scope, 12,
ICSO Scope”, John Wiley and Sons, Chicheater.
350
2. Finney, D.J., 1971. “Probit Analysis”, Cambridge University
Press.
3. Adrien Albert, 1981. “Selective Toxicity”, University Press
Cambridge.
4. Gupta, P.K. and V. Raviprakash, 1988. “Advance in Toxicology
and Environmental” Health. Jagmandar Book Agency, New Delhi.
ELECTIVE VII: AQUACULTURE

3 Credits
UNIT I: FRESHWATER FISH AQUACULTURE
Types of ponds in the intensive aquaculture, Culture pond - site selection - soil
quality - layout - inlet and outlet - formation of dykes and construction neutralization of
pH - reducing seepage.
Source of water - water quality management in aquaculture - temperature - pH

DO levels - nutrients - trace elements.
Feed - formulated - conventional- artificial, Feed cost. Feeding methods.
Composite fish culture - paddy cum - fish culture - integrated fish culture sewage
water fish culture - raceway culture.
Control of parasites, predators and weeds in culture ponds.
Procurement of seed, transport, stocking, harvesting and marketing.
Fish farm implements - Secchi disc - aerator - pH meter - tools for hypophysation
- feeding trays - gears.
Freshwater prawn culture.
UNIT II: HATCHERY TECHNIQUES
Hatching technology for major carps - common carp, silver carp - live fishes -
trout. Induced breeding methods. Live feed-Artemia, Rotifer, Diatoms and their culture.
Prawn developmental stages - freshwater and marine prawn hatchery.
UNIT III: FISH DISEASE MANAGEMENT

Non-parasitic diseases and parasitic diseases - symptoms - prevention – treatment.
351
UNIT IV: AQUARIUM AND ORNAMENTAL FISHES
Aquarium tanks - maintenance - selection of ornamental fishes.
Ornamental fish culture as cottage .industry and its export potential.
UNIT V: MARl CULTURE
Types of seaweeds - species suitable for culture - methods of culture - by
products.
Prawn culture - extensive culture methods semi- intensive - intensive culture
methods - feeds and feeding management - disease managements.
Pearl oyster culture - pearl production crab culture. Economic importance of
Lobster, sea urchin and sea cucumber - their bye products.
CMFRI, CIBA, CIFRI, CIF A and CIFE and its activities
Brackish water fish culture
REFERENCE/BOOKS
1. Baluyut, E. A. (1989) Aquaculture systems and Practices. A selected review

2. Chondar, A (1970) Handbook of breeding of Indian major carps by pituitary.

harmone injection. Agra Satisdh Book Enterprise.
3. Das M. C. and Patnaik, P. N. (1994) Brackish water culture. Pal ani paramount
4. Day, F (1958). Fishes of Indiaa , VoL I and Vol. II. William Sawson and Sons
Ltd., Londan.
5. Jhingran, C. G. (1981). Fish and Fisheriesof India. Hindustan Publilcating Co.,

India.
6. Maheswari. K. (1983) Common fish disease and their control. Institute of

FIOsheries Education, Powarkads( M. P.).
7. Michael, B. N. and Singholka, B.(1985). Freshwater Prawn Farming: A manual of

cultureof Macrobrachium rosenbergii. Daya publishing House, New Delhi.
8. Paul Raj S. (Ed.) (1995). Shrimp farming Techniques, problems and solutions.
Palani Paramount Publications, Palani, T. N.
352
9. Paul Raj S. (Ed.) (1996). Aquaculture for 2000 A. D. Publications, Palani, T. N.
Palani Paramount.
10. Pillay, T. V. R. (1990). Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. Balackwell

Scientific Publications Ltd.
11. Ponnuchammy, R. (1997). Practice guide to shrimp farming. Palani Paramount

12. Post, G. M. (1983). Text book offish health. TFH Publication.

13. Santhanam, R. (1990). Fisheries Science. Daya Publishing House, New Delhi
14. Sinha, V.R. P. and Srinivastava, H. C. (1991). Aquaculture Producativity. Oxford
and IBH Publications CO., Ltd., New Delhi.
15. Yadav, B. N. (1997). Fish and fisheries. Daya Publishing house, New Delhi.
16. FAO volumes for fish identification.
A.C.F.2009
353

MSCCBCSRS34

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MSCCBCSRS34

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VERY IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS:

Kindly refer the official communication of the University in the

M.Sc. DEGREE COURSES

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS

NAME OF THE COURSES

1) M.Sc. APPLIED ELECTRONICS

The scheme of examinations for different semesters shall be as follows:

1. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS

Elective Paper – IV 4 3 3 25 75 100

Core Paper-IX 5 4 3 25 75 100

UNIVERSITY PRACTICAL EXAMINATION WILL BE CONDUCTED IN EVEN SEMESTER

Core Paper-XIII 6 4 3 25 75 100

UNIVERSITY PRACTICAL EXAMINATION WILL BE CONDUCTED IN EVEN

Core - 10 Clinical Biochemistry 5 4 3 25 75

Core - 11 Practical III 6 4 6 40 60

Extra- Clinical basis of Diseases 4 3 3 25 75

Course Name of Course Inst. Credits Exam Maxmarks

Course Name of Course Inst. Credits Exam Maxmarks

Course Name of Course Semester Inst. Credits Exam Max.

* Elective Principles of Gene III 2 3 3 25 75

Course Name of Course Inst. Credits Exam. Max.Marks

Inst. Exam Max.Marks

Paper - 20 Animal Biotechnology 4 3 3 25 75

Soft Skill- 2 2 3 40 60 100

Theory Electives Offered:

Core XIII Organic Chemistry-IV 5 4 3 25 75

Core Principles of Compiler Design III 4 3 25 75

Course Name of Course Max. Marks

Core Project & Viva-Voce IV 20 - 20 60+ 20

VII SEMESTER THEORY#

1 CST411 Parallel Algorithms

VIII SEMESTER THEORY#

1 CST412 Software Project Management

1 CST509 TCP/IP Networks

Course Inst.Hr Credi Exam.

CORE 13 PAPER XIII 6 5 3 25 75

CORE 13 PAPER XIII - 5 3 25 75

The following Courses are common to both the Branches.

1. Paper X - Advanced Dietetics

Project work*: CIA (Project) – 50 Marks; External – 100 Marks

Core Computer Networks 4 3 25 75

Core Project & Viva-Voce IV 20 - 20 60+

Soft skill-IV XXV IV 40 60 3 Hrs 2

Elective-III (Semester III)

17. Tensor Analysis and Relativity

Core – 8 Medical Laboratory 6 4 3 25 75

Core –13 Pathology 6 4 6 40 60

COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF PRACTICAL EXAMINATION

Elective II and III -Papers 18 and 19

Any two out of the following:

Extra disciplinary Electives to be offered to M. Sc. students in Chemistry, Mathematics and

Total credits : 90 ( Core 60 + Soft-skill/Internship 10 + Electives/ED 20 )

Course Title of the Course Inst. Credi Exam MAX

Core 9 Visual Research Methods 4 4 3 25 75

1. M.Sc. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS

CORE PAPER IX – DATA COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING

UNIT 1 DATA COMMUNICATION

Introduction to data communication: A digital communication system - Data terminal equipment

Transmission – Synchronous transmission – Overview of modems and control – Error detection

UNIT 3 COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKS

UNIT 4 ARCHITECTURE, PROTOCOLS AND INTERFACES

Protocols and architecture - TCP/IP protocols – Principles of inter-networking and intra-